You are on page 1of 300

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building

Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16010
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.

B.
C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

I.

1.02

Contractor should include in his prices for the works related to the site .
adaptation all charges and fees required by the Saudi Electric Company ( SEC ) and
the Saudi Telephone Company ( STC ) for power and telephone connections.
All general provisions contained within this, or any other section of the
specification, shall be fully applicable to each and every other section.
All work carried out on the installation shall be carried out in a neat, efficient and
workmanlike manner, to provide for proper operation, maintenance and repair.
The work shall be in accordance with the requirements of these specifications, and
shall fulfill their true intent meaning. No deviations from these specifications
and/or drawings shall be made without written approval of the Engineer.
These specifications and associated drawings form a composite set of documents,
intended for the selection and installation of equipment having the general and
specific characteristics as detailed.
Unless otherwise specifically stated, the installation shall be left complete, tested
and ready for operation in all respects and fully integrated and coordinated with
all other construction.
The Contractor shall submit proof, if requested by the Engineer that the materials,
appliances, equipments or devices that he furnishes and installs under this
contract, meet the requirements of SASO, BS, NFPA as regards fire and casualty
hazards.
Visit the site of proposed works and obtain all informations as to existing conditions
and limitations and all proposed works on sites and adjacent areas which might
affect the work on this site before bidding.
The contractor should be fully aware of the site conditions and shall be responsible
for any extra works or expenses resulting from the failure of the site conditions,
any claim to the owner for that will not be acceptable.
Contractor shall be responsible of any damage that may cause himself or his labors
to the existing buildings and systems and should repair or replace the damaged
equipments system or building on his own charges with out any claim to the
owner.

SCOPE OF WORK
A.

The work under this division of the specifications shall include furnishing all labor,
materials, equipment and services to furnish and install the complete electrical
system, putting into operation, tested and commissioned as shown on the
accompanied drawings and specified herein. The work includes, but is not limited
to, the following principal systems and equipments:

OCE - 30 January 2014

Power Distribution Systems


Lighting Systems
Fire Detection
Communication Systems

Basic Electrical Requirements


16010 - 1/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

1.03

King Saud University

ELECTRICAL SUPPLY
A.

The medium voltage electrical supply from SEC shall be:

B.

3 Phase, 13.8 kV Delta, 60 Hertz.

The low voltage electrical system shall be:

3 Phase, 4 wire, 380/220 Volts, 60 Hertz, earthed neutral system ( TN-S


System )

3 Phase, 4 wire, 220/127 Volts, 60 Hertz, earthed neutral system ( TN-S


System )

3 Phase, 3 wire, 220/127 Volts, 60 Hertz, isolated neutral system ( IT System )

For the medical zones having life support such as ICU , NICU etc.. IPS system
For the operation rooms Isolated Power System with Uninterrupted Power Supply
1.04

EARTHING REQUIREMENTS
A.

B.

The Earthing system shall in all respects comply with the following:
1.

The National Electric Code (NFPA 70).

2.

Any special requirements of the Saudi Electricity Company (SEC).

3.

Any requirements stated within this specification.

4.

The International Electro-technical Standardization (CENELEC).

The Earthing system will take the following forms


1.

TN-C system for the distribution system

2.

TN-S system inside the building.

3.

IT system for critical care unit which include but not be limited to ICU &
Operation room.

The Contractor is to ensure that the installation Earthing complies with the
requirements as laid down in Section 16452 of this specification.

1.05

C.

The Earthing conductor (the final conductor by which the connection to the
selected means of Earthing is made) is to be of copper construction and comply
with NFPA 70 requirements.

D.

All extraneous conductive parts are to be protected by equipotential bonding in


accordance with NFPA 70.

E.

Steel structure of the building shall be earthed.

COORDINATION
A.

The Contractor shall be held solely responsible for the proper coordination of all
phases of the Work and time delivery to the site of all equipment and materials for
proper execution of the Work.
It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to fully coordinate the Work with all

OCE - 30 January 2014

Basic Electrical Requirements


16010 - 2/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

or any other disciplines and to ensure proper phasing of the Work to ensure
continuity of all works under this Contract. If it becomes necessary to remake any
part of these Works or that of any other discipline or trade as a result of poor or
badly timed coordination, then all costs associated with remaking those Works will
be borne by the Contractor.

1.06

1.07

B.

The Contractor shall coordinate with all supply Undertakings and Authorities and
shall include for attendance along with all costs involved in re-directing existing
services.

C.

The Contractor shall take into consideration all statutory and local requirements
issued by the Supply Authority (SEC), Local Authority, Central Government,
Broadcasting Authority, Telephone and Telecommunications Authorities along
with any other requirements to be considered for the correct and legal operation of
the electrical and telecommunication installation or equipment connected to the
installation as part of this Contract.

CLIMATE CONDITIONS
A.

External to building and in non-air conditioned spaces; all apparatus shall be rated
for an ambient temperature maximum of 55C, minimum of -5C and a maximum
humidity of 100% rh.

B.

In air conditioned buildings, all apparatus shall be rated for ambient temperature
of 45C maximum; minimum of 0C and a maximum humidity of 85% RH.

C.

When equipment is installed in direct sunlight, it shall either be shielded from


direct radiation or suitably rated for additional solar gains.

D.

All apparatus shall be rated for continuous services twenty four hours a day, seven
days a week throughout its normal rated life, except for necessary routine
maintenance.

ACCESSIBILITY
A.

1.08

STORAGE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPEMENT


A.

1.09

All work shall be so installed as to be accessible for operation, maintenance and


repair. Deviations from the drawings may be made to accomplish this, but no
change shall be made without written approval from the Engineer. Access door
locations shall be approved by the Engineer before installation work is
commenced.

All materials and equipments, fixed or unfixed, shall be protected against


corrosion, deterioration and ingress of foreign matter. All equipment shall be kept
clear of the floor or ground by means of wooden bearers or other means, and shall
be protected against the weather.

PREVENTION OF NOISE AND VIBRATION


A.

Provision shall be made to minimize noise and vibration. However, different


manufacturers equipment will have varying sound and vibration characteristics.
The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for ensuring that equipment installed
does not transmit unnecessary noise or vibration.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Basic Electrical Requirements


16010 - 3/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

1.10

1.11

1.12

King Saud University

B.

All equipment installed in plant rooms and outside areas shall not be audible in the
occupied areas.

C.

Any vibration isolators, isolating bases, flexible connections, silencers, other


acoustic treatment or anti-vibration precautions necessary shall be included in the
rates for the equipment.

D.

In individual cases, the suspension shall ensure that the natural frequency of the
vibratory system in the vertical direction is not more than 1/3 of the exciter
frequency and never exceeds 25 Hz.

E.

The Contractor shall submit proof of the selected noise proofing measures to the
Engineer before commencement of work.

F.

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval the noise generation by
the plant selected so that structural sound-proofing measures can be evaluated.
This means either data on the acoustic capacity level in relation to frequency, or the
sound pressure level measured at 1 meter from the plant at octave median
frequencies from 63 hertz to 4000 hertz. Details of the spatial and operational
conditions shall also be given.

G.

All costs of noise sound level measurements and any repeat measurements,
necessary if acoustic requirements are not met, shall be allowed for by the
Contractor.

GUARDS
A.

All moving parts of machinery shall be protected by strong guards to adequately


protect all personnel working on or in the vicinity of equipment. The guards shall
be constructed in such a manner that the movement of drive belts and rotation of
shafts may be readily observed without removal of the guard.

B.

All live parts of electrical equipment shall be protected in such a way to


adequately protect all personnel working on or in the vicinity of equipment from
injury.

C.

Wherever possible, all protective guards shall be supplied by the equipment


manufacturer. All guards shall be strongly attached to equipment and shall be
designed to be easily removed for access, servicing, adjustment and maintenance.

SIGNS AND NOTICES


A.

All signs and notices shall be in Arabic and English with the Arabic version being
above or to the right of the English version.

B.

A schedule of all signs and notices with proposed Arabic translations shall be
approved by the Engineer prior to manufacture.

GOVERNING CONDITIONS
A.

The entire electrical installation shall in all respects comply with the requirements
of the following in the ruling sequence listed:
1.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Saudi Arabian Standards Organization (SASO)


Basic Electrical Requirements
16010 - 4/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

1.13

2.

Saudi Electricity Company (SEC)

3.

Saudi Telecom Company (STC)

4.

International Electro-technical Commission (IEC)

5.

National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

6.

ANSI / NEMA Standards.

7.

British Standards (BS)

8.

International Organization of Standardization (ISO)

9.

European Committee for Electrical Standardization (CENELEC)

10.

International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee (CCITT)

11.

Any special requirements stated elsewhere within this specification.

MOUNTING HEIGHTS
A.

Unless otherwise stated on the drawings, the following shall be mounting heights
of equipment center lines above Finished Floor Level (FLL):
Panel Board
Isolating Switch
Light Switch
Push Button Station
Wall Mounted Telephone
Fire Alarm Manual Call Point
Fire Alarm Sounder
Fire Alarm Panels
Socket Outlet
Telephone Socket
TV/Radio Antenna Socket
Note:

1.14

King Saud University

2000mm (Top of Panel Above FFL)


1350mm
1350mm (100mm From Door Frame)
1350mm
1350mm
1450mm
2500mm
2000mm (Top of Panel Above FFL)
350mm
350mm
350mm

Where accessories with varying mounting heights (e.g. light switch and
socket outlet) are shown in approximately the same location, their center
lines shall align vertically.

LABEL AND IDENTIFICATION


A.

Each item of the electrical installation including electrical switch-gear, control gear,
etc. shall be fitted with a non-corrodible label clearly indicating its function, circuit
number and phase.

B.

Each label shall be made of white plastic not less than 50mm x 12mm high suitably
engraved with black 5mm high letters and fixed by means of two brass set screws,
nuts and shake-proof washer.

C.

Warning labels made of red plastic with white letters at least 25mm high reading
DANGER High Voltage shall be fixed to the entrance doors of all 13.8 kV switch,
transformer and generator rooms.

D.

Warning labels made of red plastic with white letters at least 12mm high reading
DANGER 220 V as appropriate shall be fixed to the lids, covers or doors of any
equipment which contains terminals or conductors connected to more than one
phase of a low voltage supply. The method of fixing shall be as detailed above.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Basic Electrical Requirements


16010 - 5/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

1.15

1.16

E.

Prior to final testing, the Contractor shall confirm that all labeling is intact over the
whole site and that all cable shave been fitted with circuit markers. The 13,800
volts cables shall be clearly labeled DANGER High Voltage every two meters of
its exposed length.

F.

All conductors shall have their outer covering colored to suit the phase to which
they are connected.

G.

An instruction notice giving details of first aid treatment for electric shock, shall be
positioned in an approved position in each switch-room. Manufacturers or
Contractors names or trademarks shall not be exhibited anywhere through the
installation without the prior approval and permission of the Engineer with
exception that the Contractors name and address may be fixed in an approved
position on the main intake switch-board.

H.

All labels shall be in English and Arabic.

VERMIN PROOFING
A.

All items of electrical equipment shall be adequately vermin proofed.

B.

Where cables enter or leave the bottoms of switchboards, or pass through pipe
ducts, they shall be sealed by the use of hard wood plugs treated with vermin
repellant and surrounded by mastic sealant.

C.

All spare pipe ducts shall be similarly sealed by the use of solid hard wood plugs.

D.

Alternative methods of vermin sealing will be accepted, but the written comments
of the Engineer must be obtained prior to installation.

FIRE AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS


A.

1.17

The whole of the works shall be carried out with care and so arranged as to
minimize the risk of fire and the extent of damage resulting from any outbreak of
fire.

CLEANING DOWN
A.

1.18

King Saud University

The Contractor shall allow in his tender for the final cleaning down and painting of
all scratched or damaged electrical apparatus, panel boards, cubicle panels,
distribution boards and transformers.

MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.

The Contractor shall submit samples and full relevant manufactures literature for
all material proposed for the project, in accordance with the requirements of the
relevant sections of this specification.

B.

No order shall be placed until the Contractor has obtained full written approval of
the relevant material submittal from the Engineer.

C.

The Contractor shall submit a sample of the exact make, model and finish
proposed for each material required.

D.

Manufacturers performance data and certified factory drawings giving full


information pertinent to the adequacy of the relevant equipment shall be
submitted for approval.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Basic Electrical Requirements


16010 - 6/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

1.19

E.

Submittal shall be made in a manner to ensure complete information regarding


what is being offered and in a manner that facilitates easy filing and ready access
to all data.

F.

Where data certified drawings or other required information is not available until
after orders have been placed, the Engineer may give provisional approval until all
requested drawings and information have been supplied to the Engineer and
approved by him. It is the Contractors responsibility to ensure that all necessary
information is supplied to the Engineer in accordance with the progress of work.

G.

Should the Engineer give provisional approval due to lack of complete


information, and should the missing information not eventually meet with
approval, the Engineer shall not be held responsible for any delay of additional
expense incurred. For equipment where delivery from the manufacturer is likely
to be prolonged, it is essential that the Contractor provided the material submittal
at the earliest possible date so as to ensure approval and orders in complete
conformity with the progress of the works.

SHOP DRAWINGS
A.

1.20

The Contractor shall submit for approval by the Engineer detailed construction
drawings before starting work.
These drawings shall comply with and
complement the Tender Documents in showing physical layout of all equipment,
exact location of all equipment, lighting, columns, luminaries and cables including
dimensioned locations of underground cables, construction and installation details,
wiring diagrams, etc. No work shall be started on site until approval of the
Drawings has been given in writing by the Engineer.

AS BUILT DRAWINGS
A.

1.21

King Saud University

The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer As-Built drawings all in accordance
with the requirements for Shop Drawings updated to show the exact manner in
which equipment is installed and shall be completely cross referenced to
submittals and instruction manuals, so that they form an integrated reference to
details of equipment, method of installation and maintenance.

DOCUMENTS
A.

Maintenance Literature: Prior to the final acceptance of the installation, the


Contractor shall submit to the Engineer manuals for all equipment supplied under
the Contract. The manuals shall be A4 size bound in loose leaf binders or booklets
suitably enclosed and including the following:
1.

Single line diagram of the complete network.

2.

Control, protection and circuit diagrams for all equipment.

3.

Setting up, commissioning and operating instructions

4.

Trouble-shooting procedures

5.

Maintenance instructions including schedules for preventive maintenance.

6.

Complete recommended spares list including manufacturers name and


catalog number.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Basic Electrical Requirements


16010 - 7/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

1.22

King Saud University

7.
Name of manufacturers local authorized representatives and service agent.
SPECIAL TOOLS
A.

The Contractor shall supply as part of this contract all special tools required for
equipment maintenance.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not used.
END OF SECTION 16010

OCE - 30 January 2014

Basic Electrical Requirements


16010 - 8/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16050
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01

SUMMARY
A.

Provide labor, materials, equipment and services, and perform operations required for
installation of basic electrical materials and methods and related work as indicated on
the drawings and specified herein.

B.

Work Included: The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
General construction materials and methods for application with electrical installation
as follows:

1.02

1.03

a.

Miscellaneous metals for support of electrical materials and equipment.

b.

Joint sealers for sealing around electrical materials and equipment; and for
sealing penetrations in fire and smoke barriers, floors and foundation
walls.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

Materials and equipment shall conform to the latest edition of reference specifications
specified herein and to applicable codes and requirements of local authorities having
jurisdiction.

B.

Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer for the installation and


application joint sealers.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Submit the following submittals in accordance with Section 16010.


1.

Product data for the following products:


a.
b.
c.

1.04

Joint sealers.
Smoke and fire stop fittings.
Conduit sleeves.

2.

Shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation for metal fabrications, and
supports and anchorage for electrical materials and equipment.

3.

Coordination drawings for access panel and door locations.

4.

Samples of joint sealer, consisting of strips of actual products showing full range
of colors available for each product.

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING


A.

Deliver joint sealer materials in original unopened containers or bundles with labels
informing about manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period
for use, pot life, curing time and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Basic Electrical Materials And Methods


16050 - 1/5

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

B.

King Saud University

Store and handle joint sealer materials in compliance with the manufacturer's
recommendations to prevent their deterioration and damage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01

MATERIALS
A.

Miscellaneous Metals
1.

Steel Plates, Shapes, Bars and Bar Grating: ASTM A36.

2.

Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A500.

3.

Hot-Rolled Steel Tubing: ASTM A501.

4.

Steel Pipe: ASTM A53; Schedule 40, welded.

5.

Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout:


Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining,
noncorrosive, nongaseous grout, recommended for interior and exterior
applications.

6.

Fasteners: Zinc-coated, type, grade and class as required.

B.

Conduit Sleeves Waterproof: Two (2) malleable iron hot dipped galvanized flanged
fittings with sealing assembly, joined by a galvanized threaded pipe sleeve of length to
suit wall thickness, for use through waterproof foundation and outside walls.
O-Z/Gedney Type WSK. Or equal approved.

C.

Smoke and Fire Stop Fittings: For rigid steel conduit, steel pressure discs with
elastomeric sealing ring, heat actuated infumescent compound, with 3-hour fire rating.
O-Z/Gedney "Fire Seal" type CFS and CFSI series, or equal approved.

D.

Sealant Materials
1.

Joint sealants and other related materials compatible with each other and with
joint substrates under conditions of service and application.

2.

Sealants: Sealant shall be one part low modulus silicone sealant of approved
manufacturer with a Shore A hardness of 22 conforming ASTM C920. Colors
shall be as selected by project manager from manufacturer's full line of standard
colors. Provide one of the following or approved equal:
a.
b.
c.
d.

"Dow Corning 790", Dow Corning Corp.


"Silglaze N SCS 2501", General Electric Co.
"Silpruf SCS 2000", General Electric Co.
"864", Pecora Corp.
or equal approved manufacturer .

E.

Fire Resistant Sealing Materials


1.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Sealing materials shall be silicone based formulated or equal for use in


through-penetration fire-stopping around cables, conduit penetrations through
fire-rated walls and floors. Sealants and accessories shall have fire-resistance
ratings indicated, as established by testing identical assemblies in accordance
with ASTM E814, by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or other testing and
inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Basic Electrical Materials And Methods
16050 - 2/5

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.

3.

4.

King Saud University

Sealant
a.

Provide ready-to-use silicone penetration seal that will stop passage of fire,
smoke, and water through fire-rated wall and floor penetrations and will
cure in the presence of atmospheric moisture to produce durable and
flexible seal, and will form airtight and watertight bonds with most
common building materials in any comb including cement, masonry, steel,
and aluminum.

b.

Sealant Composition shall be one-part ready-to-use materials with


consistency of soft caulk at temperatures ranging from -38 degree C to 70
degree C, and extension and compression properties of plus/minus 40
percent of original gap.

c.

Sealant shall be Fire Stop Sealant by Dow Corning Corp. or General Electric
Co. or equal approved.

Foam
a.

Provide "free foam" density, two-part silicone elastomer, supplied in liquid


components with easy identification.

b.

Foam shall be Fire Stop Foam by Dow Corning Corp. or Pensil 851 by
General Electric Co.

Backer Boards (Dams): Shall be minimum 1/4 inch thick "Duraboard FP" by
Carborundum Co., or approved equal by Babcock & Wilcox Corp., Pabco
Division of Fibreboard Corp. or Bio Fire Shield Inc. or equal approved.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01

EXAMINATION
A.

3.02

Examine conditions at the job site where work of this Section is to be performed to
insure proper arrangement and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of job
site conditions.

PREPARATION
A.

Examine the Contract Drawings and specifications in order to insure the completeness
of the work required under this Section.

B.

Verify measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the coordination
and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work of related trades, so as not to
delay job progress.

C.

Provide templates as required to related trade for location of support and anchorage
items.

D.

Preparation for Joint Sealers


1.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Thoroughly clean surfaces, removing foreign matter such as dust, oil, grease,
water, surface dirt and frost. Materials must be applied to the base surface.
Basic Electrical Materials And Methods
16050 - 3/5

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

3.03

King Saud University

2.

Prior to any priming and sealing, joints shall be masked by masking tape or other
approved means to prevent soiling of adjacent surfaces.

3.

Immediately prior to application of materials test adhesion of materials to each


substrate material and apply primer to any surface sharing poor adhesion.

4.

Where required support material with damming materials specified herein.


Where sealant materials require damming provide duct tape or compatible
backer rod.

INSTALLATION, ERECTION AND APPLICATION


A.

B.

C.

Erection of Metal Supports and Anchorage


1.

Cut, fit and place miscellaneous metal fabrications accurately in location,


alignment and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and
equipment.

2.

Field Welding: Comply with AWS "Structural Welding Code."

3.

Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.

Penetrations
1.

Provide waterproof seals for conduits entering the building from underground at
the first accessible point within the building.

2.

Provide smoke and fire stop sealants and fittings for conduits penetrating fire
rated walls and floors.

3.

Provide airtight seals for conduits penetrating into animal rooms and other
locations as indicated, utilizing joint sealers as specified in this Section.

Application of Joint Sealers


1.

Comply with manufacturer's printed application instructions applicable to


products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements
apply.

2.

Sealant Installation

OCE - 30 January 2014

a.

Comply with recommendations of ASTM C790.

b.

Cut sealant nozzle to desired size.

c.

Apply sealant bead to depth of 38 mm by pushing bead in front of nozzle


to fill void above support.

d.

Immediately after sealant application and prior to time shinning or curing


begins, tool sealant to form smooth, uniform beads; to eliminate air
pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling
agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by
sealant manufacturer.
Basic Electrical Materials And Methods
16050 - 4/5

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

3.

3.04

3.05

King Saud University

Foam Installation
a.

Use foam for complex wall and floor penetrations, including multiple
cables, multiple cables in trays, multiple conduit and pipes, and mixtures
of cables, conduits, and pipes.

b.

Remove combustible materials and loose impediments from penetration


openings and adjacent surfaces.

c.

Provide damming of penetration


manufacturer's instructions.

d.

Seal gaps and cracks left after damming materials are in place with sealant
materials.

e.

Immediately after mixing, pour or inject liquid foam into penetration


opening, not more than 1/3 full to compensate for expansion during cure.

f.

When dispensing continuously, do not exceed measured snap time or 3


minutes, whichever is less.

g.

If opening is not filled when shot reaches measured snap time or 3 minute
maximum, stop application for at least 15 minutes to allow foam to set.

h.

Dam: Leave in place for 24 hours minimum to allow foam to fully cure.

opening

in

accordance

with

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Sealant: Inspect seal after 48 hours for adhesion, and seal and correct any deficiencies.

B.

Foam: Follow manufacturer's installation instructions precisely, including 4-point field


quality control checks which consist of foam color, foam cell structure, snap time, and
free foam density.

C.

Inspect seal after 24 hours. Remove damming materials to inspect under site.

D.

Correct any deficiencies by adding foam or sealant. Reinspect after 24 hours.

E.

Reinstall damming materials which are required to achieve fire rating.

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING


A.

Sealant: Clean excess cured sealant from nonporous surfaces with commercial solvent
such as naphtha mineral solvents, following instructions on container label.

B.

Foam: Clean spills of liquid components with high-flash mineral spirit solvent,
following instructions on container label. Trim excess foam with sharp knife or blade.

C.

Cleaning: Remove equipment, materials and debris. Leave area in undamaged, clean
condition.
END OF SECTION 16720

OCE - 30 January 2014

Basic Electrical Materials And Methods


16050 - 5/5

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16110
ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.

Examine all other sections of the Specification for requirements which affect work
of this section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all
work under the Contract.

1.02 SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK


A.

The requirements of this section shall apply to all electrical raceways referred to
on the drawings and elsewhere within this Specification.

B.

The types of electrical raceways required shall comprise the following:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Metal Conduit
Flexible Conduit
PVC Conduit
Cable Tray
Cable Trunking (Metal)
Cable Trunking (PVC)
Cable Ladder
Underground Duct

1.03 QUALITY STANDARDS


A.

The manufacturer shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of electrical


raceways of the type and capacities required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five years. Preference shall be
given to In-Kingdom manufacturers.

B.

The raceways furnished under these specifications shall conform to all applicable
standards of SASO and BS.

1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.

The Contractor shall submit samples and manufacturers data on all electrical
raceways system materials, together with samples of the proposed materials.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS


A.

The Contractor shall provide color-coded thread protectors on the exposed


threads of metal conduit, handle raceways carefully to prevent end-damage and
avoid scoring the finishes. Where possible the raceways shall be stored indoors. If
necessary to store outdoors, the raceways shall be elevated well above ground and
enclosed with durable waterproof wrapping.

PART 2-PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL CONDUIT
A.

All metal conduits shall be heavy gauge welded steel complying with BS 4568, not
less than 20mm diameter and finished with hot dipped galvanizing providing
heavy protection (Class 4) both inside and outside. All conduit and fittings shall
be free from rust or other defects.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Electrical Raceways
16110 - 1/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

B.

All conduit fittings shall be malleable iron manufacture complying with BS 4568.

C.

All fittings shall have a hot dipped galvanized finish.

D.

All bushes shall be hexagonal headed, heavy duty, long threaded brass bushes
complete with serrated tempered shake-proof washers. All bends shall be cold
set. All tees shall be made using circular tee conduit boxes.

E.

All saddles shall be of the spacer bar type and of the same finish as that of the
conduit which they are being used to secure.

F.

A tapped earth connection facility shall be provided in every box.

G.

All accessory boxes shall have one adjustable fixing lug to facilitate final leveling
of accessory.

H.

An appropriate expansion fitting shall be installed wherever the conduit run


crosses an expansion joint.

2.02 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT


A.

Flexible conduit shall only to be used for final connection to items of fixed
equipment

B.

Flexible conduit and adaptors shall be manufactured in accordance with BS 731


Part 1.

C.

Brass adaptors shall be provided for connection at either end of the flexible
conduit and should be of the compression type.

D.

Flexible conduit shall be of the weather proof type having an overall PVC sheath.
No length shorter than 500mm of flexible conduit shall be used unless specified
elsewhere in this specification.

2.03 PVC CONDUIT


A.

All PVC conduits shall be uPVC. Rigid conduits complying with SASO 255/1981
medium gauge or BS 6099-2.2 / IEC 614-2-2 heavy gauge in all respects, and may
be used where ambient temperatures do not exceed 75C.

B.

All conduit fittings shall confirm to BS 6099-2-2 / IEC 614-2-2 standards and BS
4607 Part 5.

C.

No conduit shall be less than 20mm diameter.

D.

Conduit boxes shall be of the BEESA circular pattern with appropriate spout
entries and 50.8mm accessory fixing centers.

E.

All connections and terminations shall be by means of a manufacturers standard


adaptor.

F.

All boxes shall have brass thread inserts for the fixing of accessories or covers.
However, care must be taken in the support of totally enclosed lighting fittings.
Where excessive temperatures are likely to occur special insulated boxes shall be
used, i.e. of a pattern specifically designed by the manufacturer to improve weight
loading characteristics at high temperatures.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Electrical Raceways
16110 - 2/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

G.

All tees shall be made using conduit tee boxes. Tangential entry boxes shall be
used where appropriate. Multiple conduits may necessitate the use of larger
uPVC adaptable boxes for junctions.

H.

All saddles shall be of the spacer bar type and from the same manufacturer as that
of the conduit which they are being used to secure.

I.

A tapped earth terminal shall be provided in every conduit box.

J.

All wall mounted accessory boxes shall have one adjustable fixing lug to facilitate
final leveling of accessories.

K.

In order to facilitate interchangeability and to eliminate problems of differential


manufacturing tolerances, it is essential that all PVC conduit and appropriate
accessories covered by this specification shall be obtained from the same
manufacturer.

2.04 CABLE TRAY


A.

All cable trays shall be of heavy duty perforated type with return flange.

B.

All cable trays shall be manufactured from hot-dip zinc coated steel to BS 2989
with a standard heavy duty galvanized coating of 350 g/m and Z2 bending
grade.

C.

All bends, tees, cross units and angles shall be of the same specification as that of
the cable tray finish and shall be standard products from the same manufacturer
as the cable tray. Site fabrication shall not be permitted.

D.

Cable trays and accessories shall be of a thickness of not less than:

1.5mm up to 300mm width.


2.0mm above 300mm width.

E.

All fixing brackets, nuts and bolts shall be finished by hot dip galvanizing.

F.

Tinned copper earth continuity straps shall be provided at every joint.

G.

Where cable tray crosses building expansion joints, the tray shall be installed as
shown in the typical drawing details.

H.

Where cable tray carries 13.8 kV cable, a tray lid shall be installed.

2.05 CABLE TRUNKING (METAL)


A.

Metal cable trunking shall comply with BS 4678 Part 1: Class 3 and shall be
manufactured from galvanized steel sheet.

B.

Only purposed made bends, tees, risers, end tops, fittings, connectors, covers and
accessories by the same manufacturer as the trunking shall be used and finished in
hot dipped galvanized steel to BS 2989. Site fabrication shall not be permitted.

C.

Tinned copper earth straps shall be provided at every joint.

D.

Covers shall be of the over-lapping type and secured to the trunking by either an
approved clip or screws.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Electrical Raceways
16110 - 3/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

E.

In areas subject to corrosive atmospheres, e.g. chlorine, all trunking shall be


painted with chlorinated rubber paint.

F.

Cable trunking shall be used wherever possible to replace multiple conduit runs.

G.

Cable trunking shall be single or multi compartment. Where multi compartment


is used vertical dividers shall be provided between the compartments which shall
be welded to the trunking prior to galvanizing.

2.06 CABLE TRUNKING (PVC)


A.

Heavy Duty uPVC trunking with clip on lid (all insulated) shall be used wherever
possible to replace multiple conduit runs. Where applicable, trunking shall
comply with the requirements contained in BS 4678 Part 4. Any non-standard
trunking accessories shall be fabricated by the manufacturer, no site fabrication
shall be allowed.

B.

In order to facilitate interchangeability and to eliminate problems of differential


manufacturing tolerances, it is essential that all PVC cable trunking and
appropriate accessories covered by this specification shall be obtained from the
same manufacturer.

2.07 CABLE LADDERS


A.

All cable ladders shall be heavy (2mm) gauge, manufactured from hot-dip
galvanized sheet steel to BS 2989; coating weight (350 g/m) and Z2 bending
grade.

B.

All couplers, bends, tees etc. shall be by the same manufacturer as the ladder.

C.

Ladder system supports shall be determined in accordance with the


manufacturers structural information to ensure undue stress or bending does not
occur.

D.

In areas subject to corrosive atmosphere, e.g. chlorine, the ladders shall have a
PVC finish.

E.

Tinned copper earth straps shall be provided at every joint.

2.08 UNDERGROUND DUCTS


A.

Underground duct banks shall be of individual uPVC rigid conduits complying


with BS 6099-2-2 / IEC 614-2-2 heavy gauge.

PART 3-EXECUTION
3.01 METAL CONDUIT INSTALLATION
A.

All ends of conduits shall be reamed to remove all traces of burrs.

B.

Conduit threads shall be of sufficient length to allow conduits to butt together


within couplers.

C.

Oil and grease shall be removed from all threads.

D.

Conduits shall be supported at intervals of 1.5m in isolated positions or 1m in

OCE - 30 January 2014

Electrical Raceways
16110 - 4/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

accessible situations.
E.

Conduit shall not be permitted to be installed closer than 75mm to pipes of other
services.

F.

All conduit boxes not to be fitted with accessories shall have metal cover plates
which shall be overlapping where flush boxes are used.

G.

Draw-in boxes shall be provided in conduit runs exceeding 3m in length.


Draw-in boxes shall be at a maximum 12m spacing and readily accessible at all
times. Adaptable junction boxes shall also be accessible at all times for inspection
and maintenance.

H.

Inspection elbows, bends or tees shall not be permitted for flush installation.

I.

Care shall be taken to prevent water, dirt and debris from entering the conduit
system.

J.

Extension rings shall be used where boxes are found not to be flushed with the
finished surface.

K.

Conduits and conduit accessories shall be protected from rust and mechanical
damage. Exposed conduit threads and damaged or rusty areas shall be painted,
using an oxide undercoat and aluminium paint, after being cleaned to bare metal.

L.

Conduits installed in areas subject to corrosive atmospheres shall be painted with


chlorinated rubber paint after the installation is complete.

M.

Under no circumstances shall metal conduit be used as a circuit protective


conductor (CPC). Every final sub-circuit shall incorporate its own separate
Cu/PVC CPC.

N.

Spacing factors shall be applied to all conduits in accordance with 522-08 of the
IEE Wiring Regulations, 16th Edition (BS 7671).

O.

Expansion fitting shall be installed, wherever conduit crosses an expansion joint of


the building.

P.

Metal conduit and enclosed raceways shall be used for exposed and above false
ceiling spaces as per NEC 300-22 (C).

3.02 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT INSTALLATION


A.

Flexible conduits shall only be used in short lengths, of less than 1m. in cases
where a final connection is required to be made to a fixed item of equipment
which is subject to vibration or thermal expansion.

B.

Flexible conduits shall be 1.25 x L, L being the direct distance between connection
unit and fixed appliance, up to maximum length of 1m.

C.

Purpose made glands shall be used on the ends of all lengths of flexible conduit.

D.

A separate Cu/PVC circuit protective conductor shall be included in all lengths of


flexible conduits.

E.

Conduits shall be installed so as not to incur undue mechanical strain, damage or


excessive temperatures.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Electrical Raceways
16110 - 5/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

3.03 PVC CONDUIT INSTALLATION


A.

Where conduit boxes are not to be fitted with accessories, they shall be fitted with
cover plates which shall be overlapping where flush boxes are used.

B.

Conduits shall be jointed and terminated utilizing the following appropriate


components as supplied by the conduit manufacturer:
1.

Purposed made adaptors and accessories.

2.

Permanent Adhesive: Solvent cement to produce a rigid water tight joint


when used with standard couplers and accessories.

3.

Flexible Adhesive: A non-hardening adhesive to be used where expansion


facilities are required in long conduit runs, in conjunction with expansion
coupler.

C.

Conduits up to 25mm diameter may be bent with the use of the appropriate
bending spring obtained from the conduit manufacturer. For larger size conduits,
it is necessary to use heat or appropriate manufacturers standard ready made
bends.

D.

Adequate allowance shall be made for linear expansion and contraction of the
conduits under normal working temperature variations, as follows:
1.

Expansion couplers shall be used on all straight runs of conduit exceeding 6


meters in length.

2.

Conduit shall be free to slide within saddles.

3.

Allowance for expansion in cast in-situ installation is normally only


required to effect structural movement at building expansion joints.

E.

Multiple conduits may necessitate the use of large PVC adaptable boxes for
junctions, which shall be readily accessible at all times.

F.

Care shall be taken in the support of totally enclosed lighting fittings. Where
excessive temperature are likely to occur special heat resistant boxes shall be used
i.e. of a pattern specifically designed to improve weight loading characteristics.

G.

Spacing factors shall be applied to all conduit in accordance with 522-08 of the IEE
Wiring Regulations, 16th Edition (BS 7671).

H.

Conduits shall not be installed closer than 75mm to pipes of other services.

I.

Draw-in boxes shall be installed in all conduit runs exceeding 3m. in length at a
maximum 12m spacing and shall be readily accessible at all times.

J.

Inspection elbows, bend or tees shall not be permitted for flush installation.

M.

Extension rings shall be used where boxes are found to be not flush with the
finished surface. Care shall be taken to prevent water, dirt, dust or debris from
entering the conduit system.

N.

All PVC conduits shall be installed embedded inside the concrete slabs, columns
or in concrete block walls.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Electrical Raceways
16110 - 6/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

3.04 CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION


A.

Where practical cable tray shall be run horizontally and flat or vertically and shall
be supported at distances not exceeding 1.5m to the building structure using mild
steel brackets. These brackets shall be secured to the building structure using
expanded bolts and washers or built into the building structure during
construction.

B.

Where cable tray is suspended, two number drop rods shall be used at each
suspension point to an angle iron or channel support to which the cable tray is
bolted. The spacing of suspension points shall be determined in accordance with
the manufacturers structural information such that undue stress or deflection
does not occur.

C.

Where cable tray is cut, the open ends shall be painted using an oxide undercoat
and an aluminium top coat. Where the finish is PVC a top coat of liquid PVC
solution shall be applied after the completion of the cable tray installation.

D.

Cable trays run parallel with walls shall not be mounted closer than 75mm to the
wall.

E.

All cables shall be secured to the cable tray at distances in accordance with 522-08
of IEE Regulations, 16th Edition (BS 7671).

F.

Bare copper of aluminium cables shall not be run on cable tray.

G.

Earth continuity shall be ensured by means of tinned copper earth straps bolted
across each joint. Flexible braided straps shall be used for expansion joints.

3.05 CABLE TRUNKING INSTALLATION


A.

Cable trunking shall be fixed securely to the building structure at intervals not
exceeding 1.5m.

B.

Where vertical runs of trunking exceed 3m in length, pin racks shall be fitted by
the Contractor.

C.

Spacing factor shall be applied to all cable trunking in accordance with 522-08 of
IEE Regulations, 16th Edition (BS 7671).

D.

For metal trunking installations, earth continuity shall be ensured by means of


tinned copper earth straps bolted across each joint. Flexible braided straps shall
be used for expansion joints.

E.

Metal trunking cut during installation shall have the cut ends painted with an
oxide undercoat and an aluminium top coat.

F.

Where metal trunking is installed in areas subject to corrosive atmospheres, the


complete trunking installation shall be painted with a chlorinated rubber paint
after the installation is complete.

G.

Expansion joints with gaps shall be incorporated in all PVC trunking runs in
excess of 6 meters in length. External couplings shall have elongated slots and
fixing holes shall be drilled oversized to give freedom of linear movement.
Internal couplings shall be securely fixed at one end by use of thiscotrophic
adhesive leaving the other end free of linear movement.

H.

Bare copper or aluminum cables shall not be run in metal trunking.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Electrical Raceways
16110 - 7/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

3.06 CABLE LADDER INSTALLATION


A.

Where practical, cable ladders shall be run horizontally and flat or vertically and
shall be supported at distances not exceeding 1.5m to the building structure using
mild steel brackets. These brackets shall be secured to the building structure using
expanded bolts and washers or built into the building structures during
construction.

B.

Where cable ladder is suspended, two number drop rods shall be used at each
suspension point to an angle iron or channel support to which the cable tray is
bolted. The spacing of suspension points shall be determined in accordance with
the manufacturers structural information such that undue stress or deflection
does not occur.

C.

Where cable ladder is cut, the open ends shall be painted using an oxide
undercoat and an aluminium top coat. Where the finish is PVC a top coat of
liquid PVC solution shall be applied after the completion of the cable ladder
installation.

D.

Cable ladders run parallel with walls shall not be mounted closer than 75mm to
the wall.

E.

All cables shall be secured to the cable ladder at distances in accordance with 52208 of IEE Regulations, 16th Edition (BS 7671) a maximum number of four cables
may be secured by one clip.

F.

Bare copper of aluminium cables shall not be run on cable ladder.

G.

Earth continuity shall be ensured by means of tinned copper earth straps bolted
across each joint. Flexible braided straps shall be used for expansion joints.

3.07 UNDERGROUND DUCT AND MANHOLES


A.

Multiple conduit runs or banks shall be supported on preformed non-metallic


separators. Spacing between separators shall be close enough to prevent sagging
of conduits and breaking of couplings and water tight seals. Separators shall be
secured with cords where necessary and not tie wires.

B.

Duct lines shall have a continuous slope downwards away from building.
Trenches shall be excavated along straight lines so the elevation can be adjusted if
necessary to avoid unseen obstructions.

C.

During construction, partially completed duct lines shall be protected from the
entrance of debris such as mud, sand, and dirt by means of suitable conduit plugs.
As each section of duct line is completed a test mandrel not less than 300mm long
with a diameter 6mm than the size of the conduit shall be drawn through each
conduit, after which a brush with stiff bristles shall be drawn through until the
conduit is clear or all particles of earth, sand or gravel; conduit plugs shall then be
immediately installed.

END OF SECTION 16110

OCE - 30 January 2014

Electrical Raceways
16110 - 8/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16115
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND MANHOLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01

SUMMARY
A.

Provide labor, materials, equipment and services, and perform operations required for
installation of underground ducts and manholes and related work as indicated on the
drawings and specified herein.

B.

Work Included: The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

C.

1.

Excavation for underground utilities and services, including underground


raceways, vaults and equipment.

2.

Conduit ducts, reinforcing steel, and concrete encasement.

3.

Manholes, frames, covers, pulling irons, cable racks, insulators, miscellaneous


hardware.

4.

Wires and cables.

Related Work Specified Elsewhere


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

1.02

Basic Electrical Requirements


Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Raceways
Wires and Cables
Medium Voltage Cable
Grounding
Electrical Identification
Lighting.
Low current and communication cables.
Outdoor packaged substations.

DEFINITIONS
A.

The following definitions apply to excavation operations:


1.

Additional Excavation: Where excavation has reached required subgrade


elevations, if unsuitable bearing materials are encountered, continue excavation
until suitable bearing materials are reached.

2.

Subbase: As used in this section refer to the compacted soil layer used in
pavement systems between the subgrade and the pavement base course material.

3.

Subgrade: As used in this section refers to the compacted soil immediately below
the slab or pavement system.

4.

Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated


subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction from the project
manager.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Underground Ducts And Manholes


16115 - 1/9

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

1.03

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

1.04

Materials and equipment shall conform to the latest edition of reference specifications
specified herein and to applicable codes and requirements of local authorities having
jurisdiction.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Submit the following submittals in accordance with Section 16010.


1.

Calculations and shop drawings shall be submitted covering the design and
manufacture of precast manholes and shall bear the seal of a registered
professional engineer.

2.

Product data for the following products:


a.
b.
c.
d.

1.05

King Saud University

Conduit, adapters, end bells


Ducts, sealing plugs
Manholes including frames and covers
Pulling irons, cable racks, insulation, miscellaneous hardware

3.

Coordination drawings for work of other trades.

4.

Schedules indicating proposed methods and sequence of operations. Coordinate


sequencing with construction phasing and Owner occupancy.

PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.

Conditions Affecting Excavations: The following project conditions apply:


1.

Maintain and protect existing building services which transit the areas affected
by selective excavation.

2.

Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements and other facilities from


damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout and
other hazards created by excavation operations.

3.

Site Information: Subsurface conditions were investigated during the design of


the Project. Reports of these investigations are available for information only;
data in the reports are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy
or continuity of conditions. The Owner will not be responsible for interpretations
or conclusions drawn from this information.

4.

Use of explosives is not permitted.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01

MANUFACTURERS
A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of


the following or equal approved:
1.

Field Waterproofing Resin


a.
b.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Sika Corp. "Colma-Dur LV"


Other approved
Underground Ducts And Manholes
16115 - 2/9

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.

Field Waterproofing Fabric


a.
b.

Sika Corp. "Colma Fiberglas Mesh Fabric"


Other approved

3.

Manhole Frames and Covers - Cast is situ

4.

Duct Sealing Compound


a.
b.

Inmont Corp.
O-Z/Gedney Div., General Signal Corp.

5.

Conduit Sealing Bushings: O-Z/Gedney Div., General Signal Corp. , or equal


approved.

6.

Miscellaneous Hardware
a.
b.

2.02

King Saud University

Unistrut
O-Z/Gedney Div., General Signal Corp.

MATERIALS
A.

Soil Materials
1.

Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed


gravel, crushed stone, crushed slag, or natural or crushed sand.

2.

Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or


uncrushed gravel, with 100 percent passing a 40 mm sieve and not more than 5
percent passing a No. 4 sieve.

3.

Backfill and Fill Materials: Materials complying with ASTM D2487 soil
classification groups GW, GP, GM, SM, SW and SP; free of clay, rock, or gravel
larger than 2 inches in any dimension; debris; waste; frozen materials; and
vegetable and other deleterious matter. Unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Rigid Steel Conduit and Fittings: Provide as specified in Section 16110.

C.

Electrical Plastic Conduit and Fittings: Provide as specified in Section 16110.

D.

Bituminous Fibre Duct and Fittings: Provide as specified in Section 16110.

E.

PVC Plastic Utilities Duct and Fittings: Provide as specified in Section 16110.

F.

Conduit Sleeves Waterproof: Two (2) malleable iron hot dipped galvanized flanged
fittings including sealing assembly, joined by a galvanized threaded pipe sleeve of
length to suit wall thickness, for use through waterproof foundation and outside walls.
O-Z/Gedney Type WSK. Or equal approved.

G.

Manholes: Construct manholes of cast-in-place reinforced concrete as shown on


drawings or provide precast manholes as shown on drawings and as specified.

H.

Precast Manholes
1.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Precast manholes formed of reinforced concrete sections with tongue and


grooved joints designed to firmly interlock adjoining sections to provide
waterproof junctions. Provide interior dimensions as shown on drawings.
Underground Ducts And Manholes
16115 - 3/9

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

I.

J.

King Saud University

2.

Precast manholes shall be designed in accordance with AASHTO "Standard


Specifications for Highway Bridges". Concrete and reinforcing shall be designed
in accordance with ACI Code 318. Tops and walls of structures shall be designed
for AASHTO standard H20 highway loading, with 30 percent loading added for
impact, and with design load being that which produces maximum shear and
moment. Dead and live loads as well as impact loading shall be considered in
the design. Walls shall be designed to withstand soil pressures, taking into
consideration the soil to be encountered and ground water level present at the
site, and assuming that the H20 design vehicle will operate on surfaces adjacent
to the structure. Ground water level shall be assumed to be three feet below
ground surface unless a higher water table is indicated in the boring logs. Design
shall take into consideration stresses induced in handling units.

3.

Lifting devices shall be provided for properly handling units.

4.

Provide double seals at intersections, duct openings, pulling-in irons opposite


duct faces and in the center of the floor, an opening in the floor for a ground rod,
provisions for mounting of equipment and securing concrete throat and manhole
cover frame to the reinforcing steel in the manhole roof.

5.

Concrete: Minimum 28 day compressive strength of 35 MPa.

6.

Precast manholes shall be the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the


manufacture of precast concrete products including precast manholes. Manholes
shall be identified with the manufacturer's name embedded in, or otherwise
permanently attached to, an interior wall face.

7.

Assembly and installation of precast manholes shall be in accordance with the


printed instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer.
Precast
manholes shall be installed on a level bed of well-compacted gravel or crushed
stone, well-graded from the one-inch sieve to the No. 4 sieve. Sump pits and
grounding shall be provided.

Cast-In-Place Manholes
1.

In lieu of precast manholes, Contractor may provide cast-in-place manholes as


shown on drawings.

2.

Concrete shall conform to requirements of applicable code, ASTM specifications.


Consult project manager prior to start of the job.

3.

Reinforcing Steel: Use deformed bars per ASTM A615, Grade 60. Use metal or
plastic chairs or spacers to support reinforcing in ground areas; do not use brick,
block, tile, wood or similar materials. Provide "sand plates" or resteel chair legs
where chairs are supported on earth or granular fill.

4.

Fabricate forms of plyform of plastic-coated plywood to produce smooth


concrete surface on inside of manholes, free from graining or other markings.

Manhole Frames and Covers


1.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Heavy duty, cast iron, conforming to ASTM specifications A48-64 Class 30B.
Unless otherwise indicated Covers shall have an approved anti-slip surface with
the word "Electric", "Signal", or "Telephone" cast in the top face as appropriate for
the contents. Cover shall be 900 mm in diameter and 38 mm in depth unless
otherwise indicated on drawings.

Underground Ducts And Manholes


16115 - 4/9

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.

King Saud University

Covers shall fit the frame without undue play. Steel and iron shall be formed to
shape and size with sharp lines and angles. Castings shall be free from warp and
blow holes that may impair their strength or appearance. Frames shall be set
with covers level with finished grade over a minimum of 3 courses of brick (200
mm overall height) on top of manhole or as shown on the drawings.

K.

Pulling Irons: 23 mm formed steel bars and cast in the walls and floors. In the floor,
locate irons centered under the manhole cover, and in walls not less than 150 mm
above or below, and opposite the conduits entering the manhole. Pulling irons in the
wall shall project into the manhole approximately 110 mm and in the floors shall be
recessed. Irons shall be heavily zinc-coated after fabrication.

L.

Manhole Fittings: Cable rack - heavy channel steel approximately 100 mm by 40 mm


by 5 mm, hot dipped galvanized, with mounting holes and slots for cable hooks.

M.

Square Sump Frame and Grate: Gray cast iron, with machine finished contact surfaces,
30 mm square opening, square slotted cover.

N.

Miscellaneous Hardware: Concrete inserts - Continuous type, cold roll formed from
No. 12 gauge strip steel, galvanized, length as indicated, with plastic filler.

O.

Insulators: High glaze, wet process white porcelain to fit hooks furnished.

P.

Hooks: Hot dip galvanized, standard, heavy duty, to fit racks. Hooks shall be a
minimum of 450 mm in length.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01

EXAMINATION
A.

3.02

3.03

Examine conditions at the job site where work of this section is to be performed to
insure proper arrangement and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of job
site conditions.

PREPARATION
A.

Examine the Contract Drawings and specifications in order to insure the completeness
of the work required under this section.

B.

Verify measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the coordination
and scheduling of the work of this section with the work of related trades, so as not to
delay job progress.

C.

Provide templates as required to related trade for location of support and anchorage
items.

EXCAVATION
A.

Slope sides of excavation to comply with local codes and ordinances. Shore and brace
as required for stability of excavation.

B.

Shoring and Bracing


1.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with local codes
and authorities. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time
period excavations will be open.
Underground Ducts And Manholes
16115 - 5/9

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.

King Saud University

Remove shoring and bracing when no longer required. Where sheeting is


allowed to remain, cut top of sheeting at an elevation of 30 inches below finished
grade elevation.

C.

Install sediment and erosion control measures in accordance with local codes and
ordinances.

D.

Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into
excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area.

E.

F.

1.

Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent


softening of bearing materials. Provide and maintain dewatering system
components necessary to convey water away from excavations.

2.

Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside
excavation limits to convey surface water to collecting or runoff area. Do not use
trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches.

Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until


required for backfill or fill. Place, grade and shape stockpiles for proper drainage.
1.

Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store
within drip-line of trees indicated to remain.

2.

Remove and legally dispose of excess excavated materials and materials not
acceptable for use as backfill or fill.

Excavation for Underground Vaults and Electrical Structures: Conform to elevations


and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 30 mm; plus a sufficient
distance to permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services,
other construction and for inspection.
1.

G.

Take care not to disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade
just before concrete reinforcement is placed.

Trenching: Excavate trenches for electrical installations as follows:


1.

Excavate trenches to the uniform width, sufficiently wide to provide ample


working room and a minimum of 150 - 250 mm clearance on both sides of
raceways and equipment.

2.

Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required.

3.

Limit the length of open trench to that in which installations can be made and the
trench backfilled within the same day.

4.

Where rock is encountered, carry excavation below required elevation and


backfill with a layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to installation of raceways
and equipment. Provide a minimum of 150mm of stone or gravel cushion
between rock bearing surface and electrical installations.

H.

Cold Weather Protection:


Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when
atmospheric temperature is less than zero degree C.

I.

Backfilling and Filling: Place soil materials in layers to required subgrade elevations
for each area classification listed below, using materials specified in Part 2 of this
Section.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Underground Ducts And Manholes


16115 - 6/9

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

J.

King Saud University

1.

Under walks and pavements, use a combination of subbase materials and


excavated or borrowed materials.

2.

Under building slabs, use drainage fill materials.

3.

Under piping and equipment, use subbase materials where required over rock
bearing surface and for correction of unauthorized excavation.

4.

For raceways less than 750 mm below surface of roadways, provide 100 mm thick
concrete base slab support. After installation of raceways, provide a 100 mm
thick concrete encasement (sides and top) prior to backfilling and placement of
roadway subbase.

5.

Other areas, use excavated or borrowed materials.

Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Inspection, testing, approval and location of underground utilities have been


recorded.
Removal of concrete formwork.
Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids.
Removal of trash and debris.

K.

Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum


moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density
or relative dry density for each area classification specified below. Do not place backfill
or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen or contain frost or ice.

L.

Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, piping and equipment to
required elevations. Prevent displacement of raceways and equipment by carrying
material uniformly around them to approximately same elevation in each lift.

M.

Compaction: Control soil compaction during construction, providing minimum


percentage of density specified for each area classification indicated below.
1.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the
following percentages of maximum density for soils which exhibit a well-defined
moisture-density relationship (cohesive soils), determined in accordance with
ASTM D1557 and not less than the following percentages of relative density,
determined in accordance with ASTM D2049, for soils which will not exhibit a
well-defined moisture-density relationship (cohesionless soils).
a.

Areas Under Structures, Building Slabs and Steps, Pavements: Compact


top 200 mm of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to 90
percent maximum density for cohesive material, or 95 percent relative
density for cohesionless material.

b.

Areas Under Walkways: Compact top 150 mm of subgrade and each layer
of backfill or fill material to 90 percent maximum density for cohesive
material, or 95 percent relative density for cohesionless material.

c.

Other Areas: Compact top 150 mm of subgrade and each layer of backfill
or fill material to 85 percent maximum density for cohesive soils, and 90
percent relative density for cohesionless soils.
Underground Ducts And Manholes
16115 - 7/9

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.

N.

3.04

King Saud University

Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture


conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water. Apply water in
minimum quantity necessary to achieve required moisture conteand to prevent
water appearing on surface during, or subsequent to, compaction operations.

Subsidence: Where subsidence occurs at electrical installation excavations during the


period 12 months after Substantial Completion, remove surface treatment (i.e.,
pavement, lawn or other finish), add backfill material, compact to specified conditions,
and replace surface treatment. Restore appearance, quality and condition of surface or
finish to match adjacent areas.

INSTALLATION, ERECTION, AND APPLICATION


A.

Concrete Encased Underground Duct Banks


1.

Where indicated or shown on the drawings underground duct lines shall be


constructed of individual conduits encased in concrete. The conduit shall be PVC
and duct as specified and shown on drawings. Utilize schedule 80 PVC conduit
at risers, within 3 meter of manhole walls within 2000mm of building walls,
under roads, at points of strain, at equipment pads and other locations as
indicated or specified. Provide conduit adapters for connection of conduit of
different materials. The concrete encasement surrounding the duct bank shall be
rectangular in cross-section, and have a minimum concrete thickness of 75 mm.
Conduits shall be separated by a minimum concrete thickness of 75 mm. Place
sand in the trenches not less than 100 mm deep before placing the ducts and
conduits. Duct banks shall be reinforced throughout their entire length and into
manholes.

2.

Unless otherwise indicated or specified, ducts shall be PVC plastic utilities duct.

3.

Concrete shall have red pigmentation where encasing ducts containing power
cables.

4.

Provide line markers over duct banks as specified in Section 16195.

5.

Provide identifying concrete markers as specified in Section 16195.

6.

Duct lines shall have a continuous slope downward toward manholes and away
from buildings with a pitch of not less than 100 mm in 30 m. Trenches shall be
excavated along straight lines, from manhole to manhole, before ducts are laid or
manholes constructed so the elevation can be adjusted, if necessary, to avoid
unseen obstructions.

7.

Install underground duct banks with bottom below frost line.

8.

During construction, partially completed duct lines shall be protected from the
entrance of debris such as mud, snow and dirt by means of suitable removable
conduit plugs. As each section of a duct line is completed from manhole to
manhole, a testing mandrel not less than 300 mm long with a diameter 6 mm less
than the size of the conduit shall be drawn through each conduit, after which a
brush with stiff bristles shall be drawn through until the conduit is clear of
particles of earth, sand, or gravel. Conduit plugs shall then be immediately
installed. Seal the ducts and conduits including spare ducts and conduits, at
manhole entrances and terminations after cleaning of the conduits in a duct bank
is completed.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Underground Ducts And Manholes


16115 - 8/9

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

9.

B.

C.

D.

King Saud University

Provide a nylon pull tape in empty conduits and ducts, secured at ends to
prevent slippage.

Waterproofing of Manholes
1.

Cast-In-Place Manholes: Provide membrane waterproofing on the outside of


manhole walls per manufacturer's directions.

2.

Precast Manholes: Waterproof section joints, duct entrances, and joints at top
and bottom of poured concrete throats. Use field waterproofing resin with
waterproofing fabric for reinforcing. Apply waterproofing as follows:
a.

Apply resin sealer only when surfaces are clean, dry and sound, and free
from dust, grease, waxes, foreign particles and disintegrated materials.
Wire brush such surfaces and remove fines with clean, dry fiber brushes
immediately before waterproofing.

b.

Prior to waterproofing operation, cut the reinforcing fabric in minimum


150 mm wide strips for placing over joints in concrete.

c.

Immediately before use, mix the two components of the resin together with
a low speed electric mixer until the material attains uniform color and
consistency. Mix for three minutes, taking care to scrape bottom and sides
of container. Use the following methods of applications:

d.

Manhole Section and Throat Joints: Apply a 10 mil coat of resin on joints
and extend coating a minimum of three inches each side of the joint.
Embed a continuous strip of fabric in the resin, centered on the joint. Lap
fabric ends a minimum of one inch. Apply a second 10 mil coat of resin
and a second fabric strip, stagger joints in fabric.

e.

Duct Entrances: After placing ducts in openings and immediately before


pouring concrete, coat entire duct entrance pocket with resin to bond new
concrete to precast concrete. Cover areas of contact between precast and
new concrete with resin. Cover unused entrances with resin to prevent
water seepage through duct entrances.

f.

Seal the opening around the ground rod so it is watertight.

Penetrations
1.

Provide waterproof seals for conduits entering the building from underground at
the first accessible point within the building.

2.

Provide smoke and fire stop sealants and fittings for conduits penetrating fire
rated walls and floors.

3.

Provide airtight seals for conduits penetrating into animal rooms and other
locations as indicated, utilizing joint sealers as specified in this section.

Grounding within Manholes:


specified in Section 16452.

Ground metallic components within manholes as

END OF SECTION 16115

OCE - 30 January 2014

Underground Ducts And Manholes


16115 - 9/9

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16120
WIRES AND CABLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.

1.02

Examine all other sections of the specification for requirements which affect work of
this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.

SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK


A.

The requirements of this section shall apply to all multi-core and single core cables,
referred to on the drawings and elsewhere within this specification.

B.

The types of cables shall have copper conductors and comprise the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

1.03

1.04

Single core PVC insulated


Flexible multi-core cables.
PVC/PVC cables.
XLPE /PVC cables.
PVC/SWA/PVC cables.
XLPE/SWA/PVC cables.
Communications, security and data cables.

QUALITY STANDARDS
A.

Cables shall only be purchased from manufactures specializing in the manufacture


or the type of cable mentioned.

B.

Cables shall generally be manufacturers standard construction and materials.


Where this contradicts any part of this specification, the Contractor shall state so at
the time of tender.

C.

Manufacturers shall provide proof of supply of similar types of cables to known


users for a period not less than five years.

D.

All equipment furnished under this specification shall conform to applicable


standards of SASO and BS.

SUBMITTALS
A.

The Contractor shall submit samples of each type of cable they are offer.

B.

For all cables the Contractor shall submit the following manufacturers details:

OCE - 30 January 2014

Dimensions
Weights
Construction
Current Rating
Manner of Installation
Maximum Conductor Operating Temperature
Volt Drop/Amp/Meter
Impedance: Separate resistance & reactance value of single & multi core
WIRES AND CABLES
16120 - 1/9

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

1.05

King Saud University

cables
Resistance of Armoring in Omh/1000 meters Length of Cable
Characteristic Curves for Short Circuit Rating
Minimum Bending Radius

DELIVERY AND HANDLING OF CABLES


A.

End of cables shall be sealed to prevent ingress of moisture.

B.

Where cables are transported on drums there shall be adequate circumferences for
the cables.

C.

After winding on drums, the cables shall be protected by being completely enclosed.

D.

Care shall be taken during transit to avoid damage to cable and drums. Before
acceptance on site, cable drums and cables shall be inspected for:
1.
2.
3.

Damage
Compliance with Specifications
Quantity

E.

Cable, wire and accessories shall be stored in factory installed coverings in a clean,
dry indoor space which provides protection against the weather.

F.

Each distribution cable shall be supplied in one continuous length, no joints shall be
permitted.

G.

Cables shall be handled with care and every effort made to avoid damage to the
cable, to other services and to building fabric. Recommendations or instructions
available from the cable manufacturers concerning the installation of cables shall be
taken into account; in particular co-axial cables shall not be bent in radius less than
six times the overall diameter. Any damage shall be reported immediately to the
Engineer.

H.

Cable drums shall be unloaded carefully by means of either a crane or ramp and
impact with the ground shall be avoided. They shall be supported on axles and axle
stands while the cable is being pulled; twisting and abrasion of the cable serving or
over-sheath shall be avoided.

I.

Cables shall be pulled over cable rollers adequately spaced to prevent the cable
being dragged over ground or other surfaces. For cables pulled into thrust boring
or cables ducts and for all cables exceeding 10m length, cable stockings shall be such
for hauling. Precautions shall be taken to ensure that strain is taken on the cable
cores as well as the sheath and excessive stain shall be avoided.

PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01

MANUFACTURERS
A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one


of the following or equal approved:
1.
2.
3.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Riyadh Cable Company


Saudi Cable Company
Jeddah Cable Company

WIRES AND CABLES


16120 - 2/9

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.02

2.03

2.04

2.05

King Saud University

SINGLE CORE PVC INSULATED CABLES


A.

Single core cables shall be of high conductivity copper stranded wire insulated with
PVC.

B.

Cables shall comply with BS 6004 Table 5 and shall be of 600/1000V grade.

C.

Cables shall be colored in accordance with section 524 of the IEE Wiring
Regulations, 16th Edition (BS 7671) and BS 3858.

FLEXIBLE CABLES
A.

All flexible cables used for pendant lighting fittings or for final connections to fixed
or portable equipment, shall be of 300/500 grade and comply with BS 6500 Table 12.

B.

Flexible cables shall be of annealed copper conductors insulated with heat resisting
PVC, sheathed with heat resisting PVC and shall be of circular construction.

C.

Cable cores shall be colored, and conform to 2.01-C. above.

MULTI-CORE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) INSULATED NON ARMORED


CABLES
A.

All low voltage multi-core distribution cables shall be 600/1000V polyvinyl chloride
(PVC) insulated copper conductor, non armored complying with BS 6346.

B.

Cable conductors shall be of high conductivity copper wire insulated with polyvinyl
chloride (PVC).

C.

Cable cores shall be colored in accordance with section 524 of the IEE Wiring
Regulations, 16th Edition (BS 7671) and BS 3858.

D.

Joints shall not be allowed in any cable.

MULTI CORE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE


ARMORED AND PVC SHEATHED CABLES

(PVC)

INSULATED

STEEL

WIRE

A.

All low voltage multi core distribution cables shall be 600/1000V polyvinyl chloride
(PVC) insulated copper conductor, steel wire armored and PVC sheathed cable
complying with BS 6346.

B.

Cable conductors shall be of high conductivity copper wire insulated with polyvinyl
chloride (PVC). The armoring shall consist of a single layer of galvanized steel wire
and the cable be sheathed overall with PVC.

C.

Steel wire armoring shall be securely bonded to earth at each termination by means
of an adequately sized metallic bond which shall be as short and straight as it is
practicable.

D.

Cables core shall be colored in accordance with section 524 of the IEE Wiring
Regulation, 16th Edition (BS 7671) and BS 3858.

E.

Joints shall not be allowed in any cable.

OCE - 30 January 2014

WIRES AND CABLES


16120 - 3/9

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.06

2.07

King Saud University

CROSS LINKED POLYETHYLENE (XLPE) INSULATED STEEL WIRE ARMORED


AND PVC SHEATHED CABLES
A.

All low voltage multi core distribution cables shall be 600/1000V grade cross linked
polyethylene (XLPE) insulated copper conductor, steel wire armored and PVC
sheathed cables complying with BS 5467.

B.

Cable conductors shall be of high conductivity copper wire insulated with cross
linked polyethylene. The armoring shall consist of a single layer of galvanized steel
wire and the cable shall be sheathed overall with PVC.

C.

Steel wire cable armoring shall be securely bonded to earth at each termination by
means of an adequately sized metallic bond which shall be as short and straight as it
is practicable.

D.

Cable cores shall be colored in accordance with section 524 of the IEE Wiring
Regulations, 16th Edition (BS 7671) and BS 3858.

E.

Joints shall not be allowed in any cable.

COMMUNICATION CABLES
A.

Co-axial cables shall be 75 ohm to be used for audio/video signal transmission and
shall comply with IEC 78, IEC 96 and BS 5425, BS 2314. The size and type shall be
sized to meet the signal requirements at the outlet points.

B.

Wires for communication shall be single core or multi-core insulated and sheathed
conductors which are used only for high duty indoor application. The conductor
insulation and the sheath shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC), and shall be rated for
minimum of 300/500V, and shall comply with IEC 189. The insulation resistance
shall be a minimum of 100 mega ohm x kms. The copper conductor diameter shall
be indicated on the drawings. In multi-core wires each group of four conductors
shall be star-twisted. Shielding shall be provided if required as shown on the
drawings.

C.

Communication cables shall be multi-core, shielded. The conductor insulation shall


be polyethylene (PE) and shall be rated for an operation voltage of approximately
150V and test voltage of 500/200V core-core/core-sheath. The insulation resistance
shall be a minimum of 10000 mega ohms x kms. Each group of four conductors
shall be twisted. The conductors diameter shall be as indicated on drawings. The
cable shall be provided with an aluminium shielding underneath the outer sheath.

D.

Communication cables shall conform to M.O.P.T.T. requirements.

PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01

INSPECTION
A.

3.02

The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which the cables are to
be installed and correct any unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper and
timely completion of the work. The Contractor shall not proceed with the work
until all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the
Engineer.

SUB-CIRCUIT WIRING - LIGHTING


A.

Lighting installation wiring will take the following forms:

OCE - 30 January 2014

WIRES AND CABLES


16120 - 4/9

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

3.03

King Saud University

1.

Single core PVC insulated cables in trunking/conduit for internal wiring.

2.

Multi core PVC or PVC/PVC insulated cables in cable tray, ladder or


conduit for internal wiring.

3.

Multi core PVC/SWA/PVC or XLPE/SWA/PVC in conduit, duct banks or


direct buried for external wiring.

B.

The types of lighting luminaries required for detailed on the drawings, and the
types of lighting installations and accessories are detailed elsewhere in this
specification and on the drawings.

C.

No conductor smaller than 2.5 sq.mm shall be used.

D.

All lighting circuit wiring shall be carried out using the loop-in system.

E.

Each lighting circuit shall be wired as shown on the drawings and in accordance
with this Specification.

F.

Each lighting circuit shall have a separate circuit protective conductor throughout to
each light and switch point.

G.

Where a lighting circuit is to be installed in trunking or conduit together with any


other circuit(s) deviating from drawings, the circuit conductor must be derated for
grouping in accordance with table 4B1 of the IEE Wiring Regulations, 16th Edition.
This will normally result in the need to increase the conductor sizes as shown in the
schedule.

SUB-CIRCUIT WIRING SMALL POWER


A.

Small power installation wiring will take the following forms:


1.

Single core PVC insulated cables in trunking/conduit for internal wiring.

2.

Multi core PVC or PVC/PVC insulated cables in cable tray, ladder or


conduit for internal wiring.

3.

Multi core PVC/SWA/PVC or XLPE/SWA/PVC in conduit, duct banks or


direct buried for external wiring.

B.

The types of small power installations and accessories required are detailed
elsewhere in this specification and on the drawings.

C.

The small power installations shall be wired using the radial system as described on
the drawings.

D.

No conductor smaller than 4.0 sq.mm shall be used.

E.

Each small power circuit shall have a separate circuit protective conductor
throughout to each outlet.

F.

Where a small power circuit is to be installed in trunking or conduit together with


any other circuit(s) deviating from drawings, the circuit conductor must be derated
for grouping in accordance with tale 4B1 of the IEE Wiring Regulations, 16th Edition.
This will normally result in the need to increase the conductor sizes as shown in the
schedule.

OCE - 30 January 2014

WIRES AND CABLES


16120 - 5/9

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

3.04

SUB-CIRCUIT WIRING POWER (SINGLE AND THREE PHASE)


A.

3.05

Power installation wiring will take the form of one of the following:
1.

Single core PVC insulated cables in trunking/conduit.

2.

Multi core PVC or PVC/PVC insulated cables in cable tray, ladder or


conduit for internal wiring.

3.

Multi core PVC/SWA/PVC or XLPE/SWA/PVC in conduit, duct banks or


direct buried for external wiring.

B.

The types of power installations required for this project are detailed elsewhere in
this specification and on the drawings.

C.

The power installations will generally be wired on a single circuit bases as described
on the drawings and will serve fixed items of equipment.

D.

No conductor smaller than 4.0 sq.mm shall be used.

E.

Each power circuit shall have a separate circuit protective conductor.

F.

Where a power circuit is to be installed in trunking or conduit together with any


other circuit(s) deviating from drawings, the circuit conductor must be derated for
grouping in accordance with tale 4B1 of the IEE Wiring Regulations, 16th Edition.
This will normally result in the need to increase the conductor sizes as shown in the
schedule.

CIRCUIT WIRING FIRE ALARM


A.

Fire alarm installation wiring will take the form of either of the following:
1.

3.06

3.07

King Saud University

Single core PVC insulated cables in dedicated galvanized steel conduits.

B.

No conductor smaller than 2.5 sq.mm shall be used.

C.

The types of communication installations required for this project are detailed
elsewhere in this specification and on the drawings.

CIRCUIT WIRING - COMMUNICATIONS


A.

Communication installation wiring will take the form of single or multi core cables
in trunking/conduit.

B.

The types of communication installations required for this project are detailed
elsewhere in this specification and on the drawings.

FLEXIBLE CABLE INSTALLATION


A.

Flexible cables shall not be concealed in any part of the installation.

B.

Where flexible cables are subject to heat they shall be constructed containing a
minimum of three cores.

C.

All flexible cables are to be of circular construction containing a minimum of three


cores.

D.

Where portable appliances exceed 200 watt rating, the flexible cable shall not be
smaller than 32/0.20 sq.mm.

OCE - 30 January 2014

WIRES AND CABLES


16120 - 6/9

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

E.
3.08

3.09

King Saud University

Flexible cables exceeding 1m length shall not be allowed, hard wiring shall be taken
to within 1m of all equipment or apparatus to be supplied.

INTERNAL CABLE INSTALLATION


A.

Where cables enclosed in conduits are run vertically in excess of 5m the cables shall
be clamped, so as to relieve strain on the cables, using suitable approved clamps.

B.

Where cables are run in trunking the cables of each circuit or groups of circuits shall
be clipped together using nylon straps or other suitable straps or clips. Vertical runs
of trunking exceeding 5m shall be supplied with pin racks to relieve the strain on
cables.

C.

Suitable precautions shall be taken during multiple circuit wiring follows a common
route then the wiring shall be installed in trunking rather than multiple conduits.

D.

To ease future maintenance and modifications, where multiple circuit wiring


follows a common route then the wiring shall be installed in trunking rather than
multiple conduits.

E.

All cable runs shall be continuous, where multiple circuit wiring follows a common
route then the wiring shall be installed in trunking rather than multiple conduits.

F.

All cable runs shall be continuous, no joints will be permitted.

G.

Saddle and clips used for fixing cables shall be from the same manufacturer as the
cable which they are being used to fix and shall be constructed of the same material
as that of the cable sheath with an overall covering of PVC to the same color as that
of the PVC covering of the cable. All saddles and clips shall be secured using brass
round head screws. Where cables are supported on cable tray they shall be fixed to
the cable tray using suitable approved straps of clips. Ties shall be spaced at no
greater than 600mm intervals along each cable, and within 100mm of end bend or
set.

H.

Cables shall not be run inside cable trunking.

I.

Bends in cables shall not be of a smaller radius than twice the overall diameter of the
cable.

J.

Each gland shall be from the same manufacturer as the cable on which it is used and
shall be stamped describing the size and number of conductors. PVC shrouds shall
be used to protect every gland.

K.

Where cables are laid on cable trays or ladder in mechanical or electrical technical
rooms, they shall be mechanically protected by a cover to a height not less than 2m
from ground level.

L.

When installing cables, core shall be taken to ensure that electrolytic action does not
take place between the cable and any other material.

M.

Power and lighting cables shall be installed in one cable tray. Telephone, P.A., T.V.
and Communications cables shall be installed in another cable tray with fire alarm
cables separated by mechanical separators.

EXTERNAL CABLE INSTALLATION


A.

No work shall commence until the Contractor has investigated the site satisfactorily,
and ascertained that the area is free from drains or other underground services.

OCE - 30 January 2014

WIRES AND CABLES


16120 - 7/9

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

B.

Unless otherwise indicated, excavations within 600mm of existing services shall be


by hand digging. All services uncovered, whether expected or not, shall be
reported immediately to the Engineer; they shall be supported by slings or other
suitable means and protected. Any damage to services, however minor, shall be
reported immediately to the Engineer; no repairs or replacement shall be done
unless the Engineer gives his approval.

C.

When cable trenches are opened all cables shall be laid as quickly as possible. The
Engineer approval shall be obtained before a trench is backfill, generally back-filling
shall be commenced within 24 hours of cable laying and the work completed
speedily.

D.

Excavations shall be kept free of water and protected against damage or collapse.
The safety of persons and the protection of structures, buildings, roads and services
from damage shall be ensured.

E.

Before cables are laid the bottom of the trench shall be graded evenly, cleaned of
loose stones and then covered for the full width of the trench with a150mm layer of
earth which has passed through a sieve with a maximum mesh of 12mm or with
sieved sand. Where the level of the trench bottom has to change the slope shall not
be greater than 1 in 12.

F.

After cables have been laid a further layer of earth or sieved sand shall be added
over the full width of the trench and tamped to provide finally not less than 50mm
cover over the cables. The earth shall have passed through a sieve with a maximum
mesh of 12mm.

G.

Trenches shall be backfilled in layers and each layer shall be rammed. The first two
layers shall be 100mm deep and rammed by hand; then ramming may be used.
Warning tapes and covers shall be provided.

H.

Warning tapes shall be of polythene not less than 150mm wide and 0.1mm thick.
They shall be yellow in color and bear the continuously repeated legend
CAUTION ELECTRIC CABLE BELOW or similar in English and Arabic in black
letters not less than 30mm high.

I.

Cables laid in trenches shall cross other cables only at junctions; clearances between
the cables shall be maintained at cross overs. Cables shall not be laid one above the
other except where indicated.

J.

If more than one cable is to be drawn in a duct , the cables shall be bunched together
and pulled in one operation, wherever possible.

K.

Where cables run under roadways, they shall be installed in uPVC ducts, encased n
concrete. The ducts shall extend for a minimum distance of 1m on each side of each
roadway.

L.

Where cables enter ducts beneath ground to buildings, these ducts shall be sealed to
prevent the ingress of water by means of sealing fittings which will be filled with
sealing compound. At least one spare duct shall be installed at each building entry
point.

M.

Details and routes of external cables are shown on the drawings.

N.

Cables shall be installed to the requirements of the IEE Wiring Regulations, 16th
Edition and all current amendments. Section 522-08 of these regulations states
requirements for support of cables.

O.

Cables shall only be terminated using the correct size and type of gland with earth

OCE - 30 January 2014

WIRES AND CABLES


16120 - 8/9

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

tag and shroud from the same manufacturer as the cable. All gland shall be dustproof and for external applications the glands shall be fully weather-proof.

3.10

P.

Cables armoring shall be bonded to earth at each termination by means of a


green/yellow Cu/PVC earth conductor, sized in accordance with Section 543 of the
IEE Wiring Regulations, 16th Edition, connecting the cable gland earth tag to the
local earth terminal. The apparatus gland plate shall be cleaned to bare metal
around the cable gland earth tag bolted connection to ensure a sound electrical
connection.

Q.

Where cables pass through walls or floors, they shall be protected by PVC or mild
steel sleeves cast in to the building fabric. If the walls or floors are fire divisions,
then the sleeves shall be fire stopped after installation of the cable(s) to the same
rating as the walls or floors through which they pass.

R.

Before any tradesman is allowed to terminate an armored cable on the permanent


works, he shall make a demonstration termination in the presence of the Engineer
and obtain the approval of the Engineer.

S.

Where cables pass through ducts or sleeves entering buildings, the Contractor shall
seal the ends of the ducts or sleeves using a suitable approved stopper after
installation of cable.

MARKING OF CABLE
A.

Buried cables shall be permanently identified by concrete slab and marker. The
markers shall be 600mm square by 100mm thick with impressed character; they
shall be made of grade 20 concrete, as defined in BS 8110, with 10mm aggregate.
The impressed characters shall be in English and Arabic and worded L.V. CABLE
as appropriate together with circuit details as indicated.

B.

Cables markers shall be located at every point where cable enters a building, substation or distribution pillars, change of direction, road and pathway crossing, and
along the route of the cable at the interval not exceeding 45m.

C.

Except where cables are buried, located in switch rooms, in ducts and spaces
designated solely for electrical services, or have orange over-sheaths, they shall be
identified by adhesive bands colored orange, complying with standards and codes
of practice mentioned elsewhere in this specification. The bands shall be not less
than 100mm long, located at least once within each separate compartment through
which cables pass and at intervals not exceeding 12m.

D.

Except where cables are buried, or enclosed in conduit, trunking or ducting they
shall be permanently identified by discs. The discs shall be laminated plastic
materials with black character on white; character shall be not less than 3mm high.
The inscription shall indicate the nominal voltage, the designation of the load, the
number and cross sectional area of cores and the rated voltage of the cable.

E.

Cables identification discs shall be attached to the cables with ties. Discs shall be
located within 500mm of terminations and joints, at least once within each separate
compartment through which the cable pass, and at intervals not exceeding 24m,
they shall coincide with the color bands.

END OF SECTION 16120

OCE - 30 January 2014

WIRES AND CABLES


16120 - 9/9

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16135
ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01

1.02

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.

Examine all other sections of the specification for requirements which affect work
of this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this Section.

B.

Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of this
Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work
under the Contract.

SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK


A.

Extent of electrical box and electrical fitting work is indicated by drawings and
schedules.

B.

Types of electrical boxes and fittings in this section include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

1.03

1.04

Outlet Boxes
Junction Boxes
Pull Boxes
Floor Boxes (Under Floor and Flush Floor)
Conduit Bodies
Bushings
Lock-nuts
Knock-out Closures

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical boxes and


fittings, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use
in similar service for not less than 10 years.

B.

Installer: Qualification with at least five years of successful installation experience


on projects with electrical installation work similar to that required for project.

C.

IEE Compliance: Comply with IEE as applicable to construction and installation


of electrical wiring boxes and fittings.

D.

British Standards Compliance: Comply with British Standards as applicable to


sheet-steel outlet boxes, device boxes, and cover and box supports.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Products Data: Submit manufacturers data on electrical boxes and fittings.

B.

Samples: The Contractor shall submit sample of each type of box and fitting they
are offering.

OCE - 30 January 2014

ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS


16135 - 1/3

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01

FABRICATED MATERIALS
A.

Interior Outlet Boxes: Provide galvanized flat, rolled sheet steel interior outlet
wiring boxes of types, shapes and sizes including box depth, to suit each
respective location and installation, construct threaded screw holes with corrosion
resistant screws for securing box covers and wiring devices.

B.

Interior Outlet Box Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories as required for
each installation, including mounted brackets, wallboard hangers, extension rings,
fixtures studs, cable clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, which
are compatible with outlet boxes being used and fulfilling requirements of
individual wiring situations.

C.

Weather-proof Outlet Boxes: Provide corrosion resistant cast metal weather-proof


outlet wiring boxes, of types shapes and sizes, including depth of boxes, with
threaded conduit ends, cast metal face plates with spring hinged water proof caps
suitable configuration for each application, including face plate gaskets and
corrosion resistant fasteners.

D.

Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide galvanized code gauge sheet steel junction and
pull boxes or with screw on covers, of types, shapes and sizes to suit each
respective location and installation with welded seams and equipped with
stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws and washers.

E.

Conduit Bodies: Provide galvanized cast metal conduit bodies, or types, shapes
and sizes to suit respective locations and installation, construct with threaded,
corrosion resistant screws.

F.

Bushings, Knockout Closures and Lock-nuts: Provide corrosion resistant punched


steel box knockout closures, conduit lock nuts and malleable iron conduit
bushings, offset connectors, of types and sizes to suit respective uses and
installation.

PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01

INSTALLATION
A.

General: Install electrical boxes and fittings where indicated, complying with
manufacturers written instructions, applicable requirements of IEE and BS and in
compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill
requirements.

B.

Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fitting with wire/cable and raceway
installation work.

C.

Provide weatherproof outlets for interior and exterior locations exposed to


weather or moisture.

D.

Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been
removed.

E.

Install boxes and conduit bodies locations to ensure ready accessibility of electrical
wiring.

OCE - 30 January 2014

ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS


16135 - 2/3

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

F.

Avoid using round boxes where conduit must enter box through side of box,
which would result in difficult and insecure connections when fastened with locknut or bushing on rounded surface.

G.

Fasten boxes rigidly to substrate or structural surfaces to which attached, or


solidly embedded electrical boxes in concrete or masonry.

H.

Provide electrical connections for installed boxes.

END OF SECTION 16135

OCE - 30 January 2014

ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS


16135 - 3/3

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16142
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01

1.02

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.

Examine all other sections of the Specification for requirements which affect work of
this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section.

B.

Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of the
Section. Cooperate with such trade to assure the steady progress of all work under
the Contract.

SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK


A.

Extent of electrical connections for equipment is as indicated by drawings and


schedules. Electric connections are hereby defined to include, but not limited to,
connections for providing electrical power without exception to all equipment which
needs electrical power.

B.

Types of electrical power connections specific in this section include the following:

To all A/C Control Panels and Equipment.

To all Motor Control Centers (MCC).

To all Socket Outlets.

To all Isolators.

To Motors (if covered by electrical contract).

To Motor Starters (if covered by electrical contract).

To all Heaters and A/C Equipment (if covered by electrical contract).

From Motor Starters to Motors (if covered by electrical contract).

To all Lighting Fixtures and Switches.

To Converters, Rectifiers, Transformers, Inverts, UPS and Similar Current


Adjustment Features of Equipment.

To Master Units of Communication, Signal, Alarm, etc. and to all Secondary


Units where required.

To Earth all Equipment.

C.

See Sections 16481 and 16482 for Motors Control Centers and Motor Starters
furnished integrally with equipment; not work of this section.

D.

See Division 15, Sections for Control Systems Wiring is not work covered by this
section.

E.

See all the notes on electrical drawings for details of scope of work included under
this section.

OCE - 30 January 2014

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT


16142 - 1/4

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

1.03

1.04

1.05

King Saud University

GUARANTEES
A.

Attention is directed to provisions contained elsewhere regarding guarantees and


warranties for work under this Contract.

B.

Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees for work under this section.
However, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities
which manufacturers and Contractors may have by law or by other provisions of the
Contract Documents.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of connectors and terminals,


or types, and ratings required, and ancillary connection materials, including electrical
insulating tape, electrical flux, and cable ties, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five years.

B.

Installer: Qualified with at least five years of successful installation experience on


projects with electrical installation work similar to that required for the project.

C.

BS Compliance: Comply with applicable portion of


BS as to type products used
and installation of electrical power connections (terminals and splices), for junction
boxes, motor starters and disconnect switches.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Products Data: Submit manufacturers data on electrical connectors, terminals and


materials.

PART 2 PRODUCT
2.01

MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS


A.

General: For each electrical connection indicated, provide complete assembly of


materials, including but not necessary limited to, pressure connectors, terminals
(lugs), electrical insulating tape, electrical solder, electrical soldering flux, heatshrinkable insulating tubing, cable ties, solder-less wire nuts, and other items and
accessories as needed to complete splices and terminations of types indicated.

B.

Metal and Heavy Gauge PVC Conduit, Tubing and Fitting: Provide heavy gauge
PVC and metal conduit, tubing and fittings of types, grades, sizes and fittings of
types, sizes and weights (wall thickness), indicated for each type service. Where
types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by
installer to fulfill wiring raceways. Provide products complying with Section 16110
Electrical Raceways, and in accordance with the following listing of metal conduit,
tubing and fittings.

Heavy Gauge PVC Conduit (for indoor except plant rooms).

PVC External Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (external area and plant rooms)

Rigid Metal Conduit Fittings.

Electrical Metallic Tubing.

PVC Externally Coated Electrical Metallic Tubing

OCE - 30 January 2014

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT


16142 - 2/4

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

Flexible Metal Conduit

Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings

Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit

Liquid-Tight Flexible Conduit Fittings

King Saud University

C.

Wire, Cable and Connectors: Provide electrical connectors and terminals as


recommended by connector and terminal manufacturer for intended applications.

D.

Electrical Connection Accessories: Provide electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable


insulating tubing and boots, solder, electrical soldering flux, wire nuts and cable ties
as recommended for use by the accessories manufacturers for type services indicated.

PART 3-EXECUTION
3.01

INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS


A.

Install electrical connection as indicated; in accordance with connector manufacturers


written instructions and with recognized industry practices, and complying with
requirement of the IEE Wiring regulations, 16th Edition, Standard of Installation to
ensure that products fulfill requirements.

B.

Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in accordance


with equipment manufacturers written instructions and wiring diagrams. Wherever
possible, mate and match conductors of electrical connections for proper interface
between electrical power supplies and installed equipment.

C.

Coordinate installation of electrical connections for equipment with installation work.

D.

Splices insulated by wound tape shall not be acceptable.


conductors must be free of splices.

E.

Prepare cables and wires, by cutting stripping covering armor, jacket and insulation
properly to ensure uniform and neat appearance where cables and wires are
terminated.

F.

Trim cables and wires as short as practicable and arrange routing to facilitate
inspection testing and maintenance.

G.

Tighten wire binding connector screws firmly.

H.

Provide PVC coated conduit and fittings where indicated for highly corrosive
atmosphere and outdoor installation.

I.

Provide liquid tight flexible conduit for all motor connections, and for other electrical
equipment connections where subject to one or more of the following:

Protective earthing

Exterior Location

Moist or humid atmosphere where condensate can be expected to


accumulate (showers, baths, toilet, etc.).

Corrosive Atmosphere

Subjected to Water Spray

Subjected to Dripping Oil, Grease or Water

OCE - 30 January 2014

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT


16142 - 3/4

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

K.

Refer to basic electrical requirements section for identification of electrical power


supply conductor terminations with markers approved as to types, colors, letters and
markers sizes, by Engineer. Affix markers to each point of termination as close as
possible to each point of connection.

L.

Where a conduit enters a box or other fitting a bushing or grommet shall be provided
to protect the wire from abrasion unless the design of the box or fitting is such as to
afford equivalent protection.

END OF SECTION 16142

OCE - 30 January 2014

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT


16142 - 4/4

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16143
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01

1.02

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.

Examine all other sections of the Specification for requirements which affect work
of this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section.

B.

Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of the
Section. Cooperate with such trade to assure the steady progress of all work
under the Contract.

SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK


A.

This specification applies to wiring devices used as accessories for the electrical
installations as indicated on the drawings or schedules and elsewhere within this
specification.

B.

Types of electrical wiring devices required for the installation in this project
include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.

1.03

Lighting Switches (grid assembly).


Lighting Switches (plate switches).
Ceiling Switches.
External Lighting Switches.
13A Switch Socket Outlets.
15A Socket Outlets.
ANSI 15A 127V Socket Outlets.
Fused Connection Units.
Fused Clock Connectors.
Single Phase Isolators and Switch Fuses.
Multi Phase Isolators and Switch Fuses.
Cooker Control Units.
Connections to Fixed Appliances.
Shaver Socket Outlet.
Industrial Socket Outlet.
Telephone and TV/Radio Outlets.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

Standards:
The equipment and installation shall comply with the standards and codes of
practice listed in Section 16010 or their approved equivalents. In the event of the
discrepancy between this specification and any relevant standard or code of
practice, the specification shall be followed and the Engineer informed.

B.

Manufacturers:
Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of wiring devices, of types and rating
required, and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for
not less than five years.

OCE - 30 January 2014

WIRING DEVICES
16143 - 1/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

C.

King Saud University

Source Quality Control:


Before installation, wiring devices shall be tested in accordance with standards
mentioned elsewhere and have relevant listing or certificates of approval.

D.

Workmanship:
All work undertaken in part or whole shall be carried out and completed to the
standards mentioned elsewhere and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Any defects or damage caused partly or wholly in the installation of wiring
devices to the building or building fabric shall be made good to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.

1.04

SUBMITTAL
A.

The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer complete and detailed


manufacturers data relating to the wiring devices offered. Refer to Section
16010.
For approval submissions shall include the following:

B.
1.05

1.

Name of the Manufacturer.

2.

Country of Origin.

3.

Name and Address of Agents is Saudi Arabia stating whether any


manufacturing or fabrication is carried out in the Kingdom.

4.

Method of Obtaining Spare Parts for Maintenance and list of Spare Parts
Sufficient for a two years period.

5.

Technical Performance of the Equipment Selected.

6.

Dimensional details needed for Installation and Maintenance.

7.

Delivery time from the date of orders.

8.

Submit copies of test reports or certificates.

9.

Control Schematic and Wiring.

The Contractor shall provide samples of proposed wiring devices together with
the above submittal.

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING


A.

Box crate or otherwise completely enclose and protect all equipment from dirt,
construction debris, traffic and operation.

PART 2-PRODUCT
2.01

MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the
following or equal approved:
1.
2.
3.

Legrand
MK
Schneider Electric

OCE - 30 January 2014

WIRING DEVICES
16143 - 2/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.01

2.02

2.03

2.04

King Saud University

GENERAL
A.

Switch plates, socket-outlet plates and similar items shall be of the metal or plastic
material as indicated on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

B.

Decorative finishes of metal plates shall comply with appropriate standards, as


mentioned elsewhere. The finish and/or color shall be standard throughout the
installation unless otherwise indicated or as directed by the Engineer.

C.

Switches shall comply with standards mentioned elsewhere in this specification and
be suitable for use on inductive and resistive loads. They shall be single pole, unless
otherwise indicated or directed by the Engineer, and where mounted adjacent one to
another be grouped in a single enclosure and share a common switch plate.

D.

Where indicated, switches with pilot lamps shall be provided. This lamp shall be a
neon lamp with resistor and red colored lens unless otherwise indicated.

LIGHTING SWITCHES (GRID ASSEMBLIES)


A.

Lighting switches for interior use, grid type, shall be of 220 volts A.C., single pole,
minimum 20A and mounted on adjustable grid enclosed in metal box. The switches
shall be of the quick make, slow break type and shall comply with standards
mentioned elsewhere in this specification.

B.

Key switches for lighting where called for, shall be 220 volts A.C., single pole, 20A
rating, flush mounted in a metal box. The key barrel shall be flush with the cover
plate. The key being withdraw-able in both ON and OFF positions. The switch
mechanism shall be of the snap action type and conform with the standard
mentioned elsewhere in this specification.

C.

Where switches are to be flush type they shall be supplied with overlapping cover
plates finished flush with the sides of the metal box.

EXTERNAL LIGHTING SWITCHES


A.

All external lighting switches shall be one way, two way or multi-gang arrangements
and be complete with a gasket forming splash proof and dust proof enclosures. The
switches shall also comply with standards and regulations mentioned elsewhere.

B.

A suitable drain hole must be provided.

13 AMPERES SWITCH SOCKET OUTLETS


A.

13 amperes, 220 volts, switch socket outlets shall be provided as indicated on


drawings, and shall have two pole and earthing pin, to SASO standards.

B.

Switch socket outlets shall comply with the IEE Wiring Regulations, 16th Edition and
shall be double pole switched.

C.

Weatherproof socket outlets shall be provided with push on cap retaining ring
without switch.

D.

All wall mounted switch socket outlets with the exception of those mounted in
services of plant rooms shall be of the rectangular 3 pin shuttered pattern, flush
mounting type with front plates as indicated elsewhere. Socket outlets shall be
mounted in flush metal box. Where surface mounted socket outlets are required,
they shall be of the flush pattern, mounted on suitable adaptor boxes.

OCE - 30 January 2014

WIRING DEVICES
16143 - 3/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

E.
2.05

2.06

2.07

2.08

King Saud University

Socket outlets provided in services plant rooms shall be metal clad type, surface or
flush mounted as indicated elsewhere.

15 AMPERES SOCKET OUTLETS


A.

15 amperes, 127 volts, socket outlets shall be provided as indicated on drawings, and
shall have two pole and earthing pin.

B.

Socket outlets shall comply with SASO Standards and other Codes of Practice and
regulations, mentioned elsewhere in this specification.

C.

All wall mounted switch socket outlets with the exception of those mounted in
services of plant rooms shall be of 3 pin, flush mounting type with front plates as
indicated elsewhere. Socket outlets shall be mounted in flush metal box complete
with an earthing terminal and earth tag to connect the socket outlets are required,
they shall be of the flush pattern, mounted on suitable adaptor boxes.

D.

Socket outlets provided in services plant rooms shall be metal clad type, surface or
flush mounted as indicated elsewhere.

15A, 127V ANSI SOCKET OUTLETS


A.

ANSI 15A, 127V three pin socket outlets shall be provided as indicted on drawings
and shall have two pole and earthing pins.

B.

Socket outlets shall be mounted in flush metal boxes complete with an earthing
terminal and earth tag to connect the socket outlets are required. They shall be of the
flush pattern, mounted on suitable boxes.

FUSED CONNECTION UNITS


A.

Spur units are to be of the 13 amperes, 220 volts rating combining a double pole
switch, a single pole fuse in the five line and a pilot light for confirmation that the
unit it turned on.

B.

All wall mounted spur units, with the exception of those to be installed in services
and plant rooms. They shall be mounted on either metal or plastic purpose made
mounting boxes to be of the same material as that of the front plates.

C.

In plant rooms and services rooms, spur points shall be of the surface mounted type
and shall be metal clad.

SINGLE PHASE ISOLATORS AND SWITCH FUSES


A.

These shall be of the double pole single throw type, complying with regulations and
standards mentioned elsewhere in this specification.

B.

Finishes shall be either of white plastic for flush isolators or rust proof metal for
surface isolators and switch fuses.

C.

All fuses shall be of HRC type as described elsewhere in this specification. These
items of switchgear are to be used for the isolation of single phase items of fixed
equipment fed by an individual circuit.

D.

Type of equipment required in described elsewhere in this specification and on


drawings.

OCE - 30 January 2014

WIRING DEVICES
16143 - 4/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.09

2.10

2.11

2.12

King Saud University

MULTI PHASE ISOLATORS AND SWITCH FUSES


A.

Multi-phase isolators and switchgear shall be used for the isolation of multiphase
items of fixed equipment fed by an individual circuit.

B.

Switches shall be of multi-pole, single throw operation and must comply with
standards mentioned elsewhere in this specification.

C.

Types of equipment are described elsewhere in this specification.

D.

These items are to be manufactured from rust proofed, metal clad material.

E.

All fuses shall be of HRC type, as described elsewhere in this specification.

COOKER CONTROL UNITS


A.

Cooker control units shall be of 45A double pole type complying with standards
and codes mentioned elsewhere.

B.

All units shall be fitted with pilot light and switch socket outlet 13 amperes.

C.

Finishes shall be as described elsewhere in this specification and as indicated on


drawings.

D.

All units shall be of flush type with an overlapping from cover.

E.

For surface installations a suitable adaptor box shall be provided.

TIME SWITCHES
A.

Time switches shall be of the self starting, self winding, synchronous motor
driven type.

B.

The rated voltages and rated current shall be as indicated on the drawings.

C.

Time switches shall, unless otherwise indicated or as directed by the Engineer,


incorporate the following:
1.

A 150 hours spring reserve to drive the mechanism during electricity


supply interruptions.

2.

An easily replaceable cartridge fuse-link, complying with codes mentioned


elsewhere, inserted in the motor circuit.

3.

An ON-OFF manual switch to enable th circuit to be controlled at will


without affecting normal dial operation.

SHAVER SOCKET OUTLETS


A.

Shaver socket outlets shall be of the type employing a dual wound transformer with
earth free outlet, dual voltage (115V and 220V) and safe to use in a bathroom all in
accordance with BS 3052.

B.

Shaver socket outlets shall be provided with an ON-OFF switch, indicator, voltage
selector switch and shuttered outlet suitable for British, American or Continental two
pin plug.

OCE - 30 January 2014

WIRING DEVICES
16143 - 5/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.13

2.14

King Saud University

C.

Terminals shall be suitable to receive and make satisfactory connection to two (2) 4
sq.mm solid conductors minimum.

D.

Shaver socket outlets shall be insulated plate finish similar style and color with other
outlets.

INDUSTRIAL SOCKET OUTLETS


A.

Industrial socket outlets shall be single or multiple types and ratings as indicated on
drawings.

B.

Socket outlets shall have an enclosure of IP44 or IP67 integrated with switch or
without it as shown on drawings.

C.

Socket outlets shall be single phase with two poles and earthing pin or three phase
with three poles, earthing pin with or without neutral pin as shown on drawings.

D.

Socket outlet shall be integrated with 30 mA Residual Current Device (RCD) as


earth leakage protection.

TELEPHONE OUTLET
A.

All outlet plates where specified shall be of similar style and finished to that
specified for the associated lighting switches and socket outlets and shall be suitable
for mounting surface or flush.

B.

Unless otherwise specified telephone outlet plates shall be RJ 11 complete with a


terminal box suitable for termination of two pair cables as minimum and a cable
clamp to secure the outgoing telephone hand set connecting cable.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01

INSPECTION
A.

3.02

The Contractor must examine areas and conditions under which wiring devices are
to be installed and correct any unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to proper and
timely completion of the work. He shall not proceed with the work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the
Engineer.

INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES


A.

Install wiring devices where indicated, in accordance with manufacturers written


instructions, applicable requirement of BS, IEE, and in accordance with recognized
industry practices to ensure that products serve their intended function.

B.

Program installation of devices for after wiring is completed.

C.

Install devices only in electrical boxes which are clean and free from excess building
materials, debris, etc.

D.

In walls or ceilings of concrete, tile or other non-combustible material, boxes and


fittings shall be so installed that the front edge of the box or fitting will not be set
back from the finished surface more than 5mm. In walls and ceilings constructed of
wood or other combustible material, outlet boxes and fittings shall be flush with the
finished surface or project therefrom.

OCE - 30 January 2014

WIRING DEVICES
16143 - 6/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

E.

Plaster surfaces that are broken or incomplete shall be repaired so that there will be
no gaps or open spaces at the edge of the box or fittings.

F.

In making an exposed surface extension from an existing outlet of concealed wiring,


a box or an extension ring shall be mounted over the original box and electrically and
mechanically secured to it.

G.

All siring devices shall be fixed independently of the system of wiring. All fixing
screws or bolts shall be of steel and where the appropriate apparatus has a protective
coating of zinc or is mounted outside, an electro-galvanized finish shall be used
complying with relevant standards and codes of practice.

END OF SECTION 16143

OCE - 30 January 2014

WIRING DEVICES
16143 - 7/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16190
SUPPORTING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01

SUMMARY
A.

Provide labor, materials, equipment and services, and perform operations required for
installation of supporting devices and related work as indicated on the drawings and
specified herein.

B.

Work Included: The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

1.02

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

1.03

Clevis hangers.
Riser clamps.
C-clamps.
I-beam clamps.
One-hole conduit straps.
Two-hole conduit straps.
Round steel rods.
Lead expansion anchors.
Toggle bolts.
Wall and floor seals.
Cable cleats .

Materials and equipment shall conform to the latest edition of reference specifications
specified herein and to applicable codes and requirements of local authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.

Code Compliance: Comply with applicable electrical code requirements as


applicable to construction and installation of electrical supporting devices.

2.

Standards: Provide components to IEC/BS standards and equivalent UL


standards.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Submit the following in accordance with the requirements specified under "Submittals"
in Section 16010.
1.

Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on supporting devices including


catalog cuts, specifications, and installation instructions, for each type of support,
anchor, sleeve and seal.

2.

Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of fabricated products, indicating


details of fabrication and materials.

3.

Samples: Provide samples of components for Project Manager approval .

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01

MANUFACTURERS
A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the


following or equal approved:

OCE - 30 January 2014

SUPPORTING DEVICES
16190 - 1/4

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

1.

Anchors
a.
b.
c.
d.

2.

Ideal standards .
Rawlplug Co. Inc.
Star Expansion .
BRITICINT . U.K.

Channel Support Systems


a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.

2.02

King Saud University

Allied Tube and Conduit Corp.


American Electric
B-Line Systems, Inc.
BICC - U.K.
O-Z/Gedney Div; General Signal Corp.
Power-Strut Div; Van Huffel Tube Corp.
Unistrut U.K.

MATERIALS
A.

Manufactured Supporting Devices


1.

Provide supporting devices which comply with manufacturer's standard


materials, design and construction in accordance with published product
information, as herein specified and as required for installation.

2.

Supports: Provide supporting devices of types, sizes and materials as required;


and having the following construction features:

OCE - 30 January 2014

a.

Clevis Hangers: For supporting 50mm rigid metal conduit; galvanized steel;
with 13mm diameter hole for round steel rod; approximately 25 kgs per 100
units.

b.

Riser Clamps: For supporting 125mm rigid metal conduit; black steel; with 2
bolts and nuts, and 4 inch ears; approximately 230 kgs per 100 units.

c.

Reducing Couplings: Steel rod reducing coupling, 13mm x 16mm ; black


steel; approximately 7 kgs per 100 units.

d.

C-Clamps: Galvanized Black malleable iron; 13mm rod size; approximately


32 kgs per 100 units.

e.

I-Beam Clamps: Galvanized Black steel, 30mm by 5mm stock; 9mm cross
bolt; flange width 50mm ; approximately 24 kgs per 100 units.

f.

One-Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting 20mm rigid metal conduit;


galvanized steel; approximately 3 kgs per 100 units. Standard saddle clamp
also acceptable to BS 131 standards.

g.

Two-Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting 20mm rigid metal conduit;


galvanized steel; 20mm strap width; and 59mm between cenof screw holes.

h.

Hexagon Nuts: For 13mm rod size; galvanized steel; approximately 1.8 kgs
per 100 units.

i.

Round Steel Rod: Galvanized Black steel; 15mm diameter; approximately 30


kgs per 30 meters.

SUPPORTING DEVICES
16190 - 2/4

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

j.

3.

4.

a.

Lead Expansion Anchors: 16mm ; approximately 17 kgs per 100 units.

b.

Toggle Bolts: Spring head; 5mm by 100mm ; approximately 2.2 kgs per 100
units.

Sleeves and Seals: Provide sleeves and seals, of types, sizes and materials as
required with the following construction features:
Wall and Floor Seals: Provide factory-assembled watertight wall and floor
seals, of types and sizes indicated; suitable for sealing around conduit, pipe
or tubing passing through concrete floors and walls. Construct seals with
steel sleeves, malleable iron body, neoprene sealing grommets and rings,
metal pressure rings, pressure clamps and cap screws.

U-Channel Strut Systems: Provide U-channel strut system for supporting


electrical equipment, 2.7mm hot dip galvanized steel, of types and sizes indicated;
construct with 13mm diameter holes, 20mm o.c. on top surface, with standard
green finish. Provide the following fittings which mate and match with
U-channel:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.

2.03

Offset Conduit Clamps: For supporting 50mm rigid metal conduit;


galvanized steel; approximately 90 kgs per 100 units.

Anchors: Provide anchors of types, sizes and materials indicated, with the
following construction features:

a.

5.

King Saud University

Fixture hangers.
Channel hangers.
End caps.
Beam clamps.
Wiring studs.
Thinwall conduit clamps.
Rigid conduit clamps.
Conduit hangers.
U-bolts.

FABRICATION
A.

Fabricated Supporting Devices


1.

2.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following:


a.

Sheet Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with
snap lock joint, welded spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate
sleeves from the following gauge metal: 75mm and smaller, 1mm; 100 to
150mm 1.6mm ; over 150mm 1.9mm .

b.

Steel Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe; remove burrs.

c.

Iron Pipe: Fabricate from cast-iron or ductile-iron pipe; remove burrs.

d.

Plastic Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe; remove burrs.

Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeves for piping which penetrates foundation walls below
grade, or exterior walls.

SUPPORTING DEVICES
16190 - 3/4

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01

EXAMINATION
A.

3.02

3.03

Examine conditions at the job site where work of this Section is to be performed to insure
proper arrangement and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of job site
conditions.

PREPARATION
A.

Examine the Contract Drawings and specifications in order to insure the completeness of
the work required under this Section.

B.

Verify measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the coordination
and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work of related trades, so as not to
delay job progress.

C.

Provide templates as required to related trade for location of items.

INSTALLATION
A.

Install hangers, anchors, sleeves and seals as indicated; in accordance with


manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure
supporting devices comply with requirements.

B.

Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceway and wiring work, as necessary
to interface installation of supporting devices with other work.

C.

Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support raceways and electrical
equipment properly from building structure. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of
horizontal conduits to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible.
Install supports with spacing indicated and in compliance with applicable electrical code
requirements.

D.

Torque sleeve seal nuts, complying with manufacturer's recommended values. Ensure
that sealing grommets expand to form watertight seal.

END OF SECTION 16190

OCE - 30 January 2014

SUPPORTING DEVICES
16190 - 4/4

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16195
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01

SECTION INCLUDES
A.

1.02

Examine all other sections of the Specification for requirements which affect work
of this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section.

SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK


A.

This specification is for extent of electrical identification as indicated by drawings


and schedules.

B.

Types of electrical identification in this section include the following:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

1.03

SUBMITTALS
A.

PART 2
2.01

Product catalogue data and samples for name plates, labels, charts, tags, signs and
markers prior to commencing works.
PRODUCT

NAME PLATES AND LABELS


A.

Name plates and labels shall be engraved three layer 2mm traffolyte, securely
screwed to the housing and have black letters on white background in Arabic and
English.

B.

The locations are for each electrical distribution board, control equipment
enclosures and communication cabinets.

C.

Lettering shall be block capitals standing:


1.
2.

D.

2.02

Name Plates and Labels.


Wire and Cable Markers.
Color Codes Markers.
Circuit Identification Charts.
Cable Identification Tags.
Equipment Warning Signs.

3mm high for identifying individual equipment and loads.


6mm high for identifying grouped equipment and loads.

Labels using embossed adhesive tape, with 5mm white letters on black
background for identification of individual wall switches, receptacles, and control
device stations shall be used.

WIRE MARKERS
A.

Wire and cable markers shall be split sleeve or tubing type.

B.

The locations shall be for each conductor at panel board gutters, pull boxes, outlet
and junction boxes and each load connection.

OCE 30 January 2014

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16195 - 1/3

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

C.
2.03

Power and lighting circuits on branch or feeder circuits and control circuits shall
require a number.

COLOR CODING
A.

Provide color bands 75mm wide for all trunking runs, applied at panel and
junction box locations and at 15m centers within an area.

B.

Provide color bands 25mm wide for conduits up to 50mm in diameter and one
half the conduit diameter for larger conduits, applied at panel and pull box
locations, within each room, and at 6m centers within an area.

C.

Color Banding:

2.04

2.05

King Saud University

127/220 Volt
223/380 Volt
Fire Alarm
Telephone
Intercommunication and Sound
Low Voltage Switching
Television
Grounding System

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

Grey
Brown
Red
Blue
Yellow
Black
Rust
Green

CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CHARTS


A.

Individual circuit identification charts shall be provided for all panel boards and
distribution boards.

B.

Charts shall be typed on A4 size sheets. They shall be enclosed in a clear plastic
envelope and shall be securely fixed to the inside cover of the unit. Additional
copies of the charts shall be included in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

CABLE IDENTIFICATION TAGS


A.

Cable identification tags shall be in accordance with Saudi Electricity Company


SEC Underground Design Standard SES-P-108.05.

B.

All cables which exit from manholes, vaults, hand-holes, and transformer or
switch enclosures shall be properly tagged or labeled. Tags shall be permanent,
non-corrodible and clearly readable. Tags should include the information listed
below for the various circuit categories:

Feeder Name
Voltage
Phase (Single Conductor Cables)

For buried cables use warning tapes as shown on drawings.


C.

Cable identification for wire and cable circuits shall be of an opaque nylon
material arranged to include a marker plate, non-releasing nylon ties, and cable
fastening tail. One side shall be roughened to hold black nylon permanent ink.
Identification shall be permanent and waterproof. The holding device shall be
designed to allow the fastening tail to pass around the cable through the holding
device, and prevent removal of the tail without cutting it loose from the marker.
Cable identification shall be inscribed in Arabic and English.

OCE 30 January 2014

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16195 - 2/3

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.06

2.07

EQUIPMENT DANGER SIGNS


A.

For external use, pressure sensitive danger signs shall be used. Dimensions shall
be 510mm by 710mm. The signs shall be heavy duty vinyl with a self adhesive
backing which can be applied to curved or irregular surfaces. Danger signs shall
be weather resistant and shall not discolor or deteriorate with edge.

B.

Danger signs shall be inscribed with the equipment voltage level along with an
internationally recognized danger sign.

C.

All signs shall be in English and Arabic.

LANGUAGE
A.

PART 3
3.01

The Arabic and English languages shall be used for all labeling and charts.
EXECUTION

PREPARATION
A.

3.02

Degrease and clean surfaces to receive name plates and labels.

INSCRIPTIONS
A.

All items of switch gear and control gear including all electrical components shall
be provided with labels giving the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

B.

Manufacturer Name.
Country of Origin.
Type Number or Code.
Rated Voltage or Frequency.
Rated Current if Applicable.
The Short Circuit Breaking Capacity and the Appropriate Time.
Name of the International Standard with which the Equipment Complies.

Circuit identification charts in panel boards and distribution boards shall give the
following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

3.03

King Saud University

Circuit Number.
Phase.
Load Name.
Connected Load.
Outgoing Terminal Numbers.
Size and Type of Protective Device.

INSTALLATION
A.

Install warning and descriptive labels as follows:


1.

Metallic surfaces using stainless steel or chromium plated bolts and/or


self-tapping screws.

2.

Concrete surfaces or masonry walls using raw plugs and brass wood
screws.

3.

Timber surfaces using minimum 6mm counter sunk brass screws.

4.

All insulated enclosures using an approved plastic welding adhesive.

5.

For all buried cables and conduits.


END OF SECTION 16195

OCE 30 January 2014

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
16195 - 3/3

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16310
SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01

SUMMARY
A.

Provide labor, materials, equipment and services, and perform operations required for
installation of secondary unit substations and related work as indicated on the
drawings and specified herein.

B.

Work Included: The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1.

Indoor secondary unit substation.

2.

Secondary unit substation components shall be coordinated and include, but not
be limited to the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.

1.02

Primary incoming section.


Transformer section.
Secondary bus transition section. As required.
Secondary low voltage switchgear section when specified.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

Materials and equipment shall conform to the latest edition of reference specifications
specified herein and to applicable codes and requirements of local authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.

Code Compliance: Comply with requirements of the applicable electrical code.

2.

Standards Compliance:
a) Comply with the latest applicable standards of IEC/BS .If the manufacturers
equipment deviates from these standards , the relevant standards shall be
indicated with outline differences .
b) Equipment and component are to comply with the following standards :
IEC 694
IEC 298
IEC 71
IEC 420
IEC 129
IEC 265
IEC 439

B.

Common clauses for HV switchgear and control gear standards .


AC. Metal enclosed switchgear and control gear .
Insulation coordination.
H.V s.c fuse - switch combination and fuse circuit breaker
combinations .
A.C disconnectors (Isolators) and earthing switches.
H.V switches.
LV switchgear & MCC s .

Testing and Inspection:


1. The manufacturer shall thoroughly test the assembled unit substation for proper
functioning and compliance with standards and specifications
2. Notify the Project Manager that the manufacturer indents to carry out factory tests .
_

OCE - 30 January 2014

SECONDARY UNIT SUB-STATIONS


16310 - 1/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

The manufacturer shall give the Project Manager written notice. All tests subject to
witness by the client or his representative.
3. The manufacturer shall submit full details of the proposed methods of testing
including connection diagram and time schedule for routine tests.
4. Factory test for the complete substation unit and individual components in
accordance with IEC standards . Submit certification to the Project Manager that this
testing has been completed and that function and compliance conforms to the
specifications .
1.03

SUBMITTALS
A.

Submit the following in accordance with submittal requirements specified in Section


16010.
1.

Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data on unit substations.


Application data to include, but not be limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.

2.

Compliance list :
a)

3.

Submit statement list on clause by clause basis of this specification


identifying compliance and deviations to the specification .

Type Tests Certificates : Submit type test certificates which include but not
limited to the following ; in accordance with IEC standards :
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

4.

Voltage.
Phase.
Frequency.
Short-circuit ratings.
Enclosures.
Sections.
Transformer data as specified in Section 16320.
Low voltage switchgear data as specified in Section 16426.

Impulse with stand voltage test .


Temperature rise test .
Short circuit with stand tests .
Enclosure degree of protection .
Noise level measurements .

Shop Drawings:
following:

Submit layout drawings including but not limited to the

a.

Outline drawings showing overall dimensions of the secondary unit


substation assembly, shipping sections, weights of each shipping section,
recommended clearances to the front, rear, sides and top. Submit
transformer and low voltage switchgear shop drawings as specified in
Sections 16320 and (16425) (16426).

b.

Certified dimensional drawings of the secondary unit substation showing


mounting or anchor bolts required, space available at top and bottom of
primary switches for entrance of medium voltage cables and conduit and at
top and bottom of low voltage switchgear for feeder conduit and cable.
_

OCE - 30 January 2014

SECONDARY UNIT SUB-STATIONS


16310 - 2/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

1.04

King Saud University

c.

A single line diagram showing primary switch(es), fuses, lightning


arresters, power transformers, main bus, grounding, circuit breakers
and/or disconnect switches, current and potential transformers, meters,
instruments, relays, control and selector switches, pilot lights, etc.

d.

Connection diagrams for secondary unit substation components.

5.

Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each secondary
unit substation; including "troubleshooting" maintenance guide. Include that
data, product data, and shop drawings in a maintenance manual.

6.

Instruction manuals with equipment data having sufficient detail for setting
relays, timers and breakers and time-current curves for breakers and fuses.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING


A.

Handle secondary unit substations carefully to prevent damage, breaking, and scoring.
Do not install damaged sections or components; replace with new.

B.

Store secondary unit substation equipment in a clean dry place. Protect from weather,
dirt, fumes, water, construction debris, and physical damage. Assume responsibility
and security for materials and equipment.

C.

Comply with manufacturer's rigging and moving instructions for unloading secondary
unit substations components, and transporting them to final location for installation.

D.

Coordinate and schedule delivery of equipment which permits ready building ingress
for large equipment components to their designated installation spaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01

MANUFACTURERS
A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide secondary unit


substations of one of the following. Secondary unit substations shall be the product,
manufacture and assembly of one manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

2.02

Schnider Electric
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Asea-Brown-Boveri
General Electric Co.
Westinghouse Electric Corp.

MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT


A.

Secondary Unit Substations and Components


1.

Provide secondary unit substations and ancillary components of sizes, ratings,


classes, types and characteristics indicated; which comply with manufacturer's
standard design, materials, components, and construction in accordance with
published product information, as required for installation and as specified
herein.

2.

Dimensions shall not exceed those shown on drawings.


_

OCE - 30 January 2014

SECONDARY UNIT SUB-STATIONS


16310 - 3/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

B.

King Saud University

3.

Secondary Unit Substations shall include a primary incoming section,


transformer section, secondary distribution section and transition sections.

4.

The entire assembly shall be totally enclosed of indoor metal clad construction.
Fabricate enclosures of minimum 2mm gauge steel formed for rigidity. Fixed
panels and framework shall be of welded construction, ground smooth. Housing
shall be thoroughly cleaned and degreased after fabrication, bonderized and
primed with zinc chromate. Finish shall be two coats of gray enamel, ANSI color
designation No. 61 for indoor units and ANSI color designation No. 24 for
outdoor units.

5.

The construction shall be of weatherproof construction and contain space heaters,


receptacles, lighting and lighting switches, operating at 120 volts as required.

6.

Provide a continuous copper bar ground bus minimum size 75mm by 7mm
running the entire length of the unit substation. Ground bus shall be accessible
when rear panels are opened and/or removed. Provide compression type cable
connectors in the primary incoming section and secondary distribution sections
as specified.

7.

Mimic Bus: A mimic bus, on the unit substation face shall be provided depicting
major elements and power flow. Mimic bus shall be fabricated of plastic
laminate as specified in Section 16195.

8.

Provide high voltage warning signs attached to the front and rear of each section
containing equipment rated above 600 volts. Provide warning signs at lightning
arrester cubicles reading: "WARNING. LIGHTNING ARRESTERS ARE ALIVE
UNLESS PRIMARY SWITCHES ARE OPEN."

Primary Incoming Section


1.

Unless other wise indicated or specified , the primary incoming section shall
consist of two adjacent housings, each containing in its upper compartment, a
three pole, two position (open-closed) load break interrupter switch. Three
current limiting fuses shall be located in a compartment below the switch located
adjacent to the transformer section. Three distribution type lightning arresters
shall be located in a compartment below the second switch, to protect the
transformer.
a.

For outdoor unit substation , the primary incoming section shall be of the
weatherproof enclosure type with sloping overhanging roof, front and rear
doors, with weatherproof covers for locks, space heaters, receptacles and
lighting, wired to an auxiliary power transformers located in the secondary
distribution section.

b.

Load side terminals of the switches shall be bussed together and to the line
side of the fuse holders and lightning arresters. Load side terminals of the
fuse holder shall be connected to the primary terminals of the transformer
using insulated cable, properly spaced and supported. Cable entry to the
transformer shall be through a non-metallic barrier to avoid induction
heating.

c.

Provide kirk key interlocking as follows:


_

OCE - 30 January 2014

SECONDARY UNIT SUB-STATIONS


16310 - 4/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.

King Saud University

1)

Access doors to the fuse and lightning arrester compartments cannot


be opened unless both switches are open.

2)

Only one primary switch can be closed at any time but both can be
open at the same time.

3)

The secondary main breaker must be opened before either switch can
be operated.

Each switch shall be of the front operated fused load break air interrupter type 15
KV class, two position (open-closed), three pole, stored energy operated, quick
make quick break, capable of closing and latching into a fault.
a.

Operating handle shall extend through the front of the switch enclosure
and shall be operable only with the door over the switch in the closed
position. Doors shall include observation windows to permit visual
inspection of the switchblades. Provide a mechanical position indicator of
the switch position. Provide a means of padlocking each switch in the
open position.

b.

Minimum switch ratings shall be as follows:


Continuous Rating
Interrupting Rating
Momentary Close and Latch Rating
BIL Rating

600 amperes
600 amperes
40,000 amperes, asymmetrical
95 KV

3.

Fuses shall be selected to protect the transformers and coordinated with the
secondary protective devices.

4.

A full height cable termination compartment shall be provided at the rear of the
switch, suitable for cable entry from the top or bottom and provided with
bolted-on rear covers. Adequate space shall be provided for cable training and
stress cones for the quantity, size and types of cables as shown on the drawings
or as specified. Line side terminals of the switch shall be extended into the cable
termination compartment and fitted with two hole barrel compression connectors
for the incoming cables.

5.

Provide internal barriers to isolate switches from the fuses, lightning arresters,
transformer and each other.

6.

Provide three spare medium voltage fuses of each type and size.

7.

Front panels over primary switches, fuses and lightning arrester cubicles shall be
of hinged construction, with provision for bolting in place.

8.

Nameplates: Provide engraved nameplates as specified in Section 16195 to


identify each primary incoming section.

9.

Provide compression type copper cable connectors on the ground bus located in
the primary incoming section, sized 35 - 120 sq. mm for each set of feeders shown
on the drawings or as specified.

10. Primary incoming sections shall meet IP 42 protection class in accordance to IEC
529 .
_
OCE - 30 January 2014

SECONDARY UNIT SUB-STATIONS


16310 - 5/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

11. For outdoor substation unit feeding residential areas substations EA , FA & GA.
The primary incoming section shall consist of 3 - way ring main unit. Incoming
feeders side load break , switches shall be key locked One close and one open
and the transformer unit shall be normally closed . The fuse shall be fitted in the
transformer feeder , compartment. The ring mail unit shall be of the SF6 housing ,
equivalent to Merlin Gerin Ringmaster type.
C.

D.

Transformer Section
1.

Transformer shall be of the dry cast resin type or oil filled type in accordance of
the drawings and schedules as specified in section 16320 .

2.

Ratings in KVA and voltage characteristics shall be as indicated on drawings or


as specified.

Secondary Distribution Sections


1. Secondary distribution switchgear shall be as specified in Section 16426.

E.

ACCESS: Lockable double swing doors are to give access independently to HV and LV
compartments. Access to transformer is to be through demountable bolted panels . It is
to be impossible to reach equipment or live parts from outside the housing. Doors shall
be equipped with the following features:1) Pneumatic stoppers .
2) Weather proof locks with pad locking facilities .
3) Micro switches for the compartments lighting fixtures .

F.

Lighting and convenience power outlets are to be provided within the compartments
via a fused circuit.

G.

Sand Traps: approved sand traps shall be provided to prevent ingress of harmful
deposits of sand and still maintaining full air circulation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01

EXAMINATION
A.

3.02

Examine conditions at the job site where work of this Section is to be performed to
insure proper arrangement and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of job
site conditions.

PREPARATION
A.

Examine the Contract Drawings and specifications in order to insure the completeness
of the work required under this Section.

B.

Verify measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the coordination
and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work of related trades, to avoid
delays.

C.

Provide templates as required to related trade for location of items.


_

OCE - 30 January 2014

SECONDARY UNIT SUB-STATIONS


16310 - 6/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

3.03

3.04

INSTALLATION
A.

Install unit substations as indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's


written instructions, and with recognized industry practices. Bolt the unit substation to
a steel channel frame set flush with the finished floor or housekeeping pad. Design and
placement of the frame shall be in accordance with the approved manufacturer's
drawings and instructions.

B.

Provide housekeeping pad under unit substation as specified in Section 16010.

C.

Provide the services of the manufacturer's qualified service at the job site for as many
days as required to provide guidance to the Contractor during installation, to inspect
for proper installation, perform debugging, check and make adjustments for proper
operation of the devices and equipment, set protection devices, test and calibrate
protective devices in the field with secondary current injection, and instruct the
Owner's designated personnel in the care and operation of the equipment.

D.

Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with
equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment
connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten
connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torque specified in UL Std 486A
and B.

E.

Grounding: Provide equipment grounding connections for unit substations as


indicated and as specified in Section 16450 "Grounding". Tighten connections to
comply with tightening torque specified in UL Std 486A to assure permanent and
effective grounds.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

3.05

King Saud University

Prior to energization of unit substations and circuitry, perform tests as specified in


Section 16950 "Electrical Tests." If the testing should indicate failure to meet the
requirements of the specifications, the manufacturer shall provide additions,
modifications or replacements necessary to provide the Owner with a unit which fully
conforms to the specifications. Repair work shall be scheduled at a time convenient to
the facility being served.

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING


A.

Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement. Touchup scratched or


marred surfaces to match original finishes.

END OF SECTION 16310

_
OCE - 30 January 2014

SECONDARY UNIT SUB-STATIONS


16310 - 7/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16320
MEDIUM VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01

1.02

SUMMARY
A.

Provide labor, materials, equipment and services, and perform operations required for
installation of medium voltage transformers and related work as indicated on the
drawings and specified herein.

B.

Work Included: The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1.

Dry Type Transformers: Secondary substation ventilated transformers.

2.

Liquid Filled Transformers:

Insulating oil transformers

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

Materials and equipment shall conform to the latest edition of reference specifications
specified herein and to applicable codes and requirements of local authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.

Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the applicable electrical


code.

2.

Standard :
a) Dry type transformer shall be in compliance with IEC 726 latest Revision .
b) Oil filled transformers shall be in compliance with IEC 76 or BS 17I .
c) The individual components associated with transformers shall be in
accordance with relevant IEC latest edition.
d) Safety regulations: In accordance to IEC and national electrical safety code
(ASME std. C2 ) .
e) If the manufacturer standards deviates from these standards, the differences
should be clearly outlined and copy of the standards to be submitted.
f) In case of difference between applicable standards the most stringent should
be applied .

1.03

SUBMITTALS
A.

Submit the following in accordance with the requirements specified under "Submittals"
in Section 16010.
1.

Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data including rated


kVA, frequency, primary and secondary voltages, percent taps, polarity,
impedance and certification of transformer performance efficiency at indicated
loads, percentage regulation at 100% and 80 percent power factor, no-load and
full-load losses in watts, percent impedance at 75 0C, hot-spot and average
temperature rise above 50 0C ambient temperature, sound level in decibels,
standard published data and certified test reports.
_

OCE - 30 January 2014

MEDIUM VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS


16320 - 1/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

1.04

King Saud University

2.

Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's drawings indicating dimensions and


weight loading for transformer installations, showing layouts, mounting and
supports, spatial relationship to associated equipment, include transformer
connections to electrical equipment. Submit detailed dimensional drawings of the
H.V and L.V cable connection boxes if any complete with full details of H.V and
L.V terminal connections and accessories.

3.

Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring protection and control diagrams for power
distribution transformers. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that
are manufacturer-installed and portions to be field-installed.

4.

Submit catalogue information for each ancillary item such as buchholz relay,
thermometers etc. .

5.

Installation, operating and maintenance data.

UNUSUAL OPERATING CONDITIONS


A.

Harmonics:
1. For transformers feeding induction motors shall have the specified rating while
supplying a load with a total harmonic distortion (THD) of 5% minimum.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01

MANUFACTURERS
A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of


the following or equal approved.
1.

Unit Substation Transformers


a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.

2.

Pad Mounted Transformer


a.
b.
c.
d.

3.

Saudi Transformer Company (STC)


Asea -Brown- Boveri
General Electric Co.
Siemens Energy and Automation, Inc.
Square D Co.
Westinghouse Electric Corp.
Pauwels Beljum .

Asea-Brown-Boveri
General Electric Co.
Pauwels .
Brush -UK

Liquid Filled Outdoor Transformer


a.
b.
c.
d.

Asea Brown Boveri


Pauwels .
Brush .
Westinghouse (3)
_

OCE - 30 January 2014

MEDIUM VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS


16320 - 2/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.02

King Saud University

MATERIALS
A.

Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard materials and


components as indicated by published product information, designed and constructed
as recommended by manufacturer and as required for installation.

B.

Secondary Substation Ventilated Dry Type Transformers (Above 600 Volts Primary)
1.

Transformer shall be of the ventilated dry type, 3 phase, 60 HZ, two winding
type with delta primary and wye secondary windings, mounted in a ventilated
metal enclosure for indoor installation.

2.

Ratings in kVA and voltage characteristics shall be as indicated on drawings or as


specified.

3.

Transformers are designed to ensure that the permitted temperature rise


according to IEC 726 is noted exceeded. The average temperature rise must not
exceed at both high and low voltage windings 800 above ambient temperature of
50 0C when operating at full load. Transformers shall have class H insulation
system .

4.

The HV winding shall be designed for power frequency withstand voltage of 33


kV and impulse withstand voltage, full ware (1.2 / 5 micro second) of 95 kV as
per IEC 726 .

5.

Secondary winding shall be designed for a short duration power frequency test
voltage 2-5 kV for rated voltage 380/220V. Secondary winding shall be WYE
connected with neutral solidly grounded through removable link or low
resistance grounded as indicated on the drawings. Links and connectors shall
have a continuous current rating at least equal to the fan cooled rating of the
transformer. In the case of transformers with 380Y/220 volt windings, the
transformer neutral terminal shall also be brought out into the secondary bus
transition of connection to the neutral bus of the secondary switchgear.

6.

Transformer impedance shall not be more than 6% with tolerances as per IEC .

7.

Transformers shall be provided with full capacity 2-% taps in the primary
winding, two above and two below normal.

8.

Where indicated transformers shall be provided with fans for forced air cooling
to increase the self-cooled kVA rating by 33-1/3%. Power for operating fans shall
be taken from a control power transformer to be located in the secondary bus
transition or secondary distribution section.

9.

A front accessible winding temperature control panel shall be provided equipped


with necessary controls for operation of the fans when the self-cooling kVA is
exceeded and shall include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Winding temperature indicator.


Fan position selector switch, hand-off-auto.
Fuses.
Green light (auxiliary power "on").
Amber light (fan operation).
Red light (excessive temperature).

Auxiliary normally open spare contacts shall be provided to transmit remote


alarm signals for fans running and high temperature. Contacts shall be wired to
accessible terminals in the secondary bus transition or secondary distribution
section.
_
OCE - 30 January 2014

MEDIUM VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS


16320 - 3/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

10. Transformer sound levels shall not exceed IEC standard levels for either
self-cooled or fan cooled operation.
11. The core shall be visibly grounded to the frame by means of a flexible grounding
strap.
12. Rear and front enclosure panels shall be removable, fastened down with bolts
and captive nuts. Closure panels shall include louvered or screened openings for
ventilation. Location of such openings shall be limited to front and rear panels
only. There shall be no openings in top panels. Mesh of screened openings or
louvers shall be fine enough to prevent accidental contact with interior parts.
Housing shall be thoroughly cleaned and degreased after fabrication, bonderized
and primed with zinc chromate. Finish shall be two coats of light gray enamel,
ANSI color designation No. 61 to match the incoming and outgoing sections of
the unit substations.
13. Provide diagrammatic stainless steel nameplate mounted on the front enclosure
panel.
14. Provide for lifting and jacking the core and coil assembly.
15. Provide standard elastomer pad isolators to isolate the core and coil structure
from the enclosure and base structure.
16. Painting:
The painting of the metal parts which have not received a protective treatment
shall comply with the following :a)

The paints used , both inside and out side , will be anti - fire and will have a
low calorific value.

b)

Cycle of Painting: Degreasing, pickling, phosphating drying in furnace,


electrostatic deposit of episodic dust, polymerization and backing in furnace
1800 plane roof indoor steel plate shall be treated with anti-condensation
paint too.
Color of external paint gray RAL 7032 .

17. Tests
a.

The following tests shall be given transformers at the factory:


1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)

b.

Resistance measurement of windings.


Ratio tests on the rated voltage connection and on tap connections.
Polarity and phase-relation tests on the rated voltage connection.
No-load loss at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection.
Exciting current at rated voltage on the rated voltage connection.
Impedance and load loss on rated connection.
Applied potential tests.
Induced potential tests.

Certified test reports on electrically duplicate transformers shall be


submitted with approval drawings documenting that the following tests
have been performed:
1)

Temperature tests to verify design criteria.


_

OCE - 30 January 2014

MEDIUM VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS


16320 - 4/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

C.

King Saud University

2)

Impulse tests on terminals including reduced full-wave, chopped


wave and full wave tests.

3)

Short circuit capability tests.

4)

Dielectric tests including applied potential and induced potential.

5)

Sound level tests.

6)

Tests of mechanical components.

Oil Filled Transformer Conservator Type


1.

Where specified and shown on the drawings oil filled transformer (indoor /
outdoors) 3-phase , tow winding conservator type , shall be provided .

2.

Transformer enclosure shall be rated 100% continuous operation under site


ambient conditions, 50 degrees ambient temperature .

3.

Standards: The transformer shall be in accordance with the latest edition of IEC
76 or equal approved international standards .

4.

The transformer enclosure shall be welded joint steel plate construction


complete with external cooling tins and the following fittings :

5.

a)

Conservator tank complete with oil level gauge , supply line plug , drain
plug , mounted steel brackets .

b)

Buchholz relay fitted with alarm & trip switches .

c)

Valves to isolate and by pass Buchholz relay .

d)

Oil sealed silica-gel breather .

e)

Two dial thermometer, fitted with maximum reading , one set of a alarm
contacts and one set of trip contacts . One dial thermometer shall read top
oil temperature and the other shall read winding hot . Spot temperature .

f)

Oil drain valve and valve connections for a filter heater unit .

g)

Lifting eyes to lift the complete transformer and conservator tank .

h)

Stainless steel rating and connection diagram plates .

i)

Stainless steel identification name plate .

j)

One hand operated, external, five position of circuit tapping switch in the
primary winding 2- percent taps.

k)

HV & LV terminal air insulated boxes, IP55 sized to accommodate cables


number and sizes according to drawing and schedules. Top or bottom
entry as indicated.

l)

Two frame earthing terminals drilled and tapped for M12 set screws .

m)

The under carriage shall be of steel plate rigidly constructed and fitted
with flangless rollers.

The main tank, complete with cooling radiators shall be hot - dipped galvanized
and finished in accordance with manufacturer painting procedure to withstand
site conditions.
_

OCE - 30 January 2014

MEDIUM VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS


16320 - 5/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

6.

Oil - the insulating oil shall be mineral oil class 1 . to BS 148 or IEC 296 .

7.

Noise level of transformer under any mode of operation shall not exceed 70 d
BA .

8.

Magnetic ore shall be manufactured from cold rolled gain oriented steel , low
loss .

9.

Winding to be copper, class B insulated unless otherwise approved, operating


normally at 50/65 rise above 50 C degree ambient. The primary and secondary
winding ends shall be brought out to clearly identified terminals. All internal
winding connections shall be brazed, or solder connections shall not be used,
windings shall be uniformly insulated .

10.

Neutral point to be brought out fully rated .

11.

Insulation level for HV & LV winding in accordance with IEC 76 .

12.

Impedance voltage shall be according to IEC standards unless others indicated


or specified .

13.

Cooling, ON/AN unless otherwise indicated, with provision for installing


cooling fans to increase transformer capacity by 25%. Adjustable thermostats in
the main tank top oil for controlling the fans future. The setting range shall be
70-120 deg.

14.

Phase relationship (Vector group ) Dyn 11 .

15.

Each transformer shall be designed for overloading in accordance with IEC 354 .

16.

Tests :
a)

Routine tests according to IEC 76 , and as follows :


1. Measurement of winding resistance .
2. Ratio, polarity and phase relationships .
3. Impedance voltage .
4. Load losses .
5. No - load losses .
6. Induced over voltage withstand .
7. Separate source voltage with land .
8. Insulation resistance .
9. Pressure test oil samples .
10. Moisture content of oil samples .

17.

Certificates for type test shall be provided in accordance with IEC standards .

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01

EXAMINATION
A.

Examine conditions at the job site where work of this Section is to be performed to
insure proper arrangement and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of job
site conditions.
_

OCE - 30 January 2014

MEDIUM VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS


16320 - 6/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

3.02

3.03

3.04

King Saud University

PREPARATION
A.

Examine the Contract Drawings and specifications in order to insure the completeness
of the work required under this Section.

B.

Verify measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the coordination
and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work of related trades so as not to
delay job progress.

C.

Provide templates as required to related trade for location of items.

INSTALLATION
A.

Install transformers where indicated, complying with the manufacturer's written


instructions, applicable requirements of the applicable electrical code, and standards,
and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill
requirements.

B.

Install units on vibration mounts; comply with manufacturer's indicated installation


method.

C.

Connect transformer units to electrical wiring system; comply with requirements of


other Division 16 sections.

D.

Contractor shall set transformer taps to provide the voltage specified on the drawings.
Contractor shall recheck voltage after building is occupied and change taps where
required to provide the specified voltage as shown on the drawings.

E.

Tighten electrical connections and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance
with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment
connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten
connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torque specified in UL Std 486A
and B.

F.

Grounding: Provide grounding connections for power/ distribution transformers as


specified in Section 16450. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torque
specified in UL Std 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Prior to energizing, test transformers as specified in Section 16950 to assure


requirements are fulfilled.
END OF SECTION 16320

_
OCE - 30 January 2014

MEDIUM VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS


16320 - 7/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16345
MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01

SUMMARY
A.

Provide labor, materials, equipment and services, and perform operations required for
installation of medium voltage switchgear and related work as indicated on the
drawings and specified herein.

B.

Work Included: The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1.

Indoor medium voltage switchgear.

2.

Switchgear components shall be coordinated and include, but not be limited to,
the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

1.02

Switchgear sections and circuit breakers.


Instrumentation.
Relaying.
Accessories
Battery and battery chargers.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

Materials and equipment shall conform to the latest edition of reference specifications
specified herein and to applicable codes and requirements of local authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.

Codes and Standards


a.

Code Compliance: Comply with requirements of the applicable electrical


code.

b.

Comply with applicable IEC which shall include but limited to the
following :
IEC 694 Common clauses for HV switchgear and control gear standards.
IEC 298 AC metal enclosed switchgear and control gear.
IEC 56 HV ac circuit breakers.
IEC 71 Insulation coordination .
IEC
Relevant standards for other switchgear equipment.

B.

Factory Testing and Inspection:


1.

The manufacturer shall thoroughly test the assembled switchgear for


proper functioning and compliance with standards and specifications .

2.

Notify the Project Manager that the manufacturer intends to carry out
factory tests. The manufacturer shall give the Project Manager four weeks
written notice . All tests subject to witness by the client or his
representative .
____

OCE - 18 April 2005

MEDIUM VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER SWITCHGEAR


16345-1

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

3.

The manufacturer shall submit full details of the proposed methods of


testing including connection diagram and time schedule for routine tests .

4.

The manufacturer shall submit certifications to the Project Manager that the
switchgear testing has been completed and that it complies with the
function specified.

5.

Factory tests shall be carried out in accordance with IEC 298 and IEC 56 .
The tests shall include but not limited to the following routine tests:
a) Power - frequency voltage dry test .
b) Voltage tests on auxiliary circuits .
c) Mechanical operation tests .
d) Verification of operation of all auxiliary devices , protective relays , etc.
. Primary current injection tests shall be used .
e) Verification of wiring .
f) Measurement of the resistance of the main circuit .

1.03

SUBMITTALS
A.

Submit the following in accordance with submittal requirements specified in Section


16010.
1.

Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data on medium voltage


switchgear. Application data to include, but not be limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.

2.

Voltage.
Phase.
Frequency.
Horizontal bus capacity.
Vertical bus capacity.
Short-circuit ratings.
Main and branch circuit ratings and types.
Relaying.
Metering.
Types of wiring.
Enclosures.
Sections.

Shop Drawings:
following:

Submit layout drawings including, but not limited to, the

a.

Outline and arrangement drawings showing overall dimensions of the


switchgear assembly, front views, floor plan, side views, shipping sections,
weights of each shipping section, recommended clearances to the front,
rear, sides and top, and shipping weights of each draw-out air circuit
breaker.

b.

Certified dimensional drawings of the switchgear showing mounting or


anchor bolts required, space available at top and bottom of the switchgear
for feeder conduit and cable.
____

OCE - 18 April 2005

MEDIUM VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER SWITCHGEAR


16345-2

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

c.

A single line diagram showing main bus, circuit breakers, current and
potential transformers, meters, instruments, relays, control and selector
switches, pilot lights, etc.

d.

Assembly details of draw-out potential and control power transformers


and fuses.

e.

Connection and elementary diagrams for switchgear components.


Differentiate between portions of wiring that are manufacturer installed
and portions that are field installed.

f.

Time-current coordination curves starting with the protective device


nearest the source and continuing through the system to the protective
devices immediately downstream of the main distribution equipment.

g.

Battery and battery


characteristics.

h.

Terminal blocks details for secondary wiring .

charger

physical

dimensions

and

electrical

3.

Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts list for each
switchgear including "troubleshooting" maintenance guide. Include that data,
product data, and shop drawings in a maintenance manual.

4.

Instruction manuals with equipment data having sufficient detail for setting
relays, timers, and breakers and time-current curves for relays and fuses.

5.

Bill of material.

6.

Type tests certificates : Switchgears and components shall be type tested in


accordance with IEC 298 standards. A record and report of the following type
tests shall be submitted for the selected manufacturer.
a) Rated short circuit making capacity .
b) Rated short circuit breaking capacity .
c) Rated short - time withstand current .
d) Temperature rise test .
e) Impulse withstand voltage test. In addition , type test certificates shall be
presented verifying satisfactory completion of the type tests outlined in
IEC 298 and IEC 56 .

1.04

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING


A.

Handle switchgear equipment carefully to prevent damage, breaking, and scoring. Do


not install damaged sections or components; replace with new.

B.

Store switchgear equipment in a clean, dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes,
water, construction debris, and physical damage. Assume responsibility and security
for materials and equipment.

C.

Comply with manufacturer's rigging and moving instructions for unloading switchgear
components and transporting them to final location for installation.
____

OCE - 18 April 2005

MEDIUM VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER SWITCHGEAR


16345-3

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

D.

Coordinate and schedule delivery of equipment which permits, ready building ingress
for large equipment components to their designated installation spaces.

E.

Each packing crate and carton shall be visibly marked to identify contents as to types,
units and related equipment assemblies.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01

MANUFACTURERS
A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide switchgear of one of


the following. Switchgear shall be the product, manufacture and assembly of one
manufacturers or equal approved.
1.
2.
3.
4.

2.02

Asea Brown Boveri


Siemens Energy & Automation .
Square D Company
Merlin Gerin / France .

MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT


A.

Medium Voltage Switchgear and Components


1.

General
a.

Provide medium voltage metal clad switchgear of the horizontal draw-out


vacuum or SF6 circuit breaker type for incoming and outgoing for 13.8 KV
switchgear, and ancillary components of sizes, ratings, classes, types, and
characteristics indicated; which comply with manufacturer's standard
design, materials, components, and construction in accordance with
published product information, as required for installation and as specified
herein.

b.

The switchgear will operate on a , 13.8 KV, 3 phase, 3 wire grounded , 60


HZ system.
VOLTAGE RATINGS
KV
5
15

INSULATION
LEVELS
KV peak
m1.2 /50 micro .sec

INTERRUPTING
RATING
(KA) 1min

60

25

95

25

c.

The switchgear and circuit breakers, either individually or as a unit, shall


be rated 5.

d.

The arrangement shall provide for one or two circuit breakers as per
vertical section.

e.

Dimensions shall not exceed those shown on drawings. Equipment shall


be sectionalized as required for shipment and entry into the building.
____

OCE - 18 April 2005

MEDIUM VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER SWITCHGEAR


16345-4

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.

King Saud University

f.

Provide pulling eyes, jacking facilities and lifting lugs on each shipping
section to facilitate setting, lifting and skidding into place.

g.

Mimic Bus: A mimic bus, on the switchgear face shall be provided


depicting major elements and power flow. Mimic bus shall be fabricated of
plastic laminate as specified in Section 16195.

h.

Provide two normally open and two normally closed auxiliary contacts for
remote signaling of each breaker position, wired to accessible terminal
blocks.

i.

Provide engraved nameplates as specified in Section 16195 to identify each


circuit breaker and device.

j.

Provide high voltage warning signs attached to the front and rear of each
section. Provide warning sign at lightning arrester cubicles reading:
"WARNING.
LIGHTNING ARRESTERS ARE ALIVE UNLESS
INCOMING LINES ARE DEENERGIZED."

Enclosure
a.

The entire assembly shall be totally metal clad indoor switchgear enclosure
, cubical housings and doors shall be fabricated from sheet steel section of
2mm minimum thick , formed and framed for rigidity and to provide a self
- supporting floor mounted structure . Fixed panels and framework shall
be preferably bolted construction. The enclosure shall be so constructed as
to permit future expansion of the switchgear. Steel work forming part of
the enclosure shall be grounded.

b.

Front door shall be mounted on each breaker section. Each door shall be
provided with a full-length hinge, door stop, and two knurled-knob closing
screws .Each vertical cubical shall comprise the following :
a) Circuit breaker compartment .
b) Cable connection compartment .
c) Busbar compartment .
d) Low voltage compartment for mounting protection relays and
instruments .

c.

Breakers shall be removable from the structure by means of a portable


lifting device. As a breaker is removed, grounded metal safety shutters
shall isolate the primary contacts from the rest of the compartment.

d.

Primary compartments of circuit shall be isolated by grounded metal


barriers which have no intentional openings. (The primary compartments
are the breaker compartment, main bus compartment, cable termination
compartment, and auxiliary compartment.) In addition, each breaker and
roll-out tray shall be furnished with a 1/8 inch thick front plate that isolates
the control from the primary compartment. Secondary-control circuit
wires shall be armored or enclosed in ground metal troughs where they
pass through primary compartments.
____

OCE - 18 April 2005

MEDIUM VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER SWITCHGEAR


16345-5

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

e.

Cable termination compartments shall be located at the rear of the


equipment, and shall be accessible through rear bolted covers. Rear covers
shall be formed with two pieces for ease of handling. Compartments shall
have adequate space for cables and stress cones as required. Provide nontracking cable support bracing for each vertical section. Cable entry shall
be from top or bottom as required.
Barriers and a cable pass-through box shall be furnished to separate the
two termination compartments in each vertical section.

f.

Auxiliary compartments shall be provided to house devices such as fuses,


instrument and control power transformers, auxiliary devices, bus
transitions, etc.

g.

Housing shall be thoroughly cleaned and degreased after fabrication, the


outside panels are protected by galvanization and with an epoxy polyester
coating standards .Colour RAL 1011 or RAL 7030 , and have been put
through the surface tests . Laid down in standards IEC 68-2-11.
The internal partitions are protected against corrosion by galvanization ,
with chrome passivation .

h.
3.

4.

Enclosure degree of protection shall IP 42 for indoor units .

Surge Arresters
a.

Station type surge arresters shall be mounted and pre-connected to main


incoming busses at the rear of the enclosures. The arrester ground
terminals shall be connected directly to the switchgear ground bus with a
minimum size 120 sq.m ground conductor.

b.

The station type surge arresters shall be of the metal oxide type gab-less .

c.

The surge protection equipment shall have electrical ratings as required for
the system voltage application.

Bus Bar
a.

Bus bar shall be 3-phase, (3-wire) fabricated of copper, silver plated joints
and connection points. Joints shall be secured with a minimum of two
bolts per joint. Bolted connections shall be provided with Belleville
washers.

b.

Main bus bar shall have a continuous full capacity of 2000 amperes for the
13.8 KV switchgear. The bus bar shall be provided throughout the entire
length of the switchgear. Vertical bus bar shall be equal in size to the sum
of the frame sizes in the vertical section including parts spares and spaces
with a maximum size equal to that of the main bus. Bus extensions to
feeder breakers and from the load side of the breakers to the rear cable
compartment shall be equal to the frame size of the breaker. The
continuous current ratings of the busses shall be determined by
temperature as limited by IEC standards.

c.

Bus bars shall be supported on track-resistant flame retardant , non


hygrosopic supports , which can withstand the stresses produced by the
maximum peak fault current according to IEC 298 . Bus bars shall be
braced and supported to safely withstand short circuit stresses equal to the
full fault current rating specified and indicated on the drawings .
____

OCE - 18 April 2005

MEDIUM VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER SWITCHGEAR


16345-6

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

5.

King Saud University

d.

Provide an A-B-C type of bus arrangement, left to right, top to bottom,


front to back, throughout as viewed from the front of the switchgear.

e.

The main bus shall be completely enclosed by grounded, metal barriers


and shall be accessible from the front through removable panels.

f.

A copper ground bus shall be sized in accordance with IEC 298 and
6x50mm minimum and shall be continuous and extend throughout the
lineup with connections to each breaker grounding contact and each cable
compartment ground terminal. Joints shall be made with at least two bolts
per joint. Station ground-connection points shall be located in each end
section. Ground bus shall be accessible when rear panels are removed.

g.

Provide two-hole long barrel compression cable connectors for cables as


indicated per phase, (neutral) and ground. In addition, provide two-hole
long barrel mechanical clamp type cable connectors, adjustable between
120 sq. .mm to 240 sq. .mm at each end .

h.

110 Volt DC Control Power Bus


1)

A two wire, insulated, direct current, 110 volt control power bus
shall be provided, minimum size 16 sq. .mm, extending through each
compartment, and tapped therein for each vacuum /or SF6 circuit
breaker. Supply will be from a DC source.

2)

An easily accessible air circuit breaker, having a minimum


interrupting rating of 10,000 amperes with thermal magnetic trip,
shall be provided in each breaker unit for disconnecting the direct
current operating bus feed to that unit. Control circuit fuses for each
breaker with the close and trip circuits individually protected shall
be provided as required.

3)

Barrier type terminal blocks rated 30 amperes, with washer head


screw terminals, shall be used for control wire termination and shall
be located to permit either top or bottom entrance of control cable.
Terminal blocks shall be furnished with marking strips and plastic
covers.

4)

Terminal blocks suitable for entrance of the incoming DC feed shall


be furnished for the 110 volt DC bus in one section of the assembly
and shall be arranged for cable entrance from top and bottom.

Circuit Breaker Compartments


a.

The circuit breaker compartments shall be furnished with a mechanism


which will move the breaker between the operating and disconnect
positions. The mechanism shall be designed so that the breaker will be
self-aligning and will be held rigidly in the operating position without the
necessity of locking bars or bolts. In the disconnect position, the breaker
shall be easily removable from the compartment.

b.

Interlocks shall prevent moving a breaker or a grounding and test device to


or from the operating position unless its contacts are in the open position.
As a further safety precaution, the operating springs shall be discharged
automatically when the breaker is rolled fully into the compartment or is
____

OCE - 18 April 2005

MEDIUM VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER SWITCHGEAR


16345-7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

moved into the disconnect position. Means shall be provided for


padlocking the breaker in either the connected (operating) position or the
disconnected position. When locked in the disconnected position, the
breaker shall be removable from the compartment. Padlocking shall not
interfere with operation of the breaker or its mechanism.

6.

c.

Interlocks shall oppose closing the breaker unless primary disconnects are
fully engaged or the breaker is in the Test/Disconnect position.

d.

A rating interference plate shall be provided to allow only a breaker of the


correct type and rating to be inserted into any specific breaker
compartment.

e.

Grounded-metal safety shutters shall be actuated to cover the stationary


primary disconnects when the breaker is moved from the connected
position.

f.

Where space or space for future breaker is indicated, compartments shall


be equipped with current carrying parts and mechanisms ready to receive
the future draw-out circuit breaker element. Provide instrumentation and
relaying for the application indicated.

g.

Each breaker shall have a mechanical open/close


charge/discharge indicator and an operations counter.

h.

Tie circuit breaker cubicles shall be equipped with a mechanical interlock


or stop blocks to prevent the insertion of any ground or test device.

i.

Provide a mechanical interlock (key lock) between circuit breakers where


indicated and shown on the drawings .

j.

Cable earthing facilities shall be provided for incoming and outgoing


feeders . Earthing shall be via integral fault make (25 KA) earthing switch
with independent manual operation , toggle spring mechanism for quick
acting operation . A mechanical interlock shall be provided between the
circuit breaker and earthing switch to prevent inadvertent earthing of live
cables.

indicator,

Circuit Breakers
a.

The circuit breakers shall be of the horizontal draw-out type capable of


being withdrawn on rails contained in the switchgear housing. The
breakers shall be operated by a motor charged spring stored energy
mechanism. The stored energy mechanism shall be charged normally by a
universal electric motor and in an emergency by a manual handle. The
primary disconnecting contacts shall be silver plated copper.

b.

Each circuit breaker shall contain three, one per phase ,ceramic enclosed
vacuum or sealed for life cast resin enclosure for SF6 interrupters mounted
in self - contained , self aligning glass polyester housing which can be
removed as a complete unit . Circuit breaker shall comply with IEC 56 .

c.

The secondary contacts shall be silver-plated and shall be automatically


engaged in the breaker operating position. They shall be manually
engaged in the breaker test position.
____

OCE - 18 April 2005

MEDIUM VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER SWITCHGEAR


16345-8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

d.

Interlocks shall be provided to prevent closing of a breaker between


operating and test positions, to trip breakers upon insertion or removal
from housing and to discharge stored energy mechanisms upon insertion
or removal from the housing. The breaker shall be secured positively in
the housing between and including the operating and test positions.

e.

The breakers shall be electrically operated by a DC motor charged spring


stored energy mechanism. Control shall be 110V DC close and 110V DC
trip. The operating ranges for successful operation shall be 100 to 140 volts
for closing and 70 to 140 volts for tripping. Breakers shall be designed so
they may be tripped manually in an emergency.

f.

Breakers shall be rated as follows:

Interrupting Rating
Nominal Voltage Class
Rated Continuous Current RMS
Making Capacity (IEC peak)
Short time with Start current (3
sec )
Operating time (ms) opening
Closing

13.8 KV Switchgear
Main
Outgoing
25 KV
25 KV
15/17.5 KV
15/17.5 KV
1250
1250
63
25 KA

63
25 KA

45.65
60.80

45.65
60.80

g.

Circuit breakers of equal rating shall be interchangeable.

h.

Each circuit breaker shall be equipped with the followings :


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

110 v dc trip coil.


110 v dc opening release coil.
110 v dc closing coil.
Mechanical ON and OFF push - button.
Mechanical ON and OFF indicators.

6.

TRIP and TRIP SUPPLY FUNCTIONAL" lights and trip supply


supervision relay.

7.

SF6 low pressure alarm (SF6 circuit breakers).

8.

For SF6 C.B An interlock to prevent the circuit from opening or


closing if SF6 gas pressure is below a safe level.

9.

Anti - pumping Device .

10.

2 No and 2 NC spare a normally open switches wired to terminal .

11.

A secondary disconnecting device shall be provided for connections


between circuit breaker unit and the housing for the control circuits ,
and shall consist of a multiple plug and socket contact unit .The
secondary shall automatically engage when the circuit breaker is
placed in the service position , and can be re-engaged manually
when the unit is in the test position without using a test jumper.
____

OCE - 18 April 2005

MEDIUM VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER SWITCHGEAR


16345-9

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

i.

7.

8.

King Saud University

12.

Closing / opening spring charged mechanical indicator .

13.

Operation counter .

For (SF6) circuit breakers , the SF6 gas used in the circuit breakers shall
comply with IEC 376. The SF6 gas shall be tested in accordance with IEC
480 .

Fuse Switches
a.

For 13.8 KV switchgear outgoing feeders shall be fuse switch type,


motorized mechanism, 110 Volt DC operated.

b.

Ratings and sizes as shown on drawings.

c.

Provide integral earth switch with mechanical interlocks for safety


operations.

d.

Fuses shall be of HRC type with short circuit capacities suitable for the
point of utilization.

e.

Fuses shall have time / current characteristics for motor service, autotransformer starter type.

f.

Fuse shall be of current limiting type.

g.

Provide plastic indicator on top of fuse which pops up to give visual blown
fuse indication at fault occurrence.

Instrumentation, Switches, Pilot Indications


a.

Provide instrumentation, switches and pilot indications as shown on the


drawings and specified herein.

b.

Instrument Transformers
1)

Current transformers shall be mounted on the bus and/or load side


of the circuit breakers as required, protected by easily removable
grounded metal barriers. Current transformers shall be dry type,
and shall comply with IEC 185/BS 3938 . The class accuracy and
burden of current transformers shall be suitable for the loads and
duties of the equipment which they are required to supply and as
shown on the drawings and schedules. The current transformers
shall have sufficient thermal and mechanical ratings to withstand
currents corresponding to the design short circuit level of the
associated switchgear .Magnetization and core loss curves shall be
provided for each type rating of current transformer .

2)

Instrument Potential Transformers: Transformers shall be dry type,


cast epoxy resin or approved equal ,and shall be furnished with
current limiting primary fuses. The primary fuses shall be
independently removable from the transformer cubicle . Current
limiting MCB protection shall be provided on the secondary side.
The potential transformer shall be disconnected, grounded and
isolated from high voltage when the access door is open. Potential
____

OCE - 18 April 2005

MEDIUM VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER SWITCHGEAR


16345-10

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

transformers shall conform to BS 3941/IEC 186 .


c.

Instrumentation
1)

Incoming lines shall have panel mounted , flush front microprocessor


based monitoring and protective device that provides complete
electrical metering and system voltage protection in one compact ,
standard package and shall provide the followings:a

Metering Direct Reading


1. AC Ampere :

phase A , B, &C , 1% Accuracy .

2. AC voltage :

1% Accuracy .

phase A-B :
phase B-C :
phase C-A :

phase A-Neutral .
phase B-Neutral .
phase C-Neutral .

3. Watts :

2% Accuracy .

4. Vars :

2% Accuracy .

5. Power factor :

4% Accuracy .

6. Frequency

0.5% Accuracy .

7. Watt demand :

2% Accuracy .

8. Watt hours:

2% Accuracy .

b. Field settable protection functions with trip and /or Alarm


outputs .
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Phase loss (voltage).


Phase loss (current).
Phase Unbalance (voltage) Range 5-40% , 5% increment .
Phase Reversal (voltage) .
Over voltage : Range : 105 to 140% (5% increment ).
Under voltage : 95% to 60% (5% increment).
Delay
: Allows existence of over voltage , under
voltage or voltage unbalance before alarm or trip occurs .
range : O - 8 sec (1sec . increment).

c. Other Features .
1. CT & PT ratios field settable .
2. 3 wire or 4 wire system .
3. Auto ranging of units (Units , kilo units , mega units ).
4. alternate power factor calculation (for unbalanced, and nonsinusoidal wave forms) .
5. Pulse initiation on watt-hour pulse as programmed by the
user at certain kWh or MWH rates .
____
OCE - 18 April 2005

MEDIUM VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER SWITCHGEAR


16345-11

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

6. 60 HZ system .
7. Self protected from fault .
8. Self diagnostic for internal circuitry low burden , 0.0 03 VA
CT, 10 VA V.T .
d. Computer interface via standard communication port and
capabilities to be connected to building automation system for
energy management protocols.
e. The device shall be of IQ-DATA plus II as manufactured by
westing house or equal and approved .

d.

2)

Feeders (and tie breakers) circuits shall each have an ammeter and
ammeter selector switch.

3)

Ammeters and voltmeters shall be flush fronted 96mm x 96mm , 250


degree long scale, 1 percent full scale accuracy, 60 HZ. Ammeters
shall have 5 ampere movements, transformer rated. Voltmeters shall
have 150 volt movement, transformer rated.

4)

Where specified and indicated ,Power factor meter shall be


switchboard class, semi-flush mounted.

5)

Voltage and current test blocks shall be General Electric 4-pole Type
"PK-2" or approved equal.

6)

Shorting switches with visible contacts shall be installed between


metering current transformers and terminal blocks of instruments.

Control Arrangement
1)

Control and instrument switches shall be of the rotary type, with


pistol grip handles for circuit breaker control switches, round
notched handles for instrument switches, and oval handles for
auxiliary and transfer switches.

2)

Voltmeter switches where specified and indicated , shall have 7


positions, three (3) line-to-line(3)line to neutral and off. Ammeter
switches shall have four positions, three (3) phases and off. Current
transformers shall not be open circuit in any case .

3)

Local control by switches for each breaker shall be provided.


Switches shall be operable in both the "operate" and "test" positions
of the breakers.

4) Pilot light indications shall be mounted on the front doors of each


associated breaker: red, green ,Amber and white :pilot lights shall
include lamp , receptacle and resistor suitable for 110 v DC .
Indications shall depict as follows :
Red
Green
Amber
White

- Breaker closed .
- Breaker open .
- Fault trip .
- Trip supply functional .
____

OCE - 18 April 2005

MEDIUM VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER SWITCHGEAR


16345-12

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

5)

9.

King Saud University

Provide auxiliary and interlock contacts, relays, wiring, etc. as


required to provide controls as specified or shown on the drawings.

Relaying
a.

Provide the quantity, types and ratings of protective, auxiliary and lockout
relays and instrumentation transformers to provide protection and control
as required and as shown on the drawings and specified herein.

b.

Protective relays shall be of the rectangular, draw-out type in flush


switchboard cases, dust tight, rear connected with built-in test switches or
devices and external reset trip indicators, mounted on the front doors of
the associated switchgear circuit breaker.

c.

Protective relays shall comply with IEC 255 or BS 142 , and shall be suitable
for operation on 110v DC auxiliary supply . Relays shall be state of the art
solid state type. Current operated relays shall be suitable for 1A current
transformer separate from metering transformers . Relays shall be
calibrated at the factory prior to shipment .

d.

Relay targets and holding coils shall have ratings suitable for the trip coil of
the associated circuit breaker. The current transformer circuit shall be
bypassed when the relay is disconnected. Facilities shall be provided so
that the relay, while plugged into its permanent position can be tested
either from an independent auxiliary test source or from the normal source.
Facilities shall be provided so that a test plug, with connection to an
ammeter and voltmeter, can be inserted and readings taken from the
instrument transformers with the protective relay in the circuit.

e.

Relays shall be manufactured by GEC-ALSTHOM MIDOS RANGE or


equal approved , and shall have the following characteristics :
1)

Manual push button reset for all fault conditions .

2)

Directional Relays 67 & 67 N .


a) Directional relays where indicated , shall be used for directional
control of phase fault and earth fault over current relays . The
relays shall have the features below .
b) Suitable for 1A current transformer , and with an effective current
range of 0.1 A or 30A .
c) Voltage polarized operation with a nominal voltage rating of
110V ac , and effective range of 0.63V to 240V .
d) Switch selectable characteristic angle of -60 deg., -40 deg. , 0
deg.,+30 deg. and +45 deg.
e) The relay contact shall operate when both operating and
polarizing quantities reach 1% of rated values and the angle
between these quantities is equal to the relay characteristic angle .
f) The relay shall not operate for any voltage applied from 0 to 240 V
AC and any current applied to between 0 and 30A in the restrain
direction .
____

OCE - 18 April 2005

MEDIUM VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER SWITCHGEAR


16345-13

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

g) Over current Relays (50/51 & 51 and 51 N ) .


1. Relays for phase fault protection shall be three pole units
with elements in all three phase .
2. Switch selectable choice of four inverse curves IDMT ,
INVERSE , VERY , and EXTREMELY INVERS and three
time ranges .
3. Setting range of 0.05 x In through 2.4 x in steps of 0.05 x In .
4. Time multiplier range 0.05 to 1 and all characteristics .
5. Separate LED indicators for delayed and instantaneous
operations .
6. LED start indicators to facilitate testing .
7. Separate output contacts for time delayed phase fault ,
instantaneous phase fault , time delayed earth fault and
instantaneous earth fault conditions .
8. LED indication of auxiliary supply to relay .
3) Under voltage Relays (27)
a) Under voltage relays shall have an inverse time / voltage
characteristic . Each relay shall have the followings :
1. Switch or plug selectable voltage settings of 50% to 90% of
110 V AC in sever equal steps .
2. Resetting voltage 105% of voltage setting .
3. Time settings of 0 to 5 sec .
4) Master Trip Relay : (lockout relay - 86 )
a) Master Trip relays shall be provided for each circuit breaker for
tripping .
b) The relay should be hand reset , high speed , current ratting of
contacts suitable for tripping C.B on 110VDC . 10 normally open
and 4 normally closed auxiliary relay GEC VAJ series .
5) Reverse Power Relay (32):
a)

The reverse power relay shall have a switch selectable setting


range from 3% to 30% in twelve steps . with an accuracy of +3%
of setting .

b)

The operating time shall be continuously adjustable from 1sec


to 10 seconds, with an accuracy of +10% of setting .

____
OCE - 18 April 2005

MEDIUM VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER SWITCHGEAR


16345-14

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

6) Trip Circuit Supervision Relay :


a)

Each circuit breaker cubical shall be provided with trip circuit


supervision relay. The relay shall continuously monitor the
followings:
1. Trip voltage .
2. Continuity of the trip circuit and trip coils . The above
conditions shall be monitored in the circuit breaker closed
and open position.

7)

b)

The relay shall have an inherent fixed time delay to allow for
normal transient voltage dips , and for the transition period
between circuit breaker opening and closing .

c)

Each relay shall be fitted with hand reset indication lamp .

Restricted Earth Fault Relay: Restricted earth fault relay shall be of


the high impedance differential type complete with stabilizing
resisters and non-linear silicon carbid varistor.

10. Secondary and Control Wiring and Terminal Blocks


a.

Secondary control wiring shall be 2.5 sq. mm minimum ,extra-flexible,


stranded, tinned-copper wire, rated 450/750 volts, except for specific
circuits for which a larger wire size is required. Crimp-type, un-insulated
spade terminals shall be furnished on wire ends, except where
non-insulated ring terminals are used to connect to fuse blocks, instrument
studs or terminal block points which have two or more wire connections.
Secondary control wires shall be armored or enclosed in grounded metal
troughs where they pass through primary compartments.

b.

Wiring an connections shall be made at the factory and shall be labeled


with wraparound wire labels at each termination.

c.

Wiring across door hinges shall be arranged for torsion flexing.

d.

Wiring leaving each compartment shall be terminated at terminal blocks.


Terminals of each block shall be identified. Terminal blocks shall be
located in readily accessible locations. Provide a minimum of 25 percent
spare terminals. Terminal blocks for current transformer shall be of the
shorting & disconnecting type of Phoenix manufacture or equal approved .

11. Accessories: The following accessories shall be furnished with each switchgear:
a.

One (1) spare breaker element.

b.

One (1) spare vacuum bottle of each size and type for vacuum breakers.

c.

Two (2) sets of spare indicating lamps, lamp resistors and lamp color caps
of each color.

d.

One (1) quart of touchup paint.


____

OCE - 18 April 2005

MEDIUM VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER SWITCHGEAR


16345-15

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

e.

One (1) test cabinet including secondary contacts, test jumper, control
relays and push buttons.

f.

One (1) high potential test set to check the vacuum integrity within the
circuit breaker.

g.

One (1) set of special wrenches, removable hand cranks, tools as required
to maintain and assemble parts of the switchgear for field maintenance.

h.

Provide fuses as required and in addition, furnish six (6) spare control or
instrumentation circuit fuses of each type, size and voltage rating.

i.

Provide one circuit breaker portable lifting device and transport trolley for
each electrical room containing medium voltage switchgear.

j.

One (1) set of test plugs for meters and relays.

k.

Potential and current test lugs to fit test blocks. One of each required.

l.

Grounding and Test Devices


1)

Provide 110 volt DC electrically operated draw-out grounding and


test devices with facilities for grounding .The device shall be capable
of carrying the specified levels of short circuit currents.

m.

Portable remote racking deand control panel including 30 foot cable to rack
a breaker between the connect and disconnect positions with the door
closed.

n.

One spare relay draw-out case and cover for each type of draw-out relay
for transporting relays to the maintenance area.

o.

SF6 filling equipment for SF6 circuit breakers.

12. Switchgear Sections (13.8 KV)


The arrangement of the switchgear shall be in accordance with drawings and the
following :
a.

Three source incoming line : control of each incoming line shall include but
not limited for the followings :1)

1 power circuit breaker 1200 / 1250 amperes continuous, three-pole.

2)

1 set of insulated bus, three-phase, three-wire 2000 amperes.

3)

3 surge arresters.

4)

3 current transformers, 2 cores , 1250/1/5 (for protection relays and


instruments), 20VA each, class 5 P10 for protection and class 1 for
instruments.

5)

Potential transformer 13800V/110V , 3 phase , cable side connected .

6)

1 switch, breaker control.


____

OCE - 18 April 2005

MEDIUM VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER SWITCHGEAR


16345-16

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

7)

4 Indicating lamps, breaker close-open, red and green, Trip-amber


and trip supply functional white .

8)

1 Micro processor base monitoring and protective device as per


clause 7.c (Instrumentation).

9)

1 Test block - voltage.

10) 1 Test block - current.


11) Relays, 3 phase over-current, time over-current, Device 51.
12) 1 Relay, ground over-current, time over-current, Device 51N.
13) 3 pole directional over current and fault relay 67 / 67 N .
14) Close /0/ trip key switch , with key removable in the O position .
15) Trip circuit supervision relay .
16) Hand reset trip relay .
17) Alarm facia with separate indicators for each fault condition , and
with a common alarm silence / accept push button . 25% spare ways
shall be provided . a common volt - free contact shall be provided for
remote indication . The following indications shall be provided :
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
b.

Over current trip .


Earth fault trip .
SF6 low pressure for C.B .
Directional over current trip .
Directional earth fault trip .
MCB trip 110V DC supply .
Trip supervision circuit operated .
Under voltage / over voltage alarm and trip .

Bus Tie: Control of the bus tie shall include, but not limited to, the
following:
1)

Power circuit breaker 1250 A amperes continuous, three-pole.

2)

1 Set of insulated bus, three-phase, three-wire, 2000 amperes.

3)

3 Current transformers, 2core , 1200 / 1 / 5 one for protection & one


for instruments , 20VA each , class 5 p10 for protection , and 1 for
instruments .

5)

1 Switch, breaker control.

6)

4 Indicating lamps, close-open, trip and trip supply functional .

7)

1 Ammeter, indicating.

8)

1 Switch, ammeter transfer.


____

OCE - 18 April 2005

MEDIUM VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER SWITCHGEAR


16345-17

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

9)

King Saud University

3 Relays, phase over-current, with instantaneous element, Device


50/51.

10) 1 Relay, ground over-current, Device 51N.


11) Hand reset master trip 86 and trip circuit supervision relay .
c.

Feeders :
1)

1 Power circuit breaker 630 amperes continuous, three-pole.

2)

1 Set of insulated bus bar 2000 amperes.

3)

3 Current transformers, 2core , as follows:


a)

Feeders F1 & F7 : 300 / 1 / 5, 2core , one for protection & one for
instruments,
10 VA, class 5 p10 for protection and 1 for
instruments.

b)

Feeders : F2 & F8 , 200 / 1 / 5 , 2core . One for protection and


one for instruments 10VA , class 5 p10 . For protection and 1 for
instruments .

c)

Feeders F3 & 5 : Ditto , but ratio 400 / 1 / 5 .

5)

1 Switch, breaker control.

6)

4 Indicating lamps, breaker close-open, trip and trip supply


functional (Red , Green , Amber , White ).

7)

1 Ammeter, indicating.

8)

1 Switch, ammeter transfer.

9)

3 Relays, phase over-current, with instantaneous element, Device


50/51.

10) 1 Relay, ground over-current, Device 51N.


11) Master trip relay (86) and trip circuit supervision relay .
12. 110 Volt DC Control Power Equipment
110 Volt DC power shall be used for control and protection for medium and low
voltage switchgear in central plant unless otherwise indicated.
a.

Storage Battery
1)

The battery shall be of the lead acid type with lead-calcium


construction or nickel cadmium.

2)

The battery shall provide sufficient power at 110V to close or trip


breakers in the switchgear simultaneously and maintain other loads
in the switchgear. Future breakers shall be taken into consideration
when sizing the battery and charger.
____

OCE - 18 April 2005

MEDIUM VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER SWITCHGEAR


16345-18

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

3)

The battery shall be of the sealed type, assembled in heat-resistant,


shock-absorbing clear plastic containers with covers cemented in
place to form a permanent leak proof seal. Covers shall be fitted
with explosion-resistant vent caps. Cell post and cover shall be
sealed against crepe of electrolyte either by burned-ring seals or by
lead-alloy seal nuts. Cell terminal posts shall be equipped with
connector bolts having acid resisting nuts. Sufficient sediment space
shall be provided so that the battery will not have to be cleaned out
during its normal life. Electrolyte level lines shall be marked on four
sides of the container.

4)

Accessories: The following accessories shall be supplied with the


battery:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)

b.

King Saud University

Intercell connectors to provide 1/2 inch spacing between cells.


Terminal lugs.
One portable hydrometer syringe.
One thermometer.
Cell lifter.
One set of connector bolt wrenches.
Cell numbers mounted on the racks.
Anti-corrosion compound for connections.

5)

Racks:
A suitable galvanized steel rack shall be furnished.
Lead-plated copper inter-rack connectors and cell numbers shall be
provided. Plastic covers shall be provided to insulate the rails and
the cells. Racks shall be painted with two coats of acid resistant gray
paint.

6)

Ground Protection: The battery shall have a high resistance ground


and a ground detection alarm for maximum personnel safety. This
shall be an integral part of the charger.

Battery Charger
1)

The charger shall be of the voltage-regulated type, with an ampere


rating sufficient to satisfy the self-discharge losses of the battery, the
steady load of the switchgear and equalizing charges, or other
high-rate output requirements.

2)

The charger shall be suitable for the batteries. Power supply shall be
220 volts, 60 HZ. Battery voltage shall be 110 V DC.

3)

The charger shall have a ventilated sheet metal enclosure suitable for
floor or wall mounting with charging rate adjustment device,
"ON-OFF" switch, ammeter, voltmeter, warning pilot light and alarm
bell mounted on the floor.

4)

Battery/Charger alarms shall include, but not be limited to, the


following:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

AC failure.
Charger over temperature.
Charger failure.
Battery ground.
Battery under voltage.
____

OCE - 18 April 2005

MEDIUM VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER SWITCHGEAR


16345-19

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

f)

King Saud University

Fuse failure alarm .

5)

An alarm contact for battery/charger trouble shall be provided for


remote alarm indication.

6)

An automatic constant voltage float / boost type charge shall be


furnished .

7)

The following shall be incorporated :


a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

Voltmeters and A meters (Mains & Batteries ).


Timed automatic boost charge switch .
Preset current limit facility to restrict the maximum output to a
safe level .
Timed automatic boost charge switch .
Radio frequency interference suppression .

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01

EXAMINATION
A.

3.02

3.03

Examine conditions at the job site where work of this Section is to be performed to
insure proper arrangement and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of job
site conditions.

PREPARATION
A.

Examine the Contract Drawings and specifications in order to insure the completeness
of the work required under this Section.

B.

Verify measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the coordination
and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work of related trades, so as not to
delay job progress.

C.

Provide templates as required to related trade for location of items.

INSTALLATION
A.

Install switchgear as indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written


instructions, and with recognized industry practices. Bolt the switchgear to a steel
channel frame set flush with the finished floor. Design and placement of the frame
shall be in accordance with the approved manufacturer's drawings and instructions.

B.

Provide the services of the manufacturer's qualified service engineer, at the job site, for
as many days as required, to provide guidance to the Contractor during installation, to
inspect for proper installation, perform debugging, check and make adjustments for
proper operation of the devices and equipment, set protective devices, test and
calibrate protective devices in the field with secondary current injection and instruct the
Owner's designated personnel in the care and operation of the equipment.

C.

Install switchgear on vibration isolators in accordance with manufacturer's


requirements.

D.

Provide fuses in control and instrumentation sections as required.


____

OCE - 18 April 2005

MEDIUM VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER SWITCHGEAR


16345-20

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

3.04

E.

Set, adjust and calibrate relays and protective devices in accordance with the approved
coordination study.

F.

Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with
equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment
connectors. Where manufacturer's torque requirements are not indicated, tighten
connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torque specified in UL Std 486A
and B.

G.

Grounding: Provide equipment grounding connections for the switchgear as indicated


and as specified in Section 16450 "Grounding." Tighten connections to comply with
tightening torques specified in UL Std 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

3.05

King Saud University

Prior to energization of switchgears and circuitry, perform tests as specified in Section


16950 "Electrical Tests." If the testing should indicate failure to meet the requirements
of the specifications, the manufacturer shall provide additions, modifications or
replacements necessary to provide the Owner with a unit which fully conforms to the
specifications. Repair work shall be scheduled at a time convenient to the facility being
served.

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING


A.

Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement. Touchup scratched or


marred surfaces to match original finishes.

END OF SECTION

____
OCE - 18 April 2005

MEDIUM VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER SWITCHGEAR


16345-21

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16425
POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01

1.02

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND RELATED DOCUMENTS


A.

Examine all other sections of the Specification for requirements, which affect work
of this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section.

B.

Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of the
Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work
under the Contract.

SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK


A.

1.03

1.04

1.05

This specification is for extent of power distribution boards including all types of
main or sub-main distribution boards and load centers referred to the drawings,
schedules and elsewhere within this specification.

GUARANTEES
A.

Attention is directed to provisions contained elsewhere regarding guarantees and


warranties for work under this Contract.

B.

Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees for work under this
section. However, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all
other liabilities which manufacturers and Contractors may have by law or by
other provisions of the Contract Documents.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of distribution boards


and enclosure, of type and sizes and rating required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.

B.

Installer: Qualified with at least five years of successful installation experience on


projects with electrical installation work similar to that required for the project.

C.

Special Use-Markings: Provide distribution boards constructed for special use,


with British Standards marks indicating that special type usage.

D.

Comply with applicable BS safety standards pertaining to distribution board and


accessories, and enclosures.

E.

IEE Compliance: Comply with IEE as applicable to installation of distribution


board, cabinets and cutout boxes. Comply with IEE articles pertaining to
installation of wiring and equipment.

F.

BS Compliance: Comply with BS Standards Publications for Electrical Equipment.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Shop Drawings and Manufacturer's Data:


The contractor shall submit to the client/client representative for review, detailed
dimensioned shop drawings and manufacturer's literature where deviations from
the contract drawings or specification exist. Shop drawings and/or data sheets
shall be based on information stated in the specifications and as shown on the

OCE - 30 January 2014

POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARDS


16425 - 1/4

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

contract drawings and shall show all pertinent deviations and data for the
fabrication and complete installation.
Manufacturer's data sheets shall be submitted indicating the necessary installation
dimensions, weights, materials and performance information. The above
information may be provided by standard catalogue sheets marked to indicate the
specific items provided.

.
1.06

B.

Operation and Maintenance Instructions:


The contractor shall furnish data covering model, type and serial numbers,
capacities, maintenance and operation of each major item of equipment or
apparatus in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents.
Operating instructions shall cover all phases of control.

C.

Test Reports:
The contractor shall submit test reports to the client/client representative for
review.

D.

Recommended Spare Parts List:


The contractor shall submit recommended spare parts list to the client/client
representative for review.

E.

As Built Drawings:
The contractor shall submit the as built drawings to the client/client
representative for review and approval.

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS


A.

Handle distribution boards carefully to prevent breakage denting or scoring the


finish. Store distribution boards inside and protect from weather. When necessary
to store outdoors, elevate well above ground and enclose durable, waterproof
wrapping.

PART 2 PRODUCT
2.01

MANUFACTURERS
A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one


of the following or equal approved:
1.
2.
3.

2.02

Siemens
Schneider Electric
ABB

CUBICLE CONSTRUCTION
A.

Cubicle pattern main or sub-main distribution boards shall be supplied by the


manufacture of the component protective devices and shall comply with BS 5486,
Part 1 (IEC 439).

B.

The distribution board enclosures shall be either pressed or fabricated from sheet
steel having a minimum thickness of 1.7mm. The steel shall be electro zinc plated
(Zintec) and shall have a minimum of priming coat, undercoat and finishing coat
of paint. The undercoat and finished coat shall be stove enameled.

C.

The distribution board shall house the main circuit breaker, feeder circuit breakers,
instrumentation service entrance of incoming cables or bus-duct and manual
transfer switch.

OCE - 30 January 2014

POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARDS


16425 - 2/4

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.03

D.

The distribution board shall be dead front type, completely enclosed, self
supporting structure approximately 2.25m high, independent of wall supports.

E.

The distribution board construction shall be of the universal frame type using dieformed members bolted and braced. The sides, top and rear shall be covered with
removable screw on plates having formed edges all around.

F.

The distribution board shall consist of the required number of vertical sections
bolted together to form one rigid distribution board incorporating switching and
protective devices of the number, ratings and type noted here in or shown on the
drawings with all necessary interconnections, instrumentation and control wiring.

G.

The distribution board shall incorporate bus-bars which shall be of hard drawn
high conductivity copper. These bars shall be TPN + E of the size required. In all
cases the bus-bars shall be noted at not more than 1 ampere per square mm of a
minimum 50% of the full rated estimated total of MCCBs connected to them. All
bus-bar shall be supported and braced on porcelain insulators, or on laminated
carriers to withstand mechanical forces exerted during short circuit conditions
when directly connected to a power source having the indicated available short
circuit current.

H.

Small wiring, necessary fuse blocks and terminal blocks within the distribution
board shall be furnished when required. All groups of control wires leaving the
distribution board shall be provided with terminal blocks with suitable numbering
strips.

I.

An earthing bus and lugs shall be furnished firmly screwed to each vertical section
structure and shall extend the entire length of the distribution board.

J.

The distribution board shall be provided with adequate lifting means and shall be
capable of being rolled or moved into installation position and bolted directly to
the floor without the used of floor sills.

K.

The distribution board shall contain a glanding plate at top and/or bottom of the
board to allow easy terminating of cable glands with room to install and connect
cable trays etc.

MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER


A.

2.04

King Saud University

The main circuit breaker shall be a fixed mounted front removable or withdrawable type of moulded case or air type as indicated on the drawings or specified on
Section 16426 - Protective Devices.

FEEDER BRANCH CIRCUIT BREAKERS


A.

The feeder protective devices shall be Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCBs) as
described in Section 16426 Protective Devices and as shown on drawings.

B.

Circuit breakers shall be equipped with individually insulated, braced and


protected connectors. The front faces of all circuit breakers shall be flush with each
other. Large, permanent, individual circuit numbers shall be affixed to each
breaker in a uniform position and equip each breaker with a circuit card holder
and neatly printed card identifying the circuit. Tripped indication shall be clearly
shown by the breaker handle tanking a position between ON and OFF. Provisions
for additional breakers shall be such that no additional connectors will be required
to add breakers.

C.

The feeder or branch devices shall be removable from the front and shall be
individually mounted with the necessary device line and load connections front
accessible.

OCE - 30 January 2014

POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARDS


16425 - 3/4

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.05

King Saud University

METERING AND INSTRUMENTATION


A.

All MSBs shall be equipped with kwh meters as specified in Section 16430
Metering.

B.

All power distribution boards rating 630A or more shall be provided by the
following instrumentations:

Three Current Transformers


One volt meter 0-300 volts, 1% accuracy with 4 position selector switch.
Three ammeter, 1% accuracy with 0-1000A
One frequency meter.

The current transformers and ammeter shall be rated for the distribution
board capacity.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01

3.02

INSTALLATION
A.

Install power distribution boards, including electrical connections, in accordance


with the Manufacturers written instruction, applicable with recognized industry
practices to ensure that products serve the intended function.

B.

Coordinate installation of power distribution boards with cable and raceway


installation work.

C.

Install only in permanently dry locations away from all mechanical and public
health services.

D.

Anchor enclosures firmly to structural surfaces, ensuring that they are


permanently mechanically secured.

E.

Check ratings of all circuit protection devices.

F.

Provide electrical connection within enclosures.

G.

Fill out power distribution boards directory card upon completion of installation
work.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Prior to energization of circuitry, check all accessible connections to


manufacturers torque specifications.

B.

Prior to energization of distribution boards, check with earth resistance tested


phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth insulation resistance levels to ensure
requirements are fulfilled.

C.

Prior to energization, check distribution boards for electrical continuity of circuits,


and for short circuits.

D.

Subsequent to wire and cable hook ups, energize distribution boards and
demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements.
END OF SECTION 16425

OCE - 30 January 2014

POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARDS


16425 - 4/4

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16426
LOW VOLTAGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01

1.02

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.

Examine all other sections of the Specification for requirements which affect work of
this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section.

B.

Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of the
Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under
the Contract.

C.

All MCCB and MCBs shall be of the same manufacturer.

SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK


A.

Extent of protective device work is indicated by drawings and schedules.

B.

Type of protective devices in this section includes the following:


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

1.03

1.04

AIR Circuit Breakers.


MCCB Moulded Case Circuit Breakers.
MCB Miniature Circuit Breakers.
RCCB Residual Current Circuit Breakers.
RCD Residual Current Device.
Cartridge Fuses.

GUARANTEES
A.

Attention is directed to provisions contained elsewhere regarding guarantees and


warranties for work under this Contract.

B.

Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees for work under this section.
However, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities
which manufacturers and Contractors may have by law or by other provisions of the
Contract Documents.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of protective devices of


types and sizes and rating required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 10 years.

B.

Installer: Qualified with at least five years of successful installation experience on


projects with electrical installation work similar to that required for the project.

C.

IEE Compliance: Comply with IEE requirements as applicable to construction and


installation of protective devices.

D.

BS Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of the BS Standards


Publications for moulded case miniature and power type circuit breakers.

OCE - 30 January 2014

LOW VOLTAGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES


16426 - 1/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

1.05

SUBMITTALS
A.

Product Data: Submit manufacturers data on protective devices, including catalogue


cuts, time current trip characteristics curves, and mounting requirements.

B.

Maintenance Stock, Fuses: For types and ratings required, furnish additional fuses,
amounting to one unit for every five installed units, but not less than one unit each.

PART 2
2.01

PRODUCT
MANUFACTURERS
A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of


the following or equal approved:
1.
2.
3.

2.02

A.

The main circuit breakers shall be of air type and shall comply with BS 4752 (IEC
157.1) and shall comply with Saudi Electricity Company SEC requirement.

B.

The main circuit breaker shall be fixed mounted front removable or withdraw-able
type with current monitor and solid state sensor for phase and earth sensing
protection. The static sensor shall have adjustable settings for each of the following
tripping characteristics:

C.

2.04

Siemens
Schneider Electric
ABB

MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

2.03

King Saud University

Long Delay Pick Up Point


Long Delay Tripping Time
Short Delay Pick Up Point (Instantaneous Protection)
Earth Point Pick Up
Earth Tripping Time

Extra facilities may be required such as shunt trips, under-voltage release, auxiliary
switches, self and remote indications monitor, motorized for remote control, load
monitoring, measurement of phase current, maximum current and fault currents.

MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER


A.

Moulded case circuit breaker (MCCBs) shall comply with BS 3871, Part 2 for ratings
up to 100A and BS 4752 (IEC 157.1) for ratings above 100A. They shall be of the
quick make, quick break, trip free, thermal magnetic adjustable releases or with solid
state trip units complete with De-ion arc grids, alloys contacts and inter-pole
contacts.

B.

Extra facilities may be required such as shunt trips, under-voltage release, auxiliary
switches, remote indications or tripping residual current protection, or special
calibrations. Such extra facilities shall be specified elsewhere in this specification or
on the drawings.

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB)


A.

Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCBs) shall be plastic moulded units incorporating


thermal magnetic protection against overloads and short circuits, and shall comply

OCE - 30 January 2014

LOW VOLTAGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES


16426 - 2/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

with BS 3871, Part 1. The tripping mechanism shall be designed to provide delays
operation on overload and instantaneous operation under fault condition. Breakers
shall have positive ON-OFF indication, be Trip Free and shall trip to the full off
position under overload and/or short circuit. Triple pole units shall be used for
three phase circuits. All multiple breakers shall have an integral common trip bar as
standard.

2.05

2.06

2.07

B.

The circuit breakers shall be grouped and mounted on removal cradles. Each group
shall be connected to a common bus bar of the appropriate phase.

C.

Where the fault level of the system is such that the use of MCBs is not acceptable,
then moulded case circuit breakers (MCCBs) as specified elsewhere shall be utilized.

RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS


A.

Residual Current Circuit Breaker (RCCB) shall comply with BS 4293 and BS 3871,
Part 1 and generally comprise a solid state sensing device, trip coil/mechanism,
contact system/switching mechanism.

B.

The sensitivity of the breaker shall be 300, 30, 10 or 5 mA maximum tripping time of
30 ms.

C.

Each breaker shall incorporate a test circuit with a test button to simulate fault
conditions.

D.

The combined units shall be compatible with other MCBs installed within
distribution boards.

CARTRIDGE FUSE
A.

Cartridge fuse links shall be of the high rupturing capacity (HRC) type and shall
comply with BS 88, Part 2 (IEC 269-2).

B.

Each HRC fuse link shall ASTA certified for its claimed breaking capacity and shall
be so mounted that the current rating on each fuse link is clearly visible.

SURGE PROTECTIVE DIVICES : SURGE ARRESTORS


A.

General
This article covers general requirements, installation requirements, and connection
requirements for surge arresters installed on premises wiring systems.
A surge arrester is a protective device for limiting surge voltages by discharging or
bypassing surge current, and it also prevents continued flow of follow current while
remaining capable of repeating these functions.

B.

Number Required
Where used at a point on a circuit, a surge arrester shall be connected to each
ungrounded conductor. A single installation of such surge arresters shall be
permitted to protect a number of interconnected circuits, provided that no circuit is
exposed to surges while disconnected from the surge arresters.

C.

Surge Arrester Selection


Circuits of Less than 1000 Volts: The rating of the surge arrester shall be equal to or
greater than the maximum continuous phase-to-ground power frequency voltage
available at the point of application.

OCE - 30 January 2014

LOW VOLTAGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES


16426 - 3/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

Surge arresters installed on circuits of less than 1000 volts shall be listed for the
purpose.
Note. 1: For further information on surge arresters, refer to Standard for Gapped
Silicon-Carbide Surge Arresters for AC Power Circuits, ANSI/IEEE C62.11989; Guide for the Application of Gapped Silicon-Carbide Surge Arresters
for Alternating-Current Systems, ANSI/IEEE C62.2-1987; Standard for
Metal-Oxide Surge Arresters for Alternating-Current Power Circuits,
ANSI/IEEE C62.11-1993; and Guide for the Application of Metal-Oxide
Surge Arresters for Alternating-Current Systems, ANSI/IEEE C62.22-1991.
Note. 2: The selection of a properly rated metal oxide arrester is based on
considerations of maximum continuous operating voltage and the
magnitude and duration of overvoltages at the arrester location as affected
by phase-to-ground faults, system grounding techniques, switching
surges, and other causes
D.

Installation
* Location: Surge arresters shall be permitted to be located indoors or outdoors.
Surge arresters shall be made inaccessible to unqualified persons, unless listed for
installation in accessible locations.
* Routing of Surge Arrester Connections
The conductor used to connect the surge arrester to line or bus and to ground shall
not be any longer than necessary and shall avoid unnecessary bends.
Connecting Surge Arresters
* Installed at Services of Less than 1000 Volts
Line and ground connecting conductors shall not be smaller than 6mm2 copper or
10mm2 aluminum. The arrester grounding conductor shall be connected to one of
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Grounded service conductor


Grounding electrode conductor
Grounding electrode for the service
Equipment grounding terminal in the service equipment

* Installed on the Load Side Services of Less than 1000 Volts


Line and ground connecting conductors shall not be smaller than 4mm2 copper or
6mm2 aluminum. A surge arrester shall be permitted to be connected between any
two conductors ungrounded conductor(s), grounded conductor, grounding
conductor. The grounded conductor and the grounding conductor shall be
interconnected only by the normal operation of the surge arrester during a surge.
E.

Grounding
Except as indicated in this article, surge arrester grounding connections shall be
made as specified in NEC Article 250. Grounding conductors shall not be run in
metal enclosures unless bonded to both ends of such enclosure.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01

INSTALLATION
A.

Install protective devices as indicated in accordance with the Manufacturers written


instruction and with recognized industry practices to ensure that IEE and BS
requirements for installation are maintained.

OCE - 30 January 2014

LOW VOLTAGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES


16426 - 4/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

3.02

King Saud University

B.

Coordinate with other work including electrical wiring work as necessary to


interface installation of protective devices with other work.

C.

Fasten circuit breakers without mechanical stresses, twisting or misalignment being


exerted by clamps, supports or cable.

D.

Set field adjustable circuit breakers for trip settings as indicated, subsequent to
installation of devices.

E.

Install fuses, if any, in fused circuit breakers.

F.

Inspect circuit breaker operating mechanisms for mal-functioning and, where


necessary, adjust units for free mechanical movement.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Prior to energization of over-current protective devices, test devices for continuity of


circuitry and for short circuits. Correct mal-functioning units, and then demonstrate
compliance with requirements.

PART 4 SHORT CIRCUIT AND PROTECTIVE DEVICE:


4.01

SHORT CIRCUIT AND PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDIES


A.

Provide four (4) brochures, each of which shall include complete short circuit and
protective coordination studies, complete with device coordination time-current
curves for the entire power distribution system.

B.

In the short circuit study, provide calculation methods and assumptions, the per unit
quantities selected, one-line diagrams, source impedance data including power
company system characteristics, impedance diagrams, typical calculations,
tabulations of calculation quantities and results, conclusions and recommendations.
Calculate short circuit interrupting and momentary (when applicable) duties for an
assumed 3-phase bolted fault at each high voltage switchgear line-up, unit substation
high voltage terminals, low voltage switchgear line-up, switchboard, motor control
centre, distribution panelboard, pertinent branch circuit panelbaord, and other
significant locations throughout the system. Provide a ground fault study for each
medium voltage system, including the associated zero sequence impedance diagram.
Include in tabulations fault impedance, X to R ratios, asymmetry factors, motor
contribution, short circuit KVA and symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents.

C.

In the protective device coordination study, provide time-current curves graphically


indicating the coordination proposed for the system, centered on conventional fullsize log-log forms. Include with each curve sheet a complete title and one-line
diagram with legend identifying the specific portion of the system covered by that
particular curve sheet. Include a detailed description of each protective device
identifying its type, function, manufacturer, and time-current characteristics.
Tabulate recommended device tap, time dial, pick-up, instantaneous, and time delay
settings.

D.

Include on the curve sheets power company relay and fuse characteristics, high
voltage equipment relay band fuse characteristics, low voltage equipment circuit
breaker trip device and fuse characteristics, pertinent transformer characteristics,
pertinent motor and generator characteristics and characteristics of other system load
protective devices.
Include tolerance and damage bands in plotted fuse

OCE - 30 January 2014

LOW VOLTAGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES


16426 - 5/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

characteristics. show transformers full load and 150, 400 & 600 percent currents,
transformer magnetizing inrush, ANSI transformer withstand parameters and
significant symmetrical and asymmetrical fault current.
Terminate device
characteristic curves at a appoint reflecting the maximum symmetrical or
asymmetrical fault current to which the device is exposed.

4.02

E.

Select each primary protective device required for a delta-wye connected transformer
so that its characteristics or operating band is within the transformer characteristics,
including a point equal to 58 percent of the ANSI withstand point to provide
secondary line-to-ground fault protection. Where the primary device characteristic is
not within the transformer characteristics, show a transformer damage curve.
Separate transformer primary protective device characteristics by a 16 percent
current margin to provide proper coordination and protection in the event of
secondary line-to-line faults. Separate high voltage relay characteristic curves from
curves for other devices by at least 0.4 second time margin.

F.

In each brochure, include complete sets of individual protective device time-current


characteristics on transparencies.

G.

The short circuit and protective device studies may be prepared with a network
analyzer, digital computer or by written computations, but must include complete
fault calculations as specified herein for each proposed and ultimate source
combination.

H.

Submit completed studies to KSA. Make additions or changes as required by KSU at


no additional cost to KSU.

I.

The plans and specifications indicate the general requirements for the electrical
equipment being provided under this contract. Changes and additions to equipment
characteristics may be suggested by the results of the short circuit and protective
device coordination studies. Submit any such proposed changes and additions as a
part of the study brochure material. Necessary field settings of devices, and
adjustments and minor modifications to equipment to accomplish conformance with
the approved short circuit and protective device coordination studies shall be carried
out by the particular manufacturer or by the Contractor at no additional cost to the
client.

GENERAL
A. The conditions of Contract, Supplementary Conditions for Mechanical and Electrical
Work, General Provisions for Electrical Work and all other Documents issued by the
Consultant shall form part of these specifications and shall be binding upon this
contractor and all employees employed directly or indirectly by him.
B. Cable sizes indicated on the single line diagram are the minimum cable size acceptable
and take precedents over sizes indicated on layout plants. The contractor is to check and
co-ordinate the actual equipment loads to be installed and/or connected to ensure the
cable capacity and protection is suitable for the required duty and will supply the load
without exceeding the permissible volt drop. If necessary, due to the requirements of the
equipment/connected load, voltage drop, considerations and/or detailing of cable due
to installation conditions etc., the contractor is to increase the size of cable and/or
protective device to comply with the requirements of this specification. Such increase in
cable sizes, if required, is to reflect in adjustments to cable tray/conduits provisions to
provide the minimum spare capacity nominated.

OCE - 30 January 2014

LOW VOLTAGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES


16426 - 6/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

C. Changes to cable sizes form the minimum sizes nominated on the


drawings which are
required to comply with this specification are to be carried out at no additional cost or
delay to the project.
D. Allow for all equipment and facilities necessary to install, support and terminate cables
including provision of cable trenches, conduits, pits and chambers as required. All cables
are to be installed such that no strain is placed on the connection lugs of the equipment
and the cable support system is generally to be independent of the equipment connected.
E. Install cables in manner which will permit future access to conduit and/or cable tray
system for instillation of additional cables and/or utilize the spare capacity or the
conduit/cable tray system.
F. Provide a minimum of 1500mm of slack cable at connections to equipment to facilitate
relocation of equipment.
G. The distribution arrangement may be varied to suit the installation by use
of
rising
busbar mains with tap off units within risers feeding distribution boards and/or
mechanical services motor control centers. Such alternative are subject to approval by
the principal.
H. Similarly the location, number and rating of the L.V. transformers supplying 127/220 or
220/380 volt power may also be altered to suit an alternative distribution system. Such
alterations if proposed are subject to approval by the principal.

END OF SECTION 16426

OCE - 30 January 2014

LOW VOLTAGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES


16426 - 7/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension BuildingKing Saud University


Riyadh

SECTION 16427
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPD)
General
This clause contains provisions for the application of voltage limitation to obtain an
insulation coordination in the cases described in IEC 60364-4-44, IEC 60664-1, IEC 613122 and IEC 61643-12.
This clause gives the requirements for the selection and erection of

surge protective devices (SPDs) for electrical installations of buildings to obtain a


limitation of transient overvoltages of atmospheric origin transmitted via the supply
distribution system and against switching overvoltages;

SPDs for the protection against transient overvoltages caused by direct lightning
strokes or lightning strokes in the vicinity of buildings, protected by a lightning
protection system.

This clause does not take into account surge protective components which may be incorporated in the appliances connected to the installation. The presence of such components
may modify the behaviour of the main surge protective device of the installation and may
need an additional coordination.
This clause applies to a.c. power circuits. For d.c. power circuits, the requirements in this
clause may be applied as far as is useful. For special applications, other or additional
requirements may be necessary in the relevant part 7 of IEC 60364.
Selection and erection of SPDs in building installations
534.2.1 Use of SPDs
IEC 60364-4-44, clause 443, includes protection against overvoltages of atmospheric origin
(caused by indirect, distant lightning strokes) and switching overvoltages. This protection is
normally provided by the installation of test class II SPDs and if necessary test class III
SPDs.
When required in accordance with IEC 60364-4-44 or otherwise specified, SPDs shall be
installed near the origin of the installation or in the main distribution assembly, closest to
the origin of the installation inside the building.
IEC 61312-1 includes protection against the effects of direct lightning strokes or strokes
near to the supply system. IEC 61312-3 describes the correct selection and application of
SPDs according to the Lightning Protection Zones (LPZ) concept. The LPZ concept
describes the installation of test class I, test class II and test class III SPDs.
When required in accordance with IEC 61312-1 or otherwise specified, SPDs shall be
installed at the origin of the installation.
Additional SPDs may be necessary to protect sensitive equipment. Such SPDs shall be
coordinated with the SPDs installed upstream (see 534.2.3.6).
In the case where SPDs are part of the fixed electrical installation, but not mounted inside
a distribution board (e.g. in a socket outlet), their presence shall be indicated by a label on
or as near as is reasonably possible to the origin of the circuit under consideration.
534.2.2 Connection of SPDs
Surge protective devices at or near the origin of the installation shall be connected at least
between the following points (see annexes A, B and C):

OCE - 30 January 2014

Surge Protective Device


16427 - 1/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension BuildingKing Saud University


Riyadh

a) if there is a direct connection between the neutral conductor and the PE at or near the
origin of the installation or if there is no neutral conductor:
between each line conductor and either the main earthing terminal or the main
protective conductor, whichever is the shortest route;
NOTE The impedance connecting the neutral to the PE in IT systems is not considered as a connection

b) if there is no direct connection between the neutral conductor and the PE at or near the
origin of the installation, then either
between each line conductor and either the main earthing terminal or the main protective conductor, and between the neutral conductor and either the main earthing
terminal or the protective conductor, whichever is the shortest route connection
type 1;
or
between each line conductor and the neutral conductor and between the neutral
conductor and either the main earthing terminal or the protective conductor,
whichever route is shorter connection type 2 .
NOTE If a line conductor is earthed, it is considered to be equivalent to a neutral conductor for the application
of this subclause.

SPDs at or near the origin of the installation are, in general, installed as shown in
annexes A to C and according to table 53B:
Table 53B Connection of surge protective devices
dependent on system configuration
System configuration at the installation point of SPD
TT
SPDs
connected
between

TN-C

Installation
according to
Connection
type 1

Connection
type 2

each line
conductor
and PE
conductor

neutral
conductor
and PE
conductor

TN-S

IT with distributed neutral

Installation
according to

Installation
according to

IT without
distributed
neutral

Connection
type 1

Connection
type 2

Connection
type 1

Connection
type 2

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

each line
conductor
and PEN
conductor

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

NA

line
conductors

each line
conductor
and neutral
conductor

534.2.3 Selection of surge protective devices (SPDs)


The SPDs shall comply with IEC 61643-1. Additional information regarding selection and
application is given in IEC 61643-12.
534.2.3.1 Selection with regard to protection level (U p )

OCE - 30 January 2014

Surge Protective Device


16427 - 2/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension BuildingKing Saud University


Riyadh

If clause 443 of IEC 60364-4-44 requires SPDs, the protection level Up of SPDs shall be
selected in accordance with impulse withstand voltage category II of table 44B (IEC 60364-444).
If IEC 61312-1 requires SPDs for the protection against overvoltages caused by direct
lightning strokes, the protection level of these SPDs shall also be selected in accordance
with impulse withstand voltage category II of table 44B in IEC 60364-4-44.
For example in 230/400 V installations, the protection level U p shall not exceed 2,5 kV.
When connection type 2 according to 534.2.2 is used, the above requirements also apply to
the total protection level between line conductors and PE.
When the required protection level cannot be reached with a single set of SPDs, additional,
coordinated SPDs shall be applied to ensure the required protection level.
534.2.3.2 Selection with regard to continuous operating voltage (U c )
The maximum continuous operating voltage U c of SPDs shall be equal to or higher than
shown in the following table 53C.
Table 53C Minimum required U c of the SPD dependent on
supply system configuration
System configuration of distribution network
SPDs connected
between

TT

TN-C

TN-S

IT with
distributed
neutral

IT without
distributed
neutral

line conductor
and neutral conductor

1,1 U o

NA

1,1 U o

1,1 U o

NA

each line conductor and PE conductor

1,1 U o

NA

1,1 U o

Uo a

NA

Uo a

Uo a

NA

NA

1,1 U o

NA

NA

NA

neutral conductor
and PE conductor

3 Uo a

Line-to-line
voltage a

each line conductor and PEN conductor


NA: not applicable
NOTE 1 U o is the line-to-neutral voltage of the low-voltage system.
NOTE 2 This table is based on IEC 61643-1 amendment 1.
a These values are related to worst case fault conditions, therefore the tolerance of 10 % is not taken into account.

534.2.3.3 Selection with regard to temporary overvoltages (TOVs)


The SPDs selected according to 534.2.3 shall withstand the temporary overvoltages due to
faults within low-voltage systems (see clause 442 of IEC 60364-4-44).
This is confirmed by the selection of SPDs which comply with the relevant test
requirements of 7.7.6 of IEC 61643-1.
To fail safely in case of TOVs due to earth faults within the high-voltage system (see IEC
60364-4-44, clause 442), the SPDs connected to the PE shall pass the test of IEC 61643-1
subclause 7.7.4.
In addition, SPDs installed in location 4a according to figure B.2 shall withstand such TOVs
as defined in test of IEC 61643-1 subclause 7.7.4.
NOTE 1 Appropriate pass criteria are under consideration to define the meaning of withstand.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Surge Protective Device


16427 - 3/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension BuildingKing Saud University


Riyadh

NOTE 2 The loss of neutral is not covered by these requirements. Though there is currently no specific
test in IEC 61643-1, SPDs are expected to fail safely.

534.2.3.4 Selection with regard to discharge current (I n ) and impulse current (I imp )
If IEC 60364-4-44 clause 443 requires SPDs, the nominal discharge current I n shall not be
less than 5 kA 8/20 for each mode of protection.
In case of installation according to 534.2.2 connection type 2, the nominal discharge
current I n for the surge protective device connected between the neutral conductor and the
PE shall not be less than 20 kA 8/20 for three-phase systems and 10 kA 8/20 for singlephase systems.
If IEC 61312-1 requires SPDs, the lightning impulse current I imp according to IEC 61643-1
shall be calculated according to IEC 61312-1. Further information is given in IEC 61643-12.
If the current value cannot be established, the value of I imp shall not be less than 12,5 kA
for each mode of protection.
In case of an installation according to 534.2.2 connection type 2, the lightning impulse
current I imp for the surge protective device connected between the neutral conductor and
the PE shall be calculated similarly to the above mentioned standards. If the current value
cannot be established the value of I imp shall not be less than 50 kA for three-phase systems
and 25 kA for single-phase systems.
When a single SPD is used for protection according to both IEC 61312-1 and clause 443
of IEC 60364-4-44, the rating of I n and of I imp shall be in agreement with the above values.
534.2.3.5 Selection with regard to the expected short-circuit current
The short-circuit withstand of the SPDs (in case of SPD failure) together with the specified
associated (internal or external) overcurrent protective device shall be equal to or higher
than the maximum short-circuit current expected at the point of installation taking into
account the maximum overcurrent protective devices specified by the SPD manufacturer.
In addition, when a follow current interrupting rating is declared by the manufacturer, it
shall be equal to or higher than the expected short-circuit current at the point of installation.
SPDs connected between the neutral conductor and the PE in TT- or TN-systems, which
allow a power frequency follow-up current after operation (e.g. spark gaps) shall have a
follow current interrupting rating greater or equal to 100 A.
In IT systems, the follow current interrupting rating for SPDs connected between the neutral
conductor and the PE shall be the same as for SPDs connected between phase and neutral.
534.2.3.6 Co-ordination of SPDs
According to IEC 61312-3 and 61643-12 considerations shall be taken regarding the
necessary co-ordination of SPDs in the installation. The SPD manufacturers shall provide
sufficient information in their documentation about the way to achieve coordination between
SPDs.
534.2.4 Protection against overcurrent and consequences of an SPD failure
Protection against SPDs short-circuits is provided by the overcurrent protective devices F2
(see figures in the annexes A to D) which are to be selected according to the maximum
recommended rating for the overcurrent protective device given in the manufacturers SPD
instructions.
If the overcurrent protective devices F1 (which are part of the installation, see figures in the
annexes A to D) have a rating smaller than or equal to the maximum recommended rating
for the overcurrent protective devices F2, then F2 can be omitted.
The cross-sectional area of conductors connecting the overcurrent protective devices to the
line conductors shall be rated according to the maximum possible short-circuit current (F1,
F2 and F3 are shown in annexes A to D).

OCE - 30 January 2014

Surge Protective Device


16427 - 4/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension BuildingKing Saud University


Riyadh

Depending on the location of protective devices used to disconnect the SPD in case of SPD
failure, priority may be given either to the continuity of supply or to the continuity of
protection.
In all cases, the discrimination between protective devices shall be ensured.

If protective devices are installed in the surge protective device circuit, the continuity of
the supply is ensured, but neither the installation nor the equipment is protected against
possible further overvoltages (see figure 53A). These protective devices may be
internal disconnectors.

If protective devices are inserted in the installation upstream of the circuit where SPDs
are installed, the failure of the surge protective device may cause interruption of supply:
the circuit interruption will last until the surge protective device is replaced (see figure
53B).
E/I

PD

SPD

PD:
SPD:
E/I:

protective device of the SPD


surge protective device
equipment or installation to be protected against overvoltages

Figure 53A Priority to the continuity of supply

PD

E/I

SPD

IEC 945/02

Figure 53B Priority to the continuity of protection


In order to increase the reliability and the probability of having at the same time continuity
of supply and continuity of protection, it is permitted to use the scheme described in figure
53C.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Surge Protective Device


16427 - 5/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension BuildingKing Saud University


Riyadh

E/I

PD1

PD2

SPD1

SPD2

IEC 946/02

Figure 53C Combination of continuity of supply and continuity of protection


In this case, two identical SPDs (SPD 1 and SPD2 ) are connected to two identical protective
devices (PD1 and PD 2 ). The failure mode of one of the SPDs (e.g. SPD1 ) will not influence
the effectiveness of the second SPD (e.g. SPD2 ) and will lead to the operation of its own
protective device (e.g. PD 1 ). Such an arrangement will significantly increase the probability
of having continuity of supply and continuity of protection .
534.2.5 Protection against indirect contact
Protection against indirect contact, as defined in IEC 60364-4-41, shall remain effective in
the protected installation even in case of failures of SPDs.
In case of automatic disconnection of supply:

in TN systems this may, in general, be fulfilled by the overcurrent device on the supply
side of the surge protective device;

in TT systems this may be fulfilled by either


a) the installation of SPDs on the load side of an RCD (see figure B.1), or
b) the installation of SPDs on the supply side of an RCD. Because of the possibility of
the failure of an SPD between N and PE conductors,
the conditions of IEC 60364-4-41, clause 413.1.3.7, shall be met,
and
the SPD shall be installed in accordance with 534.2.2 connection type 2.

in IT systems, no additional measure is needed.

534.2.6 SPD installation in conjunction with RCDs


If SPDs are installed in accordance with 534.2.1 and are on the load side of a residual
current device, an RCD with or without time delay, but having an immunity to surge
currents of at least 3 kA 8/20 shall be used.
NOTE 1 S-type RCDs in accordance with IEC 61008-1 and IEC 61009-1 satisfy this requirement.
NOTE 2 In the case of surge current higher than 3 kA 8/20, the RCD may trip causing interruption of the power
supply.

534.2.7 Measurement of the insulation resistance


During the measurement of the insulation resistance of the installation according to IEC
60364-6-61, SPDs installed at or near the origin of the installation or in a distribution board
and not rated for the test voltage of the insulation measurement may be disconnected.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Surge Protective Device


16427 - 6/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension BuildingKing Saud University


Riyadh

In the case where SPDs connected to the PE conductor are part of a socket outlet, they
shall withstand the test voltage for measuring the insulation resistance according to IEC
60364-6-61.
534.2.8 SPD status indication
Indication that the SPD no longer provides overvoltage protection shall be provided

either by an SPD status indicator;

or by a separate SPD protective device such as addressed in 534.2.4.

534.2.9 Connecting conductors


Connecting conductors are the conductors from the line conductor to the surge
protective device and from the surge protective device to the main earthing terminal or
to the protective conductor.
Because increasing the length of the connecting conductors of SPDs reduces the
effectiveness of overvoltage protection, optimum overvoltage protection is achieved when
all connecting conductors of SPDs are as short as possible (preferably not exceeding 0,5 m
for the total lead length) and without any loops, see figure 53D. If distance a + b (see figure
53D) cannot be reduced below 0,5 m, the scheme in figure 53E may be adopted.

S
P
D

E/I

a + b < 0,50 m

Main earthing terminal or


protective conductor bar
IEC 947/02

Figure 53D Example of installation of SPDs at or near the origin of the installation

OCE - 30 January 2014

Surge Protective Device


16427 - 7/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension BuildingKing Saud University


Riyadh

S
P
D

E/I

b
b < 0,50 m

Main earthing terminal or


protective conductor bar
IEC 948/02

Figure 53E Example of installation of SPDs at


or near the origin of the installation
534.2.10 Cross-section of earthing conductors
The earthing conductors of SPDs at or near the origin of the installation shall have a
minimum cross-sectional area of 4 mm 2 copper or equivalent.
When there is a lightning protection system, a minimum cross-sectional area of 16 mm2
copper or equivalent is necessary for SPDs tested in accordance with test class I of IEC
61643-1.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Surge Protective Device


16427 - 8/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16452
EARTHING / GROUNDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01

SUMMARY
A.

1.02

This Section includes solid earthing of electrical systems (unless otherwise indicated)
and equipment. It includes basic requirements for earthing for protection of life,
equipment, circuits, and systems. Earthing requirements specified in this Section may
be supplemented in other Sections of these Specifications.

SUBMITTALS
A.

General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract
and Sections 16010.

B.

Product Data for earthing rods, connectors and connection materials, and earthing
fittings.

C.

Field tests and observation reports certified by the testing organization /or the
contractor quality assurance department authorized to do the tests, and indicating and
interpreting the test reports for compliance with performance requirements.

D.

Workshop Drawings:
1.

1.03

Submit drawings for approval including but not limited to the following:
a)

Exact location of earth pits, rods and details of installation and connection.

b)

Exact routing of buried earthing conductors with indication of cross


section, depth of laying and covering.

c)

Cross sectional area of all earthing, protective and bonding conductors.

d)

Layout and details of earthing provisions at substations, generator rooms,


switchgear, distribution panel boards etc. indicating fittings used,
insulation, plates and marking, passage and routing of earthing
conductors, conduits, sleeves, etc. giving sizes and dimensions of
components parts .

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

Provide products as specified in this section and in compliance to the following


applicable standards, codes and regulations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

OCE - 30 January 2014

IEC 364 - 3 and IEC 364 - 4 - 4L.


NFPA 70 NEC
IEE wiring regulation for electrical installations (seventeenth edition).
British standard code of practice CP1013.
Local authority regulations.
In case of deviation of the applicable standards the most stringent shall be
applied.

EARTHING / GROUNDING
16452 - 1/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01

MANUFACTURERS
A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of


the following:
1.
2.
3.

Furse - UK .
Helita - France .
Erico weld (USA).

or other equal and approved manufacturer of 15 years minimum experience.


2.02

2.03

2.04

2.05

EARTHING AND BONDING PRODUCTS


A.

Products: of types indicated and sizes and ratio comply with IEE. Where types , sizes ,
ratings and quantities indicated are in excess of IEE requirements , the more stringent
requirements and the greater size , rating , and quantity indicated govern .

B.

Equipment Earthing Conductors:


insulation.

C.

Earthing -Electrode Conductors: Stranded green / yellow cable.

D.

Underground earth Conductors: Bare stranded copper conductor of 120 sq mm. cross section minimum .

E.

Bare Copper Conductors: Conform to IEC / BS standards or equal approved ASTM


standards and shall be of high conductivity copper C101 / C103 .

Insulated stranded copper with green color

MISCELLANEOUS CONDUCTORS
A.

Earthing Bus: Bare, annealed-copper bars of rectangular cross section.

B.

Braided Bonding Jumpers: Copper tape, braided 0.6 sq. mm bare copper wire,
terminated with copper ferrules.

C.

Bonding Straps: Soft copper, 1 mm thick and 50 mm wide, except as indicated.

CONNECTOR PRODUCTS
A.

Pressure Connectors: High-conductivity-plated units.

B.

Bolted Clamps: Heavy-duty type.

C.

Exothermic-Welded Connections: Provided in kit form and selected per manufacturer's


written instructions for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and
connected items.

GROUNDING ELECTRODES AND TEST WELLS


A.

Earthing Rods: Copper-clad steel with high strength steel core and electrolytic - grade
copper outer sheath, molten welded to core.
1.

Size 19 mm by 3 meter extensible as necessary to obtain required earth resistance,


and complete with couplings, head and bolted connector of sufficient size.

2.

Copper thickness should be 2.25mm minimum and should be of 99.9% pure


electrolytic copper molecularly bonded to the steel core .

OCE - 30 January 2014

EARTHING / GROUNDING
16452 - 2/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

3.

Copper clad steel rods should be of low carbon steel with a tensile strength of
approximately 600 N/sq.mm. grade 43 A of BS 4360 or equal .

4.

Couplings should be made from silicon bronze alloy grade CS 101 of B. S 2874 or
bronze alloy grade CA 102 of BS 2871 or equal .

B.

Plate Electrodes: Where indicated shall be copper, square or rectangular shape.


Minimum 3mm thick, size as indicated.

C.

Earth Pit (Test well): Pre cast, square or circular section concrete handhole (minimum
450mm internal diameter) , with concrete cover and as detailed on drawings. Earth rod
corer is to have insert brass plate with inscription earth pit - Do Not Remove.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01

APPLICATION
A.

Equipment Earthing Conductors (Protective conductor) for exposed conductive parts:


Comply with IEC 364 -3 and 364 - 4 - 41 and IEE for types, sizes and quantities of
equipment earthing conductor.
1.

Install separate insulated equipment earthing conductor with circuit conductors


for the following in addition to locations where required by the Code:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Feeders and branch circuits.


Lighting circuits.
Receptacle circuits.
Single-phase motor or appliance branch circuits.
Three-phase motor or appliance branch circuits.
Computer outlet.

2.

Bus way Supply Circuits: Install separate equipment earthing conductor from
the earthing bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution board to
equipment earthing-bar terminal on bus way. Unless otherwise proposed and
approved by the Project Manager .

3.

Computer Outlet Circuits: Install separate equipment earthing conductor in


branch circuit runs from computer area power panels or power-distribution
units.

4.

X-RAY Equipment Circuits: Install separate equipment earthing conductor in


circuits supplying X-ray equipment.

5.

Isolated Grounding-Receptacle Circuits: Install a separate insulated equipment


grounding conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate
grounding conductor from raceway and from panel board grounding terminals.
Terminate at the equipment grounding-conductor terminal of the applicable
derived system or service, except as otherwise indicated.

6.

Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a


branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply raceway with a
nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway
enters enclosure, and install a separate equipment grounding conductor. Isolate
equipment grounding conductor from raceway and from panel board grounding
terminals. Terminate at the equipment grounding-conductor terminal of the
applicable derived system or service, except as otherwise indicated.

OCE - 30 January 2014

EARTHING / GROUNDING
16452 - 3/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

7.

B.

C.

King Saud University

Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install an equipment grounding conductor to


duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and above, including air
cleaners and heaters. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct.

Signal, data and Communication Systems: For telephone, alarm, voice and data,
computer and other communication and as indicated provide separate earth "clean
earth" connection completely isolated from the main earthing system to prevent
electrical interference on the signal and sensitive equipment and instrument. Provide
25mm2. minimum green / yellow insulated copper conductor in raceway from the
separate grounding electrode system to each terminal cabinet service location, wiring,
closet and central equipment location.
1.

Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate


grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch (6-by-50-by-300-mm) grounding
bus.

2.

Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding


terminal.

Electrical System Earthing


1.

Transform Substation Earthing


a)

MV and LV switchgears is to have separate main earthing bar connected to


framework or earth item by bare conductor and earth - electrode by two
insulated earthing conductors one at each end of bar , via testing links .
Earthing conductor is to be as indicated.

b)

Transformer Earthing Terminal: is to be connected to LV main earthing bar


by copper earthing conductor as indicated on the drawings 35 sq.mm
minimum.

c)

Transformer neutral (star point): to be connected by insulated earthing


conductor green / yellow to LV main earthing bar. Neutral earthing
conductor is to be sized for maximum earth fault current for 5 seconds with
final conductor temperature not exceeding 160 deg. C. or sized not less
than 30sq.mm. per 100 KVA of transformer rating, and with a minimum of
50 sq.mm.

d)

Lightning Arresters: are to be directly connected to earth electrode


following the shortest path. Each Lightning arrester is to be connected at a
dedicated earth rod .

e)

Distribution, lighting and power panel boards: are to be connected by


protective conductors run together with incoming. Feeder cable,
connecting earth terminals in panel boards with respective main
distribution switchgears/switchboards .

f)

Generator Plant Earthing


i.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Generator neutral (star point) is to be connected by insulated


earthing conductor through the neutral earthing link or device to
main earthing bar (or separate earth rod) as indicated. Neutral
earthing conductor is to be suitably sized to carry maximum earth
fault current but not less than 30mm2. per 100 KVA of generator
rating with minimum of 50mm2.
EARTHING / GROUNDING
16452 - 4/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

ii.

Generator Earthing Terminal: to be connected to main earthing bar


by copper conductor of cross section not less than 20sq.mm per 100
KVA of generator rating .

D.

Connections to Lightning Protection System: Bond grounding conductors, including


grounding-conductor conduits, to lightning protection down conductors or lightning
protection grounding conductors in compliance with NFPA780 .

E.

Supplementary Equipotential Bonding: all extraneous conductive parts of the building


such as metallic water pipes, drain pipes, metallic conduits , raceways , cable trays and
cable armour, steel structures, tanks, battery racks, pumps and piping are to be
connected to nearest earthing terminals by equipotential bonding conductor. Cross
section of bonding conductor is not be less than half that of the protective conductor
connected to respective earthing terminal and minimum 4mm2 Connect all non current
carrying metallic parts of the electrical/mechanical installation to the earthing system
via main earthing bar or loop located in the mechanical plant room . Earthen conductor
size 35mm2 minimum unless otherwise indicated.

F.

Earthing and bonding Patient Vicinity in Critical Care Areas : (Potential Equalization)
1.

3.02

King Saud University

Patient vicinity in critical care areas defined by NEC 517 shall have a patient
equipment grounding/Earthing point. The patient equipment grounding point
shall be permitted to contain one or more jacks listed for the purpose. An
equipment bonding jumper not less than 6mm2 shall be used to connect the
grounding terminal of all grounding - type receptacles to the patient equipment
grounding point. The bonding conductor shall be permitted to be arranged
centrally or looped as convenient.

INSTALLATION
A.

General: Ground electrical systems and equipment according to IEC/IEE requirements,


except where Drawings or Specifications exceed standard requirements. Other
applicable international codes are accepted if exceeds IEC regulation .

B.

Electrical Room Earthing Bus: Space 25 mm from wall and support from wall 150 mm
above finished floor, except as otherwise indicated. Size location and arrangement as
indicated .

C.

Earthing Rods: Locate a minimum of two-rod length from each other and at least the
same distance from any other earthing electrode.
1.

Drive rods until tops are 150 mm below finished floor or final grade, except as
otherwise indicated.

2.

Interconnect earthing rods with bare conductors buried at least 600mm below
grade. Use exothermic welds, except at test pits wells and as otherwise indicated.
Make these connections without damaging copper coating or exposing steel.

D.

Earthing Conductors: Route along the shortest and straightest paths possible, except as
otherwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may
be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

E.

Underground Earthing Conductors: Use bare copper wire. Bury at least 600 mm below
grade.

OCE - 30 January 2014

EARTHING / GROUNDING
16452 - 5/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

3.03

King Saud University

F.

Metal Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper earthing conductors, sized as
indicated, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or earthing bus, to main
metal water service entrances to building. Connect earthing conductors to main metal
water service pipes by earthing-clamp connectors. Where a dielectric main water
fitting is installed, connect earthing conductor to street side of fitting. Do not install on
earthing jumper across dielectric fittings. Bond earthing-conductor conduit to
conductor at each end.

G.

Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water
meters. Connect to pipe with earthing-clamp connectors.

H.

Bond interior metal piping systems and metal air ducts to equipment earthing
conductors of associated pumps, fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Use
braided-type bonding straps.

I.

Earth Pits: One for each driven earthing electrode, except as otherwise indicated. Set
top of pit flush with finished grade or floor. Fill with 25-mm maximum-size crushed
stone or gravel. Locate as indicated and fabricate in accordance with details indicated .

CONNECTIONS
A.

General: Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized.


Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals
in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.
1.

Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to assure high conductivity and to


make contact points closer in order of galvanic series.

2.

Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.

3.

Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and


mechanical clamps.

4.

Make aluminum-to-galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers


and mechanical clamps.

5.

Where earth connection between dissimilar metals must be made , use bimetallic
fittings and protect by coating with moisture resisting bituminous point or
compound to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.

B.

Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for


underground connections, except those at test wells. Comply with manufacturer's
written instructions. Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating
improper cleaning are not acceptable.

C.

Equipment Earthing-Wire Termination: Use pressure-type earthing lug for earthing


wire termination .

D.

Noncontact Metal Raceway Termination: Where metallic raceways terminate at metal


housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each
conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare
grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at both entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare
grounding conductors, except as otherwise indicated.

E.

Connections at earth pits "Test Wells": as indicated on the detailed drawings .

F.

Tighten screws and bolts for earthing and bonding connectors and terminals according
to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where these requirements are
not available, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

OCE - 30 January 2014

EARTHING / GROUNDING
16452 - 6/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

3.04

King Saud University

G.

Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct


circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended
by manufacturer of connectors. Provide embossing die code or other standard method
to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on
earthing conductor.

H.

Moisture Protection: Where insulated earthing conductors are connected to earthing


rods or earthing buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture
penetration of insulation and cable.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Tests: Subject the completed grounding system to a meager test at each location where
a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure
grounding terminal, and at ground test wells. Measure ground resistance not less than
2 full days after the last trace of precipitation, and without the soil being moistened by
any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or
other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. Perform the tests
according to IEE.

B.

Maximum earthing resistance are as follows:


The overall resistance between the earthing system and the general mass of earth shall
be less than 2.0 ohms. Install additional earth electrodes or earth plates if these figures
not met.

3.05

C.

Excessive Ground Resistance: Where resistance to ground exceeds specified values,


notify the Project Manager promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground
resistance and to accomplish recommended work.

D.

Report: Prepare test reports, certified by the testing organization, of ground resistance
at each test location. Include observations of weather and other phenomena that may
affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.

E.

Electrical continuity of all earthing and protective conductors including main and
supplementary equipotential bonding conductors is to be checked in accordance with
IEE.

F.

Check operation of residual current protective devices.

G.

Check earth loop impedance against calculated figures.

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING


A.

Restore surface features, including vegetation, at areas disturbed by work of this


Section. Reestablish original grades, except as otherwise indicated. Where sod has
been removed, replace it as soon as possible after back filling is completed. Restore
areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other activities to their
original condition. Include top soiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging,
and mulching.
END OF SECTION 16452

OCE - 30 January 2014

EARTHING / GROUNDING
16452 - 7/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension BuildingKing Saud University


Riyadh

SECTION 16470
PANEL BOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01

1.02

SECTION INCLUDES
A.

Examine all other sections of the Specification for requirements, which affect work of
this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section.

B.

Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of the
Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under
the Contract.

SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK


A.

1.03

1.04

1.05

This Specification is for extent of all types of lighting and power panel boards
including cabinets cut-out boxes, as indicated by drawings, schedules and elsewhere
within the Specification.

GUARANTEE
A.

Attention is directed to provisions contained elsewhere regarding guarantees and


warranties for work under this Contract.

B.

Manufacturers shall be provided their guarantees for work under this section.
However, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other
liabilities, which manufacturers and Contractors may have by law or by other
provisions of the Contract Document.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of panel boards and


enclosure, of types and sizes and ratings required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.

B.

Installer: Qualified with at least five years of successful installation experience on


projects with electrical installation work similar to that requirement for the project.

C.

Special Use-Markings: Provide panel-boards, constructed for special use, the British
Standards marks indicating that special type usage.

D.

Comply with applicable BS safety standards pertaining to panel-board and


accessories, and enclosures.

E.

IEE Compliance: Comply with IEE requirements as applicable to installation of panel


boards, cabinets, and cut-out boxes. Comply with IEE articles pertaining to
installation of wiring and equipment in hazardous locations.

F.

BS Compliance: Comply with BS Standards Publications for Electrical Equipment.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Product Data: Submit manufacturers data including and schematic drawings layout
enclosure and all accessories inside panel boards specifications, installation
instruction and general recommendations for each type of panel board required.
Include data substantiating that units comply with requirements.

OCE - 30 January 2014

PANEL BOARDS
16470 - 1/4

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension BuildingKing Saud University


Riyadh

1.06

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLE OF MATERIALS


A.

Handle panel boards and enclosure carefully to prevent breakage, denting or scoring
the finish. Store panel boards and enclosure inside and protect from weather. When
necessary to store outdoors, elevate well above ground enclose with durable,
waterproof wrapping.

PART 2 PRODUCT
2.01

MANUFACTURERS
A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of


the following or equal approved:
1.
2.
3.

2.02

Siemens
Schneider Electric
ABB

GENERAL
A.

Lighting, Power Branch Circuit and Distribution Panel Boards, shall conform to code.
The complete Technical Specification providing bus size, size and number of branch
circuit breakers, branch circuit loads and wiring is provided for each panel board in
the contract electrical schedule volumes.

B.

Enclosures: IP55 suitable for recessed or surface monitoring.

C.

Interior components shall be mounted on back-plate of reinforced steel for rigid


support and accurate alignment.

D.

One flat key tumbler cylinder type door look with two keys per lock shall be
provided.

E.

Provide for enclosure grounding in accordance with Section 16452.

F.

Bus-Bar: Hard drawn high conductivity copper, with silver-plated contact surface
and the following additional requirements.

G.

Finish: Baked grey enamel finish with rust inhibitor.

H.

Provide circuit breakers in accordance with Section 16426. Provide two adjacent
single pole breakers to opposing polarities in such a manner that two pole breakers
can be installed in any location. The same shall be for three adjacent single pole
breakers to opposing polarities.

I.

Neutral and ground buses shall be of the same rating as the phase bus.

J.

Name Plate: One 25mm wide laminated plastic, attached by means of stainless steel
rivets or permanent adhesive, showing panel board number in 13mm white cut-in
letters on black background.

K.

A directory holder with clear plastic or glass plate and metal frame shall be mounted
on the inside of each door.

L.

Protection degree shall be according to IEC.

OCE - 30 January 2014

PANEL BOARDS
16470 - 2/4

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension BuildingKing Saud University


Riyadh

2.03

2.04

2.05

LIGHTING AND POWER PANEL BOARDS


A.

The panel boards shall be of the dead front type with bolt-on circuit breakers in the
mains, if indicated, and branches. The panel boards shall be designed for 380/220
volts, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 hertz application.

B.

The lighting and power panel boards shall be equipped with bolt-on or plug-in type
circuit breakers. Circuit breaker ratings shall be as shown in the panel board
schedules.

C.

Continuous current rating of bus-bars shall be as shown on panel board schedules.

D.

Where a main protective device is not shown, disconnect switches shall be provided.
Bus-bar and branch devices shall be of the sequence phase type connections.

E.

The neutral and a grounding bar shall be mounted at the opposite end of the
structure from the mains and shall have numbered terminals for connection of
neutral and grounding wires.

DISTRIBUTION PANEL BOARDS


A.

Distribution panel boards shall be of the dead front type and shall be designed for
380/220 volts, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 hertz applications. Each distribution panel shall be
enclosed in a sheet metal cabinet with front doors, catches, locks, etc. Locks shall be
fitted for the same key as locks on other lighting and power branch circuit panel
boards. All distribution panel boards shall meet pertinent standards.

B.

The distribution panel boards shall be equipped with bolt-on moulded case circuit
breakers. Circuit breaker ratings shall be as shown on the distribution board
schedules.

C.

Where a main protective device is not shown disconnect switches shall be provided.
Current carrying connections to bus shall be of the bolted type, factory assembled.
Bus bars shall be of the sequence phase type connections and arranged for 3 phase, 4
wire mains or lugs.

D.

The neutral bar shall be mounted at the opposite end of the structure from the mains
and shall have numbered terminals for connection of neutral wires.

E.

Each distribution board shall be equipped with three ampere meters, voltmeter and a
selector switch.

NAME PLATES
A.

Each panel board shall have an affixed engraved nameplate. The nameplate shall be
both in English and Arabic.

B.

Each distribution panel board switch shall be equipped with a nameplate which
indicates the name of the equipment (motor, panel board, etc.) to which the feeder
conductors are connected. Where more than one piece of equipment or panel board
is connected to the circuit this fact shall also appear on the name plate. Feeder
numbers used on the drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01

INSTALLATION
A.

Install panel boards and enclosures, including electrical connections, in accordance


with the manufacturers written instructions, applicable requirements of the IEE

OCE - 30 January 2014

PANEL BOARDS
16470 - 3/4

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension BuildingKing Saud University


Riyadh

Wiring Regulations 16th Edition and in accordance with recognized industry


practices to ensure that products serve the intended function.

3.02

B.

Coordinate installation of panel boards and enclosure with cable and raceway
installation work.

C.

Install only in permanently dry locations away from all mechanical and public health
services.

D.

Anchor enclosure firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are
permanently mechanically secured.

E.

Check ratings of all circuit protection devices.

F.

Provide electrical connections within enclosures.

G.

Fill out panel boards directory card upon completion installation works.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Prior to energization of circuiting, check all accessible connections to manufacturers


torque specifications.

B.

Prior to energization of panel board, check with earth resistance tester phase-tophase and phase-to-earth insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are
fulfilled.

C.

Prior to energization, check panel board for electrical continuity of circuits and for
short circuits.

D.

Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize panel boards and demonstrate
functioning in accordance with requirements.

E.

A separate earthing bus, marked with a yellow green strip along its front and bonded
to the steel cabinet, shall be provided for connecting all earth conductors. Bus bars
shall be copper, shall be securely fastened to bases, and shall not depend upon
breakers for support. All main buses and back pans shall be so designed that branch
breakers may be changed without additional machining, drilling, or tapping.

F.

Panel board assembly shall be so designed that any individual breaker can be
removed without disturbing adjacent units or without loosening or removing
supplemental insulation supplied as a means of obtaining clearances and other
requirements of BS Standards.

G.

Provide panel board accessories and devices including, but not necessarily limited to,
cartridge and plug time delay type fuses, circuit breaker, earth fault protection units,
etc., as recommended by panel board manufacturer for ratings and applications
indicated.

H.

Construction shall allow maintenance of incoming line terminations, main device


connections and all main bus bolted connections to be performed without rear access.

END OF SECTION 16470

OCE - 30 January 2014

PANEL BOARDS
16470 - 4/4

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16475
FUSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01

SUMMARY
A.

Provide labor, materials, equipment and services, and perform operations required for
installation of fuses (0-600 volts) and related work as indicated on the drawings and
specified herein.

B.

Work Included: The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1.

1.02

Fuses : For the protection of down stream LV circuits .

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

Materials and equipment shall conform to the latest edition of reference specifications
specified herein and to applicable codes and requirements of local authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.

Compliance with standards :


a) In general fuses shall comply with IEC 269/BS 88. Other equivalent
international standards US, ANSI, NDE are acceptable .

2.

Compliance to codes .
a)

1.03

SUBMITTALS
A.

Submit the following in accordance with the requirements specified under "Submittals"
in Section 16010.
1.

1.04

IEE wiring regulation and equivalent NEC .

Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data on fuses, including


specifications, electrical characteristics, installation instructions, furnished
specialties and accessories. In addition, include voltages and current ratings,
interrupting ratings, current limitation ratings, time-current trip characteristic
curves, and mounting requirements.

MAINTENANCE
A.

Extra Materials
1.

Maintenance Stock, Fuses: For types and ratings required, furnish additional
fuses, amounting to two sets of 3, for each type and size.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01

MANUFACTURERS
A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fuses of one of the


following:
1.
2.
3.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Siemens
Schneider Electric
ABB
or equal approved .
FUSES
16475 - 1/3

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.02

King Saud University

MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS


A.

Except as otherwise indicated, provide fuses of types, sizes, ratings, and average
time-current and peak let-through current characteristics indicated or specified which
comply with manufacturer's standard design, materials and constructed in accordance
with published product information and with industry standards and configurations.
All fuses shall be of one manufacturer. Comply with requirements specified in Section
16470 "Panel boards" where fuses are used to protect downstream protective devices in
an integrated series short circuit protective configuration.

B.

Utilization categories and types: Shall be in accordance with IEC 269/BS 88 to suit the
application and protection requirement.

C.

Unless other wise specified or indicated all fuses shall be of high rupturing capacity
cartridge type. Each fuse shall be of appropriate rating and fusing factor, with short
circuit interrupting capacity at the point of installation and to provide adequate
protection and discrimination for the circuit.

D.

Fuses shall be of current limiting type unless other wise indicated .

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01

EXAMINATION
A.

3.02

3.03

Examine conditions at the job site where work of this Section is to be performed to
insure proper arrangement and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of job
site conditions.

PREPARATION
A.

Examine the Contract Drawings and specifications in order to insure the completeness
of the work required under this Section.

B.

Verify measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the coordination
and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work of related trades, so as not to
delay job progress.

C.

Provide templates as required to related trade for location of items.

INSTALLATION
A.

Install fuses as indicated; in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and


with recognized industry practices to ensure that protective devices complying with
requirements. Comply with the applicable electrical code and IEC / NEMA standards
for installation of fuses.

B.

Coordinate with other work, including electrical wiring, motor controllers, circuit
breakers, etc. as necessary to interface installation of fuses with other work.

C.

Install fuses in fused switches.

D.

Fuses shall be installed on the job site after installation. Replace fuses which have
opened during construction and testing.

OCE - 30 January 2014

FUSES
16475 - 2/3

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

3.04

King Saud University

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Prior to energization of fusible devices, test devices continuity of circuitry and for
short-circuits. Replace malfunctioning units with new units and then demonstrate
compliance with requirements.
END OF SECTION

OCE - 30 January 2014

FUSES
16475 - 3/3

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16481
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01

1.02

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND RELATED DOCUMENTS


A.

Examine all other sections of the Specification for requirements which affect work of
this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section.

B.

Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of the
Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under
the Contract.

SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK


A.

1.03

1.04

1.05

This Specification is for extent of motor control centers including all types referred to
the drawings, schedules and elsewhere within this specification.

GUARANTEES
A.

Attention is directed to provisions contained elsewhere regarding guarantees and


warranties for work under this Contract.

B.

Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees for work under this section.
However, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities
which manufacturers and Contractors may have by law or by other provisions of the
Contact Documents.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of motor control centers, of


types and sizes and rating required, whose products have been in satisfactory us e in
similar services for not less than 10 years.

B.

Installer: Qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects


with electrical, and mechanical installation work similar to that required for the
project.

C.

Special Use-Markings: Provide motor control center constructed for special use, with
British Standards marks indicating that special type usage.

D.

Comply with applicable BS safety standards pertaining to motor control center and
starters, and enclosures.

E.

IEE Compliance: Comply with IEE requirements as applicable to installation of motor


control centers, cabinets, and cutout boxes. Comply with IEE articles pertaining to
installation of wiring and equipment.

F.

BS Compliance: Comply with BS Standards Publications for Electrical Equipment

SUBMITTALS
A.

Shop Drawings: Include front and side views of enclosures with overall dimensions
shown; conduit entrance locations and requirements; nameplate legends; size and
number of bus bars per phase, neutral, and ground; electrical characteristics including
voltage, frame size and trip ratings, withstand ratings, and time/current curves of all
equipment and components.

OCE - 30 January 2014

MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS


16481 - 1/4

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

1.06

King Saud University

B.

Test Reports: Indicate field test and inspection procedures and test results.

C.

Product Data: Submit manufacturers data including schematic drawings, layout of


enclosure and distribution of protective devices, and starters specification, installation
instructions and general recommendations for each type of motor control center
required. Include data substantiating that units comply with requirements.

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS


A.

Handle motor control center carefully to prevent breakage denting or scoring the
finish. Store motor control center inside and protect from weather. When necessary to
store outdoors, elevate will above ground and enclose durable, waterproof wrapping.

PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.01

CUBICLE CONSTRUCTION
A.

Cubicle pattern motor control center (MCC) shall be supplied by manufacturer of the
component motor control center and protective devices and shall comply with BS 5486:
Part 1 (IEC 439)

B.

The MCC enclosures shall be either pressed or fabricated from sheet steel having a
minimum thickness of 1.7 mm. The steel shall be electro zinc plated, (Zintec) and shall
have a minimum of priming coat, undercoat and finishing coat of paint. The undercoat
and finished coat shall be stove enameled.

C.

The MCC shall house the main circuit breaker or switch, instrumentation and control
equipments, motor starter and protective devices.

D.

The MCC shall be multi cubicle type assembly self supporting structure approximately
2.25m high, independent of wall supports.

E.

The MCC shall be of the universal frame type using die-formed members bolted and
braced. The sides, top and rear shall be covered with removable screw-on plates
having formed edges all around.

F.

The MCC shall consist of the required number of vertical and horizontal sections
bolted together to form one rigid MCC incorporating switching, motor starters, control
elements, and protective devices of the number, ratings and type noted here in or
shown on the drawings with all necessary interconnections, instrumentation and
control wiring.

G.

The MCC shall incorporate bus-bars which shall be of hard drawn high conductivity
copper. These bars shall be TPN + E of the size required. In all cases the bus-bars shall
be noted at not more than 1 ampere per square mm of a minimum 50 % of the full
rated estimate total of MCCBs connected to them. All bus-bars shall be supported on
porcelain insulators, or on laminated lite carriers and braced to withstand mechanical
forces exerted during short circuit conditions when directly connected to a power
source having the indicated available short circuit current.

H.

Small wiring, necessary fuse blocks and terminal blocks within the MCC shall be
furnished when required. All groups of control wires leaving the motor control center
shall be provided with terminal blocks with suitable numbering strips.

I.

An earthing bus and lugs shall be furnished firmly screwed to each vertical section
structure and shall extend the entire length of the motor control center.

OCE - 30 January 2014

MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS


16481 - 2/4

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.02

J.

The motor control center shall be provided with adequate lifting means and shall be
capable of being rolled or moved into installation position and bolted directly to the
floor without the used of floor sills.

K.

The motor control center shall contain a glanding plate at top and/or bottom of the
board to allow easy terminating of cable glands with room to install and connect cable
trays etc.

MAIN INCOMING
A.

2.03

2.04

The main incoming shall be a fixed mounted front removable or withdraw-able type of
moulded case type as indicated on the drawings.

MOTOR STARTERS AND PROTECTIVE DEVICES


A.

The motor starter shall be a fixed mounted on supporting structure. The units shall be
as described on section 16482 and so shown on drawings.

B.

The protective devices shall be of moulded case circuit breaker with short circuit
protective or cartridge fuse as described in section 16426 with special peculiarities to
take the in rush current and frequency starting.

RELAY AND CONTROL COMPARTMENT


A.

2.05

King Saud University

The relay and control compartment shall be of one or more module of the motor
control center. It should equip all the automatic or servo devices include
electromagnetic, logic and static relays, and programmable controllers as described in
control section.

METERING AND INSTRUCMENTATION


A.

All MCCs shall be provided by the following instrumentation:


Three Current Transformers
One volt meter 0-400 volts, 1% accuracy with 4 position selector switch.
One ammeter, 1% accuracy with 4 position selector switch.

The current transformers and the ammeter shall be rated for the distribution board
capacity.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01

INSTALLATION
A.

Install MCC, including electrical connections, in accordance with the Manufacturers


written instruction, applicable with recognized industry practices to ensure that
products serve the intended function.

B.

Tighten accessible bus connections and mechanical fasteners after placing motor
control center.

C.

Install fuses in fusible switches.

D.

Select and install heater elements in motor starters to match installed motor
characteristics.

E.

Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 16195.

OCE - 30 January 2014

MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS


16481 - 3/4

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

3.02

King Saud University

F.

Motor Data: Provide neatly typed label inside each motor starter door identifying
motor served, nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, services factor
and voltage/phase rating.

G.

Co-ordinate installation of MCC with cable, raceway installation work and mechanical
works.

H.

Install only in permanently dry locations away from all mechanical and public health
services.

I.

Anchor enclosures firmly to structural surfaces, ensuring that they are permanently
mechanically secured.

J.

Check ratings of all circuit protection devices.

K.

Provide electrical connection within enclosures.

L.

Fill out MCC directory card upon completion of installation work.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Prior to energization of circuitry, check all accessible connections to manufacturers


torque specifications.

B.

Prior to energization of MCC, check with earth resistance tester phase-to-phase and
phase-to-earth insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled.

C.

Prior to energisation, check MCC for electrical continuity of circuits and for short
circuits.

D.

Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize MCC and demonstrate functioning in
accordance with requirements.

END OF SECTION 16481

OCE - 30 January 2014

MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS


16481 - 4/4

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16482
MOTOR STARTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01

1.02

1.03

1.04

1.05

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.

Examine all other sections of the Specifications for requirements, which affect work of
this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section.

B.

Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of the
Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under
the Contract.

SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK


A.

This specification is for extent of motor starter work as indicated by the drawings.

B.

Types of motor starters in this section include the following:

Motor (under 0.34 KW)

Director-on-line (up to 5 KW but not including 5 KW)

Wye-Delta (Star-Delta 5 KW and over)

Auto Transformer (if specified by manufacturer)

GUARANTEES
A.

Attention is directed to provisions contained elsewhere regarding guarantees and


warranties for work under this Contract.

B.

Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees for work under this section.
However, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities
which manufacturers and Contractors may have law or by other provisions of the
Contract Documents.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture motor starters, of types,


ratings and characteristics required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar services for not less than 10 years.

B.

Installer: Qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on


projects with electrical installation work similar to that required for the project.

C.

IEE compliance: Comply with IEE requirements as applicable to construction and


installation of motor starters.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Product Data: Submit manufacturers data on motor starters.

B.

Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of motor starters showing accurately


scaled equipment layouts and relationship to associated motors and connections to
electrical power panels and feeds.

OCE - 30 January 2014

MOTOR STARTERS
16482 - 1/3

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

C.

King Saud University

Maintenance Stock, Starters: For types and ratings required, furnish additional
starters, amounting to one unit for every 10 installed units, but not less than 5 units
of each.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01

STARTERS
A.

General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide motor starters and ancillary


components which comply with manufacturers standard materials, design and
construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for
complete installation.

B.

AC Fractional HP Manual Starters: Provide manual single-phase fractional KW


motor starters, of types, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated; equipped
with thermal overload relay with field adjustment capability of plus or minus 10%
variation of nominal overload rating, for protection of 220/380 V motors of less than
0.34KW. Provide starters with quick-make quick-break trip free toggle mechanisms,
green pilot lights, selector switches for local remote control, start-stop push buttons,
a manual reset push button; and with toggle operated handle with handle lock-off.

C.

Direct-on-Line Starters: Direct-on-line starters to be used on motors below 5KW. All


in accordance with BS sizes requirements. Single-phase voltage 220V or phase to
phase 380V as indicated on drawings/schedules.

D.

Star-Delta Starters: Provide Star-delta starters, of types, sizes, ratings, electrical


characteristics and BS sizes indicated. Construct starters with resistor-type closedcircuit transition wiring, including three 3-pole contractors, adjustable electronic
timer, and 3-pole overload protection relay. Equip with START-STOP push button
for control. Voltage 220V phase to phase as indicated on drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01

INSTALLATION OF MOTOR STARTERS


A.

Install motor starters as indicated in compliance with manufacturers written


instructions, applicable requirements for IEE standards, and BS Standard of
Installation, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project
requirements.

B.

Coordinate with other work, motor and electrical wiring/cabling work, as necessary
to interface installation of motor starters with other work.

C.

Install fuses in fusible disconnects, if any.

D.

Select and install overload heater elements in motor controllers to match installed
motor characteristics.

E.

Provided engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 16195.

F.

Provide neatly typed label inside each motor controller door identifying motor
served, nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, and
voltage/phase rating.

OCE - 30 January 2014

MOTOR STARTERS
16482 - 2/3

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

3.02

3.03

King Saud University

ADJUST AND CLEAN


A.

Inspect operating mechanisms for malfunctioning and where necessary, adjust units
for free mechanical movement.

B.

Touch-up scratched or marred surface to match original finish.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Subsequent to wire/cable hoop-up, energize motor starters and demonstrate


functioning of equipment in accordance with requirements; where necessary correct
malfunctioning units.

END OF SECTION 16482

OCE - 30 January 2014

MOTOR STARTERS
16482 - 3/3

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16485
ENCLOSED CONTACTORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01

1.02

GENERAL REQUIRMENTS
A.

Examine all other sections of the Specification for requirements which affect work of
this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section.

B.

Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of the
Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under
the Contract.

SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK


A.

This Specification is for extent of enclosed contactors as indicated by the drawings.

B.

Types of enclosed contactors in this section include the following:

1.03

1.04

1.05

General Purpose Contactors


Lighting Contactors.

GUARANTEES
A.

Attention is directed to provisions contained elsewhere regarding guarantees and


warranties for work under this Contract.

B.

Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees for work under this section.
However, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other
liabilities which manufacturers and Contractors may have by law or by other
provisions of the Contact Documents.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of motor control centres, of


types and sizes and rating required, whose products have been in satisfactory use
in similar services for not less than 10 years.

B.

Installer: Qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on


projects with electrical, and mechanical installation work similar to that required for
the project.

C.

IEE Compliance: Comply with IEE requirements as applicable to construction and


installation of motor starters.

SUBMITTAL
A.

Product Data: Submit manufacturers data on enclosed contactors.

B.

Shop Drawings: submit dimensioned drawings of enclosed contactors showing


accurately scaled equipment layouts and spatial relationship to associated panels
and feeds.

OCE - 30 January 2014

ENCLOSED CONTACTORS
16485 - 1/2

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

C.

King Saud University

Maintenance Stock, Enclosed Contactors: For types and ratings required, furnish
additional contactors, amounting to one unit for every 10 installed units, but not
less than 5 units of each.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01

2.02

2.03

GENERAL PURPOSE CONTACTORS


A.

Description: NEMA ICS 2, AC general purpose magnetic contactor.

B.

Coil Voltage: 380 or 220 volts, 60 Hertz as indicated.

C.

Poles: One, Two, Three as indicated.

LIGHTING CONTACTORS
A.

Description: NEMA ICS 2, magnetic lighting contactor.

B.

Configuration: Electrically held 2 wire control.

C.

Coil Voltage: AS indicated.

D.

Poles: As indicated.

E.

Contact Rating: As indicated.

ACCESSORIES
A.

Pushbuttons and Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2, general duty type.

B.

Including Lights: NEMA ICS 2, push to-test type.

C.

Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, Class A300.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01

3.02

INSTALLATION
A.

Install enclosed contactors as indicated in compliance with manufacturers written


instructions, applicable requirements for IEE standards and BS Standard of
Installation, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project
requirements.

B.

Coordinate with other work, motor and electrical wiring/cabling work, as


necessary to interface installation of enclosed contactors with other work.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Subsequent to wire/cable hook-up energize enclosed contractors and demonstrate


functioning of equipment in accordance with requirements; where necessary correct
malfunctioning units.

END OF SECTION 16485

OCE - 30 January 2014

ENCLOSED CONTACTORS
16485 - 2/2

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16495
TRANSFER SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01

SUMMARY
A.

This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less and the following items:
1.
2.
3.
4.

1.02

1.03

Automatic transfer switch.


Bypass/isolation switch.
Non-automatic transfer switch.
Remote annunciation system.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Product Data: For each switch specified. Include dimensioned plans, sections, and
elevations showing minimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space,
installed features and devices, and materials lists.

B.

Wiring Diagrams: Details of wiring for transfer switches and differentiating between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Show both power and control
wiring.

C.

Single-Line Diagram: For each combined transfer switch and bypass/isolation


switch, show connections between transfer switch, bypass/isolation switch, power
sources, and load; and show provisions.

D.

Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that products furnished


comply with requirements and that switches have been tested for short-circuit closing
and withstand ratings applicable to units for Project.

E.

Qualification Data:
Article.

F.

Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
performance requirements.

G.

Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in the maintenance manuals
specified in section 16010. Include all features and operating sequences, both
automatic and manual. List all factory settings of relays and provide relay-setting
and calibration instructions.

For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance"

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

Type Test Qualifications : Should be presented for the products and witnessed by
international third party testing Agency for compliance of the products to standards
and requirement .

B.

Emergency Service : (Local representative ). Manufacturer shall maintain Emergency


center with the area of the project or a responsive local representative for emergency
maintenance and repairs at Project site at his works within 24-hour maximum
response time.

OCE - 30 January 2014

TRANSFER SWITCHES
16495 - 1/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

C.

Source Limitations: Obtain automatic transfer switch, bypass/isolation switch, nonautomatic transfer switch, remote annunciators, and remote annunciator and control
panels from a single manufacturer who assumes responsibility for all components.

D.

Standards:
1.

Comply with ISO 3046 and relevant IEC standards or equal and the followings.
a)

NFPA 99 standards for Essential Electrical systems for Health care


facilities and NFPA 110 "Standards for Emergency and standards by
power system .

b)

Comply with IEC 529, Enclosure protection classes or NEMA equivalent


standards.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01

MANUFACTURERS
A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of


the following or equal approved:
1.

Conventional Transfer Switches:


a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.

2.

Transfer Switches Using Molded-Case Switches or Circuit Breakers:


a.
b.
c.
d.

2.02

Caterpillar, Inc.; Engine Division.


Emerson Electric Co.; Automatic Switch Co. Subsidiary.
Generac Corp.
Kohler Co.; Generator Division.
Onan Corp.; Electrical Products Division.
Schneider Electric .
Zenith Controls, Inc.

Eaton Corp.; Westinghouse & Cutler-Hammer Products.


Group schnieder .
ABB.
Siemens.

GENERAL TRANSFER-SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS


A.

B.

Number of poles, Current and voltage ratings: As indicated .


1.

Units Smaller than 600 A: Do not have derating current rating for different
classes or mixtures of loads, including 100 percent tungsten filament lamp or
100 percent inductive load.

2.

Units 600 Amperes and larger have current ratings that apply to mixtures of
loads including 30- percent tungsten filament lamp load .

Tested Fault-Current Ratings : Closing and withstand rating exceed the indicated
available rms. symmetrical fault current at the equipment terminals based on testing
according to IEC 947 or UL 1008 at full - rated system voltage and 20 percent power
factor. Rate each product for withstand duration time as following when tested for
rated short - circuit current correlated with the actual type of circuit protection device
indicated for transfer switches for this project .

OCE - 30 January 2014

TRANSFER SWITCHES
16495 - 2/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

1.

Molded case circuit breaker, 150 Ampere or smaller: 1.5 closing and withstand
duration cycles.

2.

Molded case circuit breakers, larger than 150 Amperes: 3 closing and
withstand duration cycles.

3.

Power circuit breaker: 10 closing and withstand duration cycles.

4.

Current -Limiting Fuses: 0.5 (nominal) closing and withstand duration cycles.

C.

Annunciation and Control Interface Components: Devices at transfer switches for


communicating with remote annunciators or annunciator and control panels have
communications capability matched with the remote device.

D.

Solid-State Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings is plus or minus 2 percent or


better over an operating temperature range of minus 20 deg C to 70 deg C.

E.

Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: According to IEC standards or ANS 1 C37 - 90 - 1-and NEMA ICS - 1 .

F.

Neutral Terminal: Where 2- or 3-pole switches are indicated, provide fully rated,
solid, un-switched neutral terminal, unless otherwise indicated.

G.

Four-Pole Switches: Where 4-pole switches are indicated, provide neutral switching.

H.

Oversize Neutral: For equipment associated with non -liners loads and as indicated ,
ampacity and switch rating of neutral are double the normal rating of the switch .

I.

Enclosures: IP 42 to IEC 529 or equivalent NENA type enclosure , unless otherwise


indicated .

J.

Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label consistent with Shop
Drawings, either by color code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable tape
markers at termination.
1.

Designated Terminals: Pressure type suitable for types and sizes of field wiring
indicated.

2.

Power-Terminal Arrangement and Field-Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side,


or bottom entrance of feeder conductors as indicated.

3.

Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips.

K.

Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a non-fused, momentarily energized solenoid or


electric motor-operated mechanism, mechanically and electrically interlocked in both
directions.

L.

Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous-duty repetitive transfer of full-rated


current between active power sources.
1.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Limitation: Switches using molded-case switch or insulated-case circuit-breaker


components and switches using contactors not designed for continuous-duty
repetitive switching between active power sources are not acceptable.

TRANSFER SWITCHES
16495 - 3/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

M.
2.03

2.04

King Saud University

2.

Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions.

3.

Switch Contacts: Silver composition for load current switching. Units rated
225 Ampere and more have separate arcing contacts .

Over current devices are not part of switch products .

AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH


A.

Comply with ISO 3046/IEC and level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.
(Standards for Emergency and stand by power systems ).

B.

Comply with NFPA 20 for fire-pump transfer switches. Standards for the Installation
of centrifugal fire Pumps for ATSS serving fire pumps .

C.

Switching Arrangement: Double-throw type, incapable of pauses or intermediate


position stops during normal functioning, unless otherwise indicated.

D.

Manual Switch Operation: Manually operated under load, with the door closed, and
with either or both sources energized. Transfer time is the same as for electrical
operation. Control circuit automatically disconnects from electrical operator during
manual operation.

E.

Signal-before-Transfer Contacts: A set of normally open/normally closed dry


contacts operates in advance of retransfer to normal source. Interval is adjustable
from 1 to 30 seconds.

F.

Digital Communications Interface: Where indicated provide full-duplex RS 422 type,


matched to capability of remote annunciator or annunciator and control panel.

AUTOMATIC TRANSFER-SWITCH FEATURES


A.

Voltage sensing for each phase of normal source. Pickup voltage is adjustable from
85 to 100 percent of nominal, and dropout voltage is adjustable from 75 to 98 percent
of pickup value. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent.

B.

Time delay for override of normal-source voltage sensing delays transfer and engine
start signals. Adjustable 0 to 6 seconds and factory set at 1 second.

C.

Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevents premature transfer to an emergency


generator set. Pickup voltage is adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal.
Factory set to pickup at 90 percent. Pickup frequency is adjustable from 90 to 100
percent of nominal. Factory set to pickup at 95 percent.

D.

Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes and
factory set at 10 minutes. Provides automatic defeat of the delay on loss of voltage or
sustained under voltage of the emergency source, provided normal supply has been
restored.

E.

Test Switch: Simulates normal-source failure.

F.

Switch-Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected.

G.

Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via the transfer-switch,


normal- and emergency-source sensing circuits.

OCE - 30 January 2014

TRANSFER SWITCHES
16495 - 4/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.05

King Saud University

1.

Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal


Source Available."

2.

Emergency Power Supervision:


"Emergency Source Available."

Red light with nameplate engraved

H.

Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: 2 normally open single-pole, double-throw contacts


for each switch position, rated 10 A at 240 V, ac.

I.

Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so automatic


transfer switch will remain connected to emergency power source regardless of the
condition of the normal source. A pilot light indicates override status.

J.

Engine Starting Contacts: 1 isolated, normally closed and 1 isolated, normally open.
Contacts are gold flashed or gold plated and rated 10 A at 32 V, dc minimum.

K.

Engine Shutdown Contacts: Time delay adjustable from 0 to 5 minutes; factory set at
5 minutes. Initiates shutdown at remote engine-generator controls after retransfer of
load to normal source.

BYPASS / ISOLATION SWITCH


A.

Comply with requirements for Level1 equipment per NFPA 110. Or equal 150 / IEC
standards.

B.

Description: Manual type, arranged to select and connect either source of power
directly to the load, isolating the transfer switch from the load and from both power
sources. Include the following features for each combined automatic transfer switch
and bypass/isolation switch:

C.

1.

Means to lock the bypass/isolation in the position that isolates the transfer
switch, with an arrangement that permits complete electrical testing of the
transfer switch while isolated. While isolated, interlocks prevent transferswitch operation, except for testing or maintenance.

2.

Draw-out Arrangement for Transfer Switch: Provides physical separation


from live parts and accessibility for testing and maintenance operations.

3.

Bypass/Isolation Switch Current, Voltage, Closing, and short-circuit


Withstand Ratings: Equal to or greater than those of the associated automatic
transfer switch, and with the same phase arrangement and number of poles.

4.

Contact temperatures of bypass/isolation switches do not exceed those of


automatic transfer-switch contacts when they are carrying rated load.

5.

Operability: Constructed so load bypass and transfer-switch isolation can be


performed by 1 person in no more than 2 operations in 15 seconds or less.

6.

Legend: Manufacturer's standard legend for control labels and instruction


signs give detailed operating instructions.

7.

Maintainability: Fabricate to allow convenient removal of major components


from the front without removing other parts or main power conductors.

Interconnection of Bypass/Isolation Switches with Automatic Transfer Switches:


Factory-installed copper bus bars, plated at connection points and braced for the
indicated available short-circuit current.

OCE - 30 January 2014

TRANSFER SWITCHES
16495 - 5/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.06

2.07

MANUAL NON-AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH (CHANGE OVER SWITCH)


A.

Comply with the requirements of IEC 947 and or NFPA 110 for non-automatic
transfer switches.

B.

Operation: By external manual handle operable only with door closed , provide quick
make quick break manual switching action .Switch is capable of manually
transferring the load in either direction with either or both sources energized .

C.

Double-Throw Switching Arrangement: Incapable of pauses or intermediate position


stops during switching sequence.

D.

Mechanical position indication for either sources .

REMOTE ANNUNCIATION SYSTEM


A.

2.08

Remote annunciation system for condition at indicated transfer switch shall be via
Building automation system and shall include the following:
1.

Sources available, as defined by actual pickup and dropout settings of transferswitch controls.

2.

Switch position.

3.

Switch in test mode.

FINISHES
A.

2.09

King Saud University

Enclosures: Manufacturer's standard enamel over corrosion-resistant pretreatment


and primer.

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Factory Test Components, Assembled Switches, and Associated Equipment: Ensure


proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-delay
settings for compliance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test
complying with IEC standards or NEMA ICS10.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01

3.02

INSTALLATION
A.

Floor Mounting of Switches: Level and anchor unit to floor.

B.

Identify components according to Division16 Section "Electrical Identification."

C.

Identify components according to Division16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and


Methods."

WIRING TO REMOTE COMPONENTS


A.

3.03

Match type and number of cables and conductors to control and communications
requirements of transfer switches used. Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost
to Owner if necessary to accommodate required wiring.

CONNECTIONS
A.

Tighten factory made connections, including connectors, terminals, bus joints,


mountings, and grounding .Tighten field connected connectors and terminals

OCE - 30 January 2014

TRANSFER SWITCHES
16495 - 6/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

including screws and bolts, according to equipment manufacturers published torque


tightening values. When manufacturers torque requirements are not indicated ,
tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torque specified in UL
standards 486 A & 486 B .
B.
3.04

Grounding: Make equipment grounding connections for transfer switch units as


indicated and specified in division 16 section "grounding ".

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Preliminary Tests: Perform electrical tests as recommended by manufacturer and as


follows:
1.

Measure phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground insulation resistance levels with


insulation resistance tester. Include external annunciator and control circuits.
Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Meet
manufacturer's specified minimum resistance.

2.

Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.

B.

Field Tests: Give 7 days' advance notice of tests and perform tests in presence of
Owner's representative.

C.

Coordinate tests with tests of generator plant and run them concurrently.

D.

Tests: As recommended by manufacturer and under his representative supervision


and as follows :
1.

Contact Resistance Test: Measure resistance of power contacts for automatic


transfer switches, non-automatic transfer switches, and bypass/isolation
switches. Resolve values in excess of 500 micro-ohms and differences between
adjacent poles exceeding 50 percent.

2.

Operational Tests:
Demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational
function for each switch at least 3 times.
a.

Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches


and of emergency source with normal source available.

b.

Simulate low phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source


to automatic transfer switches.

c.

Verify time-delay settings and pickup and dropout voltages.

E.

Test Failures: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and prepare for retest. Verify
that equipment meets specified requirements.

F.

Reports: Maintain a written record of observations and tests. Report defective


materials and workmanship and retest corrected items. Record adjustable relay
settings and measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a
label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

END OF SECTION 16495

OCE - 30 January 2014

TRANSFER SWITCHES
16495 - 7/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16500
LIGHTING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01

SUMMARY
A.

Provide labor, materials, equipment ,accessories and services, and perform operations
for installation of lighting system including all hardware necessary for installation
whether so detailed under fixture description or not .

B.

Work Included: The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1.

High-intensity discharge (HID) lighting fixtures.


a.
b.

1.02

Metal-halide.
High-pressure sodium.

2.

Fluorescent lighting fixtures.

3.

Compact fluorescent lighting fixtures.

4.

Incandescent lighting fixtures.

5.

Decorative lighting fixtures.

8.

Other fixtures per LUMINAIRES SPECIFICATION SHEETS.

9.

The work shall include all necessary hardware and accessories to provide
complete workable system.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

Materials and equipment shall conform to the latest edition of reference specifications
specified herein and to applicable codes and requirements of local authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.

Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local code requirements of


the authority having jurisdiction as applicable to installation, and construction of
lighting fixtures, poles and standards.

2.

Comply with the following standards.


SS A 33
SS A 34
SS A 138
SS A 139
BS 55
BS 61
BS 64
BS 81
BS 188

1.03

BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
BS
IEC

238
400
432
566
598
1833
2818
598

SUBMITTALS
A.

Submit the following in accordance with the requirements specified under "Submittals"
in Section 16010.

OCE - 30 January 2014

LIGHTING SYSTEM
16500 - 1/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

1.04

1.05

King Saud University

1.

Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions


on each type of lighting fixture and component. Confirmation that control gear is
suitable for prolonged and continuous service in an ambient temperature of 50
0C. Specify power factor, type and quality of any plastic materials used in the
fittings.

2.

Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each lighting fixture and accessory on
separate sheets, clearly showing dimensions, mounting details, light control
assemblies, conduit entrances, photometric information and test reports
(prepared by an independent testing laboratory) for luminance, efficiency, and
comfort levels. Submit details indicating compatibility with ceiling grid system.
a.

Provide iso-footcandle (isolux) plot diagram of foot-candles on horizontal


pavement surface which shows composite values of illuminance projected
from the arrangement of light sources from exterior roadway, parking lot
and area fixture locations and heights. Show on the graphic plots the
locations, spacing and heights of luminaries.

b.

Submit manufacturer's data on electrical poles, standards and hardware;


include certified dimension drawings for fabricated poles, standards, and
mast arms.

c.

Samples: Submit one operating unit for each type of lighting fixture
specified to the Project Manager upon request at no cost to the Owner. In
the event that alternate make is offered provide a sample for comparison
unless other - wise specified or dictated by the Project Manager .

DESIGN CRITERIA
A.

Lighting layout and fixtures configuration based on selected fixtures type and
Engineering calculation. The contractor shall verily the calculations in light of the
approved fixtures type with detailed calculation report to verily illuminance intensities
and quality of lighting as specified and to the satisfaction of the Project Manager.

B.

The contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the work in this division with the
components of ceiling systems specified and other works.

C.

Lighting fittings shall be of first class quality , made by approved manufacturer and
shall be suitable for trouble free operation on the system voltage at site.

D.

Lighting fixtures shall be controlled by switches and dimmers as shown on layout


drawings. Lighting fixtures in public areas , corridors and parking areas shall be
controlled centrally from the building management system in addition to local switches
unless otherwise indicated or shown on the drawing. Provision shall be provided in the
lighting panels for remote control. All necessary equipment and devices required for
the purpose shall be provided.

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING


A.

Deliver lighting fixtures, accessories, poles and standards, in factory-fabricated


containers or wrappings, which properly protect fixtures from damage.

B.

Store lighting fixtures, accessories, poles and standards in original packaging. Store
inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme
temperatures, humidity, laid flat and blocked off ground.

OCE - 30 January 2014

LIGHTING SYSTEM
16500 - 2/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

C.

King Saud University

Handle lighting fixtures, accessories, poles and standards carefully to prevent damage,
breaking, and scoring of finishes. Do not install damaged units or components; replace
with new.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01

MANUFACTURERS
A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of


the following:
1.

Lighting Fixtures
a.
b.
c.
d.

2.

Lamps
a.
b.
c.
d.

2.02

Saudi Lighting Company


Zumtobel Staff
Erco.
BEGA.

Osram.
General Electric Co.
Philips Lighting Co.
Mazda - France .

MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT


A.

Provide lighting fixtures, of sizes, types and ratings indicated; including, but not
limited to, housings, lamps, lamp holders, reflectors, energy efficient ballasts, starters
and wiring. Ship fixtures factory-assembled, with those components required for
installation. Design fixtures with concealed hinges and catches, with metal parts
grounded as common unit, and so constructed as to dampen ballast-generated noise.

B.

Pendant fixtures shall be furnished with ball or swivel type aligners unless otherwise
noted per fixture type.

C.

Where fluorescent fixtures are mounted in continuous rows, the wires through the
channels shall be 2.5 mm2 minimum flexible heat resistance 450 / 750 volt grade, 90
degree rated minimum.

D.

Enclosures: Fabricate fixture enclosures with a minimum of 1mm thick cold rolled
sheet steel. Enclosures may be constructed of other metals, provided they are
equivalent in mechanical strength and acceptable for the purpose.

E.

Sheet Metal Work: Sheet metal work shall be free from tool marks and dents, and shall
have accurate angles bent as sharp as compatible with the gauges of the required metal.
Intersections and joints shall be formed true of adequate strength and structural rigidity
to prevent any distortion after assembly.

F.

Housings shall be so constructed that electrical components are easily accessible and
replaceable without removing fixtures from their mountings, or disassembly of
adjacent construction.

G.

Castings: Castings shall be exact replicas of the approved patterns and shall be free of
sand pits, blemishes, scales and rust, and shall be smoothly finished. Tolerance shall be
provided for any shrinkage of the metal castings in order that the finished castings will
accurately fit in their designated locations.

OCE - 30 January 2014

LIGHTING SYSTEM
16500 - 3/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

H.

King Saud University

Lamp sockets in lighting fixtures shall be suitable for the indicated lamps and shall be
set so that lamps are positioned in optically correct relation to lighting fixture
components. If adjustable socket positions are provided, socket should be preset in
factory for lamp specified. If different socket positions are specified for same fixtures,
sockets shall be preset for each type, and cartons marked accordingly. Lamp holders for
fluorescent fixtures shall be white polycarbonate and to IEC 400, and shall be of
standard two-pin tubular lamps, locking angles shall be 30 deg. to both sides. Edison
screw lamp holders shall be designed so that only lamp cap makes electrical contract
when fully screwed home, and to have means to prevent unscrewing of the lamp due
to vibration or similar cause.
Lamp holders for tungsten lamps shall comply with IEC 61 and IEC 238. Lamp holders
shall consist of heat resistant plastic or porcelain Edison screw type E14 , E27 and E40 .

I.

Hardware for steel and aluminum fixtures, screws, bolts, nuts, and other fastening and
latching hardware shall be cadmium or equivalent plated unless otherwise indicated.
For stainless steel fixtures, hardware shall be stainless steel. For bronze fixtures,
hardware shall be stainless steel or bronze.

J.

Temperatures: Fixtures and ballasts shall operate within the temperature limits of their
design and as specified by IEC in the applications and mounting conditions herein
specified or shown on drawings.

K.

Parabolic cones shall be guaranteed against discoloration for a minimum of ten years,
and, in the event premature discoloration, shall be replaced by the manufacturer,
including both materials and the cost of labor.

L.

Aluminum reflectors shall be finished specular, semi- specular, or diffuse as required


and shall meet or exceed IEC specifications. Minimum requirements of reflector
finishes for interior and exterior service shall be as follows:
DESCRIPTION OF SERVICE
Normal interior
Commercial service
General interior industrial &
Exterior work reflector protected
by glass covering.
Exterior industrial & commercial
Reflector not protected.

MINIMUM
WEIGHT OF
SQUARE INCH

5.0
7.5

10.0

MIN. REFLECTANCE PERCENT


Specular
Semi-Specular
Diffuse
Diffuse

83

75

78.0

73.0

78.0

75.0

M.

Plastic for lenses and diffusers shall be formed of colorless 100% virgin acrylic. The
quality of the raw material must exceed IES, SPI, and IEC Specifications by at least 100
percent which, as a minimum standard, shall not exceed a yellow-ness factor of 3 after
2,000 hours of exposure in the Fadeometer or as tested by an independent testing
laboratory. Acrylic plastic lenses and diffusers shall be properly cast, molded or
extruded as specified, and shall remain free of any dimensional instability,
discoloration, or loss of light transmittance for at least 15 years.

N.

Mechanical: Lenses, louvers, or other light diffusing elements shall be removable, but
positively held so that hinging or other normal motion will not cause them to drop out.

O.

Painted Surface: Synthetic enamel, with acrylic alkyd, epoxy, polyester, or


polyurethane base, light stabilized, baked on at 3500F minimum, catalytically or photo
chemically polymerized after application.

OCE - 30 January 2014

LIGHTING SYSTEM
16500 - 4/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

P.

White Finishes: Minimum of 85 percent reflectance.

Q.

Ceiling opening frames shall either be manufactured of non-ferrous metal, or be


suitably dust-proofed after fabrication.

R.

Undercoat: Except for stainless steel give ferrous metal surfaces a five stage phosphate
treatment or other acceptable base bonding treatment before final painting and after
fabrication.

S.

Unpainted Non-Reflecting Surfaces: Shall be satin finished and coated with a baked-on
clear lacquer to preserve the surface. Where aluminum surfaces are treated with an
anodic process, the clear lacquer coating may be omitted.

T.

Unpainted Aluminum Surfaces: Finish interior aluminum trims and anodized coating
of not less 0.0 12 mg. per square mm of a color and surface as selected by the Project
Manager. Finish exterior aluminum and aluminum trims with an anodized coating of
not less than 0.054 mg. per square mm, of a color and surface finish as selected by the
Project Manager and as per the fixtures schedule.

U.

Porcelain Enamel Surfaces: Apply porcelain finishes smoothly. Finish shall be not less
than 7.5 mils thick of non-yellowing, white, vitreous porcelain enamel with a
reflectance of not less than 85 percent.

V.

Wiring: Provide electrical wiring within fixture suitable for connecting to branch
circuit wiring as follows:
1.

W.

Hard wire , 1.5 mm2 minimum cross section , heat resistant up to 105 deg. C.
PVC - ht insulated wire .

Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts: High power factor, in complying with IEC 82. Two lamp
type wherever feasible (3 lamp - type not acceptable), lowest sound level to IEC or
lower, lowest case temperature rise rating. High stable power delivery to the lamp even
at unstable power supply within 198 to 264 V oscillations.
1.

Ballasts shall be rated for reliable starting down to 0 degrees Fahrenheit for
fixtures installed outdoors or in unheated areas.

2.

Unless other wise specified or shown on the LUMINAIRES SPECIFICATION


SHEETS, ballast shall be of rabid start, Energy saving type , electronic RFI
protected , of Philips manufacture or equal approved.

3.

Dimming: Suitable for use with dimming system as specified or as shown on


drawings.

X.

High-Intensity Discharge Lamp Ballasts: HID lamp ballasts, of ratings, types and
makes as recommended by lamp manufacturer, which properly mates and matches
lamps to electrical supply by providing appropriate voltages and impedance for which
lamps are designed. Design ballast to operate lamp within the lamp's power trapezoid
requirements.

Y.

Lamps
1.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Provide fluorescent lamps of energy saving types as indicated. Tubular


fluorescent lamps shall comply with IEC 81, BS, 853 / SSA B8 and SSA/39. The
color shall be day light unless otherwise indicated.

LIGHTING SYSTEM
16500 - 5/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

The individual tube sizes shall have not less than the following lumens output
after 100 hours life.
58 W
36
18 W

Z.

AA.

:
:
:

5200 lumens
3350 lumens
1350 lumens

2.

Provide clear/phosphor coated metal halide lamps in wattage indicated. Lamps


shall be self-extinguishing in the event of outer bulb breakage or puncture.

3.

Provide high-pressure sodium lamps in wattage indicated.

4.

Provide incandescent lamps in wattage and types as indicated, rated 220 volts 60
HZ unless otherwise indicated. Lamps 200 W and below shall have BC screw
sockets and 300W and larger GES screw type base.

Lighting Fixture Types


1.

Fixtures must comply with minimum requirements as stated herein. Review


architectural drawings and specifications to verify ceiling types, modules,
suspension systems appropriate to installation.

2.

Fixture Type: Refer to LUMINAIRES SPECIFICATION SHEETS Appendix I for


each type of fixtures .

Electrical Poles and Standards


1.

Metal Lighting Standards: Provide pre-stressed concrete, raceway-type, lighting


poles and standards, of sizes and types indicated, comprised of shafts and
brackets, and construct with the following construction features:
a.

Material: Extruded aluminum.

b.

Configuration: Anchor base type with handhole and cover where


indicated. Hand hole shall be at 800 mm from finished flour level .

c.

Metal Lighting Standards accessories: Provide accessories for metal halide


lighting standards, including anchor bolts, as recommended by lighting
standards manufacturer, of sizes and materials needed to meet erection
and loading application requirements, and to withstand project site
conditions .

d.

Painting unless otherwise indicated all aluminum poles and accessory are
painted by epoxy coating electro coating, corrosion resistant, UV stabilized anti - yellowing and subject to phosphochromate treatment and
have a rough finish in polyurethane resin . Color to the Project Manager
approval.

BB.

Noise level: Control gears for indoor fluorescent lighting fixtures shall not exceed 30
dB in conditions defined in BS 2818 part 1.

CC.

Power factor: Fluorescent fixtures and HID fixtures shall be of the high power factor
type of 0.9 minims for fluorescent fixtures and 0.85 for HID fixtures.

DD.

Harmonic Distortion: Shall not exceed minimum IEC / BS requirement.

OCE - 30 January 2014

LIGHTING SYSTEM
16500 - 6/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01

EXAMINATION
A.

3.02

3.03

Examine conditions at the job site where work of this Section is to be performed to
insure proper arrangement and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of job
site conditions.

PREPARATION
A.

Examine the Contract Drawings and specifications in order to insure the completeness
of the work required under this Section.

B.

Verify measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the coordination
and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work of related trades, so as not to
delay job progress.

C.

Provide templates as required to related trade for location of items.

INSTALLATION
A.

Install lighting fixtures and accessories at locations and heights as indicated, in


accordance with fixture manufacturer's written instructions, requirements of the
applicable electrical code, IEC standards, to ensure that lighting fixtures fulfill
requirements.

B.

Provide fixtures and/or fixture outlet boxes with hangers to properly support fixture
weight. Submit design of hangers, method of fastening, other than indicated or
specified herein, for review by Project Manager.

C.

Install flush mounted fixtures properly to eliminate light leakage between fixture frame
and finished surface, and between fixture frame and fix. Where fixtures are of the air
handling type or installed in partially-transparent ceilings, construct fixtures to
eliminate light leaks above the ceiling line.

D.

Provide plaster frames for recessed fixtures installed in other than suspended grid type
acoustical ceiling systems. Brace frames temporarily to prevent distortion during
handling.
1.

If ceiling system requires, each recessed and semi-recessed fixture shall be


furnished with a mounting frame or ring compatible with the ceiling in which
they are to be installed. The frames and rings shall be one piece or constructed
with electrically-welded butt joints, and of sufficient size and strength to sustain
the weight of the fixture.

E.

For air supply type fixtures, retain side slot closures in place for adjustment by
Balancing Contractor.

F.

Fasten fixtures securely to indicated structural supports and ensure that pendant
fixtures are plumb and level. Provide individually mounted pendant fixtures longer
than 610mm with twin stem hangers. Provide stem hanger with ball aligners and
provisions for minimum 25 mm vertical adjustment. Mount continuous rows of
fixtures with an additional stem hanger greater than number of fixtures in the row.

G.

Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with

OCE - 30 January 2014

LIGHTING SYSTEM
16500 - 7/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment


connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten
connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Stds 486A
and B, and the applicable electrical code.

3.04

H.

Support surface mounted fixtures greater than 610 mm in length at a point in addition
to the outlet box fixture stud.

I.

Provide yokes, brackets, and supplementary supporting members needed to mount


lighting fixtures to carrier channels or other suitable ceiling members.

J.

Reflectors, reflector cones and visible trim of lighting fixtures shall not be installed until
completion of plastering, ceiling tile work, painting and general cleanup. They shall be
carefully handled to avoid scratching or fingerprinting and shall be, at the time of
acceptance by the Owner, clean.

K.

Lenses shall be clean and free of dust.

L.

Lighting fixture locations in mechanical equipment rooms and/or fan lofts are
approximate. Coordinate installation of fixture with installation of mechanical
equipment and mount fixtures at uniform heights to properly illuminate equipment
including gauges and meters. Run exposed EMT conduit to these fixtures.

M.

Aim and adjust lighting fixtures to the satisfaction of the Project Manager. Outdoor
lighting fixtures shall be aimed and adjusted at night.

N.

Grounding: Provide equipment grounding connections for lighting fixtures, poles and
standards as required and as specified in Section 16452 "Grounding." Tighten
connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Std 486A to ensure
permanent and effective grounds.

DEMONSTRATION
A.

3.05

Upon completion of installation of lighting fixtures, and accessories and after building
circuitry has been energized, apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and
compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site,
then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units,
and proceed with re-testing.

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING


A.

Clean lighting fixtures of dirt and construction debris upon completion of installation.
Clean fingerprints and smudges from lenses.

B.

Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction period.

END OF SECTION 16500

OCE - 30 January 2014

LIGHTING SYSTEM
16500 - 8/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16525
FLOOD LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01

1.02

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.

Examine all other sections of the Specification for requirements, which affect work of
this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this section.

B.

Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting or affected by work of the
Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all work under
the Contract.

SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK


A.

This specification is for extent of flood lighting fixture work as indicated by drawings
and schedules.

B.

Types of flood lighting fixtures in section include the following:

C.

Applications for flood lights fixtures required for project include the following:

1.03

1.04

Tungsten / halogen lamps


High pressure mercury tungsten discharge
High pressure mercury discharge (fluorescent)
High pressure mercury discharge deluxe (metal halide)
High pressure sodium discharge

Area lighting

GUARANTEES
A.

Attention is directed to provisions contained elsewhere regarding guarantees and


warranties for work under this Contract.

B.

Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees for work under this section.
However, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other liabilities
which manufacturers and Contractors may have law or by other provisions of the
Contract Document.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of lighting fixtures of types


and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service
for not less than 10 years.

B.

Installer: Qualified with at least 5 years of successful installation and experience on


projects with interior lighting fixtures similar to that required for this project.

C.

IEE Compliance: Comply with IEE requirements as applicable to construction of


interior building lighting fixtures.

D.

BS Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of BS standard publications


pertaining to lighting equipment.

OCE - 30 January 2014

FLOOD LIGHTING
16525 - 1/5

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

E.
1.05

1.06

King Saud University

CBM Labels: Provide fluorescent lamp ballast which comply with Certified Ballast
Manufacturers Association Standards and carry the CBM label.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Product Data: Submit manufacturers data on floodlights.

B.

Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of flood lights installations, including


but not necessary limited to, layout relation to associated panel-boards, and
connections to panel-boards. Submit fixture shop drawings in booklet form with
separate sheet for each fixture, assembled in luminaire type alphabetical order, with
proposed fixture and accessories clearly indicated on each sheet.

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS


A.

Floodlighting, lamps, and accessories shall be delivered to job site wrapped in


protective covering and stored in a dry location free from dust or water, and in such a
manner to permit easy access for inspection and handling. Floodlights, lamps, and
accessories shall be handled carefully to prevent damage. Damaged items shall be
replaced at no additional cost.

PART 2 PRODUCT
2.01

GENERAL
A.

Floodlights shall be complete with all necessary accessories such as ballasts lamps,
sockets, reflectors, mounting hardware, etc. to make a workable unit.

B.

Floodlights should be made of extruded or pressure die-cast and aluminum alloy


housing with sheet aluminum corrosion resistance type and top sealed with fasteners
and silicone sealant.
Optical system shall be composed of polished aluminum reflectors, which shall allow
for filled adjustment to the desired light distribution. Reflector shall be adjustable and
retained in position by a spring loaded per device. Lens shall be clear flat tempered
glass or acrylic. The external surface shall be smooth to reduce to minimum dirt and
accumulation and therefore maintenance.

2.02

C.

Floodlights shall be waterproof type, they shall be protected to the standard IP55.
Where floodlight are exposed to bad weather conditions or other specified areas, they
shall be protected to the standard IP65.

D.

Ballasts components shall be mounted on an inner tray with a cover and retained in
the closed position by two quarter turn fasteners. The entire tray assembly shall be
removable for replacement or maintenance. Some floodlights may be required to
mounted remote from its gear, in this situation a detail will be given showing its
construction. Ballasts shall be of the ratings, types and makes as recommended by
large manufacturers for starting the high intensity discharge lamp which properly
matches lamps to power line by providing appropriate voltages and impedances for
which lamps are designed.

LAMPS
A.

All lamps shall conform to section 16510-2.04 LAMPS.

OCE - 30 January 2014

FLOOD LIGHTING
16525 - 2/5

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.03

King Saud University

FLOODLIGHTING HIGH MASTS


A.

A tapered, folded sheet steel shaft of polygonal cross section, made of several pieces of
12m maximum unit length to be telescoped together, equipped with a base plate and
including an inspection door.

B.

Head-frames shall be designed and manufactured especially for stadiums with special
floodlight supports. Head-frames shall be triple rectangular type.

C.

Fixing arrangement for control gear:


Circular brass fixed to vertical rails for adjustable spacing shall enable control gear
back plates to be fixed around the mast internally on one or more levels.

D.

The steel grades used shall be conform to international standards (i.e. NFA 35 501)
and shall be submitted to the required mechanical and chemical test prior to
manufacturing. They shall be highly weldable, permitting a perfect galvanization and
can be cold-formed without cracks or failure starts.

E.

The used steel grades shall be:

2.04

E 36 (36 kg/mm2, yield 52 to 62 kg/mm2, tensile 22% elongation).

F.

The base plate steel shall have sharp impact value of at least 3.5 daj/cm2 at 20
degrees C. Welds shall be submitted to nondestructive test (Ultrasonic or gamma ray).

G.

The masts shall be hot-dip galvanized.

H.

Erection shall be performed by and under the responsibility of a specialized team


according to manufacturers instructions using suitable templates to facilitate the
exact positioning of the anchor bolts.

CONTROLS
All external lighting shall be controlled via photo electric cells with the following
characteristics:
i)

Supply voltage:

As shown.

ii)

Control Load Rating:

1 KW Discharge Lamp.

iii)

Sensitivity:

Switch ON 50 lux
Switch OFF 100 lux

iv)

Power consumption:

Maximum 3 watts during daylight conditions @


supply voltage.

v)

Delay time for daytime Fluctuation:

30 seconds

vi)

Ambient temp range:

-20C to + 50C

vii)

Net weight:

115 g

viii)

Mounting:

3 min locking plug to suit cirlock socket.


Gasket fitting to ensure water/dust tight fitting.

ix)

Housing:

Weatherproof and resistant to ultra violet light.

OCE - 30 January 2014

FLOOD LIGHTING
16525 - 3/5

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01

3.02

3.03

INSTALLATION
A.

Floodlighting luminaries shall be fixed to columns on the ground prior to erection.


After erection of the columns and final cable connections are completed, each
luminaire shall be aimed in accordance with specialist lighting suppliers instructions.

B.

Proposals for floodlighting installation must be accompanied by computer


calculations confirming aforementioned horizontal and vertical illuminance levels and
corresponding uniformity.

C.

Columns shall be erected plumb and shall be set back from the edge of the field or
court as indicated on the drawings. Column locations shall be staked prior to
installation to assure there is no conflict with other utilities. Conflicts that should
arise shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer for direction in relocating
column at no extra cost.

D.

Foundations for there columns shall be based on manufacturers data and shall be
designed and detailed by the Contractor taking into account their different location,
the corresponding bearing capacities and wind loads as per structural and as per soil
report. No construction shall be done, prior to the approval of the Engineer. For
concrete base foundation shall conform to section CONCRETE.

E.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the hire of a suitable crane for the erection of
all, columns onto the foundations. Columns shall be erected onto the foundation bolts
using a sling to protect the surface finish. After bolting down, the columns shall be
plumb checked.

F.

The control gear, located in each column, shall include a cut-out unit with sub-circuit
HRC fuse rated appropriate to the luminaire served and which shall allow the use of a
reduced size cable within the column where appropriate.

G.

Cabling on the head-frames of the columns shall be installed in weatherproof trunking


or XLPE insulated copper cable. All cables shall have numbered ferrules fixed at each
termination position. Other single wire cables shall be PVC insulated stranded copper
of sizes to suit the number of lamps on the circuit and shall be installed in galvanized
steel conduits.

ADJUST AND CLEAN


A.

Clean interior floodlights luminaire of dirt and debris upon completion of installation.

B.

Protect installed columns from damage during remainder of construction period.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Upon completion of installation of floodlights, and after building circuitry has been
energized, apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with
requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to
demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed
with retesting.

B.

At the time of Substantial Completion, replace lamps in floodlights which are


observed to be noticeably dimmed after contractors use and tested.
C.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Check and record illumination levels in accordance with design requirements.


FLOOD LIGHTING
16525 - 4/5

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

3.04

King Saud University

EARTHING
A.

Throughout each installation, all conduit, trunking and metallic sheeting of cables
shall be electrically continuous to form a complete bonded system with the column
earthing system.

B.

Each column shall be connected to earthing system by a stranded bare copper wire as
indicated on the drawing to the panel-board.

END SECTION 16525

OCE - 30 January 2014

FLOOD LIGHTING
16525 - 5/5

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16535
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01

1.02

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.

Examine all other section of the specifications for requirements which affect
work of this section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in
this section.

B.

Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work
of this section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of
all work under the Contract.

SCOPE AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK


A.

1.03

1.04

GUARANTEES
A.

Attention is directed to provisions contained elsewhere regarding


guarantees and warranties for work under this Contract.

B.

Manufacturers shall provide their standard guarantees for work under this
section. However, such guarantees shall be in addition to and not in lieu of
all other liabilities which manufacturers and Contractors may have by law
or by other provisions of the Contract Documents.

QUALITY ASSURANCES
A.

1.05

1.06

This section applied to exit lighting units will be provided to facilitate


orientation within, and escape from, the building upon failure of the
normal lighting system. Dependent on their location within the building the
units will be powered from standby generator set and by individual selfcontained batteries as indicated in the drawings.

Equipment shall be purchased only from manufacturers specializing in the


equipment described herein.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Manufacturers illustrated leaflets, drawings, technical data covering the


equipment required.

B.

Submit Equipment and spare parts lists.

C.

Operation and Maintenance: Comply with the relevant section for the
provision of Operation and Maintenance manuals.

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS


A.

Pack equipment for protection during transportation and storage.

B.

Store in dry, clean location.

OCE 30 January 2014

EMERGENCY LIGHTING
16535 - 1/4

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

1.07

King Saud University

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.

In the event of main and essential power failures to the areas served by the
emergency lighting, emergency lighting shall switch shall switch on automatically
and independently of the on/off mode of the normal light switch.

B.

Selected lighting fittings designated emergency lighting fittings shall be complete


with batteries, charging units and inverter unit as appropriate or standby generator
system as shown on drawings.

C.

On restoration of the normal supply, the fitting shall return to operating mode prior
to the power interruption.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01

EQUIPMENT
A.

All equipment shall be standard supplied by a single supplier.

B.

The battery shall be a self-contained sealed nickel cadmium pack of 12 volt 4 Ah


capacity.

C.

The charger/inverter module shall be capable of the following from a completely


discharged condition:

D.

A LED to indicate power supply on.

E.

Provide fuses in the unswitched power supply and in the battery supply.

F.

The change-over voltage from normal power supply to emergency shall be between
60% - 85% of nominal normal voltage.

G.

A 3 position test key shall provide the following facilities:

H.
2.02

Full capacity charge in 24 hours or less


60% capacity charge in 12 hours or less
30% capacity charge in 6 hours or less.

1.

Normal:

Operation as described earlier


Key removable.

2.

Test:

Isolates unswitched normal supply, energizing fluorescent


tube battery supply circuit.
Key trapped.

Isolate:

Isolates normal switched and unswitched power supply. The


fluorescent will be energized from the battery/inverter.
Key trapped.

The batteries/inverter and all circuit accessories shall be enclosed in a steel box.

EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS SELF CONTAINED


A.

Unless otherwise specified in the particular specifications, all self contained


emergency light fittings shall be of the non-maintained type. Lamps shall be
fluorescent and shall operate in the emergency mode for a period not less than 3
hours.

OCE 30 January 2014

EMERGENCY LIGHTING
16535 - 2/4

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

B.

Each unit shall contain within its enclosure the lamp, emergency batteries, constant
voltage charging units, automatic hangover and an LED to show that the charging
circuit and the DC system are in good order.

C.

All units shall have fire resisting diffusers, complying with the relevant standards
and Codes of Practices mentioned elsewhere in this specification.

D.

Type of emergency lighting to be used is specified either in this specification or


indicated on the drawings.

E.

Every unit shall be connected to a permanently live supply of the LOCAL lighting
circuit. A switch shall be installed in the permanent live supply so that regular
testing can be carried out. These switches shall be situated in the positions indicated
on the drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01

INSPECTION
A.

3.02

The Contractor must examine the areas and conditions in which the luminaires will
be installed and correct or bring to the attention of the Engineer any unsatisfactory
conditions before installation commences.

INSTALLATION
A.

Install lighting fixtures at locations as indicated in accordance with fixture


manufacturers written instructions, applicable requirements of IEE and BS
Standard of Installation, and with recognized industry practices to ensure that
lighting fixtures fulfill requirements.

B.

All fixtures shall be furnished complete with lamps. Emergency lighting fixtures
shall be installed after completion of all masonry and structural work and shall not
be used for lighting purposed during construction.

C.

Mounting heights of fixture are, in most cases, indicated on the drawings. Where job
conditions require mounting heights different from those specified or shown to avoid
equipment or structural features, etc. such changes in mounting heights shall be as
directed by the Engineer.

D.

Lighting fixtures shall be set plumb, square, level and in alignment and shall be
secured in accordance with manufacturers directions and approved shop drawings.

E.

The Contractor executing the work under this section of the Specifications shall
examine the architectural, mechanical and structural drawings to acquaint himself
with the structural features of the building and the location of pipes, ducts, etc.,
which would alter the locations or spacing of outlets to the Engineer for a decision as
to the proper location. This Contractor shall be responsible for the proper
reinforcement of any ductwork necessary to carry the added weight of lighting
fixtures where same must be mounted on the bottom of such ductwork.

F.

All conductor installation shall be suitable for the maximum temperatures they will
be subjected to, in luminaire canopies and outlet boxes, etc. Cables shall be kept clear
from the surface of the temperature can reach 90C.

OCE 30 January 2014

EMERGENCY LIGHTING
16535 - 3/4

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

3.03

3.04

3.05

King Saud University

ADJUST AND CLEAN


A.

Clean interior lighting fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of installation.

B.

Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction period.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Upon completion of installation of emergency lighting fixtures, and after building


circuitry has been energized, apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and
compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site,
then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new
units, and proceed with retesting.

B.

At the time of Substantial Completion, replace lamps in lighting fixtures which are
observed to be noticeably dimmed after contractors use and tested.

C.

All emergency lights shall be functionally tested to proved that they operate
satisfactorily for the purpose.

D.

Check and record illumination levels in accordance with design requirements.

EARTHING
A.

Provide equipment earthing connections for all emergency lights.

B.

Separate earthing wire should be used between any fixture and panel-board.
Minimum size 2.5mm2.

END OF SECTIONN 16535

OCE 30 January 2014

EMERGENCY LIGHTING
16535 - 4/4

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16610
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
SCOPE
This document aims at setting out the specifications for the supply, installation and
commissioning of an Uninterruptible Power System (UPS) designed to provide high quality
electrical power.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE EQUIPMENT & Manufacturer
Turn key supply of a UPS with output power as per project material bill of quantity and
drawings
The UPS material shall be manufactured by
abcd-

SOCOMEC SICON - France.


PILLER Germany
SIEMENS Germany.
Or having equivalent performance and features,

The UPS battery shall be manufactured by


a- Exide.
b- Hawker.
c- Yuasa
d- Or having equivalent performance and features.
UPS incorporates double on line conversion VFI-SS-111 technology (Voltage and Frequency
Independent) as per standard CEI 62040-3 : output frequency and voltage must be continuously
controlled and independent from input characteristics.
The UPS shall include the following:
. a three-phase rectifier-charger
. a battery protection
. a battery rated for back up times of 30 minutes unless otherwise specified.
. a three-phase inverter
. a bypass circuit including:
. an automatic bypass without interruption (static switch)
. a maintenance bypass
This package enables future power expansion by connecting in parallel up to 4 UPS units
(i.e. rectifier/battery/inverter/bypass) having same power.

OCE - 30 January 2014

UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS


16610 - 1/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

DESCRIPTION OF UPS COMPONENTS


RECTIFIER CHARGER
For less restrictions on the upstream power supply, the UPS incorporates an IGBT PWM
rectifier providing Power Factor Correction (PFC). The rectifier is rated for simultaneously
supplying the inverter at nominal power, and ensuring battery charge after operation on back
up time. It shall comply with the following features:
Power factor :
The input power factor is over 0.99 without additional power factor capacitors.
Current harmonic distortion
The rectifier charger providing PFC has low input harmonic distortion (THDI < 3 % at full
nominal load and THDI <4% at half load).
To avoid risks of disturbances, especially resonance phenomena, the system does not require
additional harmonic filter (LC resonant type).
Correction of DC voltage according to temperature
Regulation includes an automatic compensation system for maintaining battery float voltage
according to the ambient temperature. Voltage correction factor is settable between 1 and
7mV/C/ cell.
Limited inrush current on start up
In order to avoid inrush current when the power supply voltage is restored, a delayed (from 3
to 600 seconds) and programmable soft start facility is available with a progressive rise in
power limited to 50 A per second (settable value).
Limitation of energy drawn when operating on generator set
On generator set operation, an external information via dry contacts enables battery charge
interruption while the rectifier is kept operating. This function allows not to recharge the
battery prior to power supply return.

Rectifier charger specifications


The rectifier charger shall have the following features :
- Three-phase input voltage :
- Admissible voltage tolerance :
- Input frequency :
- Admissible frequency variation :
- Output voltage stability :
- Maximum inrush current :

OCE - 30 January 2014

380 . 400, 415 V


342 to 456V
60 Hz
+ - 10 %
+-1%
1In

UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS


16610 - 2/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

BATTERY
Sealed Lead Acid, Maintenance Free battery shall be used, the life time for the same shall be
10 years or more under normal operating conditions, assumed to be 25 C.
Stationary battery of following type can be provided:
Cabinet mounted for backup time less than or equal to 10 minutes
Sealed lead-acid batteries on factory supplied racks for back up time longer than 10 minutes
Back-up time: 30 minutes for UPS at full load (Cos phi 0,8 ind.) unless otherwise specified in
material bill of quantity.
Battery protection consists of a fuse switch that is incorporated in the battery cabinet or
mounted in a wall enclosure (for battery on racks)
The battery can be isolated from the rectifier and the inverter without jeopardising
operation of the latter (excepted in case of power supply failure)
UPS automatic test checks battery capacity to supply energy.

INVERTER
The inverter ensures that output parameters (voltage, frequency, distortion) are maintained
within tolerances.
The inverter consists of a three-phase frequency converter fitted with :
- a power converter bridge with IGBT
- an output filter
- digital control and PWM regulation technology
A transformer is installed on the converter output to ensure galvanic isolation
between DC circuit and load output.
Short circuit and discrimination :
In cases of failure in the downstream circuit supplied by the UPS:
- Mains present : automatic and seamless transfer of the load via the automatic bypass. Once
initial conditions are restored, the load is automatically switched back to inverter after 3
seconds.
- Mains absent : in cases of mains outage, the inverter shall be able to generate a minimum
short circuit current of 4In for 100 ms.
In case of non discriminated short circuit, the electronic protection shall activate inverter
shutdown before any damages are caused.
After the inverter has stopped due to battery discharge, the UPS can either be set to restart
automatically when the power supply is restored, or manually through user intervention
(settable).

OCE - 30 January 2014

UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS


16610 - 3/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

Inverter specifications
The inverter shall comply with the following:
- Rated power of UPS unit at Cos phi 0,80 ind.:
- Technology of three-phase bridge:
- Control technology:
- Nominal output voltage:
- Voltage tolerance:
- Angular phase-shift of phase to neutral voltage
balanced load
unbalanced load
- Output voltage distortion on linear loads:
- Output voltage distortion on non linear loads
with current crest factor = 2,5 at rated power:
- Overload capacity:
10 minutes
1 minute
- Minimum short circuit current:

kVA as per material bill of quantity


IGBT type
Pulse Width Modulation (PWM)
380 . 400. 415 V with neutral
<1%
120 + - 0.5
120 + - 1
<1%
<3%
125 %
150 %
4 In 100 ms

AUTOMATIC BYPASS
The UPS is fitted with an automatic bypass for seamless transfer of the load to mains or
inverter, should a failure arise e.g. overload, downstream short circuit, excessive local
temperature, malfunctioning, or servicing operations be needed.
To get optimum efficiency, the inverter path is fitted with an electromechanical switch and
the mains path with a static switch.
In case of repeated transfers, transfer shall be locked on the path selected by the operator
(inverter or bypass mains)
The system shall enable asynchronous transfer, if operating conditions are fulfilled. This
settable function ensures transfer to the bypass in case of failure, even if inverter and bypass
are not synchronised. This asynchronous transfer causes a micro cut-off lasting from 10 ms to
a few periods (settable).
The rectifier and the bypass can be supplied via a common or separate input. Supply sources
are not necessarily synchronised.
The neutral conductor must be rated for a permanent overload of 1.5 that can
possibly be generated by non-linear loads".

Bypass circuit specifications


The bypass shall comply with the following:
- rated power :
- short circuit current admitted :
- Technology :
OCE - 30 January 2014

equal to UPS rating


20 In
electromechanical switch on inverter side
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS
16610 - 4/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

- rated voltage :
- Voltage tolerance :
- admissible frequency tolerance :

King Saud University

and thyristors on mains side


ditto UPS
+ - 10 %
+- 2 Hz (can be set up to 4 Hz by step of 0,5 Hz)

MAINTENANCE BYPASS
Maintenance and possible tests shall be performed without interruption in the load power
supply.
Such facility is permitted by manually controlled switches enabling the load to be
powered directly by the mains, whereas the rectifier, the inverter and the automatic
bypass can be isolated from the circuit.
POWER EXPANSION
This system provides flexible increase in power by adding up to four parallel UPS units of
same power. This operation requires no modification of the installation and there is no need
for a second common cabinet.
NEUTRAL ARRANGEMENTS
Upstream grounding connection (supply) :
Downstream grounding connection (load ) :

TT
TT

IT
IT

TNS
TNS

TNC
TNC

Refer to electrical wiring diagrams relevant to this project and follow the facility neutral
arrangement.
ECO MODE
The Eco-mode function which allows an even greater cost-effective operation
(efficiency > 98%) must be available in the UPS software. In such configuration, the
load is directly supplied by the mains. In cases of faults or disturbances on the
power supply source, the system automatically switches to inverter mode, which is
seamless for the loads. The system also ensures that mains conditions are restored
prior to load transfer back to the mains. Periodic transfers to Eco mode can be
selected locally from the control panel.
OPERATING
Emergency stop
The system incorporates an emergency stop input (ESD) for UPS shutdown.
Battery test
The battery test is designed to check the battery capacity to supply energy. It can be
made automatic and periodic from the control panel if several conditions are
fulfilled, i.e. rectifier operating, bypass available and sufficient residual back up
time after test.
This test can also be started upon operators request on the control panel. If the test
fails, battery fault alarm shall be displayed.

OCE - 30 January 2014

UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS


16610 - 5/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

CONTROL- MONITORING - MAINTENANCE


For user-friendly operation and easy servicing, the UPS is fitted with a control panel
including:
- 1 mimic panel with 11 leds
- 1 eight-line LCD display (with up to 40 characters)
- 1 four key intuitive user interface to access information and controls displayed
on the control panel.
Controls
Interactive procedures are displayed to guide the operator when performing
controls such as automatic start up, transfer to maintenance bypass or transfer from
mains to inverter and vice versa.
For secure operation, some controls can be locked using an access code defined by the
operator.
Display of electrical measurements :
The following measurements shall be shown:
Input:
Voltage per phase
Load output:

DC circuit:

Load rate
Voltage per phase + Ph/N
Rms current per phase
Output power
Rectifier output voltage
Rectifier output current
Battery discharge current
Battery charge current

Frequency

Frequency

Remaining back up time


Battery room temperature

Display of status and alarms


The following alarms shall be shown:
Imminent stop
End of battery discharge
Battery faulty
Repeated transfers
Operating on battery
UPS overload
A sound signal is given together with each alarm displayed.
The following status shall be shown:
Bypass mains out of tolerances
Emergency stop
Battery charging
Operation on generator set
Synchronisation to bypass mains
Display of the event log
In order to make maintenance operations easier, every event (status, alarms and controls) is
recorded, time/date logged and numbered. The message specifies whether it is a state, an
alarm or a control. The memory of the UPS unit can log up to 500 events and is saved utilising
a separate supply.
OCE - 30 January 2014

UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS


16610 - 6/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

Help to the user


In order to increase equipment availability, a dedicated display indicates if preventive
maintenance is needed.
Communication
UPS data shall be remotely reported through dry contacts, i.e.:
- General alarm
- 7 customised information, and up to 14, for the transfer of alarms and status
Contacts can be set as NO or NC.
STANDARD REFERENCE
The equipment complies with standards in force, especially
Safety
IEC 50091-1-2
IEC 62040-1-2
EMC
EN 50091-2
IEC 62040-2
Performance
IEC 62040-3
Harmonic interference
IEC 61000-3-4

IEC 60950

ENVIRONMENT
To enhance UPS reliability, ventilation is ensured by fans located in the lower part of the
equipment where cold air flow comes in.
Bypass ventilation is redundant.
Equipment has front access for easier installation, operating and maintenance (no rear or side
access required).
The footprint of each UPS (without battery) is equal or lower than 0.80 m2
The manufacturer shall specify the following:
dimensions and weight of the equipment
Maximum temperature not to be exceeded in UPS technical area
Maximum temperature not to be exceeded in battery technical area.
COMMISSIONING
During commissioning, phase order inversion shall cause no component damage
and an error message shall be reported to the operator. Procedures for applying
voltage, transferring the load to the mains or performing shutdown of the unit are
displayed.
On-site commissioning is undertaken by the manufacturer's technicians.
SPARE PARTS
The supplier shall undertake to supply spare parts for a minimum period of 10 years after
delivery and installation.
WARRANTY
Parts and on-site labour warranty shall apply for the equipment (rectifier/inverter/bypass).
The period of validity of the warranty is 12 months after commissioning.
Battery manufacturer shall be liable for battery warranty.
END OF SECTION 16610
OCE - 30 January 2014

UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEMS


16610 - 7/7

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16620
STAND-BY POWER SYSTEM
( ENGINE GENERATOR SETS )
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01

RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.

1.02

1.03

1.04

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and


Supplementary Conditions and section 1600 of division 10 apply to this Section.

SUMMARY
A.

This Section applies to the stand-by generators working in parallel through the
synchronizing and ATS panel including engine generator set, cooling system, fuel
system, combustion air intake and engine exhaust systems, starting system,
instrumentation, protection and control equipment and the following additional
features:

B.

Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this
Section:
1.

Division 16 Section "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches, including sensors


and relays, to initiate automatic starting and stopping signals for engine
generator set.

2.

Circuit breakers as in division 16.

3.

Earthing as in division 16.

DEFINITIONS
A.

Emergency or Standby Rating: Power output rating equal to the power the generator
set delivers continuously under normally varying load factors for the duration of a
power outage, with capability for a minimum overload of 10 percent of the rating for 1
continuous hours of out of any period of twelve hours (12) continuous operating hours
at full load , with temperature rise not exceeding rise allowed by standards .

B.

Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to the highest value of a
parameter over the range of conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of the
nominal value of the parameter.

C.

Power Output Rating: Gross electrical power output of generator set minus total
power requirements of electric motor-driven accessories normally constituting part of
the engine assembly.

D.

Steady-State Voltage Modulation: The uniform cyclical variation of voltage within the
operational bandwidth, expressed in Hz or cycles per second.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.

System Includes: Unless otherwise indicated or shown on the drawing, Standby-rated,


automatically started diesel engine coupled to an AC. generator unit. Engine and
generator are factory-mounted and -aligned on a structural steel skid. Subsystems and
auxiliary components and equipment are as indicated.

OCE - 30 January 2014

STAND-BY POWER SYSTEMS (Engine Generator Set)


16620 - 1/16

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

B.

1.05

King Saud University

Functional Description: When the mode selector switch on the control and monitoring
panel is in the "automatic" position, remote control contacts in one or more separate
automatic transfer switches initiate the starting and stopping of the generator set.
Unless otherwise indicated or shown on the drawing. When the mode selector switch is
placed in the "on" position, the generator set starts manually. The "off" position of the
same switch initiates shutdown of the generator set. When the unit is running,
specified system or equipment failures or derangement automatically shut the unit
down and initiate alarms. Operation of a remote emergency stop switch also shuts
down the unit. Automatic transfer switches are specified in another Section of these
Specifications. For system without automatic transfer switches (double pole double
through type ) ,when the selector switch on the control & monitoring panel in "on"
position , "manual mode" , key interlock between the Emergency circuit breaker and
the incoming and tie breakers of the normal source on the associated switchgear shall
be provided to prevent in advertant operations. On the manual mode a voltage
monitoring relays shall be provided to give permission for closing generator circuit
breaker for live line (Generator Feeder) and dead bus bar case only .

SUBMITTALS
A.

General: Submit the following according to general sections of division 16 .

B.

Product data for products specified in this Section. Include data on features,
components, ratings, and performance. Include dimensioned outline plan and
elevation drawings of engine generator set and other system components.

C.

Maintenance data for system and components for inclusion in Operating and
Maintenance Manual as specified in section 16010 . Include the following :
1.

Lists: Tools, test equipment, spare parts, and replacement items recommended
to be stored at the site for ready access. Include part and drawing numbers,
current unit prices, and source of supply.

2.

Detailed Operating Instructions:


abnormal conditions.

Cover operation under both normal and

D.

Shop Drawings: Detail fabrication, piping, wiring, and installation of the field-installed
portions of the system. Include general arrangement drawings showing locations of
auxiliary components in relation to the engine generator set and duct, piping, and
wiring connections between the generator set and the auxiliary equipment. Show
connections, mounting, and support provisions and access and working space
requirements. Provide foundation drawings , indicating size and location of fixing
details .

E.

Wiring Diagrams for System: Show power and control connections and distinguish
between factory-installed and field-installed wiring.

F.

Qualification Data for Manufacturer: Include capabilities and experience data required
to demonstrate qualifications specified in Quality Assurance Article. Include list of
completed projects with project names and addresses and names of Engineers and
Owners, plus other information specified. Include separate data for each of the
following items:
1.
2.
3.
4.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Engine Generator System.


Engine Generator Set.
Remote Radiator.
Load Banks.

STAND-BY POWER SYSTEMS (Engine Generator Set)


16620 - 2/16

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

1.06

G.

Certified Summary of Prototype Unit Test Report: Submit certified copies of actual
prototype unit test report if subsequently requested.

H.

Certified Test Reports of Components and Accessories: Submit for devices that are
equivalent, but not identical, to those tested on prototype unit.

I.

Exhaust Emissions Test Report.

J.

Certification of Torsional Vibration Compatibility: Conform to NFPA 110.

K.

Factory Test Reports: For units to be shipped for this Project showing evidence of
compliance with specified requirements.

L.

Field Test Report: Record of tests specified in Part 3.

M.

Design and Guaranteed Performance data : Submit design data for engine , generator
and accessories in standard format including but not limited to the following :
1.

Rating and overload capability.

2.

Overall efficiency, and fuel consumption and lubricant consumption at 100%,


75%, 50% and 25% of rated load (break down for engine and generator data is
required ).

3.

Exhaust gas emission data at full load.

4.

Heat radiated to room by engine and generator.

5.

Guaranteed generator load and no load losses at full load.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

Manufacturer Qualifications: Firms experienced in manufacturing equipment of the


types and capacities indicated that have a record of successful in-service performance.
1.

1.07

King Saud University

Emergency Service: System manufacturer maintains a service center capable of


providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance and repairs at the
Project site with 4 hours maximum response time.

B.

Emergence Service : Provide evidence that proposed equipment manufacturer has a


locally established and authorized organization or crevice center which can be called
upon for professional advice and maintenance as may be required , and which can
immediately supply spare parts to support day to day and emergency maintenance
requirements .

C.

Comply with standards: Equipment and components parts are to comply with 150
3046, IEC 34 IEC 85 or equivalent ANSI, NEMA, IEE and DIN standards and NFPA
Applicable codes, where such standards and codes meet with or exceeds 150 and IEC
standards .

D.

Comply with NFPA 99, "Standard for Health Care Facilities."

E.

Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain engine generator system components from a


single manufacturer with responsibility for entire system.
Unit shall be a
representative product built from components that have proven compatibility and
reliability and are coordinated to operate as a unit as evidenced by records of prototype
testing.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

OCE - 30 January 2014

STAND-BY POWER SYSTEMS (Engine Generator Set)


16620 - 3/16

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

1.08

King Saud University

A.

Deliver engine generator set and system components to their final locations in
protective wrappings, containers, and other protection that will exclude dirt and
moisture and prevent damage from construction operations. Remove protection only
after equipment is made safe from such hazards.

B.

Pack spare parts in containers bearing labels clearly designating contents and pieces of
equipment for which intended .

EXTRA MATERIALS
A.

B.

Furnish extra materials matching products installed, as described below, packaged


with protective covering for storage, and identified with labels describing contents.
Deliver extra materials to the Owner.
1.

Fuses: 3 for every 10 of each type and rating, but not less than 3 of each.

2.

Pilot Lights: 2 for every 6 of each type used, but not less than 2 of each.

3.

2 set each of lubricating oil, fuel, and combustion air filters.

4.

One set of hoses and belts including one of each different size and type.

5.

One complete change of lube oil plus one gallon of make -up lube oil supplied
in unopened containers.

6.

One complete change of ethylene glycol anti freeze solution to provide a 50


percent solution in the engine cooling system supplied in unopened containers.

7.

One - ante - freeze test hydrometer .

8.

One complete set of spares for excitor control electronics for each type .

Provide one set of all special tools that are required for the normal operation and
maintenance of the engine driven generator unit .

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01

MANUFACTURERS
A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of


the following or equal approved:
1.

Engine Generator Sets:


a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Caterpillar, Inc.
M.T.U. - Germany .
Detroit Diesel Corp.
Siemens -Germany.
Petbow . England .
Volvo - Sweden .
Magnetek Century Electric.
Nissan Marine and Power Products.
Onan Corp, Electrical Products Div.

STAND-BY POWER SYSTEMS (Engine Generator Set)


16620 - 4/16

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.

Storage Batteries:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

3.

2.02

C&D Charter Power Systems.


Exide Corp.
Katolight Corp.
Kohler Co.
Siemens .
SAFT - NIFE .
Onan Corp.

Manufacturer experience and after sale service :


1.

The engine generator self shall be the standard product, as modified by these
specification of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of this
type of equipment organization and supply of spare parts in place at the time
of the bid within the area of the project . The unit to be furnished shall be built
from components, which have proven compatibility reliability and are
coordinated to operate as a unit.

2.

The manufacturer shall have suitable testing facilities adequate for performing
the shop tests and inspections specified here in .

SYSTEM SERVICE CONDITIONS


A.

B.

Environmental Conditions: Engine generator system withstands the following


environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of
performance capability:
1.

Ambient Temperature: Minus 5 deg C to plus 50 deg C.

2.

Relative Humidity: 0 to 95 percent.

3.

Altitude: Sea level to 300 m.

Unusual Service Conditions:


conditions:
1.

2.03

C&D Charter Power Systems.


Chloride Systems.
Exide Corp.
SAFT -NIFE Co.
Sonnenschein Batteries, Inc.
Yuasa Battery (American), Inc.

Battery Chargers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.

B.

King Saud University

Engine generator system operates in the following

Dust: Filters on air intake and louvers should be provided .

ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM


A.

General: System is a coordinated assembly of compatible components.

B.

Ratings: Voltage, frequency, and power output ratings of the system are as indicated.

C.

Output Connections: 3 phase, 4 wire, and 3 phase, 3 wire as indicated .

D.

Safety Standard: Comply with 150 standards or equal ASME B15.1, "Safety Standard
for Mechanical Power Transmission Apparatus."

OCE - 30 January 2014

STAND-BY POWER SYSTEMS (Engine Generator Set)


16620 - 5/16

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.04

King Saud University

E.

Nameplates: Each major system component is equipped with a conspicuous nameplate


of the component manufacturer. Nameplate identifies manufacturer of origin and
address, and the model and serial number of the item.

F.

Limiting dimensions indicated for system components are not exceeded.

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A.

Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 4 percent of rated output voltage from


no load to full load.

B.

Steady-State Voltage Modulation: Less than 1 Hz.

C.

Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 10 percent variation for 50 percent
step-load increase or decrease. Voltage recovers to remain within the steady-state
operating band within 2 seconds.

D.

Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: 0.5 percent of rated frequency from


no load to full load.

E.

Steady-State Frequency Stability: When the system is operating at any constant load
within the rated load, there are no random speed variations outside the steady-state
operational band and no regular or cyclical hunting or surging of speed.

F.

Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 3 Hz variation for a 50 percent step-load


increase or decrease. Frequency recovers to remain within the steady-state operating
band within 3 seconds.

G.

Output Wave form: The terminology used for harmonic distortion shall be as defined
in the U.K Electricity council Engineering Recommendation and the THD shall not
exceed 5 percent for line to line voltage and 3 percent for single harmonics. Radio
interference suppression is to be within the limits set by IEC standards, grade (N), or
telephone influence factor according to NEMA MG1, "Motors and Generators," does
not exceed 50.

H.

Sustained Short- Circuit Current: For a 3-phase bolted short circuit at the system
output terminals, the system will supply a minimum of 250 percent of rated full-load
current for not less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without
damage to any generator system component.

I.

Temperature Rise of Generator: Within acceptable limits for insulation systems used
according to BS 5514 / IEC 34 standards when operating at standby rating conditions .

J.

Nonlinear Load Performance: System performance is not degraded from that specified
in this Article by continuous operation, with the load current having a minimum total
harmonic content of 15 percent rms., and minimum single harmonic content of 10
percent rms.

K.

Starting Time: Maximum total time period for a cold start, with ambient temperature
at the low end of the specified range, is 5 seconds. Time period includes output voltage
and frequency settlement within specified steady-state bands.

L.

Impact loading: The engine generator system shall be guaranteed to be adequate to


start the largest squirrel cage induction motor design letter (N). Connected to the
Emergency generator bus , as indicated . The motor shall be full voltage direct on line

OCE - 30 January 2014

STAND-BY POWER SYSTEMS (Engine Generator Set)


16620 - 6/16

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

started . The generator set shall be adequate to start largest two reduced voltage started
motors simultaneously .
2.05

2.06

ENGINE GENERATOR SET


A.

Power Output Rating: Nominal ratings as indicated, with capacity as required to


operate as a unit as evidenced by records of prototype testing.

B.

Skid: Adequate strength and rigidity to maintain alignment of the mounted


components without dependence on a concrete foundation. Skid is free from sharp
edges and corners. Lifting attachments are arranged to facilitate lifting with slings
without damaging any components.

ENGINE
A.

Comply with 150/IEC standards and /or NFPA 37 "Stationary Combustion Engines
and Gas Turbines."

B.

Fuel: Diesel fuel oil grade DF-2.

C.

Maximum Speeds: Engine - 1800 rpm. Piston for 2 cycles 8.8 meters per second .
Piston speed for 4-cycle engines 11.4 meter .

D.

Lubrication System: Pressurized by a positive displacement pump driven from the


engine crankshaft. The following items are mounted on the engine or skid:

E.

1.

Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90 percent of particles 5 microns and


smaller while passing full flow.

2.

Oil Cooler: Maintains lubricating oil at the manufacturer's recommended


optimum temperature throughout 2 hours of operation of the generator set at
110 percent of system power output rating.

3.

Thermostatic Control Valve: Controls flow in the system to maintain optimum


oil temperature. Unit is capable of full flow and is designed to be fail-safe.

4.

Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily


removable container with no disassembly and without the use of pumps or
siphons or special tools or appliances.

5.

By - pass valve: Spring loaded by -Pass valve to permit oil circulation if filters
become clogged.

Engine Fuel System: Comply with NFPA 30, "Flammable and Combustible Liquids."
System includes:
1.

Integral Injection Pumps: Driven by the engine camshaft.


adjustable for timing and cylinder pressure balancing.

2.

Main Fuel Pump: Mounted on the engine. Pump ensures adequate primary
fuel flow under starting and load conditions.

3.

Parallel Fuel Oil Filters: Ahead of the injection pumps. Changeover valves
allow independent use of either filter.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Pumps are

STAND-BY POWER SYSTEMS (Engine Generator Set)


16620 - 7/16

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

4.

2.07

Relief/Bypass Valve: Automatically regulates pressure in the fuel line and


returns excess fuel to the source.

F.

Jacket Coolant Heater: Electric immersion type, factory-installed in the jacket coolant
system. Unit is rated and thermostatically controlled to maintain an engine
temperature of 25 0C at the low end of the ambient temperature range specified under
"Environmental Conditions" above.

G.

Speed Governor: Adjustable isochronous type, with electrical speed sensing , wood
ward type or equal electro - hydraulic governor shall be selected to meet the steadystate and transient frequency tolerances specified in this section . Speed control shall be
wood ward type or equal mounted in the generator control panel with manual speed
adjustments.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM


A.

Description: Closed-loop, liquid-cooled, with radiator factory-mounted on engine


generator set skid and integral engine-driven coolant pumping.

B.

Radiator: Factory-piped and -rated for specified coolant.


1.

Radiator Core Tubes: Nonferrous metal construction other than aluminum.

2.

Size of Radiator: Adequate to contain expansion of total system coolant from


cold start to 110 percent load condition.

3.

Fan: Driven by multiple belts from engine shaft.

C.

Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene glycol and 50 percent water.

D.

Temperature Control: Self-contained thermostatic control valve modulates coolant


flow automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as
recommended by the engine manufacturer. Features include:

E.

2.08

King Saud University

1.

Thermostatic Elements: Interchangeable and nonadjustable.

2.

Actuator Design:
actuator fails.

Normally-open valves to return to open position when

Coolant Hose: Flexible assembly with nonporous rubber inside surface and aging,
ultraviolet, and abrasion-resistant fabric outer covering.
1.

Rating: 50 psi (345 kPa) maximum working pressure with 180 deg F (82 deg C)
coolant, and non collapsible under vacuum.

2.

End Fittings: Flanges or steel pipe nipples with clamps to suit piping and
equipment connections.

FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM


A.

System complies with BS 2869 or NFPA 30, "Flammable and Combustible Liquids
Code," and NFPA 37, "Standard for Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines."

B.

Day Tank: Factory-fabricated assembly of NRTL-listed fuel tank with integral, floatcontrolled transfer pump and the features described below.

OCE - 30 January 2014

STAND-BY POWER SYSTEMS (Engine Generator Set)


16620 - 8/16

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.09

King Saud University

1.

Tank Capacity: Adequate to supply fuel to the engine for an uninterrupted


period of 4 hours operation at 100 percent of rated power output of the engine
generator system without being refilled. Unless otherwise indicated or shown
on the drawings .

2.

Pump Capacity: Exceeds the maximum flow of fuel drawn by the enginemounted fuel supply pump at 110 percent of rated capacity, including fuel
returned from the engine.

3.

Unit, Including Alarm Contacts: Complies with UL 142, "Steel Aboveground


Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids."

4.

low-level Alarm Sensor: Separate device operates alarm contacts at 75 percent


of normal fuel level.

5.

High-Level Alarm Sensor: Separate device operates alarm and redundant fuel
shut-off contacts at 106 percent of normal fuel level.

6.

Piping Connections: Include fuel suction and return lines to fuel storage tank,
fuel supply, and return lines to engine, local fuel fill, vent line, overflow line,
and tank drain line complete with shutoff valve.

C.

Redundant High-Level Fuel Shutoff: Actuated by the high-level alarm sensor in the
day tank. It operates a separate motor disconnect device that disconnects the day tank
pump motor. It also closes a solenoid valve in the fuel suction line from the fuel
storage tank to the day tank. Both items remain in the shut-off state until manually
reset. Shutoff action initiates an alarm signal to the control panel, but does not shut
down the engine generator set.

D.

Fuel Piping: As specified in Bid Pack 5 Section "Fuel Oil Piping Systems."

E.

Fuel Storage Tank: As specified in Bid Pack 5 Section "Fuel Oil Piping Systems."

ENGINE EXHAUST SYSTEM


A.

Muffler: Critical-type, sized as recommended by the engine manufacturer. Measured


sound level, according to the "DEMA Test Code for the Measurement of Sound from
heavy-duty Reciprocating Engines" at a distance of 10 feet (3 m) from the exhaust
discharge, is 85 dB "A" or less.

B.

Muffler: Residential-type, sized as recommended by the engine manufacturer.


Measured sound level, according to the "DEMA Test Code for the Measurement of
Sound from heavy-duty Reciprocating Engines" at a distance of 10 feet (3 m) from the
exhaust discharge, is 95 dB "A" or less.

C.

Connections from Engine to Exhaust System: Flexible section of corrugated stainless


steel pipe.

D.

Connection from Exhaust Pipe to Muffler: Stainless-steel expansion joint with liners.

E.

Insulation for Mufflers and Indoor Exhaust Piping: As specified in Bid Pack 5 Section
"Pipe Insulation."

F.

Supports for Muffler and Exhaust Piping: Vibration isolating-type specified in Bid
Pack 5 Section "Vibration Control."

OCE - 30 January 2014

STAND-BY POWER SYSTEMS (Engine Generator Set)


16620 - 9/16

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

G.

2.10

Thimbles for Exhaust Piping: Conform to NFPA 211, "Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents,
and Solid-Fuel Burning Appliances."

COMBUSTION AIR-INTAKE SYSTEM


A.

2.11

King Saud University

Air-Intake Silencer: Filter-type providing filtration as recommended by the engine


manufacturer.
1.

Sound level emanating from the air intake measured as specified in the
"DEMA Test Code for the Measurement of Sound from heavy-duty
Reciprocating Engines" at a distance of 25 feet (8 m) is 54 dB or less in the 12004800 Hz frequency band and 56 dB or less in the 4800-10,000 Hz band.

2.

Mounting: Factory-installed on engine generator set at a location readily


accessible for servicing.

B.

Supports for Air-Intake Piping and Filter-Silencer: Vibration isolation-type as specified


in Bid Pack 5 Section "Vibration Control."

C.

Air-Intake Duct: Round ducts with 16-gauge (1.5-mm) galvanized steel, with spiral
lockseam construction.
Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards."

STARTING SYSTEM
A.

Description: 24 V electric with negative ground and including the following items:
1.

Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine-cranking


cycle with the ambient temperature at the maximum specified in paragraph
"Environmental Conditions."

2.

Cranking Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases


from the engine flywheel without binding.

3.

Cranking Cycle: As required by 150 standards or NFPA 110 for system


specified.

4.

Battery: Sealed lead acid in plastic type , complies with battery rack and
internal connectors. Batteries shall have adequate capacity to provide the
specified cranking cycle series at four consecutive starts without recharging .

5.

Battery Cable: Size as recommended by the generator set manufacturer for the
cable length indicated. Include required interconnecting conductors and
connection accessories.

6.

Battery rack: Flour mounted structural steel battery rack shall be specifically
designed for battery service. The rack shall be finished with an acid and fire
resistant epoxy coating.

7.

Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory-mounted on engine with solid-state


voltage-regulation and 35 ampere minimum continuous rating.

8.

Battery Charger: Current limiting, automatic equalizing and float chargingtype designed for operation from a 220 V 60 Hz supply source. Unit shall

OCE - 30 January 2014

STAND-BY POWER SYSTEMS (Engine Generator Set)


16620 - 10/16

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

comply with IEC standards or equivalent UL standards and includes the


following features:

2.12

a.

Equalizing charging rate (high change rate) of adequate amperes is


initiated automatically after the battery has lost charge in not more than
8 hours until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at the battery
terminals. The unit then automatically switches to a lower float-charging
mode, and continues operating in that mode until the battery is
discharged again.

b.

Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjusts the float and equalizes


voltages for variations in the ambient temperature from minus 40 deg C
to plus 60 deg C to prevent overcharging at high temperatures and
undercharging at low temperatures.

c.

Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintains output voltage constant


regardless of input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent.

d.

Ammeter and Voltmeter:


charging rates.

e.

Safety Functions: Include sensing of abnormally low battery voltage


arranged to close contacts providing "low battery voltage" indication on
control and monitoring panel. Also include sensing of high battery
voltage and loss of AC. input or D.C. output of battery charger. Either of
these conditions closes contacts that provide "battery charger
malfunction" indication at system control and monitoring panel.

f.

Enclosure and Mounting: IP21 wall-mounted .

Flush mounted in door.

Meters indicate

CONTROL AND MONITORING


A.

Configuration:
Unless otherwise indicated, Operating and safety indications,
protective devices, engine gages, basic system controls, instrument transformers,
generator circuit breaker, and other indicated components are grouped in a
combination control and power panel. Control and monitoring section of panel is
isolated from power sections by steel barriers. Panel features include:
1.

Switchboard Construction: Unit is freestanding and conforms to Division 16


Section "Switchboards."

2.

Generator Circuit Breaker:


a.

For low voltage (below 1000V) generator circuit breaker shall be Molded
case type conforming to Division 16 Section "Over current Protective
Devices," and with adjustable trip units , solid state unit unless otherwise
indicated .

b.

For medium voltage generators circuit breaker shall be of the SF6 or


vacuum type conforming to division 16 section "Medium voltage circuit
breaker switchgears".

3.

Shunt Trip Device: For generator breaker, connected to trip breaker when
generator set is shut down by protective devices.

4.

Current and Potential Transformers: Instrument accuracy class.

OCE - 30 January 2014

STAND-BY POWER SYSTEMS (Engine Generator Set)


16620 - 11/16

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

B.

King Saud University

Indicating and Protective Devices, and Controls: Include those required by applicable
standards plus the following :
1.

A.C. Voltmeter with 7-position selector switch 64mm face, 0.5 percent
accuracy.

2.

A.C. Ammeter , 64mm face ,0.5 percent accuracy class .

3.

Frequency Meter 64mm face , 0.5 percent accuracy .

4.

D.C. Voltmeter (Alternator Battery Charging).

5.

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage.

6.

Engine-Lubricating Oil Pressure Gage.

7.

Running Time Meter.

8.

Ammeter/Voltmeter Phase Selector Switch or Switches.

9.

Generator Voltage-Adjusting Rheostat.

10.

Off / test / manual / auto duty switch .

11.

Manual start and stop switch .

12.

Fuel tank Derangement Alarm .

13.

High Fuel Tank level - shutdown of fuel supply alarm .

C.

Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices,
and wiring required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting
items on engine, generator, or elsewhere as indicated. Where not indicated, locate to
suit manufacturer's standard.

D.

Connection to Data Link: A separate terminal block factory-wired to Form C dry


contacts for each alarm and status indication is reserved for connection for
transmission of indications by data link to remote data terminals. Data system
connections to terminals are covered in another Section.

E.

Common Remote Audible Alarms: Conform to NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1
systems. Include necessary contacts and terminals in control and monitoring panel.
Locate audible device and silencing means where indicated.

F.

Common Remote Audible Alarms: Signal occurrence of events listed below. Locate
audible device and silencing means where indicated. Connect so that after an alarm is
silenced, clearing of initiating condition will reactivate alarm until silencing switch is
reset.
1.

High Engine Temperature Shutdown.

2.

Low-Lube Oil Pressure Shutdown.

3.

Over speed Shutdown.

4.

Remote Emergency Stop Shutdown.

5.

High Engine Temperature Pre-alarm.

6.

Low-Lube Oil Pressure Pre-alarm.

7.

Low Fuel Tank Level.

8.

Over-crank Shutdown.

OCE - 30 January 2014

STAND-BY POWER SYSTEMS (Engine Generator Set)


16620 - 12/16

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.13

9.

Low Coolant Temperature Alarm.

10.

Control Switch Not in "Auto" position.

11.

Battery-Charger Malfunction Alarm.

12.

Low Battery-Voltage Alarm.

King Saud University

G.

Remote Alarm Annunciator: Comply with NFPA 99, "Health Care Facilities." Labeled
LEDs indicate alarm events. Common audible signal sounds for alarm conditions.
Silencing switch in face of panel silences signal without altering visual indication.
Connect so that after an alarm is silenced, clearing of the initiating condition will
reactivate the alarm until the silencing switch is reset. Cabinet and faceplate are
surface- or flush-mounting type to suit mounting conditions indicated.

H.

Remote Emergency Stop Switch: Flush wall-mounted except as otherwise indicated


and prominently labeled. Push-button is protected from accidental operation.

GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR


A.

Comply with IEC 34/BS 4449 or equal NEMA standards .

B.

Drive: Generator shaft is directly connected to the engine shaft. Exciter is rotated
integrally with generator rotor.

C.

Electrical Insulation: Class H.

D.

Station Winding Leads: Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for
other voltages if required.

E.

Construction and type: Synchronous, low reactance, high efficiency, revolving field
type with brushless exciter sized and supported to prevent mechanical, electrical, and
thermal damage due to vibration, over-spend up to 125 percent of ratings, and heat
during operation at 110 percent of rated capacity. Winding shall be braced to withstand
any possible short stresses and shall be designed to withstand overheating and stresses
caused by harmonics generated by non-linear loads.

F.

Excitation uses no-slip or collector rings, or brushes, and is arranged to sustain


generator output under short circuit conditions as specified. Exciter, directly mounted
to generator shaft and connected to generator field through solid state hermetically
sealed, silicon rectifier accessible for maintenance and repair. Exciter - regulator
combination is to maintain output voltage within limits specified for any load up to
110% generator rating and under any sudden load changes specified.

G.

Protection: Generator stator winding shall be protected against overload by built in six
(6) resistance temperature detectors PT100 . The PT100 loads shall be wired to auxiliary
terminal box and connected to generator control panel to motor and control winging
temperature .

H.

Voltage Regulator: Solid-state, separate from exciter hermetically sealed , providing


performance specified . All components are to be moisture and heat resistant , with
suitable environmentally protected enclosure .Put isolation transformer and filters shall
be provided to minimize disturbances caused by line harmonics .
1.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Adjusting rheostat on control and monitoring panel provides plus or minus 5


percent adjustment of output voltage operating band.

STAND-BY POWER SYSTEMS (Engine Generator Set)


16620 - 13/16

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.14

I.

Surge Protection: Conform to IEC standards and UL 1449, "Transient Voltage Surge
Suppressors." Mount suppressors in generator enclosure and connect to load terminals.

J.

Strip Heater: Thermostatically controlled unit arranged to maintain stator windings


above the dew point.

K.

Leads and Cables: Phase leads are to be brought out, fully insulated to a terminal box
of heavy gauge steel sheet, protection IP44. Control and protection cables are to be
brought out to a separate terminal box. Terminal box shall be adequately sized to
accommodate line cables indicated on the drawings and schedules, without undue
stresses on cable and termination. Cable entries shall be as indicated.

ELECTRIC MOTORS
A.

Conform to Bid Pack 5 Section "Motors."


5.

2.15

2.16

King Saud University

Provide power to space heaters and water heaters, battery charger etc.

FINISHES
A.

Indoor Enclosures and Components: Manufacturer's standard enamel over corrosionresistant pretreatment and primer.

B.

Outdoor Enclosures: Polyurethane enamel over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and


manufacturer's compatible standard primer.

SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Project-Specific Equipment Tests: Test engine generator set and other system
components and accessories prior to shipment. Test items individually and assembled
and connected as a complete system at the factory in a manner equivalent to that
required at the Project site. Record and report test data. All tests will be witnessed by
the Project Manager prior to shipment conform to 150/IEC standards and the
following:
1.

Test Equipment: Use instruments calibrated within the previous 12 months


and with accuracy directly traceable to 150 / NIST standards.

2.

Hydrostatic Test:
jacket.

3.

Generator Tests: Conform to IEC 34 / BS.

4.

Complete System Continuous Operation Test: Includes nonstop operation for


a minimum of 8 hours, including at least 1 hour each at 1/2, 3/4, and full load,
and 2 hours at 110 percent of full load. If unit stops during the 8-hour test,
repeat the complete test. Record the following minimum data at the start and
end of each load run, at 15-minute intervals between those times, and at 15minute intervals during the balance of the test:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Perform on radiator, heat exchanger, and engine water

Fuel consumption.
Exhaust temperature.
Jacket water temperature.
Lubricating oil temperature and pressure.
Generator load current and voltage, each phase.
Generator system gross and net output kW.

STAND-BY POWER SYSTEMS (Engine Generator Set)


16620 - 14/16

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

5.

King Saud University

Complete System Performance Tests: Include the following to demonstrate


conformance to specified performance requirements:
a.
b.
c.
d.

Single-step load pickup.


Transient and steady-state governing.
Transient and steady-state voltage performance.
Safety shutdown devices.

6.

Observation of Test: Provide 2-week advance notice of tests and opportunity


for observation of test by Owner's representatives.

7.

Report test results within 10 days of completion of test.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01

3.02

INSTALLATION
A.

Anchor generator set and other system components on concrete bases conforming to
Division 3 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete" and as indicated. Provide anchorage
according to manufacturer's recommendations.

B.

Field Installation of Piping and Ductwork: As specified in Bid Pack 5 Sections "Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods" and "Hydronic Piping."

C.

Exhaust Piping Installation: Conform to NFPA 211, "Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents, and
Solid-Fuel Burning Appliances." Use thimbles where indicated.

D.

Manufacturer's Field Services: Arrange and pay for the services of a factory-authorized
service representative to supervise the installing, connecting, testing, and adjusting of
the unit.

IDENTIFICATION
A.

3.03

Identify system components according to Bid Pack 5 Section "Mechanical


Identification" and Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification."

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Tests: Provide the services of a qualified independent testing agency to perform the
tests listed below according to manufacturer's recommendations upon completion of
installation of system. Use instruments bearing records of calibration within the last 12
months, traceable to NIST standards, and adequate for making positive observation of
test results. Include the following tests:
1.

Insulation Tests: Test generator windings using 500 V D.C. for units rated up
to 250 volts and 1000 V D.C. for units rated between 250 and 600 volts. Verify
minimum insulation resistance is 25 mega-ohms for units up to 250 volts, and
100 mega-ohms for units 251 to 600 volts.

2.

Battery Tests: Measure charging voltage and voltages between available


battery terminals for full-charging and float-charging conditions. Check
electrolyte level and specific gravity under both conditions. Test for contact
integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test and a capacity load

OCE - 30 January 2014

STAND-BY POWER SYSTEMS (Engine Generator Set)


16620 - 15/16

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

test for the battery. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of battery
after discharge. Verify measurements are within manufacturer's specifications.
3.

Battery Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and
float-charging conditions.

4.

System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and


integrity of each element of engine generator system before and during system
operation. Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks.

5.

Simulation of malfunctions to verify proper operation of local and remote


protective, alarm, and monitoring devices.

6.

Load Test: Use variable load bank capable of simulating kVA, kW, and power
factor of load for which unit is rated. Run unit at 25, 50, and 75% of rated
capacity for 30 minutes each, and at 100 percent for 3 hours. Make the 100&
load run at 80% power factor. Record voltage, frequency, load current, batterycharging current, power output, oil pressure, and coolant temperature
periodically during the test.

7.

Vibration Baseline Test: Measure amplitude for nominal frequency and for
frequencies 5, 10, 15, and 20 percent above and below nominal at each main
bearing cap. Vibration levels not exceeding those specified in IE / BS
standards "rotating equipment" are acceptable.

8.

Exhaust System Back-Pressure Test: Use a manometer with a scale exceeding


40 inches (1000 mm) of water. Connect to the exhaust line close to the engine
exhaust manifold. Verify that back pressure at full-rated load is within
manufacturer's published allowable limits for the engine.

9.

Exhaust Emissions Test: Conform to applicable government test criteria.

10.

Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: Use recording oscilloscope to


measure voltage and frequency transients for 50-percent and 100-percent stepload increases and decreases and verify that performance is as specified.
Harmonic Content Tests: Measure harmonic content of input and output
current under 25 percent and at 100 percent of rated linear load. Verify that
harmonic content is within specified limits.

11.

12.

B.
3.04

Efficiency Tests: Perform at 50 percent, 75 percent, and 100 percent of rated


load.

Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until
specified requirements are met.

CLEANING
A.

Upon completion of installation, inspect system components. Remove paint splatters


and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match
original finish.
Clean components internally using methods and materials
recommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION 16620

OCE - 30 January 2014

STAND-BY POWER SYSTEMS (Engine Generator Set)


16620 - 16/16

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16670
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01

SUMMARY
A.

1.02

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.

1.03

This Section includes lightning protection for the building and requirements for
lightning protection system components.

Protect entire building including roof projections, chimneys, and roof mounted
equipment.

SUBMITTALS
A.

General: Submit each item in this Article according to section 16010.

B.

Product Data for each component specified. Include the following:


1.
2.

1.04

C.

Shop Drawings detailing lightning protection system. Include air terminal locations,
conductor routing and connections, and bonding and grounding provisions. Include
indications for use of raceway and data on how concealment requirements will be
met.

D.

Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include data on listing or certification
by Internationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (IRTL) or trade association.
Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and
addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

E.

Field inspection reports indicating compliance with specified requirements.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
C.
D.
E.

1.05

Roof adhesive data.


Decorative air terminal illustrations.

Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to install lighting protection


system.
Conform to NEPA 780 .
Conform to UL 96 A.
Conform to LPI 175 and provide LPI certified system or equal.

SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING


A.

Coordinate installation of lightning protection with installation of other building


systems and components, including electrical wiring, supporting structures and
building materials, metal bodies requiring bonding to lightning protection
components, and building finishes.

__________________________________________________________________________________________
OCE - 30 January 2014

LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM


16670 - 1/3

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01

MANUFACTURERS
A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by of one


of the following or equal approved:
1.
2.
3.

2.02

Robbins lightning, Inc.


Heary Bros. Lightning Protection Co.
Furse - UK .

LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS


A.

Comply with UL 96 or IEC equivalent standards .

B.

System Materials: Copper, with solid air terminals .

C.

Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel with a minimum of 27 percent of the rod weight in
the copper cladding.
1.
2.

D.

Diameter: 19 mm.
Length: 3 m.

Other materials: As specified in section 16452 - grounding.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01

EXAMINATION
A.

3.02

Examine surfaces, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of lightning
protection. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.

INSTALLATION
A.

Install lightning protection as indicated, and shown on the drawing using approved
manufacturer's materials and fittings.

B.

Comply with UL96A, LPI-175, and NFPA 780.

C.

Install conductors with direct paths from air terminals to ground connections. Avoid
sharp bends and narrow loops. Where indicated, run conductors in nonmetallic
raceway, Schedule 40, minimum.

D.

Conceal system conductors.

E.

Conceal down conductors. Use of reinforced steel bare are permitted as shown on the
drawings. Coordinate with the Project manager for approved concealment,
connections and installations.

F.

Conceal interior conductors.

__________________________________________________________________________________________
OCE - 30 January 2014

LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM


16670 - 2/3

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

3.03

3.04

King Saud University

G.

Conceal conductors from normal view from exterior locations at grade within 60 m
of building.

H.

Provide notification at least 48 hours before concealing lightning protection


components.

I.

Cable Connections: Use approved exothermic-welded connections for all conductor


splices and connections between conductors and other components, except those
above single-ply membrane roofing.

J.

Bond extremities of vertical metal bodies exceeding 18 m in length to lightning


protection components.

K.

Bond ground terminals with counterpoise conductor located below grade .

L.

Bond grounded metal bodies on building within 4 m of Ground to counterpoise


conductor as indicated.

M.

Bond grounded metal bodies on building within 4 m of roof to counterpoise


conductor.

N.

Bond lightning protection components to grounded metal bodies on building at


every 18 m with intermediate-level interconnection loop conductors and as indicated
.

CORROSION PROTECTION
A.

Do not combine materials that can form an electrolytic couple that will accelerate
corrosion in the presence of moisture, unless moisture is permanently excluded from
the junction of such materials.

B.

Use conductors with protective coatings where conditions would cause deterioration
or corrosion of conductors.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Cheek the installation against the detail layout drawings.

B.

Cheek earth tapes and down conductor against the specification, installed as per
manufacturer standards and applicable standards, securely clipped.

C.

Cheek electrical continuity of lightning system.

D.

Cheek test clamps to ensure they are securely fixed and disconnect facilare operable.

E.

Measure resistance value of lighting system and verify compliance with requirement.

END OF SECTION 16670

__________________________________________________________________________________________
OCE - 30 January 2014

LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM


16670 - 3/3

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16675
ISOLATED POWER PANEL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01

SCOPE
A.

1.02

The contractor shall furnish and install a complete isolated power system as
indicated on the plans and specified herein.

CODES AND STANDARDS


A.

The isolated power system shall be designed and installed in accordance with the
latest edition of the following codes and standards
1.
2.
3.
4.

1.03

NFPA 99
NFPA 70
UL Standard 1047
UL Standard 1022

:
:
:
:

"Health Care Facilities


"National Electrical Code
"Isolated Power System Distribution Equipment
"Line Isolation Monitors

PANEL DESCRIPTION
The isolated power panel shall be normal type (IDC) or (SFP) Surgical Facility Panel as
defined in project bill of quantity and project requirements. The panel shall be UL listed
under Standard 1047 and shall incorporate the following features and components:
A.

Enclosure shall be a three-piece assembly consisting of back box, chassis and front
trim. The back box shall be fabricated of galvanized steel in accordance with UL
Standard 50, "Standard for Cabinets and Boxes" and shall be flush mounted, unless
indicated otherwise, at the elevation shown on the plans. All internal electrical
components shall be mounted on a galvanized steel chassis, which bolts onto studs
located in the back box. The front trim shall be made of 12-gauge stainless steel
polished to a #4 satin finish and shall have a 1.5 inch return flange on all sides.
It shall attach to the back box with a continuous piano hinge and be secured in the
closed position with heavy-duty pawl fasteners

B.

Isolation Transformer shall be single phase, 60 Hz, KVA rating as per project bill
of quantity (range 3, 5, 7.5, 10, or 15) with primary and secondary voltage as per
project bill of quantity and drawings ( 120, 208, 220, or 240). The transformer shall
be of stacked core design with an electrostatic shield between the primary and
secondary windings. Transformers 5 KVA and smaller, the leakage current shall
not exceed 10 microamperes, and the noise level shall not exceed 25 dB; the 7.5
KVA transformer, shall not exceed 14 microamperes and 27 dB; the 10 KVA shall
not exceed 25 microamperes and 25 dB; and the 15 KVA shall not exceed 30
microamperes and 25 dB.

C.

Line Isolation Monitor shall be the Mark IV Self-Testing and Self-Calibrating LIM.
It shall continuously monitor the impedance from each secondary conductor to
ground without the use of switching circuitry and shall display the total hazard
current of the system on an ammeter. The LIM shall be capable of detecting all
combinations of resistive and capacitive faults whether they are balanced,
unbalanced or hybrid. The LIM shall not contribute more than 25 microamperes to
the total hazard current of the system.

OCE 30 January 2014

ISOLATED POWER PANEL


16675 - 1/3

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

The LIM shall alarm when the total hazard current (THC) reaches a value of 5
milliamperes (Ma). When the THC is less than 5 Ma, a green light shall be
illuminated indicating normal conditions. Should the THC reach 5 Ma, a red light
shall illuminate and a buzzer shall sound indicating an alarm. A silence switch
shall be provided to quiet the buzzer while leaving the red light on. The LIM shall
automatically reset to normal status when the fault condition is corrected.
The LIM shall also detect and signal an alarm if the ground connection to the LIM
is broken. A momentary test switch shall be provided for periodic testing of the
LIM circuitry.
The LIM shall be flush mounted on the front of the panel so that the LIM signals
are clearly visible at all times
The LIM shall be recognized under UL Standard 1022.
D.

Twin X-ray Illuminator (use for Surgical Facility Panels only) shall be FLUSH
mounted into panel front and shall have stainless steel trim. Each illuminator shall
contain a 32-watt, circular lamp and low leakage ballast. Diffuser shall be white,
translucent acrylic, 1/8 inch thick and shall slide up and out for easy access to the
lamps. Illuminators shall be controlled by two-pole switch mounted on panel front

E.

Elapsed time indicator (use for Surgical Facility Panels only) shall be DT and
FLUSH mounted into panel front. The timer shall have a digital display, 2.5 inches
high. The controls shall be mounted on the panel front.

F.

Clock shall be DC and FLUSH mounted into panel front ( use for Surgical Facility
Panels only). The clock shall have a digital display, 2.5 inches high.

G.

Branch circuit breakers shall be 20 amp, two-pole, quantity 10 unless specified


otherwise in the project bill of quantity.

H.

Reference ground bus having 24 branch taps for #12 to #6 shall be provided.

I.

Power receptacles shall be provided on the front of the panel. Receptacles to be 20


amp, 120 volt, type as instructed by site engineer, quantity 4 unless specified
otherwise in the project bill of quantity.

J.

Ground jacks shall be provided on the front of the panel. Jacks to be Hampden
SLR-3S, quantity 4 unless specified otherwise in the project bill of quantity.

PART 2 - WIRING, INSTALLATION


2.01

All Components within the isolation panel shall be pre-wired using low leakage type
XHHW wire. A barriered compartment shall be provided for the incoming primary feeder
and separation shall be maintained between grounded and ungrounded conductors. A
terminal block shall be provided for connection of remote signal conductors.

2.02

All Branch Circuit Conductors of the isolated power system shall be stranded copper
having a cross-linked polyethylene insulation, or equivalent with a dielectric constant of
3.5 or less. Type XHHW is suitable for this purpose. Each branch circuit conductor shall be
color-coded in accordance with National Electrical Code. Wire pulling compound
produces an adverse effect upon the dielectric constant of conductor insulation and shall
not be used when pulling the wire of the isolated power system. Use of dry talcum powder
is permitted.

OCE 30 January 2014

ISOLATED POWER PANEL


16675 - 2/3

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

PART 3 PRODUCTS
3.01

APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A.

The following manufacturers who are specialized in this industry are acceptable:
1.
2.
3.

3.02

SQUARE-D, USA
Life Link, USA.
SIEMENS, GERMANY

TEST AND CERTIFICATION


A.

Upon completion of the installation, a qualified factory technician/representative


shall inspect and test the equipment to verify that it is properly installed and
operating as specified. A field test report and written certification that the system
was installed and operating properly shall be furnished. The factory technician
shall also instruct the hospital personnel in the proper use and maintenance of the
equipment.
END OF SECTION

OCE 30 January 2014

ISOLATED POWER PANEL


16675 - 3/3

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16721
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01

WORK INCLUDED
Furnish a complete Analogue soft addressable electrically supervised fire detection and alarm
system as specified herein and indicated on the drawings. The system shall include but not
limited to a control panel with integral battery charger, in-built alphanumeric keypad ( keys to
facilitate on-site programming), in-built 40 column thermal printer, visual display unit capable of
displaying 16 lines of 40 characters each (64 Characters LCD ) and signal initiating devices,
audible and visual alarm devices, and all accessories required to provide a complete operating
system.

1.02

QUALITY ASSURANCE
All the system components shall be manufactured by a single manufacturer, laboratory tested
and assessed by the standards of the Loss Prevention Council. All the equipment of fire alarm
system shall have the Loss Prevention Certification Board (LPCB) listing or Vds approved.

1.03

APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS


The system shall be installed in accordance with the NEC and the following standards.
BS 5839 - Part1 Fire Detection & Alarm System in Buildings.
BS 5839 - Part 2 to Part 5,
BS 5445 - Part 5 & 7
BS 5446
EN 54
NFPA / DIN or any other international standards.

1.04

SUBMITTALS
Provide together with the shop drawings submittal , where called for in these specifications.
Upon completion of the installation and prior to final inspection, the contractor shall provide
"As-built" drawings where sensors are used, the "As Built" drawing shall show the number and
the exact sequence in which the detectors are installed in the circuit.
Submit complete list of materials and equipment of fire Alarm and Detection System for
engineer's approval . Include in the submitted package, catalogues, illustrations, diagrams and
any other relevant descriptive literature.
The contractor shall provide six copies of a maintenance manual giving complete instructions for
the operations, inspection, testing and maintenance of the system including wiring diagrams of
units and main control panel. It shall also include the following Manufacturer's instructions for
testing and frequency of cleaning for automatic smoke detector heads. Manufacturer's
instructions for any control adjustment and maintenance of battery/charger units.

OCE - 30 January 2014

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM


16721 - 1/10

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

1.05

King Saud University

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The fire detection and alarm system shall be designed to facilitate accurate identification of the
source of heat / smoke / fire in their early stages to minimize occurrences of false alarms due to
faulty equipment, electrical transients, system faults etc.
The fire alarm control panel shall be of 4 or 8 loops capacity and shall be installed as shown in
the drawings. The panel shall make final decision on whether a fire or fault exists by comparing
the plotted patterns from a fire sensor against known fire and fault patterns held in its memory.
System shall be true Analogue with the ability to print the output from a fire sensor over a period
of time.
All system components and devices shall be connected to a two-wire loop circuits with each
component having its own individual built-in isolator. Removal or disconnection of any
component from the loop shall not affect the functioning and performance of other components
and the system. Please note that group isolators which are used to isolate a section of a loop in
case of fault are not acceptable.
System shall be of Analogue soft (safe) addressable type i.e. Addressing of all devices shall be
done automatically from FACP whereby use of hard switches to set addresses is eliminated.
Please note that hard addressing is not acceptable.

1.06

OPERATION
A.
Alarm Condition
The Operation of fire alarm manual station, or automatic detector, or water flow sensing device
in sprinkler etc. shall cause the following functions.
Visual indicate the alarm indicating device exact location and the detailed 32 character label at
the Fire Alarm Control Panel Liquid Crystal Display.
Active audible alarm sounders in the effected zone with evacuate tone and alert tone in the
adjacent zones i.e. In case of Fire, when reported from Sensors or Manual Break Glass unit the
sounders connected on the loop shall ring throughout the building in 2 phases and accordingly
as below :
a) Continuous evacuation signal shall be provided at the floor of origin of fire alarm ,
Intermittent alert signal shall be provided for one floor above and one floor below + fire stair
wells.
b) If the fire alarm is not resetted within 3 minutes of receiving the above signal ,evacuation
signal shall travel one floor above and one floor below.
c) If still the fire alarm is not resetted for another 3 minutes then the whole of the building shall
provide the evacuation signal.
d) Automatic operate the fan shut down control and fire doors for the same floor .
e) Air-conditioning system shall be switched off only on the floor of origin of fire alarm signal
and A/C system on the other floors shall be switched off only if such signal is received from
these floors. But if there is a fire reported from transfer floor where all chillers and chilled water
circulating pumps are installed then a/c system for the whole building shall be switched off. To
achieve this sequencing the F.A system shall be interfaced to BMS and shall provided floor wise
contacts of fire condition through the Interface Rack. .

OCE - 30 January 2014

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM


16721 - 2/10

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

f) Operate a clean contact and provide a signal to the Building Management System, Lift Panel
serving the same zone. If the fire is initiated in any other floors other than ground floor , the
respective lift in that area shall trip and stop at ground floor . If the fire is initiated in the ground
floor , the lift shall trip and stop at first floor.
The system shall connect to the telephone system through a Auto dialer so that one common fire
signal is relayed to the Central Fire Station after a set delay. THE ABOVE FIRE PLAN SHALL BE
FINALISED BASED ON THE APPLIACTION BY THE CLIENT ENGINEER DURING
EXECUTION.
B.

Fault Condition

Facilities shall be provided to constantly monitor and check the following circuits and fault
conditions on the Liquid Crystal Display Of the FACP and a fault and warning condition LED.
The operation of a valve tamper switch.
The power supply to the loop /s
For open-circuit, short-circuit, earth fault and any other fault condition in the loop wiring.
For communication failure and errors in all cards and loops.
For faults in keyboard and printer circuits.
Monitoring of all devices status every 1.3 minutes to create a table of each analogue channel for
event analysis.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01

GENERAL
All devices i.e., Sensors, MCPs, sounders, repeat panel, interface unit etc. shall be installed on
the same loop. All devices shall be assigned an maximum of 64 character alpha-numeric label. In
case of fire, fault or warning, the label of device sensing threshold shall appear on visual display
unit of the panel.
Any programming , correction in label shall have to be carried out from the built-in keyboard of
FACP. Use of separate PC or tools shall not be acceptable. Any event i.e. Fire, fault or warning
shall be recorded with time, date and place of occurrence in the memory of FACP. These events
can either be displayed on VDU or printed, as required.
Provision shall be done at the fire alarm control panel to silence the alarm sounders but the
visual indication shall remain until the system is reset. Sensitivity of sensors can be changed, if
required, only from fire alarm control panel. Sensitivity can also be varied automatically, if
required by time zoning feature whereby it allows sensors to be programmed to respond at
different sensitivities relative to any time of day, and any day of week.
Facility to introduce / change delay periods in operating individual sounder / group of
sounders, shall be possible to program from FACP without the need to change any hardware.

2.02

MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL ( ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE )

OCE - 30 January 2014

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM


16721 - 3/10

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

The panel shall be computer controlled using analogue technique to detect smoke / heat / fire
conditions. The panel shall be complete with, but not limited to, the following elements :
Visual display unit capable of displaying 16 lines of 40 characters back-lit display
Built-in 40 character thermal printer.
Built-in full alpha numeric keyboard. Labeling of devices can be done from this keyboard. Also,
any programming , correction in label if required, shall be done by this keyboard only.

Shall be backed-up with maintenance free sealed lead acid battery and charger unit, as per the
requirements of BS 5839.
Essential controls- sound alarms, silence alarms and reset fire. These shall be enabled by a keyswitch.
Cancel fault buzzer
Fire, fault, warning and power on lamps.
Simple menu driven function keys with password protection shall allow users to an extensive
range of software based features such as :
- last 100 fire events
- last 255 system events
- current fault and warning logs.
- analysis of analogue sensor information
- interrogation of sensor cleanliness
- loop map connections
- enable/ disable sensors, zones, sounders, interface unit channels.
- fire plan configuration menus
- outstation label changes
- address allocation
- status of outstation
- status of all cards
- printer on, off, line feed and test facilities.
All control buttons and keyboard shall be enclosed behind a lockable cover.
Up to 200 analogue addressable device capacity per 1 km loop.
RS 232/ RS 485 computer communication option.
Shall have minimum of 2 Master alarm circuits.
Shall have a secure networking facility to indicate a remote zone and remote zone text across the
network in future.

OCE - 30 January 2014

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM


16721 - 4/10

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.03

King Saud University

BATTERY CHARGER
This power supply unit shall be integrated into the fire alarm control panel to power the
electronics within the panel and also provide power for outstations connected to the panels loop.
The unit shall normally derive its supply from the standard mains of 220VAC 50/60 Hz,
protected with a 5A fuse. In the event of a mains failure the panels battery backup facility shall
maintain all power requirements for 24 hours using the maintenance free sealed lead acid
batteries.
The method used for transforming the power shall involve the switching of power devices at
high speed to chop unregulated dc voltage into pulse at a rate determined by the load
requirements. Efficient computer grade energy storage devices shall modulate the pulse into a
stabilized dc voltage, which shall be chopped yet again to create a number of other isolated dc
voltage for use by the control panel.
There shall be two charger circuits for the sealed lead acid battery banks integrated with the
power supply design and each charger shall be protected by a 5A fuse. Each charger shall have a
negative temperature compensation characteristic giving a 48mV/ deg. C reduction in charge
voltage with an increase in temperature.
Other facilities shall be built into the power supply assembly to provide for panel and system
control. These shall include two auxiliary relays, two master alarm circuits rated 1A at 24V and a
two tone Fire/Fault buzzer. Extensive fault monitoring shall be performed at the unit to cover
the mains supply, loop voltage, earth fault monitoring and the monitoring of all stabilized dc
voltages.

2.04

ALL SENSORS
Install where ever appropriate as shown in the drawings. All smoke sensors shall comprise of
three components :Termination Plate, Electronics Module and a replaceable sensor chamber. The termination plate
shall incorporate the terminals for wiring only and shall not contain any electronic parts. The
electronic module shall plug onto the termination plate as a second fix item. It shall have micro
processors, short-circuit isolators and all electronic components and circuitry suitable for an
Analogue addressable system. The sensing chamber shall fit on the electronics module as a third
fix item.
This design shall allow sensing element alone to be replaced, should it become dirty due to a
build up of dust from the surrounding atmosphere. When removed, the panel shall display a
fault condition with a message Sensor chamber Removed with a relevant label/address. The
sensor chamber shall also have 360 degree viewing LED indicator.
The automatic fire detectors shall be fixed to the installation by means of plug-in bases .
The bases specified herein shall have a facility to set and accept all type of sensors with feature of
locking the detectors place once plugged in.
The base or sensors shall NOT have any address setting key-switches. All the devices connected
on the loop shall be soft addressed by the FACP. Addressing of devices through hard switches or
separate tools or flips are NOT acceptable.

OCE - 30 January 2014

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM


16721 - 5/10

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

All equipment connected to the system addressable loops either directly via interfaces units, shall
be proofed against electrical noise, high frequency pulses and electromagnetic influences from
other equipment.
2.05

IONIZATION TYPE SMOKE SENSOR


Comply where applicable with requirements of BS 5445: Part7. Install where ever appropriate as
shown in the drawings. Contain integral L.E.D. indicator to denote operational mode and infrared emitter for transmitting address and status information to an hand held device.
Contain all necessary microprocessors, electronic components and circuitry required to form a
analogue/addressable device for direct connection to the two wire loop circuits originating from
the central
control panel and operate in conjunction with the system circuitry/operational
arrangements.
The smoke chamber shall employ a low energy alpha emitting ionizing radiation source
(Americium 241 of 0.8Mc). Ionization sensors shall be dual chamber type with sampling
reference chambers for high reliability.

2.06

OPTICAL SMOKE / HEAT SENSOR (COMBINED IN ONE HEAD)


Comply where applicable with the requirements of BS 5445 :Part 5 & and BS 5446:Part 1 for the
Heat/Smoke elements respectively. Install where ever appropriate as shown in the drawings.
Smoke sensing shall be by pulses of an infra-red beam projected across a dark sensor chamber by
the L.E.D. emitter. A photo-diode receive fitted at an obtuse angle to the IR beam shall normally
sense some standing light scatter. When smoke enters the smoke chamber through entry slots
around the sensor head, more light shall be scattered towards photo-diode receiver thus enabling
the microprocessor and measurement circuits on the PCB to pick up a fire threshold. Heat
sensing shall be done by the two thermistors in close contact with the mesh which shall prevent
foreign bodies entering the sensor chamber and shall serve as an heat sink for the two
Thermistors to allow even heat distribution. These sensors should also have capabilty of
accomodating inbuilt sounders upto 85 dBA.

2.07

HEAT SENSOR
Comply where applicable with the requirement of BS 5445:Part5 & 8 . Install where ever
appropriate as shown in the drawings.
Heat sensing shall be carried out by the thermistor and heat sink assembly.
The microprocessor on the PCB performs the monitoring of the THERMISTOR through analogue
to digital conversion circuitry and uses the measurement to enable heat sensing to be performed.

2.08

DUCT SENSOR
It shall use an optical smoke/heat sensor combined. Install where ever appropriate in return air
ducts as shown in the drawings. Housing shall include inlet and outlet probes and terminations
to the sensor base.

OCE - 30 January 2014

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM


16721 - 6/10

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

Shall monitor an air flow of 0-10 meters per second in ventilation ducts. Therefore a correct
positioning of duct detectors is a must. Air turbulence caused by bends, fans or obstructions
shall reduce the efficiency of the probes and the unit shall be fitted away from these positions. A
position shall be selected where a sufficient density of smoke can reach the inlet probe.
For this to be achieved, duct sensors must not be sited in a common duct as this will lead to
smoke dilution. That is, air from an area of fire will mix with clean air from other areas and may
not satisfactorily operate the sensor within the duct housing. When the probes are correctly
aligned in the duct, the air flow along the duct promotes a pressure differential between the inlet
and exhaust probes, causing air to flow through the duct housing. If smoke is present in
sufficient quantity in the duct it shall be sensed by optical/heat sensor.
2.09

ADDRESSABLE CALL POINTS


Comply where applicable with the requirement of BS 5839 Part 2 . Install where ever appropriate
as shown in the drawings.
The Addressable call points shall be soft addressable type, microprocessor based and shall
monitor and signal to FACP the status of switch operated by a break glass.
The addressable call points shall be capable of operating by means of thumb pressure.
For external applications , the addressable call points shall be capable of mounted in weather proof affording protection to IP 66.

The addressable call points shall incorporate a mechanism to interrupt the normal addressable
loop scan to provide an alarm response within less than 1 second.
The addressable call points shall be field programmable to trigger either an alert or an evacuate
response from FACP.
The addressable call point shall be capable of being tested using a special key without the need
for shattering the glass.
The addressable call points shall be provided with an integral red LED to indicate activation.
The addressable call point glass shall have both English and Arabic script.
2.10

SOFT ADDRESSABLE SOUNDERS


Shall meet the requirements of BS 5839 Part 1.
Shall be electronic soft addressable pattern with
Two link selectable volume:
95dB at 1 Mt.
104 dB at 1 Mt.
Shall be compatible to be connected on the same loop along with addressable sensors and
addressable manual call points.

OCE - 30 January 2014

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM


16721 - 7/10

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

Cross - zoning concept shall be available which can be modified and programmed accordingly
using the keyboard. Activation, deactivation, enabling and dissembling features shall be
available and shall be achieved using the built-keyboard. Shall be suitable for surface mounting.
2.11

ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM INTERFACE UNIT


Install where ever appropriate as shown in the drawings.
All interface units shall be soft addressable PATTERN and contain all necessary microprocessors, electronic components/circuitry required to form an addressable device for direct
connection to the two wire loop circuits and operate in conjunction with the system
circuitry/operational requirements to take inputs from the adessable detectors and manual break
glass units if shown in the drawings.
Shall have capacity to drive 4 special outlets to be controlled via relays with 1 no. set of 24 volts
AC/DC 6 amp rated volt free change over CONTACTS to provide the outputs to door holders.,
all pre-wired to terminals for accepting incoming cables shall be by the sub-contractor.
The relay coil shall be controlled from the control panel via the two wire loop circuits and
internal micro-processors/electronic components/circuitry, the contacts shall be utilized to
adressable de-energize automatic fire doors and transfer ventilation plants to a fire status under a
fire alarm condition as shown in the drawings and mentioned elsewhere.
The interface units shall be complete with power supply units i.e. integral battery and charger, all
housed within a surface mounted metallic enclosure.
No use of relays shall be required when any form of low current output devices are connected to
any of the 4 lines of interface units.

2.12

GRAPHIC MIMIC DISPLAY PANEL


Comply where applicable with the requirement of BS 5839 Part 4 . Install where ever appropriate
as shown in the drawings.
All graphic mimic display panel shall be installed at entrance reception in the ground floor . This
shall have soft addressable pattern, containing all necessary microprocessors, electronic
components and circuitry required to form an addressable device for direct connection to the two
wire loop circuits and operate with conjunction with the system circuitry/operational
requirements.
This shall give secondary indications of fires detected by the main control panel by means of
illuminating lamps behind a translucent site plan of the protected premises. The lamps shall be
on 1/2" matrix and consists of high brightness Red L.E.D.'s.
Controlled illuminated patterns shall be carried out automatically based on pre-programmed
data to illuminate lamps individually or in groups depending on the positions of the outstations
on the protected site.
The map shall be fitted between 2 sheets of clear perplex and mounted against 1536 high
brightness lamps. Any site alterations as a result of office moves or extensions to the building
shall be easily accommodated by replacing the film and programmable device holding the lamp
illumination data.

OCE - 30 January 2014

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM


16721 - 8/10

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

It shall also include:


Shall have first or last fire flashing option
Shall have flashing in phase of anti-phase to save power consumption
Shall have the facility to operate single or group of lamps with individual devices.
2.13

ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM REPEAT PANEL


Install where ever appropriate as shown in the drawings.
Fire Alarm repeat panel shall be soft addressable pattern, contain all necessary microprocessors,
electronic components and circuitry required to form an addressable device for direct connection
to the two wire loop circuits and operate in conjunction with the system circuitry/operational
requirements. It shall give the secondary indication and control of the main fire alarm control
panel. It shall repeat system Fire, Fault and Warning messages with indications and also
duplicates essential system controls for emergency conditions.
The messages on the repeat panel shall be alphanumeric 16 lines by 40 characters liquid crystal
display. Audible indications are by means of a 2 tone buzzer for Fire and Fault sound.
It shall have an identical display and keyboards to those used on the control panel and includes
Start Sounders, Stop Sounders, Reset Controls and Test Engineering Facilities.
Local communication, interconnection of electronics disconnection from the loop power supply
land standby supply shall be monitored.
All alarm/graphic mimic panels, manual contacts, sensors, sounders, repeat panels and interface
units shall be complete with individual circuit monitors.
The function of the monitors being to both isolate short/open circuit faults on the loop wiring
and equipment items, without impairing the operation of all other equipment items connected to
the loop of the system.

2.14

ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE RACK UNIT :


Install where ever appropriate as shown in the drawings.
Fire Alarm interface rack shall be EMC compliant, LVD Compliance cable types and loop circuit
connections. The rack shall consist of 40 monitored change over contacts to provide signal to
BMS and other auxiliary equipment. Interface rack shall be semi-flush mounted and shall
consist of 10 numbers loop powered interface PCBs with each 4 Nos. input/output
programmable contacts.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1

INSTALLATION
A. Fire alarm components shall be installed directly to conduit outlet boxes at the following
mounting heights
above finished floor level, measured to the center of box unless stated
otherwise.
B. Fix manual call station semi-recessed at 1.50 Mt. height above finished floor.
C. Automatic smoke and heat sensors: Ceiling mounted
D. Alarm sounders: 2.20 Mt. above finished floor

OCE - 30 January 2014

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM


16721 - 9/10

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

E. Outdoor alarm: fix where indicated by fire dept. and approved by the Client / Consultant
engineer.
F. External response indicators: fix beside or above doors as directed by the client engineer / as
shown on the drawings.
3.2

WIRING AND WIRING FACILITIES

A.

Supply and install the necessary conduit, enclosed trunking to the Fire Cable and accessories and
wiring for the fire alarm system.
B.
Supply shall operate on two wire lines for detection, alarm and control functions. Wire size
termination and other details shall be as per Fire Alarm System manufacturer's recommendations.
Loop wiring for the devices shall be 2 core 1.5 sq. mm screened Firecell SR114 , Pirelli FP400 cable
or approved equivalent fire resistant cable.
C. All wiring shall be installed to provide complete and satisfactory function system in all respects.
All cable terminations at components and junction boxes shall have identification tags, indicating
through out the system.
D. The Fire Alarm/Detection system wiring shall be completely independent from the other system
wiring in all respects in accordance with the IEE Regulations.

3.3

TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

E.

After the installation is complete, the contractor shall conduct operating and commissioning tests.
The equipment shall be demonstrated to operate in accordance with the requirements of the
specification. The system installation, testing and commissioning shall be as per Local approvals
and requirements.
F. The fire alarm system shall be completely programmed in accordance with Fire Department
requirement and a specialist from the manufacturer shall attend and demonstrate the complete
system.
G. A company trained representative shall personally supervise the complete installation and final
testing of the system .
H. All tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Client or persons authorized by the consultant
/ client..
I.
Upon the completion of the acceptance tests, the representatives shall instruct operatives in the
proper operation , maintenance programming, configuration, and testing of the system.
J.
The vendor shall provide equipment and /or software which is necessary to allow field
modification of the programming and configuration.
END OF SECTION 16720

OCE - 30 January 2014

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM


16721 - 10/10

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16735
AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEMS (AUDITORIUM)
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
Acoustical Wall Panels
Visual System
Wireless Control System
Video Conference System
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01

1.02

SECTION INCLUDES
A.

Furnishing and installing public address system as shown on the drawings and specified
in this section.

B.

Furnishing and installing Acoustical wall panels as shown on the drawings and specified
in this section.

C.

Furnishing and installing Visual System as shown on the drawings and specified in this
section.

D.

Furnishing and installing Translation system as shown on the drawings and specified in
this section.

E.

Furnishing and installing Wireless control system as shown on the drawings and
specified in this section.

F.

Furnishing and installing Videoconference system as shown on the drawings and


specified in this section.

REFERENCES
A.

IEC - International Electrical Commission


1. IEC 149
2. IEC 268
3. IEC 297
4. IEC 574

B.

NFPA National Fire Protection Association


1. NFPA 70

C.

Sockets and Accessories for Electronic Plug-In Devices


Sound System Equipment
Dimensions of Panels and Racks
Audio-Visual, video and Television Equipment and System

National Electrical Code

EIA - Electronic Industries Association


1. All Relevant Publications

D.
1.03

For further details refer to Section 16050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Complete list of materials and equipment to be incorporated in the work, including a


complete wiring diagram of the system and circuit routing.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Audio Visual Systems


16735 - 1/11

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

B.
1.04

1.05

Descriptive literature and other data of each material and equipment listed.

TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE


A.

All the components system shall be provided in manufacturers original new and
unopened packing bearing manufacturers name and label.

B.

Store materials not in actual use in covered and well-ventilated area and protect them
from dirt, dust, moisture, direct sunlight and extreme temperatures.

C.

For further requirements follow manufacturers written instruction regarding storage


and handling.

WARRANTY
A.

1.06

King Saud University

Submit written guarantee signed by the contractor, manufacturer for the period of 5
years from the date of substantial completion. The guarantee shall cover the repair and
replacement of defective materials and workmanship as directed by the Engineer.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

Manufacturers Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of public address


systems and components, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
services for not less than 5 years period, and shall be subject to approval of the Engineer.

B.

Installer Qualifications: An experienced specialist sub-contractor who is authorized by


the system manufacturer, and subject to approval of the Engineer.

C.

All the components and installations shall comply with the requirements of specified
codes and standards.

D.

Single Source Responsibility: All components and accessories shall be product of single
manufacturer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01

GENERAL:
A.

2.02

The Contractor shall furnish and install all equipment, accessories and material required
for the installation of the specified public address systems. Any material and/or
equipment necessary for the proper operation of the system not specified or described
herein shall be deemed part of these specifications. The equipment described and
furnished under these specifications shall be the standard product of one manufacturer.
Number of each equipment shall be as shown on the drawings, and shall be mounted in
rack.

PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM (Sound system)


A.

Speaker Technical Information: (10 Pcs)


Frequency Range
Speaker Configurations
Sensitivity

OCE - 30 January 2014

:
:
:

75Hz to 16 kHz 3dB


70V/100V (25W, 50W, 100W, 200W taps)

85dB-SPL @ 1W, 1m (pink noise)


Audio Visual Systems
16735 - 2/11

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

B.

King Saud University

Maximum Acoustic Output

102dB-SPL @ 1m (pink noise)


102dB-SPL @ 1m (IEC3 noise)

Dispersion (6dB point, average, 1-4 kHz)

Horizontal 178
Vertical 93

Long-Term Power Handling

100W continuous
200w peak

Impedance

70V: 25. At 200W tap setting


100V: 50. At 200W tap setting

Floor Stage Monitor Technical Information: (2 Pcs)


Frequency Range

90Hz to 16 kHz (3dB)

Active Equalization

70V (1W, 2W, 4W, 8W, 16W, 32W taps)


100V (1W, 2W, 4W, 8W, 16W, 32W taps)
Passive Equalization - 4, 32W, no transformer

C.

Sensitivity

Active Equalization- 87dB-SPL @ 1W, 1m (pink noise)


Passive Equalization-87dB-SPL @ 1W, 1m (pink noise)

Maximum Acoustic Output

102dB-SPL @ 1m (pink noise)


102dB-SPL @ 1m (IEC3 noise)

Dispersion

(6dB point, average, 1-4 kHz) 132 conical

Long-Term Power Handling

32W continuous
Connectors: 70V/100V, screw terminal; 4
Hex nut post terminals
Mounting Hardware Included: Quick install

Professional Power Amplifiers 500W (1 Pc.)


Stereo Mode (both channels driven)
8 ohms 20 Hz-20 kHz 0.1% THD
4 ohms 20 Hz-20 kHz 0, 1% THD
2 ohms 1 kHz 1% THD

Continuous Average Output Power per Channel


260W
425W
700W

XF Output Power, Stereo Mode


7OVor 100V 50 Hz-16 kHz 0.5% THD
25V 50 Hz-i 6 kHz 0.5% THD
Bridge Mono Mode
8 ohms 1 kHz 0.1% THD
4 ohms 1 KHz 1% THD
XF Output Power, Bridge Mono Mode
l4OVor200V 5OHz-l6kHz 0.5% THD
50V 5OHz-l6kHz 0.5% THD
Signal to Noise (2OHz-2OkHz)
Distortion (SMPTE-IM)
Input Sensitivity @8 ohms
Gain at 8 ohms
Distortion (typical)
20 Hz-20kHz:10 dB below rated power
1.0 kHz and below: full rated power

500W
400W
Continuous AverageOutput Power
900W
1400W
1000W
800W
100dB
Less than 0, 01%
1.07v (+2.8dBu)
44.7x (33 dB)
Less than 0.03% THD, 4 & 8
Less than 0.03% THD, 4 & 8

Frequency Response
OCE - 30 January 2014

Audio Visual Systems


16735 - 3/11

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

10 dB below rated output power:


Direct outputs:
XF outputs:

-3dB @50Hz, -0.5 dB @20 kHz;


50 Hz-16 kHz,+0/-3 dB

Damping Factor
Input Impedance
Input Clipping

Greater than 200 @ 8


10 K unbalanced, 20 K balanced
10 Vrms (+22dB)

Cooling

Continuously variable speed


fan, back-to-front air flow

Connectors
Input:

Active balanced; 3-pin Eurostyle detachable terminal block


and XLR (pin 2+)
Covered barrier strips
HD-1 5 connector

Output:
Data Port V2:
Controls
Front:
Rear:

AC switch
Ch. 1 and Ch. 2 gain knobs, 10position DIP switch

Amplifier Protection

D.

Full short circuit, open circuit, thermal,


ultrasonic, and RF protection; Stable
into reactive or mismatched loads

Professional Power Amplifiers 800W (2 Pcs.)


Stereo Mode (both channels driven)
8 ohms 20 Hz-20 kHz 0.1% THD
4 ohms 20 Hz-20 kHz 0, 1% THD
2 ohms 1 kHz 1% THD

Continuous Average Output Power per Channel


450W
650W
1200W

XF Output Power, Stereo Mode


7OVor 100V 50 Hz-16 kHz 0.5% THD
25V 50 Hz-i 6 kHz 0.5% THD
Bridge Mono Mode
8 ohms 1 kHz 0.1% THD
4 ohms 1 KHz 1% THD

800W
640W
Continuous Average Output Power
1500W
2400W

XF Output Power, Bridge Mono Mode


l4OVor200V 5OHz-l6kHz 0.5% THD
50V 5OHz-l6kHz 0.5% THD

1600W
1280W

Signal to Noise (2OHz-2OkHz)

100dB

Distortion (SMPTE-IM)
Input Sensitivity @8 ohms
Gain at 8 ohms
Distortion (typical)
20 Hz-20kHz:10 dB below rated power
1.0 kHz and below: full rated power

Less than 0, 02%


1.07v (+2.8dBu)
56.2 (35 dB)
Less than 0.03% THD, 4 & 8
less than 0.03% THD, 4 & 8

Frequency Response
10 dB below rated output power:
Direct outputs:
XF outputs:

-3dB @50Hz, -0.5 dB @20 kHz;


50 Hz-16 kHz, +0/-3 dB

Damping Factor
Input Impedance

Greater than 200 @ 8


10 K unbalanced, 20 K balanced

OCE - 30 January 2014

Audio Visual Systems


16735 - 4/11

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

Input Clipping
Cooling

10 Vrms (+22dB)
Continuously variable speed
fan, back-to-front air flow

Connectors
Input:

Active balanced; 3-pin Eurostyle detachable terminal block


and XLR (pin 2+)
Covered barrier strips
HD-1 5 connector

Output:
Data Port V2:
Controls
Front:
Rear:

AC switch
Ch. 1 and Ch. 2 gain knobs, 10position DIP switch

Amplifier Protection

E.

F.

Full short circuit, open circuit,


thermal, ultrasonic, and RF
protection; Stable into reactive
or mismatched loads

FEEDBACK DESTROYER:

Digital 2-channel feedback suppressor with a 24X32 bit high speed signal
processor.

High-quality burr brown 18-bit A/D and converters for pure and clean audio
quality.

Open architecture for easy software updating.

Windows editor for easy use and use powerful PC based MIDI remote control.

Linkable in "cascade" mode with other units.

64 home preset and 64 user presets available.

Automatically search and suppress feedback frequencies.

Single Shot, auto and Manual mode selectable for each filter

LCD for clear and simple readability.

Servo balanced inputs and outputs with XLR connectors.

SOUND FILTER:
Sample Rate
Analog Inputs Connectors
Impedance balanced
Input level

:
:
:
:

Sensitivity
A to D conversion
Dynamic range
THD
Frequency response
Crosstalk
Analog Outputs Connectors
Impedance balanced
Maximum output level
Output ranges
D to A conversion

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

OCE - 30 January 2014

44.1 KHZ
(2)XLR balanced
21 K
Maximum: +18dBu
Minimum: 0dBu
9@dB headroom: -12dBu to +9dBu
24 bit, 128 x over sampling bitstream
95dB typ, 20Hz - 20 kHz
Typ < 92dB (0.0025%) @ 1 kHz
20Hz to 20 kHz, +0/-0.1dB
<100dB, 20Hz to 20 kHz
(4) XLR balanced
40
18+dBu (balanced )
Balanced 20/14/8/2dBu
24 bit, 128 x oversampling bitstream
Audio Visual Systems
16735 - 5/11

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

G.

King Saud University

D to A Delay
Dynamic Range
THD

:
:
:

0.63ms @ 44.1 kHz


100dB typ 20Hz - 20 kHz
Typ < 94dB (0.002%) @ 1 kHz +20dBu
Output

Frequency response
Crosstalk
Front Panel Attributes

:
:
:

20Hz to 20 kHz: +0/-0.5dB


<-95 dB, 20Hz to 20 kHz
Standby button
Standby on/off

Channel 1 and 2 input meters

Displays the individual input levels of


Channels 1 and 2. The meter range is O
(overload red LED), 0, -6, -12, -18, -24 and, 40dB (green LEDs)

Display

LCD display

16 CHANNELS MIXER (1 Pcs.)

16 x 4 x 1
On-board effects
12 mic/line channels, 2 stereo/line channels
Input trim controls with +50dB gain range
100 Hz Low Cut filters on each mic channel
2 aux sends with pre/post switch on each channel
Internal and external effects level sends on each channel
Active 3-band, swept mid EQ on mic channels and active 4-band EQ on stereo line
channels
Pan control and mute switch on each channel
Bus assign switches on each channel for _ and _
PFL Solo switch on each channel
9-band stereo main graphic EQ with 15dB cut/boost and dual 12-segment LED
ladders
Master AUX 1, Aux 2 and EFX 1 sends, and external EFX return
Internal 32-Bit EMAC digital effects processor with 9 reverbs, 4 delays, and chorus,
flange and phaser
2 adjustable parameter controls on each effect
Special EFX Wide switch expands effect image on reverbs, chorus and flange
Effects foot switch jack and separate EFX bypass switch
4 sub mixes with direct outs and left and right assign switches
48V master phantom power
Tape/CD input/output RCA jacks with level control and assign to main mix switch
Headphone output with independent level control
Left and right control room outputs with independent level control
Mic-channel line inputs are TRS balanced/unbalanced
TRS insert jacks on mic channels for insertion of external signal processors
Dual effects sends with dual stereo returns
12V BNC lamp jack

H.

Wireless Microphone (4 Pcs.)

I.

Dynamic Microphone (5 Pcs.)

J.

Phantom Microphone ( 1 Pcs.)

K.

Tuner (1 Pcs.)

L.

Tape Deck Player (1 Pcs.)

OCE - 30 January 2014

Audio Visual Systems


16735 - 6/11

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.03

King Saud University

EQUIPMENTS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION (Sound System &Acoustical Wall Panels)


1.

Charts
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

2.

Panel component
Edges
Mounting
Size to
Thickness
Remarks

:
:
:
:
:
:

General Purpose
Resin Hardened Square Edge
Velcro ( Hook and Loop)
47.24" x 47.24"
1"
* Field cutting is available
* Leveled sub wall is required

Data :
a.

Thickness
:
Finish
:
Core Construction
:
Absorption Coefficient:

1"
Special Fabric
7 lb/ ft fiberglass
125 hz
250 hz 500 hz
0.07
0.35
0.70
1000 hz
0.95

2.04

2000 hz
1.07

VISUAL SYSTEM
A.

4700 ANSI Lumens Projector ( 1 Pcs ) :


Display Technology

1.3" Polysilicon panel x 3

Resolution

1024 x 768 (total 2,359,296 pixels), 600 video lines

Brightness / Contrast Ratio

4700 ANSI lumens / 600 :1

Colors

16,770,000 colors

Zoom/focus

Remote control (zoom ratio: 1.3 : 1)

Min~Max Picture size / Throw Ratio

60 ~ 300 inch / 1.9~2.4:1

Source lamp / Max lamp life / Lamp


model

270W / 2000 Hours in low mode / VLTXL5950LP


VGA ~ UXGA (640 x 400 ~ 1600 x 1200)

Computer compatibility

True Resolution : XGA (1024 x 768)


Sync on green available
NTSC, NTSC 4.43, PAL (including PAL-M,N),
SECAM, PAL-60

Video compatibility

DVD (component), HDTV (525p, 720p, 1080i)


SCART plug (RGB +1V sync)
PC: mini D-sub 15 pin x 1, BNC x 5

Input terminals

Video1: RCA + BNC,


Video2: S video + Y/C + BNC
Audio: RCA x 2

OCE - 30 January 2014

Audio Visual Systems


16735 - 7/11

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

Output terminals
Communication terminals

2.05.

King Saud University

RGB: mini D-sub 15 pin x 1


RS-232C x 2 (DIN 8 pin)
USB terminal for Mouse x 1

Audio speakers

5W

Remote control

Full function remote with laser pointer

Power consumption

380W

Power supply

AC100 ~ 240V 10%, 50/60Hz

B.

4.25X4.25 Motorized Screen Rollermic 220V (1 Pcs.)

C.

Plasma 50" ( 2 pcs)

D.

HIGH RESOLUTION COMPUTER-TO-VIDEO SCAN CONVERTER (1PCS.)

E.

Switchers 4X4 RGBHV(1 Pcs.)

F.

Switchers 8X8 S-VIDEO (1 Pcs.)

G.

Switchers 4X8 VIDEO (1 Pcs.)

H.

C TO S-VIDEO TRANSCORDER (1 Pcs.)

I.

DVD/VCD/CDR PLAYER (1 Pcs.)

J.

Hhs hi-fi Video Player 6 Head (1 Pcs.)

WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM


A.

Viewpoint Wireless Touch Panels


1.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Specifications
a.

Color Viewpoint
Provides smart battery charging
Displays 256-color graphics on a 6" Color-passive LCD
Transmits 1-way RF wireless signals
Transmits downloaded maufacturer IR codes
Includes NiMH rechargeable battery pack

b.

LCD
6" (153.9 mm) Color passive-matrix LCD with a resolution of 320 x 240
pixels Memory
512 KB of SRAM and 2 MB of flash for a total of 2.5 MB

c.

External Buttons
4 fixed external programmable pushbuttons (2 on each side)

d.

Operating Frequencies
RF: 418 MHz standard RF 1-way transmission
IR: 38 KHz or 455 KHz IR frequencies

e.

Connector Ports
External power: 6 mm coax male power cable connects from an External
power supply
Programming: 2.5 mm stereo female conductor jack (Viewpoint to PC
programming cable)
Audio Visual Systems
16735 - 8/11

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

f.

1-way RF Radio Receiver


Receives RF signals from Viewpoint and other 1-way wireless panels
Connects to an AXlink control network RF Frequency

OCE - 30 January 2014

King Saud University

418 MHz standard or other..


Wireless Remote Control ( for projector 2 plasma dvd video ..)
Viewpoint express ( 1- way RF )
Integrated AXCESS Controller
Touch panel
RF Receiver
Power Supply
IR Emitter Cables
ViewPoint station for handling and changing the wireless touch panel
Dimming System( 6 zone )
4 channel radia integrated dimmer modul
Radia Prolink wall panel 1-gang
Programming control system

Audio Visual Systems


16735 - 9/11

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01

INSTALLATION
A.

OCE - 30 January 2014

The entire systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers drawings,
Audio Visual Systems
16735 - 10/11

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

instructions and recommendations.

3.02

B.

All electrical conduits, wiring and methods shall conform to the requirements - BASIC
MATERIALS AND METHODS.

C.

In general, all cable shall be installed in raceway.

TESTING
A.

The completed installation shall be tested in accordance with the manufacturers


recommendation. Testing shall be conducted by representative of the manufacturer.

END OF SECTION 16735

OCE - 30 January 2014

Audio Visual Systems


16735 - 11/11

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building King Saud University


Riyadh

Item
2.02

DESCRIPTION

QTY

UNIT

RATE

AMOUNT

PUBLIC ADDRESS /SOUND SYSTEM


SUPPLY AND INSTALL A PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
CONSISTING OF.BUT NOT LIMITED TO :

01

PUBLIC ADDRESS EQUIPMENT RACK

02

MICROPHONE JACK Outlets

03

LOUD SPEAKER

10

04

MONITOR SPEAKER

05

POWER AMPLIFIER

06

POWER AMPLIFIER

07

FEEDBACK DESTROYER

08

SOUND FILTER

09

MIXER

10

WIRELESS MIC

11

DYNAMIC MIC

12

TUNER

13

TAPE DECK PLAYER

14

PHANTOM MIC

2.03

ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS


SUPPLY AND INSTALL ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS

2.04

VISUAL SYSTEM
SUPPLY AND INSTALL VISUAL SYSTEM
CONSISTING OF.BUT NOT LIMITED TO :

01

PROJECTOR

02

MOTORIZED SCREEN

03

PLASMA

04

COMPUTER TO VIDEO SCAN CONVERTER

05

SWITCHERS

06

SWITCHERS

07

SWITCHERS

08

C TO S-VIDEO TRANCORDER

09

DVD

10

VIDEO

OCE - 30 January 2014

Audio Visual Systems (Auditorium)


16735/BOQ - 1/2

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building King Saud University


Riyadh

Item
2.06

DESCRIPTION

QTY

UNIT

RATE

AMOUNT

WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM


SUPPLY AND INSTALL WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM
CONSISTING OF.BUT NOT LIMITED TO :

01

RF RECEIVER

02

POWER SUPPLY

03

INTEGRATED ACCESS CONTROL FRAME INCLUDES AS NON


SEPARATE ITEMS COMPACT AND SEALED

04

RELAY CARD

05

ENHANCED SYSTEM MASTER CARD

06

6 CHANNEL RADIA INTEGRATED DIMMER MODULE

07

6 SPACES RADIA ENCLOSURE CONTROL CARD

08

IR SERIAL INTERFACE CARD

09

ACCESS CARD DRIVER FRAME

10

3 CHANNEL VOLUME CONTROLLER

11

6" 1-WAY VIEWPOINT COLOR WIRELESS TOUCH PANEL

12

IR EMITTER CABLE

2.07

VIDEOCONFERENCE SYSTEM
SUPPLY AND INSTALL VIDEOCONFERENCE SYSTEM
CONSISTING OF.BUT NOT LIMITED TO :
VIEW STATION POINT TO POINT IP UP TO 2 MHZ
COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
COMMUNICATION COLOR CAMERA
DIGITAL MICROPHONE WITH SPEAKER
1 VCR AND DOCUMENT CAMERA SUPPORT
ETHERNET HUB
REMOTE COMMANDER
MULTIPOINT LICENSE KEY

OCE - 30 January 2014

Audio Visual Systems (Auditorium)


16735/BOQ - 2/2

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building

King Saud University

Riyadh

SECTION 16740
DATA NETWORK
PART 1

GENERAL

1.01

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A.

1.02
A.

The work shall consist of furnishing and installation of stand-alone data Local Area
Network (LAN) as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
REFERENCES
NFPA-National Fire Protection Association
NFPA 70 National Electrical Code.
NFPA 78 Lighting Protection Code.

B.

NEMA-NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION.


NEMA 250 Enclosure For Electrical Equipment.

C.

EIA-ELECTRICAL INDUSTRIES ASSOCIATION.


RS-453 Dimecsional, Mechanical & Electrical Characteristics.

D.

UL-UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES,Inc.
All relevant standards

1.03

SUBMITTALS

A.

Product Data: Submit manufacturers technical data.

B.

Shop Drawings: Submit layout drawings of data network and accessories.

1.04
A.

1.05

WARRANTY
Submit manufacturers written warranty for period of one year from substantial
completion for the repair or replacement of defective materials and workmanship.
QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

Manufacturers Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of data system of


types, ratings & capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 5 years.

B.

Installer Qualifications: Specialist sub-contractor with at least 5 years of successful


installations experience with projects utilizing data system and equipments similar to that
required for this projects. Sub-contractor shall be subject to approval of Engineer.

C.

Material and installation shall comply with the specified codes and standards.

D.

Single Source Responsibility: All components and accessories shall be product of single
manufacturer.

OCE 19 April 2005

DATA NETWORK
16740 - 1/3

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building

King Saud University

Riyadh

PART 2

PRODUCTS

2.01

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. General: the data Local Area Network (LAN) shall include supply and installation of
raceways/trucking, cabling, patch panels, communication cabinets, outlet and other
components required complete work as shown on the drawings and specified herein. Number
of data outlets shall be as shown in drawings the data Local Area Network (LAN) Subcontractor shall coordinate his work with the telephone sub-contractor.
B. The data Local Area Network (LAN) installation shall utilize Unshielded Twisted Pair
(UTP) category 6 cabling and Fiber Optic (FO) backbone.
C. Following components shall be used for Data Local Area Network (LAN):
1. Fiber Optic Backbone (Riser): Shall be low Smoke Zero Halogen fiber optic building
cable consisting of 6 individual 62.5/125 micron fibers, 5mm outdoor (O.D). Type
RDM-ULSZH SHEATH ,Fiber optic cable Main Data communication cabinet and each
floor communication cabinet.
2.

Lightguide Interconnect Unit (LIU): Shall be light guide termination shelf; model
LSTIF-072/7 for main Data Communication cabinets and Model 600 Al for each floor
communication cabinets. Fiber Optic backbone cable shall be terminated at both ends
with SC Duplex connectors and mounted in Lightguide Interconnect Unit (LIU)
located in each communication cabinet there will be 12 port 19 rack mounted LIU.

3.

Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Cable: shall be Unshielded Twisted Pair category 6
(125 Mbps) cable, type RDM35291 4P cable 2x0.5 mm (24 AWG) Consisting, whiin
a common polyolefin jacket. This cable shall be for horizontal cable connection
between each information Outlet and Data Patch Panel located in each floor
communication Cabinet.

4.

Information Outlet: shall be category 6, RJ45 high-density modules. High density


modules shall be installed at each data outlet point along with telephone outlets with
one cover plate, flush-mounted US Standard M-Series, color as approved by
Engineer. The Two data outlets (if required at same location) shall be different color.
Data outlets shall be installed where on shown on drawings.

5.

Data Patch Panel: shall be RDM35405 Modular Jack Patch panel utilizing RJ45
Category 6 patch cords to interface workstation information outlet with connector
outlets. Patch Panels are 19 rack mounted type and sized according the number of
user/information outlets as each floor with additional points for future expansion.
Data Patch Panels shall be installed in each floor Communication Cabinet.

6.

Communication Cabinets: Main and Floor Communication Cabinets shall be of size


1200x800 mm. 42U High painted steel Cabinet shall be floor standing type mounted
on heavy duty lockable castors and shall be complete with to two glass front doors
and painted steel near panels include cooling fans, Two accessory shelves and power
strip, color as approved by Engineer. Cabinets shall house Connectors, Hubs LIU,
Data Patch Panels and other equipment related to network.

OCE 19 April 2005

DATA NETWORK
16740 - 2/3

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building

King Saud University

Riyadh

PART 3

EXECUTION

3.01

INSTALLATION

A.

The entire system shall be installed by specialist sub-contractor approved by the


Engineer.

B.

Installation shall be in accordance with the approved drawings and manufacturers


written instructions.

C.

For excavation and backfilling refer to civil work related for such work.

3.02

ELECTRICAL SAFETY

A.

Separation of telecommunication circuits from the building electrical system and


electrical equipment shall conform to the least publications of Articles 800-3(a) and 82013 of National Electric Code (NEC).

B.

An earth or ground shall be provided and extended to the termination box and connected
to each station protector. The earth or ground shall be installed and bonded in accordance
with National Electric Code (NEC).

3.03
A.

TESTING
AFTER installation of entire system and prior to acceptance of work, manufacturers
standard rests shall be conducted in the presence of the Engineer to show proper
operation of each equipment and the system entirely.
END OF SECTION 16740

OCE 19 April 2005

DATA NETWORK
16740 - 3/3

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16745
TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM
Part 1 - General
1.01

DESCRIPTION
A. The General Conditions as defined in section 16010 shall be considered as an integral part
of these specifications and shall be carefully examined before proposals for any work are
submitted. Unless these specifications contain statements which are more definitive or
more restrictive than those contained in the General Conditions, these specifications shall
not be interpreted as waiving or overruling any requirements expressed in the General
Conditions.
B. Articles or parts of articles of the general conditions not so amended, modified or
supplemented by these specifications shall remain in full force and effect. Should any
discrepancy become apparent the contractor shall notify Owner/ or owners
representative, in writing and the Owner/ owners representative shall interpret and
decide such matter in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions.
C. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable codes and standards.
D. These specifications call out for certain duties of the contractor and his suppliers. They
are not intended as a material list of items to be supplied by the contractor.
E. This division of the specifications cover the King Abdul Aziz University Hospital
telecommunications (telephone & LAN) cabling System.
F. The LAN System shall be the latest technology of Medical network. The contractor shall
comply with all the requirements accordingly.
G. The LAN System should consider the network distribution of X-ray film directly access
to the Doctors.
H. Contractor is to refer to and must meet the Project Schedule for the completion of the
Project. The schedule is to be met in harmony with the requirements of the project.
I.

It is the intent of this specification to provide a complete and workable


telecommunications cabling system for both Telephone & LAN System with all MDF &
IDF (Main Distribution Frame & Information technology Distribution Frame) ready for
the owners use. Any item not specifically called for in the Specifications, but normally
required to conform with the intent, is to be considered a part of the Contract.

J.

Contractor is to provide all cable, termination hardware, and cable supports except where
otherwise noted within this specification.

K. The contractor shall provide all other items required to complete the installation as called
out for in this specification. This will include, but not be limited to all incidentals,
equipment, appliances, services, hoisting, scaffolding, supports, tools, supervision, labor,
consumable items, fees, licenses, etc., to provide a complete and workable system.
L. These Specifications are material, equipment and performance specifications. Actual
installations shall be as indicated on the Drawings. Installations and details indicated on
the Drawings shall govern if they differ from the Specifications and the contractor is
OCE - 30 January 2014

TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM


16745 1/10

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

obligated to identify such differences at bid.


M. Any given item of equipment or material shall be the product of one manufacturer
throughout any single or approved group of equipment. Multiple manufacturers of any
one item will not be permitted, unless specifically noted otherwise.
N. Utilize the following definition for discernment within the Drawings and Specifications:

1.02

1.

"PROVIDE" or "FURNISH" means to supply, purchase, transport, place, erect,


connect, label, test and turn over to Owner, complete and ready for regular operation,
all materials, labor, equipment, testing apparatus, controls, tests, accessories and all
other items customarily required for a Telecommunications Cabling System.

2.

"SUPPLY" means to purchase, procure, acquire, and deliver complete with related
accessories.

3.

"INSTALL" means to move from property line, set in place, join, unit, fasten, link,
attach, set up or otherwise connect together before testing and turning over to Owner
of equipment and/or components. It means the installation is to be complete and
ready for regular operation, except as otherwise noted.

4.

"WIRING" or "CABLING" includes furnishing, unless otherwise noted, of all fittings,


hangers, supports, sleeves, etc.

5.

"CONDUIT" and CABLE TRAY" or LADDER RACK includes furnishing, unless


otherwise noted,, of all fittings, hangers, supports, sleeves, etc.

6.

"AS DIRECTED" means as directed by the Engineer of his representative.

7.

"CONCEALED" means embedded in masonry or other construction, installed behind


wall furring or within double partitions, or installed within hung ceilings.

8.

"EXPOSED" means not installed underground or "CONCEALED" as defined above.

9.

APPROVED means as accepted and authorized in writing, by, the Owner or


Owner representative.

WORK INCLUDED:
A. The work covered by this contract includes the construction described, including all
labor, material, tools and equipment necessary to perform and complete such
construction. The scope of this work includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1.

Mounting, terminating and labeling of all work station and multimedia outlets.

2.

Installation of all Voice and Data horizontal cable through conduits, raceways,
cable trays, sleeves and hangers from STC Cabinet to all MDF & IDF.

3.

Furnish MDF and IDF rooms as documented herein and as per the associated
drawings. Assemble and install free standing and/ or wall mounted racks where
specified. Install racks and/ or wall patch panels and associated cable
management hardware. Mount 110 blocks and corresponding cable troughs on
backboards. Install protector blocks in all MDF and IDF rooms where a transition
point exists between outside plant and indoor rated copper cable. Install
Lightguide Shelf Termination units in specified MDF and IDF rooms. For riser
and outside plant fiber cable terminations. Terminate horizontal cabling on
corresponding 110 blocks or patch panels. Ground and bond all outside plant

OCE - 30 January 2014

TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM


16745 2/10

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

cabling. Provide all fiber optic and Category 6 jumper cables.


4.

Route and terminate riser cables between all IDF and MDF within each zoon
using designated sleeves, conduits, and pathways.

6.

Administrative labeling and documentation of all cables and hardware installed


under this contract.

7.

The provision and installation of all non-specified miscellaneous hardware, i.e.


nuts, bolts, tie wraps, etc., necessary to complete an effective installation,
organization, and management of the telecommunications cabling system.

8.

Testing of all cables.

9.

Fire -stopping of all rated wall and floor penetrations.

10. Preparation and submission of shop drawings, testing reports, as built drawings,
and cable termination schedules and documentation.
1.03

RELATED WORK PROVIDED BY OTHERS

A. Conduits.
B. Duct bank.
C. Cable tray.
D. Ladder racks.
1.04

SUBMITTALS
Submit within five working days of notice to precede, the following items in accordance with
the contract document.
A.

B.

Product Data:
1.

Submit original manufacturers latest product data sheets. Only specified or


accepted manufacturers or suppliers shall appear in the product data
submittal.

2.

Equipment and components data shall contain descriptive literature,


manufacturers cut sheets, standard schedules, instructions and diagrams.

3.

The most recent publication of performance data, corresponding to


manufacturer and model number, will be submitted for all specified
equipment.

4.

Custom or modified equipment shall require the same submittals.

Shop Drawings:
1.

Contractor is to provide shop drawings within 15 days after award of the


contract.

2.

Shop drawing is to consist of one (1) set of reproducible drawings and three
(3) sets of printed drawings.

3.

Shop drawings are to show point -to- point inter and inter cabling diagrams

OCE - 30 January 2014

TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM


16745 3/10

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

for all cables to be installed under this contract.


4.

Shop drawings are to show, in detail, cable routes for all horizontal and
backbone cabling including placement under raised floors, location of slots
and sleeves, routes through drop ceilings, and location/positioning within
riser shafts and pathways.

5.

Drawings must contain details showing outlet numbers, wiring diagrams,


pin-outs, color codes, panels, plate finishes, equipment type and equipment
placement

6.

Acceptance of any submitted data or shop drawings for material, equipment


apparatus, devices, arrangements and layouts shall not relieve the Contractor
from responsibility for errors, omissions or inadequacies of any sort on
submitted data or shop drawings.

7.

Submit pull schedules in a printed and file format compatible with Microsoft
Excel software. The Pull Schedules are to include the information outlet
location, cable ID, frame mount, row, pair and fields for owner provided
equipment and associated information. Agreement is to be reached with
owner as to what fields the owner requires. The pull schedules are to be
submitted prior to systems acceptance and commissioning.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE


A.

All materials used shall bear the Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. label, or other
approved third party testing Lab.

B.

All products and materials shall be new and unused, clean, free of defects, and free of
damage and corrosion.

C.

Contractor is to provide the latest model/ revision of a specified piece of equipment,


at the time of bid.

D.

All installation practices are to conform to ANSI/ EIA/ TIA and IEEE regulations
with special attention to the following:

E.

1.

ANSI/EIA/TIA 568-A Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling


Standard

2.

ANSI/EIA/TIA
569
Commercial
Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces

3.

ANSI/EIA/TIA 606 Administration Standard for Telecommunications


Infrastructure for Commercial Buildings

4.

ANSI/EIA/TIA 607 Commercial Building Bonding and Grounding


Requirements for Telecommunications Wiring

Building

Standard

for

Should any change in plans or Specifications be required to comply with


governmental regulations, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer of the item when
submitting the bid response.

1.06 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE


A.

With the exception of bulk materials, items shall be delivered in manufacturers


unopened containers, fully identified with manufacturers name, trade name, type,
class, grade, size, and color. All material deliveries must be made during business

OCE - 30 January 2014

TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM


16745 4/10

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

hours.

1.07

1.08

B.

All materials will be shipped in a manner that will protect them from damage,
weather, and entry of debris. If items are damaged, do not install, but take
immediate steps to obtain replacement or repair.

C.

The Contractor shall maintain and protect all equipment, materials, and tools from
loss or damage from all causes until final acceptance by Project Manger.

D.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the receipt, safe storage and delivery of
materials and equipment to the job site and for coordination of same with a person
designated by the schools principal. Material and equipment subject to damage by
natural elements shall be stored in a manner suitably sheltered from the elements but
readily accessible for inspection, or in a weather-tight enclosure supplied by the
Contractor.

E.

The Contractor shall not store or place material on floors in excess of the floors
designed load limits.

COORDINATION OF THE WORK


A.

Carefully check space requirements and the physical confines of the areas of work to
ensure that all material can be installed in the spaces allotted thereto, including IDF,.
and MDF Closets, riser space and sleeves/ conduits.

B.

Transmit to Engineer, with 3 days notice, all information necessary for any work
required by other trades and/ or equipment vendors to insure that all trades/
vendors have the information necessary to properly install all the necessary
connections and equipment. Also with 3 days notice, identify all items of work that
require access so that the Owner may arrange for access.

C.

Wherever Telecommunications Cabling work interconnects with work of other trades


and/ or equipment vendors coordinate with other trades and/ or equipment vendors
to insure that all trades/ vendors have the information necessary to properly install
all the necessary connections and equipment. Identify in advance, all items of work
that require access so that the Owner may arrange for access.

D.

The Contractor shall arrange and coordinate all access to the job site and to the floors
as well as the receipt, staging; marshaling and safe storage of all materials, tools and
supplies with a person specified by the general contractor and inform the Engineer of
the arrangements. All material deliveries, either before or after normal working hours
(overtime) and are to be included in this pricing.

E.

Cleanup and removal of debris is the responsibility of the bidder. If the bidder does
not cleanup and remove debris, the custodian will perform this function and the
bidder will be back charged for this work.

F.

The contractor will be held accountable for any damage done to the property or work
of other trades (i.e. ceiling tile, painted walls, etc.) and will be back charged for any
required repairs.

PERMITS
A.

All local fees and permits and services of inspection authorities shall be obtained by
the Contractor. The Contractor shall cooperate fully with local utility companies with
respect to their services. The Contractor shall include in his price and itemize all such
costs to be incurred relative to the installation of the system described herein.

OCE - 30 January 2014

TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM


16745 5/10

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

1.9

ACCEPTANCE
A.

1.10

King Saud University

Upon receipt of the Contractor's documentation of cable testing, the Engineer may
review or observe the installation and request random tests of the cables installed at
no additional charge. The number of cables so randomly tested shall not exceed 5%
of the total number of cables installed. Once the testing has been completed and the
Engineer is satisfied that all work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, the
Engineer will notify the Contractor in writing.

RECORD DRAWINGS
A.

During construction, the Contractor shall maintain a copy of all Specifications and a
complete set of the construction drawings on the job site, making notations and
updates thereon as required, to provide an accurate record of all installations
pursuant to the issue of As-built drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01

MATERIALS
A. Contractor is to use all products and materials that are identified in the specifications or
indicated on the drawings for a specific application.
B. The Backbone of the cabling system shall be Fiber Optic, connecting all local computer
Switch to the main cabinet.

2.02

COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS
A.

Base bid manufacturers: The contractor may provide cable and equipment as
displayed from the manufacturers listed below or approved equal:
1.
2.
3.

Siemens.
AT&T.
R&M.

PART 3- EXECUTION
3.01

STAFFING
A.

The Contractor shall provide a supervisory work force sufficient to maintain efficient
performance of the Contractor's responsibilities. The Contractor shall designate in
writing to the owner a dedicated, full time foreman as contact for resolution of
problems, job coordination, additions, changes, etc., who shall be present in the field
at all times during the performance of the work. The Contractor's foreman shall have
full authority to represent the Contractor in making decisions and executing the work
in an acceptable manner. The contractor as part of this bid response shall supply a
resume of the foreman and if a Engineer is to be assigned, a copy of his resume as
well.

B.

The Contractor shall use only a skilled, experienced and reliable work force and shall
discontinue the services of anyone employed on this project upon written request by
the owner/Engineer.

C.

Craft personnel shall be qualified to perform the work and be knowledgeable of the
following activities:
1.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Color coding or standard telephone/ data telecommunications cables.


TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM
16745 6/10

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

3.02

King Saud University

2.

Bonding and grounding of shields.

3.

Testing conductors for transmission impairments.

4.

Testing conductor insulation.

5.

Pulling and connectorizing of optical fiber cabling.

6.

Testing and verification of optical fiber transmission characteristics with in


Optical Time Domain Reflectometer.

D.

Craft personnel will be required to provide and use the proper tools and test
equipment in the performance of each activity. The tools must be in good working
order, and the test equipment must have current calibration certificates, as applicable.
The Engineer reserves the right to review the tool and test equipment lists and
maintenance procedures of the Contractor.

E.

Use of Site
1.

Keep driveways and entrances clear at all times.

2.

Do not use driveways or entrances for parking or storage of materials

3.

The use of any space at the site for the storage of materials and equipment
shall require the consent of the Owner.

4.

The Contractor shall repair any damage resulting from the storage of
materials or equipment.

INSTALLATION
1.

Fiber and copper cables will enter the MDF and IDFRooms through sleeves
and slots based on cable routing requirements.

2.

Contractor is to take all necessary precautions to assure that the maximum


tensile load and minimum bend radius of all cables (fiber and copper) are not
exceeded. When terminating Category 6 cable, care should be taken to
maintain pair twists up to the termination point and the cable sheath is not to
be removed more than 12.5mm from the termination point. Tie wraps are to
be hand tightened on cables and are not to crimp the sheath. Contractor is
responsible for protecting all connectorized cables from damage by other
contractors at the information outlet before and after installation of the outlet
faceplates.

3.

Termination Hardware: "110" blocks and Patch panels will be utilized for
terminating and cross connecting cable to be installed as shown on drawings.

OCE - 30 January 2014

a)

For all new Voice cabling to be installed, "110" blocks shall be used
for termination. The Copper Data cabling will be terminated onto
Category 6 RJ45 Patch Panels. The fiber optic cabling will be
terminated onto fiber distribution panels with SC connectors.

b)

All cables, cabinets, racks, patch panels, frames will be grounded and
bonded according to EIA/ TIA standards and ground bus bars will
be provided as displayed in the attached drawings and according to
EIA/ TIA standards.

TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM


16745 7/10

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

4.

5.

3.03

King Saud University

Voice and Data Risers:


a)

All cable terminations shall be made uniformly in sequence,


commencing with termination of the 1st cable pair on the first
connection points in the upper left hand corner of each block.

b)

The bidder is responsible for supporting cables installed.

Horizontal Subsystem Cabling:


a)

All horizontal cables shall be installed as uninterrupted conductor


sections between the MDF and the station outlets.

b)

Installation of outlet connectors shall be coordinated by the


Contractor with the electrical furniture and other contractors, all
working together with the Construction Manager.

c)

Standard office and work station outlets shall be housed in a single


or double gang flush mounted box and shall consist of a series of 8pin ("RJ-45) Jacks and SC bulkhead connectors.

d)

Outlets that are not part of a standard office or work station, as


shown on drawings, shall also be furnished and installed by the
Contractor as part of this Specification and Contract.

e)

All installed connectors, regardless of type, method of procurement


or permanency, shall be protected and insulated during and
following the installation. Protective caps or dust covers shipped
with connectors shall be left in place or replaced by the Contractor if
found to be dislodged or damaged.

f)

Cables shall be terminated on the appropriate unassigned (vacant)


portions of the wall mounted Intermediate Distribution Frame or
Patch Panels and run as uninterrupted conductor sections to the
Information Outlets. All cable terminations shall be made uniformly
in sequence, commencing with termination of the 1st cable pair on
the first connection points in the upper left hand corner of each
block.

g)

The bidder is responsible for supporting cables installed in the hung


ceiling plenum and they are to be separate from the ceiling supports.

CABLE AND OUTLET IDENTIFICATION


A.

The Contractor shall furnish and install cable tags labeled with identifying cable
numbers mutually agreed upon with contractor and Engineer.

B.

The Contractor shall clearly and consistently mark the appropriate designation strip
labels on ALL termination hardware mutually agreed upon with the Engineer.
Contractor will submit for approval a sample of all designation labels.

C.

The Contractor shall affix outlet identification labels, machine printed or typed, with
identifying cable numbers.

D.

Subsequent to pulling and terminating cables, the Contractor shall place the
appropriate cable tags within six (6) inches of each end of each copper cable and
eighteen (18) inches of each optical fiber cable end.

OCE - 30 January 2014

TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM


16745 8/10

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

E.

If at any time during the job, the cable tape becomes illegible or removed, the
Contractor shall immediately replace it with a duplicate preprinted cable tag.

F.

The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a listing keyed to cable types of all
cable identification numbers.

G.

Contractor will label each information outlet with the following labeling scheme:
1.

If the 1st floor IDF closet A is the origination point of the cable feeding
workstation 007 the following is the configuration of the label to be
installed:
a)

H.

3.04

King Saud University

Floor- IDF Noumper - Information Outlet Number

Contractor will submit for approval a sample of all information outlet designation
labels.

FIRE STOP - PENETRATION SEALANT


A. Provide fire-resistant material fill to restore fire ratings to all wall or floor or ceiling
penetrations. Material must be UL classified and meet NEC and local code.
B. All penetrations through fire rated floors and walls shall be sealed to prevent the passage
of smoke, fire, toxic gas or water through the penetration. The fire rating of the
penetration seal shall be at least that of the floor or wall into which it is installed, so that
the original fire rating of the floor or wall is maintained as required by the National Fire
Protection Association.
C. No flammable material may be used to line the chase of hole in which the fire stop
material is to be installed.
D. When damming materials are to be left in place after the seal is complete, then all such
materials shall be non-flammable.
E. The sealant shall be poured into the hole after each cable has been spread to allow a
minimum of 12mm of foam to flow between them. No cables may be touching each
other, thereby allowing voids to form in the fire stop.
F. If plastic cartridges are used for smaller installations, the chemical components of the
foam shall be pre-measured within the cartridges to insure the proper ratios.
G. The sealant shall remain resiland pliable to allow for the removal and/or addition of
cable without the necessity of drilling holes. It shall adhere to itself perfectly to allow any
and all repairs to be made with the same material. It shall allow for vibration, expansion
and/or contraction of anything passing through the penetration without affecting the
seal, or cracking, crumbling and spalling.
H. When sealant is injected into a penetration, the foam shall expand to surround all the
items within the penetration as well as the pass-minutes and be fire resistant at that time.
No heat shall be required to further expand the foam to block the passage of fire and
smoke or water.
I.

The foam sealant shall have been subjected to fire exposure in accordance with standard
time-temperature curve in the Standard, UL, ASTM E 119, and NJPA 251. The foam firestop shall have also been subjected to the hose stream test in accordance with UL 10B.

OCE - 30 January 2014

TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM


16745 9/10

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

3.05

King Saud University

DETAIL SPECIFICATIONS

A.

Cable plant support structures and facilities


1.

Contractor will provide sleeves, junction boxes, conduit, and manholes where
appropriate to facilitate installation of cable plant. The contractor will be
responsible for insuring all sleeves and conduits are installed with bushings and
are suspended according to building industry standards. Conduits must provide
the appropriate sweep in order to maintain required bend radius for copper and
fiber optic cables. For information purposes, the drawings indicate sleeve and
conduit locations.

B.

The contractor is to harmoniously coordinate work with other trades.

C.

Horizontal Cable
1.

All horizontal cabling is to be home run from the information outlet to the
corresponding IDF or MDF/ IDF. Horizontal cabling will be Category 6
Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP). All information outlets will have either one or
two voice jacks that are to be labeled V1 and V2. The varying number of data
station cables per information outlet will be labeled D1, D2, D3, Etc. All UTP
cable (voice or data) will be terminated in accordance with EIA/ TIA 568B wiring
standard on 8 Conductor RJ45 jacks. Contractor is to refer to the drawings for
specific locations of telecommunication outlets.

2.

The electrical contractor will provide conduit stub-ups from work area outlet to
above ceiling to allow for cable routing down wall. Cable contractor is to verify
the existence of these facilities and immediately notify the Engineer in the event
of discrepancy.

3.

Throughout the cable installation, the contractor is to maintain EIA/TIA


standards. Correct distances must be maintained for proximity to high voltage
cabling, transformers, motors, fluorescent light fixtures, etc... Cable termination
must be completed in such a manner to maintain pair twist to within 12.5mm of
termination. Cable routes must never exceed the EIA/ TIA limit of 100m. Fill
ratios for cables distributed through conduits must not exceed 40%, with no more
than two 90 degree bends. Equally important as fill ratios, cable contractor must
also bear in mind cables are not to exceed their tensile load strength when being
pulled through conduit.

END OF SECTION 16745

OCE - 30 January 2014

TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM


16745 10/10

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16746
TELEPHONE PABX SYSTEM
PART 1-GENERAL
1.01

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.
A.

Work comprises the supply and installation of the following:


1.
2.
3.

1.02

SUBMITTALS.
A.

Submit as specified under provisions of section 16010.

B.

Submit three copies of Instruction Books, Manuals and Diagrams to indicate the
following:
1.
2.

1.03

PABX Key Telephone System


UPS System
All related work required for the proper performance of a complete system

PABX and telephone sets.


Maintenance and Supervision requirements.

APPLICABLE STANDARDS.
A.

The system shall comply with the Saudi Arabian PTT regulations and the related
CCITT recommendations.

B.

The components and the installation shall comply with the applicable IEC
recommendations and with NEC-Article 800.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01

MANUFACTURERS
A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of


the following or approved equal:
1.
2.
3.

2.02

ALCATELL.
Meridian
Ericson

ELECTRONIC PRIVATE EXCHANGE (PABX)


A.

The telephone exchange shall be of the modern electronic telephone system type
serving as a telephone and intercom system.

B.

The system shall be of the computerized basis with complete software programming
support for a modern first class performance.

C.

The system shall be of modular type with possibility of adding extension modules in
future without interference with the proper daily operation for any facility that the
system performs.

OCE - 30 January 2014

TELEPHONE PABX SYSTEM


16746 - 1/5

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

D.

The system shall be of a standard product of reputable manufacturing standard that is


being used in similar type of projects.

E.

The PABX shall be of trunk lines \extensions capacity as specified in BOQ.

F.

The system shall be of metal cabinet design with front doors completely dust proofed.

G.

The equipment shall be robust and be able to withstand a temperature range of 10 - 45


degree C., relative humidity in the range of 40 - 80%.

H.

All metal surfaces shall be spray galvanized before finishing with enamel paint.

I.

Location and fitting of the various elements in the cabinets shall be planned taking
maintenance convenience into consideration.

J.

All components used shall be of rugged construction and shall have adequate margins
to withstand the rigors of continuous service with minimum of maintenance.

K.

Any component for assembly should be capable of replacement by equivalent types,


the characteristic of which shall be within the limits of the manufacturer's tolerance,
without affecting the reliability or the ability of the system.

L.

All semi-conductor devices shall be encapsulated in hermetically sealed packages.

M.

All components, except integrated circuits, shall be sufficiently derated in order to


guarantee long-term trouble free operation.

N.

Anti-vibration feature shall be provided in the equipment.

O.

The system shall satisfy the following requirements and features:


1.

Modern in design.

2.

Fully electronic, fully digital.

3.

Flexible and plug in type.

4.

Fully redundant

5.

Compact, utilizing minimum space area.

6.

Capable of dealing with local Authority telephone system.

7.

Direct extension to extension calls.

8.

Call transfer facility

9.

Call forward facility.

10.

Call waiting facility

11.

Call hold

12.

Conference calling

13.

Hold up calls

14.

Fully restricted and semi-restricted extensions.

15.

System speed dialing facility.

16.

Distinctive ringing for external and internal calls.

17.

In case of any fault, an alarm integrated in the PABX shall indicate the faulty
equipment and such alarm shall be associated with change over to standby.

OCE - 30 January 2014

TELEPHONE PABX SYSTEM


16746 - 2/5

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.03

King Saud University

18.

It shall be easy to add new facilities by means of software additions or


modifications without necessitating hardware modification or addition.

19.

The PABX shall have the provision to group the extensions as desired. Restriction
to get access from one group to another shall be possible if so desired.

20.

Automatic audio and visual Howler Facility in all extensions.

21.

Message facility at extensions.

22.

Morning calls.

23.

It shall be possible to restrict any extension from reaching an external line except
through the operator.

24.

System interface to Building Management System.

25.

System interface with Public address system.

26.

System interface with Fire Alarm system.

27.

Tariff metering with memory registration and bills origination for all internal and
external calls passed through the system.

P.

The system shall have the facility for call answering from pre-assigned extensions when
the operators do not reply within pre-assigned adjustable time. It shall be easy to
change this facility from one extension to another within the extensions and without
involving the system software.

Q.

One Laser type printer and one 132 character quality printer shall be provided to
produce all back-up printing facilities for the system maintenance and operation and
bills production.

OPERATOR CONSOLES
A.

The system shall be provided with identical operator consoles in the operator's room.

B.

The operator console shall be of modern, compact design, high quality finish, easy to
operate and require minimum desk top space

C.

The operator shall be able to perform all switching and monitoring operations
mentioned under the PABX features. In addition, each operator console shall have the
following facilities and features as a minimum:
1.

Built-in visual and adjustable audible signals.

2.

Equipped with push button dialing pad.

3.

The display shall indicate the extension and type of call if it is external or
internal.

4.

Differentiate between incoming calls from external Lines.

5.

Automatic attendant recall in case of delay in answering by the called extension.

6.

Time, date display and calculation facility.

7.

It shall be possible to route different exchange lines to different extensions.

8.

Built in alarm indication for in case of failure in the console or the PABX.

OCE - 30 January 2014

TELEPHONE PABX SYSTEM


16746 - 3/5

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.04

2.05

King Saud University

TELEPHONE SETS (INSTRUMENTS)


A.

Telephone instruments shall have a push button dialing facility and shall be of an
approved color and Finnish.

B.

The set shall be made of rugged impact resistant thermoplastic material.

C.

Bell volume shall be adjustable between a soft purr and a strident ring of 70dB.

D.

The set shall perform all extension functions listed under PABX.

E.

Each set shall have digital display and local extension memory for minimum of ten
lines.

F.

Wall mounted free hand telephone sets shall be provided in services areas.

POWER EQUIPMENT
A.

Power supply equipment shall be provided to suit the PABX capacity and function.

B.

The power equipment shall ensure satisfactory operation in normal and in standby
modes.

C.

The rectifier equipment shall work satisfactorily on the power supply 220 volts, AC +
or - 10% and 60 Hz + or - 4%.

D.

The nominal output voltage shall be to suite the PABX equipment and shall not be
more than 48 volts DC.

E.

The power unit shall be operated on battery full float principle. The unit shall be fully
automatic for normal operation. Supervision shall only be required during boost charge
periods.

F.

The automatic charging units shall have DC output being smoothed so that under full
load conditions and while floating , the output voltage of the units shall be maintained
despite variations in load.

G.

Batteries shall be of the Lead Acid, corrosion resistant, maintenance free type, requiring
no special ventilation.

H.

Batteries shall be able to provide adequate service for approximately 8 hours in case of
power failure.

I.

In case of non functioning of any charger, an audible and visual alarm shall be
actuated.

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01

INSTALLATION
A.

Install only the approved equipment and in accordance with the approved shop
drawings.

B.

Installation shall be in accordance with the local authority regulations and standards
where applicable.

OCE - 30 January 2014

TELEPHONE PABX SYSTEM


16746 - 4/5

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

3.02

3.03

King Saud University

C.

Coordinate with layout of ducts, cable trays, and conduits as shown on drawings. The
telephone shop drawings shall be coordinated with all other electrical and interior
design works and with other services.

D.

Grounding system should be according NEC article 800.

TESTING
A.

Test the complete telephone installations in accordance with the local telephone
authorities regulations.

B.

Demonstrate to the Project Manager that all equipment and installations satisfy the
system requirements.

CONNECTION TO SAUDI-TELEPHONE LINES


A.

The contractor shall be responsible for coordinating and follow-up with STC (Saudi
Telecommunication Company) for telephone connections and provide them required
information and help to complete all work.

END OF SECTION 16746

OCE - 30 January 2014

TELEPHONE PABX SYSTEM


16746 - 5/5

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16748
NURSE CALL SYSTEM

PART 1-GENERAL
The Contractor shall furnish all equipment, accessories and material required for the installation of a
Nurse/Patient Communication System in accordance with the specification and drawings. Any
material and/or equipment necessary for the proper operation of the system not specified or described
herein shall be deemed part of the specification.
The Nurse/Patient Communication System shall provide two-way voice communications between a
master station and patient, emergency, staff, and duty stations. Audible and visible annunciation of all
calls by classification (both routine and emergency) shall be indicated at the master station, duty
station, and by all corridor lights and zone lights associated with each call.
The system shall consist of a master station, patient stations, emergency stations, corridor lights, zone
lights, staff stations, duty stations, centralized equipment, and all station cabling as required and
shown on the floor plans.
The system shall automatically classify calls and provide simultaneous audible tone and visual display
at the master station of all calls by room or bed designation. Each station call shall be indicated by a
separate annunciator key on the master station. The master station shall have a minimum capacity of
50 stations.
All calls from patient or staff stations shall be visibly and audibly annunciated at the master station.
Each patient or staff station call shall be indicated by a separate indicator lamp, and the capacity of the
master station shall be determined by the number of stations in the system. The master station shall be
virtually unlimited as to the number of station keys and shall be of modular construction in groups of
ten stations, with each group having a group monitor and reset key. The areas within the master
station housing not used for station selector keys shall be filled with a blank decorative plate thus
permitting expandability of the system.
All patient, staff, and duty station components shall be installed in standard, one-gang electrical
backboxes, will all necessary components pre-wired, requiring no more than (6.35cm) of depth. The
subplate shall be of the standard size and have the necessary adjustment holes for fastening to a
standard electrical backbox. A separate stainless steel trim plate shall be supplied for mounting over
the subplate. All controls shall be properly and permanently designated on the trim plate. Sections
requiring larger backboxes shall not be acceptable.
Patient station components shall be integrated within bedhead trunking unit.
All patient stations shall be equipped with complete program facilities having entertainment, television
control. The subplate assembly shall be mounted adjacent to the patient station sub-assembly over
which is placed a common trim plate.
The lavatory and emergency station components shall be mounted on a one-gang, stainless steel plate
for proper mounting on a one gang backbox. The components shall be arranged so these stations can be
operated in the system independently or in conjunction with the bedside station, thereby making it
unnecessary to have separate indication at the master station and corridor light. Optionally, the
controls may be separated. Lavatory and emergency stations shall be supplied in push button and pull
cord versions. Pushing the button or pulling the cord shall initiate an emergency call which must be

OCE - 30 January 2014

NURSE CALL SYSTEM


16748 - 1/6

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

cancelled at the originating stations by a control other than the control used to initiate the call. Each
station call shall be of splashproof design suitable for use in shower areas.
The system power supply shall be fully regulated and designed for continuous duty with an output of
24-volt DC at 3.2 amps. Output protection shall be provided by an electronic circuit set to limit the voltampere output to less than 100VA. The supply shall be UL listed for hospital operation or other
internationally recognized tired party LAB.
The Nurse Call System components shall also be coordinated with Public Address System devices to
allow for music broadcasting and paging through bedroom pillow speakers.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
1.

MASTER STATION

The master station provides visual identification of all calls placed at patient, staff, or emergency
stations in the system. Audio tones shall be provided to distinguish emergency calls from normal calls.
Two-way communication may be established between the Master Station and a calling station through
a keyless handset or through a speaker/microphone. The Master Station operator may answer calls by
direct selection of a pushbutton corresponding to the room or bed number.
The Master Station shall be controlling all patient, staff, duty, and emergency stations.
1.

The Master Station shall be modular in design and shall be arranged for easy operation and
minimal training.

2.

The Master Station shall contain the following features:


a.

An "In Use" light (BUSY) for visual indication at Master Station that the System is not in
standby condition.

b.

An "Incoming Call" light (CALL) for visual indication of any normal or emergency calls
placed in the system.

c.

A "Tone On/Off" pushbutton (TONE) which shall turn the audio signal received at the
Master Station on or off. The pushbutton shall glow steadily when in the quite operating
mode.

3.

A speaker/microphone for intercommunication or for monitoring stations. It shall be a 3" x 5"


dynamic speaker/microphone. It shall have the same wide range sensitivity as the patient
station. A volume control and a three position lever switch shall regulate only the incoming
volume level.

4.

A keyless handset with a 120cm coil cord shall be provided for communication with any other
intercom station in the system without the necessity of a push-to-talk switch.

5.

Station selector modules shall be provided having interlocking and illuminated keys for each
station to be controlled.
a.

Each switchbank shall contain ten station keys, one group monitor/page key, and one
reset key. Each station key shall indicate the station calling and the type of call placed
(normal or emergency). The group key, when depressed, shall gather all stations in the
switchbank automatically for monitoring or paging purposes.

b.

The station selector knob covering the lamps shall be clear translucent plastic with a
photographic insert between the knob and white knob insert for bright, clear and lasting
identifications.

OCE - 30 January 2014

NURSE CALL SYSTEM


16748 - 2/6

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

c.

The lamps shall be standard base type, replaceable for the front. It shall be possible to
change the color knob insert to red, green, blue, or amber for staff indicators or patient
status.

d.

Numerical room designation sheets shall be provided with each Master Station for
application to the photographic insert without special tools, machines or solutions.
Station identification can be changed without any special tools.

6.

The Master Station shall be mounted in a desk housing made of high impact plastic
surrounding a 16-gauge cold steel chassis.

2.

AUTOMATIC NURSE CALL (CENTRAL EQUIPMENT)

The central equipment for Nurse/Patient Communication System shall include one control cabinet to
provide control of and communications with patient, staff, and duty stations from master stations. The
central equipment shall be a control cabinet and shall contain an intercom amplifier, voice operated
talk/listen control, tone generator and flasher, 3-digit dial matrix, and 5 station selector modules.
All controlling printed circuit components shall be solid state and plug into pre-wired frames necessary
concentric knockouts for " to 1 " conduit shall be provided to allow cable access from any side of the
central control cabinet. Internal cable channels with clamps shall be provided for proper cable dress
and to protect all electronic components.
The solid state intercom amplifier shall be a single printed circuit board designed for plug-in mounting
and shall be capable of producing 15 watts of audio power on demand for intercommunications. Both
input and output lines shall be provided with balanced line transformers for protection of the amplifier
as well as to provide crisp and clear two-way communications not affected by outside sources. All
power transistors shall be protected by heat sinks.
The solid state transistorized, voice operated talk/listen circuit board shall be of plug-in design and
operate with the amplifier and handset. A control sensitivity control shall be provided to set the level
of operation to meet the characteristics of the different type voices using the system. The components
shall in no way affect the voice signals produced by the intercom amplifier. No clicks or pops shall be
heard during operation.
The transistorized flasher and tone plug-in printed circuit board shall generate and control all normal
and emergency tone signals and lamp operational sequences required at, or initiated for, the patient,
staff, duty, and emergency stations. Power and sensing transistors shall be protected and plug-in. A
level control shall be provided for control of the tone being generated for the duty stations.
Four separate volume controls shall be provided to control audio level at various outputs
independently.
1.

TX Vol (Transmitter Volume) shall control output level of the transmitter.

2.

RC Vol (Receiver Volume) shall control output lever to handset receiver.

3.

M Lister (Master Listen) shall control maximum lever to master station speaker.

4.

M Talk (Master Talk) shall control maximum level to patient station speaker from the master
speaker.

A limiter adjustment shall be provided to prevent overloading the amplifier on strong input signals.
A tone control shall be provided to shape the frequency response for maximum intelligibility in each
installation.
The touch dial router and translator shall be completely transistorized of plug-in design.
OCE - 30 January 2014

NURSE CALL SYSTEM


16748 - 3/6

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

3.

King Saud University

BEDSIDE STATION

Bedside Station shall be furnished for operation with Pillow Speakers.


Bedside Station shall provide multi-contact receptacle for a pillow speaker which shall permit the
patient to place a call to the master station to run a TV set on and off, change TV channels, regulate the
TV volume, select up to three TV and the public address program sources and carry on a conversation
with the master station over the speaker in the pillow speaker.
Bedside Station and associated pillow speaker shall provide automatic transfer of intercom operation
to the bedside station speaker when the pillow speaker is disconnected and a standard call cord is
inserted in the bedside station receptacle.
4.

LAVATORY STATION

The Lavatory/Emergency Station components shall be electronically isolated from the single gang,
stainless steel plate for proper mounting into a single gang back box. By pulling the cord, an
emergency call is placed on the system using independent circuits or those of the patient station if in
the same room. Cancellation of the call is from the originating station by depressing the call assurance
light.
-

All components of lavatory station shall be mounted on a single gang, stainless steel plate. A
totally enclosed switch is connected to a six foot long nylon cord pendant by a breakaway
chain connector.

A separate red call assurance light/reset switch shall be part of the station so when the cord is
pulled the lamp will flash. The call can only be cancelled by depressing this switch.

The lamp color may be changed to the colors available on an optional basis.

The complete station shall be splash-proof for use in shower stall and all electronic components
are isolated from the surface control plate to assure the safety of the patient.

This station shall be located 100cm from the floor as indicated on the plans.

5.

STAFF/SOLARIUM STATION

The Station shall provide two-way voice communication between a ward clerk at the centralized
nursing location and the staff or patient at another location. A call shall be placed by depressing the call
switch on this station. The call will be indicated at the centralized nursing location as well as all duty
stations and corridor light if required of the system.
Call origination and holding circuitry employed in the staff station shall be accomplished by solid state
circuits.
The station contains a dynamic speaker/microphone, a combination pushbutton cancel switch and call
assurance/privacy light, a call pushbutton and two solid state circuit boards.
The dynamic speaker/microphone and associated solid state answer circuits shall be removable as a
module. The speaker microphone shall employ a two inch cone with cadmium plated basket.
All call and answer circuits shall employ the most up-to-date and reliable solid state circuits to
accomplish all switching functions.
The combination pushbutton switch/light shall glow steadily when a call is placed and turns to red
when the nurse control center answers or calls the station.
OCE - 30 January 2014

NURSE CALL SYSTEM


16748 - 4/6

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

The lamp also glows red when the station is monitored to ensure the privacy of the patient. A call can
be answered and cancelled remotely or locally by operating the cancel switch button.
A call pushbutton shall be provided to place a call when depressed.
6.

DUTY STATION

Duty Station shall provide, audio tones and visual indications for the type of call (normal or
emergency) placed from a patient, staff or emergency station in the system. The station shall be
physically constructed to fit into a single gang back box with all components mounted to the sub plate
over which is placed a single gang, stainless steel trim plate.
Duty Station consists of one sub panel and one single gang, stainless steel trim plate.
The sub panel components include an electronic, solid state tone alert, call/in use light and local tone
on/off switch.
The tone shall be generated at the central control flasher and amplified at each station to assure
distinction of normal and emergency calls.
A switch locally controls the tone with an option to have control from the central control master
station. The tone shall be automatically silenced when the call is answered remotely.
The call/in use light visually announces a normal and emergency incoming call as well as indicates to
local personnel that the calls are being answered from the central control master station.
All connections are made on a pre-coded basis having a division of functions for easy installation and
identification.
A single gang, stainless steel trim plate shall be provided to cover the station and is permanently
designated indicating the functions of the controls. The plate shall be resistant to hospital disinfections.
7.

PILLOW SPEAKERS

The combination Nurse Call Bedstation and Pillow Speaker shall be having provisions for remote
control of radio and TV entertainment functions as well as calling functions and communications with
the master station.
All operating controls shall be flush mounted in a white, high impact, plastic housing with no sharp or
protruding corners.
The unit shall be able to withstand a drop of 180cm to a hard tiled floor without damage to the case or
any component.
At 5cm, moisture resistant, dynamic speaker with a continuous adjustable volume control shall be
provided for use with entertainment systems.
The speaker shall also act as a speaker/microphone when used with patient stations and be used for
private communications with the master station. The volume control shall be disconnected
automatically during this mode of operation.
Buttons for selecting and for volume control of three TV channels, 3 public address channels, and nurse
call origination shall be permanently hot stamped and epoxy colored for long lasting identification.
OCE - 30 January 2014

NURSE CALL SYSTEM


16748 - 5/6

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

A 240cm., flexible cord of matching color shall have a multi-pin plug with strain relief features molded
to one end and a molded strain relief conforming to the housing form on the other end. The multi-pin
plug shall have a built-in permanent magnet for holding the pillow speaker when it is not in use.
15cm., chain and bed sheet clamp shall be provided. Sufficient jaw pressure shall be available to hold
the pillow speaker in place without shredding the sheet.
All electronic components shall be isolated from the surface controls and the entire unit shall be
capable of being gas sterilized without discoloration or deterioration.
A white call assurance and red privacy light shall be flush mounted in the housing. The white light
shall illuminate any time the "nurse" button is depressed. The red light shall illuminate when the call is
answered or any time the patient is being monitored.
The pillow speaker shall operate on low voltage.
8.

CORRIDOR LIGHT

The single or dual Corridor Door Light shall be wall mounted adjacent to each room, as shown on the
floor plans.
-

The lamp shall have a standard bayonet base and operate on 24 volts. The color shall be easily
changed to red, amber, blue or green by covering the lamp with high temperature color caps.

The lamp socket shall be attached to a standard two gang stainless steel plate, over which is
placed a dome lens.

The shatterproof, heat resistant, polymer plastic dome lens, measuring approximately 3.9/32" x
2.5/8", shall snap off and on for instant lamp replacement.

One or two lamps and sockets shall be provided under the same dome lens with barrier plates
dividing the lens into independent sections.

9.

ANNUNCIATOR PANEL

The Annunciator Panel shall provides distinctive visual station call identification of the type of all
(normal or emergency) placed from all patient, staff or emergency stations in the system.
Annunciator lamp display shall have 50 individual lamps.
Each lamp shall be separated by a metal divider to provide permanent and distinct visual indication of
adjacent station calls.
The lamps shall be standard 28 volt bayonet base type, replaceable from the front and have a 5 year
system life. It shall be possible to change the color to red, green, blue or amber for staff indicators or
patient status.
The station designation plate covering the lamps shall be translucent mylar with photographic grid
laminated between glass. This plate shall be protected by a stainless steel plate.
END OF SECTION 16748

OCE - 30 January 2014

NURSE CALL SYSTEM


16748 - 6/6

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16760
CLOCK SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01

SUMMARY
A.

Provide labor, materials, equipment and services, and perform operations required for
installation of Clock and Program Systems and related work as indicated on the
drawings and specified herein.

B.

Work Included: The work of this section shall include, but not be limited to, the
following:
1.

Master clock and program system including requirements for clock and program
system components as follows:
a.
b.
c.

C.

Related Work Specified Elsewhere


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

1.02

Master time control unit, integral part of the nurse call master station.
Conventional clocks, slave.
Locally powered clocks.

Basic Electrical Requirements


Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Grounding
Nurse call system.
Electrical Tests

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.

The clock control system shall be an integral part of nurse call system for originating
and distributing time and time correction signals. It shall display the time at remote
locations and provide programmed, audible signals and operation of remote switching.
The system shall transmit time and program signals to indicating clocks and audible
signal equipment over clock and program system wiring. Provided locally powered
clock units, where nurse station not applied as shown on the drawings.

B.

Functional Performance, Clock System: Provide components and installation required


for system features and functions that include, but are not limited to, the following.

C.

1.

Use precision time reference independent of line frequency. Battery backup of


timekeeping.

2.

Operate and automatically correct three-wire analog synchronous clocks and


two-wire digital clocks. Quantities for each areas as indicated on the drawings.

3.

Automatic daylight savings time correction.

Functional Performance, Program Control System:


Provide components and
installation required for system features and functions that include, but are not limited,
to the following:

OCE - 30 January 2014

CLOCK SYSTEM
16760 - 1/5

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

1.03

1.

Continuously runs a minimum of three independent schedules of events


simultaneously. Minimum of 125 events per schedule.

2.

Event schedules can be programmed to run continuously, controlling any output


circuit.

3.
4.

Minimum of four output circuits for automatic remote function switching.


Output circuits have automatic daylight savings time correction and automatic
shift to a separately programmable holiday schedule.

5.

Events scheduled using keypad and LED or liquid crystal display. System is user
programmable.

6.

Non-volatile memory for event schedules.

7.

Circuit duration for events adjustable from one to twenty-nine seconds


minimum.

8.

Output circuit ratings - 10 amperes.

9.

Manual controls for output circuits on integral control panel.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

B.

1.04

King Saud University

Materials and equipment shall conform to the latest edition of reference specifications
specified herein and to applicable codes and requirements of local authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.

Electrical Component Standard: Provide work complying with applicable


requirements of the applicable electrical code.

2.

Comply with IEC/BS and applicable UL 50 standards.

Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is a factory-authorized


service representative for installation of clock and programming system. Submit
evidence of such qualifications to the Project manager.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Submit the following in accordance with the requirements specified under "Submittals"
in Section 16010.
1.

Product Data for each product specified. Provide color photographs or color
chips for clocks, signal equipment and control panels.

2.

Wiring Diagrams detailing wiring for power, signal and control, differentiating
clearly between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Identify
terminals and wiring color codes to facilitate installation, operation and
maintenance.

3.

Maintenance Data for materials and products, for inclusion in Operating and
Maintenance Manual specified in Section 16010 "Basic Electrical Requirements."
Provide complete manual material concurrently with system submittal and
provide updated final versions of manuals one month before completion of
construction and final system turnover.

OCE - 30 January 2014

CLOCK SYSTEM
16760 - 2/5

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

1.05

King Saud University

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING


A.

Deliver products in factory containers. Store in clean, dry space in original containers.
Protect products from fumes and construction traffic. Handle carefully to avoid
damage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01

MANUFACTURERS
A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of


the following or approved equal.
1.
2.
3.
4.

2.02

Dukane Corp.
Edwards Co., Inc.
Simplex Time Recorder Co.
Standard Electric Time/Faraday

MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT


A.

Provide a fully functional clock and program system using types, sizes, ratings and
performances of equipment and materials indicated. Use equipment complying with
manufacturer's standard design and construction in accordance with published product
information, and as required for installation.

B.

Time Control Unit

C.

1.

Microprocessor based, interchangeable assembly of solid-state switching circuits


with regulated accuracy of two seconds per month using quartz crystal oscillator
time control unit shall be integral part of nurse call stations. System shall have a
single precision time reference standard. Time reference unit shall operate on
internal, automatic recharging battery power for a minimum of 20 hours when
normal power is disconnected, and automatically reset system upon resumption
of power.

2.

Clock Control: Supervises and corrects system clocks indicated.


a.

Conventional Indicating Clocks: Synchronous motor operation. System


shall test clocks automatically for synchronization with master time control
at least once each hour and twice daily for 12 hour control. System shall
automatically and individually correct clocks found to be not synchronized
with the master time control unit.

b.

Locally powered conventional clocks : Provide conventional clocks, not


connected to the time control unit , an shall be locally powered.

3.

Program Control: Able to be programmed to activate specific signal circuits


selectively to produce programmed signals at any minute of any day of any 365
day cycle. Provide quantity of programmed signal circuits indicated.

5.

Switches:
circuit.

Provide manual switch control on control unit for each program

Back Boxes: Provide back boxes for clocks and signal devices. Equip with knockouts
and hanger straps. Provide box cover plate and grounded receptacle to suit mounting
and connection of devices.

OCE - 30 January 2014

CLOCK SYSTEM
16760 - 3/5

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

D.

E.

King Saud University

Slave Conventional Clocks


1.

Conventional clocks shall be synchronous motor-driven indicating clocks of sizes


and ratings as indicated, either surface or semi-recessed mounting, containing
self-starting permanently lubricated and sealed motors and setting knobs.

2.

Provide semi-recessed 15-inch round clock, with red sweep second hand, black
numbers or marker, cover glass, and casing with black matte finish.

3.

Provide 15-inch double-face indicating clocks for wall or ceiling mounting, as


shown on the drawing.

Locally Powered Clocks : Provide conventional locally powered clocks of size and
shape as indicated on the drawing complete with all accessories and fittings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01

EXAMINATION
A.

3.02

3.03

Examine conditions at the job site where work of this Section is to be performed to
insure proper arrangement and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of job
site conditions.

PREPARATION
A.

Examine the Contract Drawings and specifications in order to insure the completeness
of the work required under this Section.

B.

Verify measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the coordination
and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work of related trades so as not to
delay job progress.

C.

Provide templates as required to related trade for location of items.

INSTALLATION
A.

Install system in accordance with the applicable electrical code and in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

Wiring Methods: Install wiring in raceways. Conceal raceways except in unfinished


spaces and as shown on the drawings.

C.

Wiring within Enclosures: Provide adequate length of conductors. Bundle, lace and
train the conductors to terminal points with no excess. Provide and use lacing bars.

D.

Control Circuit Wiring: Install control circuits in accordance with the applicable
electrical code as required. Provide number of conductors as recommended by system
manufacturer to provide control functions indicated or specified.

E.

Splices, Taps and Terminations: Make splices, taps and terminations on numbered
terminal strips in junction, pull and outlet boxes, terminal cabinets, and equipment
enclosures.

OCE - 30 January 2014

CLOCK SYSTEM
16760 - 4/5

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

3.04

3.05

3.06

King Saud University

F.

Identification of Conductors and Cables: Use color coding of conductors and apply
wire and cable marking tape to designate wire and cables so media are identified in
coordination with system wiring diagrams.

G.

Weatherproofing: Weatherproof units mounted outdoors or exposed to weather.

H.

Repairs: Wherever walls, ceilings, floors or other building finishes are cut for
installation repair, restore and refinish to original appearance.

I.

Grounding
1.

Provide equipment grounding connections for clock and program system as


required. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL
Standard 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds.

2.

Ground clocks and programming equipment and conductor and cable shield to
eliminate shock hazard and to minimize ground loops, common mode returns,
noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

Manufacturer's Field Service: Provide services of a factory-authorized service


representative to supervise the field assembly and connection of components and
system pretesting, testing, adjustment and programming. Perform tests as specified in
Section 16950.

B.

Inspection: Make observations to verify that units and controls are properly labeled,
and interconnecting wires and terminals identified.

COMMISSIONING
A.

Train Owner's operating personnel in the programming and operation of the system.
Train Owner's maintenance personnel in the procedures and schedules involved in
programming, operating, troubleshooting, servicing and preventive maintenance of the
system.

B.

Schedule training with Owner through the Project Manager, with at least seven days
advance notice.

CLEANING AND PROTECTION


A.

Provide final cleaning and protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable
to Installer, which ensures system being free from damage and deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

OCE - 30 January 2014

CLOCK SYSTEM
16760 - 5/5

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16770
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01

1.02

1.03

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.

Examine all other sections of the Specification for requirements which affect
work of this Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in this
Section.

B.

Coordinate work with that of all other trades affecting, or affected by work of
this Section. Cooperate with such trades to assure the steady progress of all
work under the Contract.

DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.

The section applied to the use of ceiling mounted speakers used as the public
address system.

B.

The system is mainly used in the sales hall, plant rooms, bakery, cold rooms and
offices.

C.

The quantity and location of apparatus comprising a complete system.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.

1.04

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

1.05

Equipment shall be shown with microphones and loudspeaker units positioned


where indicated on the drawings to provide the maximum flexibility and
coverage for broadcasting.

Equipment shall be purchased only from manufacturers established and


specializing in these types of products.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Manufacturers shall submit drawings and illustrated leaflets of the various types
of apparatus offered.

B.

For speakers, submit the following:


1.

Characteristic curve for defined methods of mounting on ceilings.

2.

Suitability for continuous full output power handling:


a.
b.

3.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Harmonic distortion values


Loudspeaker impedance

Types recommendations by manufacturer with application and


environment considerations. Suitable cabinets for internal loudspeakers to
be flushed to ceilings.

PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM


16770 - 1/5

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

4.
1.06

King Saud University

Samples of all types of loudspeakers and microphones.

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS


A.

Pack to protect all apparatus during transportation.

B.

Store in a dry clean place.

C.

Do not install equipment until it can be protected from damage during


construction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01

EQUIPEMNT
A.

To provide high quality reproduction and natural sounding speech from a good
amplitude modulated amplifier.

B.

Supply:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

2.02

C.

Level of sound Output: The system shall be designed so that it is capable of


providing without undue distortion the maximum loudness likely to be required
taking into account such factors as audience absorption and the maximum
ambient noise quality.

D.

For internal output a mean sound Intensity level of 60dB relative to (5-8 s.cm2)
shall be provided and 20dB below maximum available from the amplifier and
speakers and not after allowance for the loudest passages so not to create
distortion in output quality.

SOURCES OF INPUT FOR THE PA SYSTEM


A.

The public address system shall be suitable to receive inputs from:


1.
2.
3.

2.03

amplifier.
Control panel.
Console.
Microphones.
ceiling mounted loudspeakers for indoor use.
IP Rated loudspeakers whereever it is necceray.
Cables.

Microphones
Pre recorded announcements
Manager chime

MICORPHONES
A.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Suitable for omni directional response. Smooth response over range of


frequencies for the system. Move coil, ribbon or piezo electric as most suitable
for the amplifier.

PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM


16770 - 2/5

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.04

AMPLIFIERS
A.

To operate continuously on the environment conditions stated earlier.

B.

Low voltage to speakers not in excess of 100V. Inputs to the amplifier shall be
high enough to produce full power output stated on drawings.

C.

Frequence response: With filter inoperative, tone control set for desired response
the frequence response shall not vary more than 2dB over:
1.
2.

2.05

With same conditions of frequency response the total harmonic content at rated
power should not exceed:
o
o

2.07

A.

Loudspeakers shall provide close frequency response. Loss of higher frequencies


shall not exceed 10dB at the highest frequency.

B.

Line transformers shall also be fitted to loudspeakers where individual outputs


require to be adjusted, to provide reasonable acoustics to the Engineers
approval.

CONTROL PANEL
A.

All manual controls shall be grouped on one desk mounting panel incorporating
all monitoring and individual controls for inputs and outputs.

B.

Inputs to be controlled individually:


Microphones (each separately)
Priority being as indicated on the drawings.

CABLES
A.

2.09

2% (-34dB) at 100 Hz
4% (-28dB) at 70 Hz

LOUDSPEAKERS

1.
2.
2.08

60Hz to 12HHz at 25% rated output.


100 Hz to 10KHz at rated output.

DISTORTION
A.

2.06

King Saud University

All cables for the sound system are to be PVC sheathed PVC insulated copper
cables with a metallic screen.

MICROPHONE CABLES
A.

Microphone cables shall be hard services cord high temperature thermoplastic


insulated.

3.0

EXECUTION

3.01

INSPECTION

OCE - 30 January 2014

PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM


16770 - 3/5

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

3.02

3.03

King Saud University

A.

The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which the public
address system is to be installed and function.

B.

Correct and unsatisfactory conditions detrimental to the proper and timely


completion of the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a
manner acceptable to the Engineer.

INSTALLAITON
A.

Power supply to be provided adjacent to the amplifier equipment rock.

B.

All equipment metal enclosures to be earthed.

C.

A separate uninsulated earthing system for connection to cables screens.

D.

Room where amplifier is installed shall be adequately ventilated

E.

Public address system cable shall not be placed in any raceway or cable trays
with conductors for lighting or power cables or cable carrying voltages higher
than 100V.

F.

Power supply be durably marked to indicated the class of supply.

G.

All non-current carrying metal parts of equipment shall be earthed.

H.

All fixed cabling shall be carried out as a fixed wiring system.

I.

Joints shall not be permitted.

J.

Boxes shall be fitted in dry locations where possible. Boxes fitted in damp
locations shall be waterproof pattern.

K.

Wires forming a pair shall not be split. Distribution boxes shall provide separate
terminals for all incoming and outgoing wires with cross connection facilities.

L.

One terminal shall contain one wire only. Spare wires shall be left long enough
to reach any terminal.

M.

A schedule shall be fixed to the inside face of the box cover showing all
connections and giving details of the wiring.

N.

Cables shall not be run externally.

O.

Adequate protection shall be provided for all accidental damage or unauthorized


interference.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

The completed installation shall be inspected to ensure the work has been carried
out in a satisfactory manner and that the methods, materials and components
shall comply with the specification, drawings and manufacturers
recommendations.

B.

A functional test of the installation shall be made to ensure the installation will
give satisfactory service under all conditions likely to be experienced.

C.

Earthing connections shall be checked and tested.

OCE - 30 January 2014

PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM


16770 - 4/5

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

3.04

3.05

King Saud University

FIELD TESTS
A.

The Contractor shall carry out field tests within the building after the fabric and
finishes are complete to determine the acoustic characteristics of the various
areas.

B.

The Contractor shall carry out acoustic characteristics field tests in internal and
external circulation areas after completion of all elements relevant to the acoustic
performance.

C.

The Contractor shall adjust the quantity and location of speakers and adjust the
output to suit the results of the filed tests to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

D.

Upon completion of the installation and all relevant acoustic finishes, all areas
shall be tested for acoustic performance to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

FACTORY TEST
A.

Prototype speakers shall be manufactured and tested at works for all speakers.

B.

The Contractor shall ensure exact matching between the speakers in all areas to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.
END OF SECTION 16770

OCE - 30 January 2014

PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM


16770 - 5/5

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16780
MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01

SUMMARY
A.

Provide labor, materials, equipment and services, and perform operations required for
installation of television systems and related work as indicated on the drawings and
specified herein, to provide complete workable system.

B.

Work Included: The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1.

1.02

UHF/VHF Antennas, Central equipment, all central and line amplifiers as


required, video switches, splitters, tap-off units signal transmission lines,
controls, accessories, raceways, electrical boxes and fittings, wiring/ cabling and
control/signal transmission media, as specified herein and in other applicable
sections, which are required in conjunction with installation of MATV systems.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

B.

Materials and equipment shall conform to the latest edition of reference specifications
specified herein and to applicable codes and requirements of local authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.

Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local code requirements of


the authority having jurisdiction as applicable to installation and construction of
television equipment and signal distribution systems.

2.

NFPA Compliance:
Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 78,
"Lightning Protection Code," pertaining to television and antenna systems.

3.

UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL Standards


pertaining to television system products. Provide television systems and
components which are UL-listed and labeled.

4.

NEMA Compliance: Comply with requirements of Stds Pub/No. WC 41,


"Coaxial Communication Cable," pertaining to testing of coaxial cable.

5.

CCIR Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of Europlan Standards


pertaining to television equipment and accessories.

6.

NESC Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Safety Code requirements


pertaining to materials and installation of antenna supporting structures for
MATV systems.

7.

FCC Compliance: Comply with Subpart J of PART 15, FCC Rules pertaining to
computing devices including Class A, Class B, personal and peripheral types.
Provide equipment which complies with technical standards for both radiated
and power line conducted interference.

Installer's Qualifications: Firms with at least 5 years of successful installation


experience with projects utilizing television system work similar to that required for
this project. Firm shall be an accredited installation company of the equipment
manufacturer. Submit evidence of such qualifications to the Project Manager.

OCE - 30 January 2014

MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM


16780 - 1/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

1.03

SUBMITTALS
A.

1.04

1.05

Submit the following in accordance with the requirements specified under "Submittals"
in Section 16010.
1.

Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on television systems including


components and accessories.

2.

Shop Drawings: Submit layout drawings of television systems including


antennas, cameras, monitors, video switchers and time/gate generators showing
scaled components and spatial relationship to associated equipment. Such as
cable distribution TV out lets TV channel pre-Amplifies splitters & tap off line
amplifiers etc. .

3.

Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams for television systems, including


interconnecting signal/video units and electrical power connections to
equipment and components. Show physical layout of signal and power cabling.
Differentiate between portions of wiring which are manufacturer-installed and
portions which are field-installed.

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING


A.

Deliver TV system components properly packaged in factory-fabricated type


containers. Enclose an operating impact sensor in each container, which are holding
sensitive electronic equipment capable of recording a 5G rating.

B.

Store TV antenna components in original cartons and in clean dry space; protect from
weather and construction traffic.

C.

Handle TV equipment and components carefully to avoid breakage, impacts, denting


and scoring finishes. Do not install damaged equipment; replace and return damaged
units to equipment manufacturer.

SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING


A.

1.06

King Saud University

Sequence TV system installation work with other work to minimize possibility of


damage and soiling system during remainder of construction period.

MAINTENANCE
A.

Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each television system
component including "troubleshooting" maintenance guide. Include that data, product
data and shop drawings in a maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of
Section 16010.

B.

Furnish standard products of a single manufacturer for equipment and accessories.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01

MANUFACTURERS
A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide television system


products of one of the following (for each type of product):

OCE - 30 January 2014

MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM


16780 - 2/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

a.

King Saud University

TV Wire/Cable
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Alpha Wire Corp.


Belden Corp.
General Cable Div; DK Technologies, Inc.
Pirelli Cimco Corp.
Motorola Inc.

b. Master Antenna TV Systems


1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.02

Blonder-Tongue Laboratories, Inc.


Channel Master; Avnet, Inc.
Jerrold Distribution Systems Div; General Instrument Corp.
Cathrin
Fuba

MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT


A.

Master Antenna TV Systems


1.

Provide master antenna TV systems, of types, performances, capacities and


channels/frequencies as indicated or specified; consisting of receiving antennas,
antenna supporting structure, cabling, matching transformers, balance signal
dividers, VHF/UHF/FM band separators, amplifiers, outlets and other
components as required for installation. Except as otherwise indicated, provide
manufacturer's standard antenna system components as indicated by published
product information, designed and constructed as recommended by
manufacturer. Provide master antenna TV system with the following functional
and construction features.

2.

VHF Antennas: Provide factory-assembled 75-ohm Yagi TV receiving antennas


for VHF channels/frequencies as indicated. Construct of corrosion-resistant
heavy gauge, 6063-Y4 aluminum tubing. Vibration dampen elements on low
band channel antennas with internal fiber dampers, seal elements and boom ends
with end-caps; construct to withstand 200 KPH winds. Equip antennas with
plates and "U" bolts for fastening to antennas supporting structures, and
construct antennas with following minimum electrical performance features.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.

3.

UHF Antennas: Provide factory-assembled 75-ohm Yagi TV receiving antennas


for UHF channels/frequencies as indicated. Construct of corrosion-resistant
heavy gauge, 6063-T4 aluminum tubing. Seal elements and boom ends with
end-caps; construct to withstand wind velocities of 100 MPH. Equip antennas
with plates and "U" bolts for fastening to antennas supporting structures and
construct antennas with following minimum electrical performance features:
a.
b.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Gain Over Tuned 1/2 Wave Dipole: 10 dB.


Front-To-Back Ratio: 22 dB mm for low band VHF.
Front-To-Back Ratio: 20 dB mm for high band VHF.
Attenuation of Undesired Side Lobes: 18 dB.
Beam Width (-3 dB points): 50 degrees 174MHZ, 42 degrees 230MHZ.
Bandwidth: 174 - 230MHZYz dB flatness.
Impedance: 75-ohm gamma matched.
Backmatch: 12 dB return loss minimum over entire channel (VSWR 1.65:1).

Gain Over 150 tropic 10.2 dB .


Front-To-Back Ratio: 18 dB.

MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM


16780 - 3/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
4.

Center Frequency: Channels 21 thru 69.


Bandwidth: 470 - 900MHz.
Gain: Not less than 20 dB.
Input/Output Impedance: 75 ohms.
Operating Ambient Temperature Range: Minus - 40oC + 60oC.
Minimum Recommended input excellent picture +50 dB MV.
Power Supply: Minus 21 VDC at 28.6 ma; regulated power.

VHF Amplifiers: Provide 19 inch Rack factory-assembled, solid-state single


channel amplifiers, with AGC, for VHF TV channels/ frequencies as indicated.
Equip amplifiers with Type F chassis connectors which match and mate with
Type F coaxial cable connectors. Select amplifiers with following minimum
electrical performance features:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Gain, Channels 2 thru 5: Not less than 29 dB.


Gain, Channels 5 thru 12: Not less than 26 dB.
Bandpass Flatness, Channels 5 thru 12: 8 MHz, plus-or-minus FM 1.0dB.
Noise Figure, Channels 2 thru 5: 3.5 dB or less.
Noise Figure, Channels 5 thru 12: 2.5 dB or less.
Input/Output Impedance: 75 ohms.
Connectors; Input, Output and Output Monitor: Type F.
Input Match, Channels 2 thru 5: Not less than 14 dB min.
Input Match, Channels 5 thru 12: Not less than 6 dB min.
Selectivity: 12 dB min., down 9 MHz from channel center frequency.
Output Match, Channels 2 thru 6: Not less than 8 dB min.
Output Match, Channels 5 thru 12: Not less than 4 dB min.
Operating Ambient Temperature Range: -40o - 60o .
Power Requirements: -21 VDC at 40 ma; regulated power supply.

UHF Preamplifiers: Provide factory-assembled, solid-state preamplifiers for


UHF receiving channels/frequencies as indicated. Equip preamplifiers for
antenna support structure mounting and with Type F chassis connectors which
match and mate with Type F coaxial cable connectors. Select preamplifiers with
noise figure not to exceed 4.5 dB and with following minimum electrical
performance features:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.

6.

Attenuation of Undesired Side Lobes: 22 dB.


Beam Width (-3 dB Points): 43 degrees vertical, 35 degrees horizontal.
Bandwidth: 470-890MHZ, 2dB flatness.
Impedance: 75-ohm gamma matched.
Backmatch: 12 dB return loss minimum over entire channel (VSWR 1.67:1).

VHF Preamplifiers: Provide factory-assembled, solid-state preamplifiers for VHF


receiving channels/frequencies as indicated. Equip preamplifiers for antenna
supporting structure mounting and with Type F chassis connectors which match
and mate with Type F coaxial cable connectors. Select preamplifiers with noise
figure not to exceed 3 dB, and with following minimum electrical performance
features:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.

5.

King Saud University

Gain: 55.0 dB min.


Gain Control Range: 20 dB.
Maximum out put for 1/2 dB sync compression +131 dB MV 3.5 volt .
Noise Figure: 7.5 dB., at full gain.
Return Loss, Input: Not less than 12 dB min.
Return Loss, Output: 14 dB min. and 18 dB out of band.
Bandpass Flatness: over 40 dB Gain plus-or-minus 0.75 dB. Typical +1.5
dB Max
MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM
16780 - 4/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

h.
i.
j.
7.

Selectivity: 30 dB, down 9 MHz from channel center frequency.


Line Sensitivity: +0.5 dB change for plus-or-minus 10% change in line
voltage.
Power Supply: 220 VAC, 60 Hz, 0.06 amp., regulated power.

UHF Amplifiers:
Provide factory-assembled, solid-state single channel
amplifiers, with AGC, for UHF TV channels/ frequencies as indicated. Equip
amplifiers with Type F chassis connectors which match and mate with Type F
coaxial cable connectors. Select amplifiers with following minimum electrical
performance features:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.

8.

King Saud University

Gain: 58 dB/max., 18 dB min. (full AGC).


Output: Plus 50 to plus 67 dBmV for less than 1 dB gain compression.
Noise Figure: at full Gain 7.5 dB .
Input With AGC Action: 10 dBV min. to 50 dBmV max. (output set at 68
dBmV).
Level set Ranges 109 - 130 dB MV .
AGC Range: 30 dB.
Bandpass Flatness: over 30dB AEC Range 1.0dB .
Input Match: 12 dB return loss (1.67:1 VSWR).
Output Match: 10 dB return loss.

VHF/UHF-Channel Multiplexers:
Provide factory-assembled, solid-state,
75-ohm multiplexers capable combining sub-channels VHF/UHF channels for
those receiving channels/frequencies as indicated. Provide circuitry with sharp
responses to obtain high isolation between sub-channels and VHF/UHF
channels. Equip units with 75-ohm Type F chassis connectors which match and
mate with Type F coaxial cable connectors. Select multi-plexers with the
following minimum electrical performance features:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.

Frequency Range LB 48MHz - 88MHz HB 170 - 230MHz 470 - 900 MHz .


Gain 45 dB HB 43dB UHF .
Out put 109 - 114 .
Noise figure 5.0 dB .
Minimum input +54.5 dB MV .

9.

752-Ohm Band Couplers: Provide high/low antenna band couplers with


752-ohm cable-clamping connections; capable of combining signals from high
and low VHF TV antenna bands into single output. Select couplers which are
mast-mountable.

10.

UHF/VHF/FM Band Separator: Provide 752-ohm band separators capable of


separating UHF/VHF/FM outputs from single 752-ohm down-load carrying
three bands of signals. Select types of band separators which easily mount on
rear of TV sets.

11.

Antenna Supporting Structures: Provide prefabricated antenna supporting


structures of types, sizes and materials indicated, which properly support
antennas within environment specified.

12. Antenna System Accessories: Provide antenna system accessories including, but
not limited to, baluns/impedance matching transformers, signal splitters,
VHF/UHF/FM band separators/splitters, antenna lead-in discharge units,
water-resistant cable boots, diplexers, and wall type TV tap-offs as recommended
by antenna system manufacturer, of types and materials needed to meet
installation and impedance matching requirements.

OCE - 30 January 2014

MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM


16780 - 5/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

B.

Closed-Circuit TV Systems
1.

Provide provision in MATV central equipment and distribution network for


future addition of Close Circuit TV equipment and signal distribution through
the MATV network from a location in administration building to any location
provided with MATV service in Ambulatory, Rehabilitation, recovery, and
administration buildings. The system must accept the following future
equipment as minimum:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.

C.

D.

King Saud University

Silicon Target Vidicon CCTV Cameras


Monochrome CCTV Monitors
Video Alarm SequSwitcher
Manual Passive Switcher
CCTV Enclosure Mounting Brackets
CCTV Equipment Console
Pan and Tilt Units
Time/Date Generator
Motorized Zoom Lenses
Zoom Lens Control Units

TV System Cabling and Accessories


1.

Coaxial Cable: Provide RG59/U type, 5 to 300 MHz, flexible coaxial cable;
75-ohm characteristic impedance; with single 18-gauge stranded copper inner
conductor; outer conductor single braid 34-gauge copper wire; cellular
polyethylene low-density dielectric core; with black vinyl jacket; and 100 percent
sweep tested.

2.

Aerial Coaxial Cable: Provide aerial type coaxial cable; 75-ohm characteristic
impedance; with center conductor 18-gauge copper-clad steel; dielectric, cellular
expanded polyethylene; outer conductor shield 34-gauge bare copper braid, 95
percent coverage; with black polyvinyl chloride jacket; and 100 percent sweep
tested. Note all race way coaxual cable shall be double screened RG 11 type all
internal coaxual cable shall be double screened RG6.

3.

Coaxial Cable Connectors: Provide radio frequency, Type F cable connectors for
RG59/U flexible coaxial video cable, where indicated.

4.

Tap offs and Splitters: Provide tap offs and splitters as recommended by coaxial
cable manufacturer for service indicated to meet cable mating and impedance
matching requirements.

Raceways and Electrical Boxes and Fittings


1.

Provide raceways and electrical boxes and fittings complying with Division 16
sections in accordance with the following listing:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.

OCE - 30 January 2014

Rigid steel conduit.


Rigid metal conduit fittings. Type 1.
Electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
EMT fittings.
Interior outlet boxes.
Junction and pull boxes.
Bushings, knockout closures and locknuts.

MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM


16780 - 6/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01

EXAMINATION
A.

3.02

3.03

Examine conditions at the job site where work of this Section is to be performed to
insure proper arrangement and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of job
site conditions.

PREPARATION
A.

Examine the Contract Drawings and specifications in order to insure the completeness
of the work required under this Section.

B.

Verify measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the coordination
and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work of related trades, so as not to
delay job progress.

C.

Provide templates as required to related trade for location of items.

INSTALLATION
A.

Install television systems and components, including antennas where indicated, in


accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions, in compliance with the
applicable electrical code and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that
television systems complies with requirements and serves intended purposes.

B.

Use extreme care in handling, fishing and pulling-in electronic coaxial cable to avoid
damage to cable and shielding. Avoid excessive and sharp bends. Ensure
manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions are not exceeded.

C.

Install television equipment properly to avoid causing mechanical stresses, twisting or


misalignment of equipment being exerted by clamps, supports and cabling.

D.

Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with
equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment
connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten
connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standards
486A and B, and the applicable electrical code.

E.

Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same
raceway.

F.

Identify conductors and cables using color coding of conductors and apply wire and
cable marking tape to designate wires and cables so media are identified in
coordination with system wiring diagrams.

G.

Avoid splices in media (cable) runs.

H.

Orient each antenna by rotating to a position that results in maximum signal pickup,
then fasten antenna firmly in mounting.

I.

Install TV cable from common signal source directly to TV terminals. Do not loop
cables from TV outlet to TV outlet.

J.

Grounding:

OCE - 30 January 2014

Provide equipment grounding connections for television systems as

MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM


16780 - 7/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

indicated or specified. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified


in UL standard 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds. Provide grounding
conductors for antennas and antenna supporting structures without splices or
connections in the conductor. Ensure and demonstrate that resistance to solid earth for
signals is less than, or equal to 3 ohms.
3.04

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A.

3.05

Perform tests of television systems as specified in Section 16950.

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING


A.

Set field-adjustable television system components for input voltages, current settings
and frequency settings.

B.

Touchup scratched and marred surfaces to match original finishes; remove dirt and
construction debris.
END OF SECTION

OCE - 30 January 2014

MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM


16780 - 8/8

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16783
CCTV AND ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
PART 1
1.01

GENERAL
SCOPE OF WORKS
A.

The Security Works described in this Section of the Specification and as indicated on
the drawings shall comprise of the supply and installation of a CCTV surveillance,
Access Control, and Fire Alarm System systems, with all associated cabling and
containment.

B.

The contractor work shall include for the design development, co-ordination with all
other trades, carrying out a complete survey of existing services, supply, delivery to
site, off-loading, positioning, installation, fixing, making all connections of all new
material necessary, setting to work and the inspection, testing, commissioning and
hand-over of the completed installation of the Security Engineering Services, as
detailed in this Specification and as shown on the drawing and those essential items
not shown on the drawings, together with all installation equipment and other items
not necessarily detailed or shown, but which are essential for the complete safe and
specified operation of the plant, equipment, apparatus and system described.
In this regard the contractor shall be responsible for some small elements of the design
development, and full co ordination and integration of the works including but not
necessarily limited to, for the co-ordination of the contractors design elements required
within this specification, the co-ordination of the architect design and integration of the
architect design with the contractors design and the remainder of the works, the coordination and integration of the designs with the design of the remainder of the
works.

C.

The contractor is responsible for ensuring that his design and that of the architect and
or professional consultant are spatially consistent with the works. Equally the
contractor is responsible for advising the architect of any defects, errors or inadequacies
in the design of the works which the contractor becomes aware of in adequate time for
the architect to issue the necessary clarifications to the contractor so as not to impede
progress of any works.
Furthermore the contractor is responsible for the co-ordination and integration of any
subcontractors design with the works and the works of other subcontractors and
consultants.
As a prerequisite of the contractors tender submission the contractor has offered both
to complete the design development, co ordination and integration of the works and to
carry out and complete the construction of the works.
The entire security system for all areas shall be fully fit for purpose and included, but
not necessarily limited to the following:
1.

Carry out a complete survey of existing service and prepare a detailed condition
and investigation report.

2.

Provide a detailed method statement and construction programme indicating


proposed sequence of works, preferred method of installing plant including all
procurement dates of all plant and equipment for the security installation. This
should include indication and notification periods to access all areas.

OCE 30 January 2014

CCTV & Access Control System


16783 - 1/ 21

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

1.02

King Saud University

3.

Provide and submit for approval all technical documentation submissions


relating to the security plant to be incorporated within the works.

4.

Supply, connect and install an access control system, CCTV, and Fire alarm
system, including all conduit, wiring etc.

5.

Supply, connect and install an intruder alarm system including all conduits,
wiring and interfacing wiring to the system.

6.

Supply, connect and install a CCTV system including monitors, multiplexers,


VCRs, conduits, wiring etc.

7.

Inspect, test commission and handover.

8.

Provision of all Builders work drawings.

9.

Inspect, test, commission and handover the entire security systems, including all
sectionalized testing and handover of the works.

10.

Provide shop, manufactures, contractors installation and As Fitted Drawings.

11.

Supply Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

12.

Instruct and train client staff.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.

All deliveries of materials shall be arranged with the contractor representative so as not
to impede the office operation.

B.

The contractor shall allow in his tender for undertaking a condition survey of the
existing security services immediately on award of contract. The contractor shall
submit a report to the engineer within 14 days of award of contract indicating the
interface requirements necessary to integrate the standalone system with the base
building system.

C.

The contractor shall include as part of his tender submission, for a method statement
indicating proposed sequence of work. This should include, design development, start
up dates, procurement dates of all materials, indicate dates written orders were place,
anticipated delivery dates and the sequence of installation of all new plant required for
the project.
Furthermore a complete testing and commissioning programme complete with detailed
written statement of all tests on and off site shall be produced.

D.

The contractor shall deem to have included within his tender for all necessary out of
sequence working including but not necessarily limited to:
1.

Night-time working.

2.

Hours in excess of the normal working day.

3.

Weekend working.

4.

National Holidays.

5.

As necessary to suit the programme completion dates of the project.

The contractor shall comply fully with the security arrangements of the Client.

OCE 30 January 2014

CCTV & Access Control System


16783 - 2/ 21

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

1.03

TENDERING
A.

The contractor shall allow for the supply, installation, inspection, testing and
commissioning of all items of work covered within this document.

B.

The contractor shall complete the schedule of the names of the manufacturers used in
the Form of Tender for the following:
1.
2.

1.04

Access Control System


CCTV System

C.

The contractor may submit proposals for alternative or additional equipment but he
must specify these within the tender return document. However these alternatives
should be shown as options below the line and do not form part of the original tender
submission.

D.

The contractor shall include sectionalized, testing, inspection and commissioning of the
project as required to complete the project.

E.

The contractor shall submit details of the comprehensive maintenance proposals as part
of his tender submission.

WORKING AND BUILDERS WORK DRAWINGS


A.

1.05

King Saud University

The contractor shall include in his tender price for providing the following in accordance
with the Preliminaries Section:
1.

All Builders Work details showing all holes, chases, etc. required for the installation
of the security services.

2.

Co-ordinated layout drawings of the security services for all areas to scale 1:50.

3.

Full interface and control wiring diagrams for the security system interfacing wiring
diagrams.

4.

Full interface and control wiring diagrams for the interface wiring to other systems.

5.

Details of the Card access and CCTV System, with schematic diagrams, plan
layouts and indicator panel fascia layouts.

6.

Detailed arrangement of electrical riser cupboards, vertical and horizontal


containment routes (Plans and Elevations).

7.

The manufacturer shall submit an item-by-item compliance statement to all


requirements of this specification

8.

Complete diagrams of all interconnections and their amp capacities for all inputs
and outputs.

DRAWINGS
A.

The drawings accompanying this Specification are up to date at the time of issue and are
intended to indicate the general requirements of the installation.

B.

The contractor is required to keep close liaison with the professional design team and
other associated contractors to prepare all working drawings, manufacturing shop
drawings in accordance with the detailed plans which will be supplied to the contractor
as issued by the Main Contractor Representative.

OCE 30 January 2014

CCTV & Access Control System


16783 - 3/ 21

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

C.

King Saud University

The Contractors shall check all dimensions prior to the preparation of drawings for panels,
conduit, trunking, etc. The Contractor shall be held responsible for the accuracy of these
services in relation to the building structure and the Architects requirements. The
Contractor shall be deemed to have visited the site and to be fully aware of the conditions
applicable.
In this regard the contractor shall be responsible for the design, co-ordination and
integration of the works including but not necessarily limited to, for the co-ordination
of the contractors design elements required within this specification, the co-ordination
of the architect design and integration of the architect design with the contractors
design and the remainder of the works, the co-ordination and integration of the
professional consultants design with the design of the remainder of the works. The
contractor is responsible for ensuring that his design and that of the architect and or
professional consultant are spatially consistent with the works. Equally the contractor
is responsible for advising the architect of any defects, errors or inadequacies in the
design of the works, which the contractor becomes aware of.
Furthermore the contractor is responsible for the co-ordination and integration of any
subcontractors design with the works and the works of other subcontractors and
consultants.
As a prerequisite of the contractors tender submission the contractor has offered both
to complete the design development of the works and to carry out and complete the
construction of the works.

1.06

RECORD DRAWINGS
A.

1.07

The contractor shall include in his tender price for providing the following composite
record drawings of the electrical installation, including: 1.

A single line schematic of the Security and CCTV systems and all associated
interfaces.

2.

In general the contractor shall produce record drawings as a revision of all working
and manufacturers drawings.

3.

All drawings shall be provided in hard copy format plus electronic CD-ROM disc
format. The electronic format shall be AutoCAD Release 2000 or above.

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS


A.

The contractor shall submit (3) copies of the operation and maintenance manuals
within 30 days of completion of the works. The manuals shall include written text of
the complete operation and maintenance routines to be undertaken for the equipment.
The document shall include a general introduction, description of the complete security
system. In addition the document shall included all circuit and wiring diagrams, safety
precautions, operating and maintenance instructions, drawings, illustrations, and
complete spare parts list and fault finding routines.

B.

The complete text of the operation and maintenance manuals shall be produced in an
electronic format Microsoft office Word 2000 or above. This shall include all technical
manufactures data, technical schedules, routine maintenance procedures, fault-finding
routines etc.

OCE 30 January 2014

CCTV & Access Control System


16783 - 4/ 21

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

1.08

King Saud University

STAFF TRAINING
A.

The contractor shall arrange a minimum of a 3 day course to instruct the client staff as
to the equipment installed. The contractor shall submit a detailed synopsis of the items
to be covered within 3 weeks of appointment for the engineers approval.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01

SECURITY SYSTEMS INTEGRATED ACCESS MONITORING AND CONTROL SYSTEM


A.

The contractor shall complete the design development, manufacture, delivery, supply,
offload, place in position, install, connect, test and commission the complete CCTV, and
integrated card access system described below.
This document outlines the requirements for an integrated Access Control & Alarm
Monitoring System.

B.

The system shall be a Windows NT 4.0 database incorporating an integrated access


control, alarm monitoring and video imaging pass production system employing
contactless utilising the r proximity reader system.

C.

The Security Management systems operating within the Windows NT environment


will connect via a dedicated Ethernet LAN to a host computer and workstations at the
following locations:
1.
2.

Host computer in the security control room.


PC based video image with camera and tripod.

A report printer shall be located within the security room together with a dye
sublimation printer associated with Pass production.
D.

The card access system shall be interfaced to the fire detection and alarm system. In
addition the intruder alarm system shall be interfaced to the existing landlords control
panel.
The software should meet the following requirement:

Access Control:
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o

Alarm monitoring:
o
o
o
o

Cardholder: 100,000
Access codes: 250
Time code: 128
Time group: 250
Holidays: Up to 50
Controllers: Up to 32
Doors: 16, 32, 64
Actions: 100
Action groups: 50

Monitor points: 8, 160


Zones: 100
Operators/Passwords: 99
User-Defined cardholder data fields: 31.

Reporting & Operating:


o

OCE 30 January 2014

Operator instructions: 500


CCTV & Access Control System
16783 - 5/ 21

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

o
o
o

2.02

King Saud University

User-defined floor maps: 100


Reports: 100
Graphic map import: BMP graphics from CAD/CAM and other graphics
software

INTRUDER ALARM MONITORING


A.

The intruder alarm system shall be a function of a standalone intruder panel linked to a
centralized P.C. based system and shall be controlled via the system outstations operating
the access control system. Monitoring of the existing tenants electrical rooms and exit
doors on each floor shall be linked to the intruder alarm system
As a function of the access control outstations magnetic door contacts shall be located to
the specified doors and cabled back to the nearest outstation (ACU Access Control Unit).

B.

All wiring would be recessed into the building fabric and generally installed within a
conduit and trunking system.
The intruder alarm system shall provide the following as a minimum: -

2.03

1)

4 state alarm monitoring.

2)

Dedicated keys for alarm handling.

3)

An alarm will be triggered by certain system exceptions such as Void Card, Access
Level, Time Zone, Terminal Down, and Forced Entry. Etc.

4)

An individual alarm station will be assigned to handle all alarms or a range of


alarms only.

5)

Notification of alarm states requiring acknowledgement will be reported to the


security Room.

6)

4 state inputs (active, secure, open, and short) circuit down state is also indicated.

7)

Support of 32-point output control terminals.

8)

Response codes will be selected by the operator and put in history (up to 16
characters) logs.

9)

10 alarm priority levels and time ordered alarm queues.

10)

Output circuits will be verified by an arbitrary input.

11)

Real-time update of Circuit Status, what occurred, what is required information


when an alarm circuit is displayed on the alarm Monitor.

12)

Each input can trigger up to 5 outputs or events.

13)

Enhanced instruction and description text includes a full line description and up to
5 lines of instructions.

14)

Circuits can be suppressed by timed duration.

15)

Connection to a remote central watching via auto dialler.

ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM


A.

The Access Control System shall be controlled by the centrally located PC based system
and shall comprise of the following major items: 1)

Central Controller

2)

Security Interface Units

3)

Proximity Badge Technology

OCE 30 January 2014

CCTV & Access Control System


16783 - 6/ 21

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

B.

4)

Door Locking Devices)

5)

Door Exit Control by proximity badge technology

6)

Battery Back-up Unit

7)

Door Exit Button

8)

Emergency Egress break glass units

King Saud University

The card access system shall be interfaced to the fire alarm and gas suppression systems.
The Access Control System shall be the base system controlling alarm monitoring
Card readers shall be of proximity technology and be recessed into the building fabric
adjacent to the respective doors. Cards themselves shall be of credit card size with the
suitable functional range to allow the user to wear the badge on their person.
Door locking devices shall surface type mounted into the doorframe and door with all
associated wiring being concealed.

2.04

DOOR ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM


A.

The contractor shall supply and install Conduit/Trunking/trays system for the internal
access Control and intruder alarm system, all as indicated on the drawings. The
Conduit system shall be installed through the columns above the false ceiling void, and
in the risers, with junction boxes at intervals. Power supplies shall be installed adjacent
controllers generally in false ceilings. The power supplies shall be ring served 2.5-mm
LSF cable (20A MCB) and will terminate in fused connection unit c/w neon and flex
outlet.
The control system shall be a PC-based, data network, linked to a bus-controller, access
controllers and reader interface modules, operating on software driven system. The
system shall incorporate full patrol logging facilitates.

2.05

B.

The contractor shall undertake the complete access door system, comprising the
supply, installation, network cabling, cabling to local components, testing and
commissioning and necessary cause and effect software.

C.

The sub-contractor shall provide a submission of fully detailed technical specification,


supported by all relevant manufacturers data etc, for issue to the services consultants
for comment/approval.

VIDEO IMAGING PASS PRODUCTION


A.

The video imaging pass production shall utilise the DataCard IDWorks software
database for stored cardholder details and images.

B.

Badge printing shall be undertaken using the PVC with glossy laminate surface card
printer.
The card shall include the following:

Staff image
Staff signature
Company logo
Site address

OCE 30 January 2014

CCTV & Access Control System


16783 - 7/ 21

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

C.

2.06

2.07

King Saud University

The contractor shall supply a minimum of 500 cards and the contractor shall allow to
validate the first 100 cards, complete with images and to create the necessary database
for the client.

OPERATOR INTERFACE
A.

The requirement is for a Microsoft Compatible Windows User presentation,


combining the benefits of this Graphical User Interface Standard with the flexibility of
viewing multiple windows simultaneously.

B.

It shall be possible to select any function, within a given Operators Permissions,


independent of the currently displayed screen. Functions will be accessed via ICONS
which will include hidden Help prompts which will appear when the mouse pointer
dwells on selection.

C.

The system will include comprehensive on-line Help dialogue screens, which will
relate to the currently active window. To minimise the amount of information
displayed for any given Help screen, Hypertext Links will be included. It shall be
possible to browse the Help screens via a Help Contents selection option. System
operators shall not have to depend upon any supporting Manuals to confirm any
aspect of functionality.

D.

A Print Screen command button will be required to be available for all screens and will
cause the currently displayed information and screen presentation to be printed.

E.

The Time and Date along with information relating to the current Quantity, Priority
and Status of any Alarms will be displayed on the screen at all times. When logged
onto the system the Operators name will also be displayed at all times.

F.

All Readers, Alarm Monitoring Points and Switching Outputs will be associated with a
Custom text Description of their location, which will be utilised as the Operator
reference when selecting devices within any particular function.

G.

Similarly Access rights, Time programmes, Automatic Commands and Operator


Permissions shall all incorporate an Operator definable description for easy reference
when retrieving pre-defined selections.

OPERATOR PERMISSIONS
A.

System Operators shall be associated with a log in ID and Password. A system option
will determine whether pass codes will be forced to include numeric data or not.
Additionally, each operator will be assigned to a Permission category. This will
determine the functions that will be available to that Operator when logged onto the
system.

B.

Each Operator is required to only see the functions for which he has access thereby
reducing the options displayed to those appropriate for any given category of
Operators permissions. The option to hide Personal Identification Numbers of
cardholders when an Operator is viewing a record is a requirement.

C.

The ICONS used to select system functions will be used to create the Operator
Permission categories employing standard Windows Drag-and-Drop methodology.
For all Operators, a means of re-arranging their icon Tool Bar shall be provided to allow
the most frequently used icons to be repositioned by any Operator.

OCE 30 January 2014

CCTV & Access Control System


16783 - 8/ 21

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.08

2.09

ACCESS MANAGEMENT
A.

Cardholders will be added to the system records as required. To speed the task of
administering card records, it shall be possible to select a pre-defined Access Code
from a pick list. Each Access Code provides a description of the access rights available
for that code. Each Access Code definition will automatically assign the readers and
times for which access is to be granted on a per door basis.

B.

To embrace situations where a suitable Access Code has not been previously created,
then it shall be possible to select the required readers, associate each with a time code
and enter a new Access Code description from within the Card Holder record screen.
Access Codes created in this way subsequently being added to the pick list for re-use
by the System Operator.

C.

A requirement exists to allow selected cardholders to be automatically re-assigned to


an alternative Access Code for a period. Upon expiry of the alternate Access Code, the
cardholders access rights will revert to its normal Access Code.

D.

It shall be possible from within a card holder record to view the last five valid
movements to assist in locating personnel.

E.

The System Operator will be provided with a means of manually making an individual
card inactive. It shall be possible to enter a comment at the time of making the card
inactive to provide additional information when subsequently viewing a record. The
Operator will have the ability to uniquely flag a card as Lost.

F.

To encompass short-term contractors, each card record shall be provided with a start
and end date validity period. Upon expiry of the validity period, cards shall become
automatically inactive without Operator intervention.

HOLIDAY OVERRIDES
A.

2.10

2.11

King Saud University

Time codes will provide a means of both limiting access rights and enabling automatic
commands to be controlled. Each time code shall be able to be suspended
automatically on special holidays dates. To differentiate between whole day and part
day holidays, up to four different types of holiday date shall be included. It shall be
possible to create special time codes, which will not be subject to override on these
holiday dates.

CARD HOLDERS DETAILS


A.

Each card holder record shall provide up to 10 fields of additional personal information
with each field including a definable title. Both cardholder records and the history log
will be capable of using any one of these 10 fields of additional information or their title
as a parameter to sort by.

B.

To minimize typing it shall be possible recall previously entered data by selecting from
a list or enter new data as required. New data entries being automatically added to the
list selections for future reference.

CARD HOLDER PRIVILEGES


A.

To cater for special cardholders, the following privilege options shall be included:

OCE 30 January 2014

CCTV & Access Control System


16783 - 9/ 21

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.12

EXTENDED DOOR TIMES


A.

2.13

King Saud University

This option is required for both disabled cardholders and personnel required
manoeuvring goods trolleys. A cardholder with this privilege will be automatically
provided with extended door release and open monitoring times.

INTEGRATED VIDEO IMAGING


A.

The system shall support Video Imaging as an optional facility and use a common
cardholder database for integrated system operation. It shall be possible to capture and
save both Facial and Signature images, by using a standard CCTV camera, for each
cardholder on the system.

B.

The system offered shall encompass a comprehensive facility for create custom ID
badge designs and saving each layout with a description title. The facility shall include
the ability to import pictures and logos in the form of a bit map to provide a corporate
image to the badge.

C.

All card holder details such as Name, Car Number, Expiry Date and any of the 10 fields
of Personal Details shall be available for incorporation into any given design in
addition to the facial and signature images.

D.

It shall be possible to associate a designated area with any one of these parameters then
allow its position and size to be modified as required when creating each badge design.
A means of retaining the aspect ratio for the area assigned for the facial image shall be
included to prevent distortion of faces.

E.

Standard drawing tools shall also be incorporated to allow straight lines, rectangles and
ellipses to be included on the design. It shall be possible to fix the font, size and colour
of all text and also include a Size to Fit option to automatically re-size for card with
long data entries in any field. Tools to allow easy alignment of multiple elements snap
to a gird and a zoom shall also be included.

F.

When registering a new card holder the image capture shall be an integral step to
creating the card record and shall allow the required ID badge design to be selected
and the specific card details to be previewed on the screen prior to requesting the
badge to be printed.

G.

The system shall operate with any manufacturers Dye Sublimation Card printer with a
Microsoft Windows compatible printer driver.

H.

The option to encode a magnetic stripe card in a single process utilising the ID Badge
printer shall be available and support both a unique high security format specified by
the security systems supplier, or a custom format if requested by the Specifier.

I.

The system shall include a monitoring screen to automatically display the stored image
for a card when used at a reader. This screen will operate in conjunction with a Live
Video input from a standard CCTV camera viewing a nominated access point. This
should provide a system Operator with the ability to verify the user of a card as the
authorised cardholder.

OCE 30 January 2014

CCTV & Access Control System


16783 - 10/ 21

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.14

MONITORING CARDHOLDERS MOVEMENTS


A.

2.15

2.17

It shall be possible to flag an individual cardholder, which will result in all movements
through access control doors to be automatically indicated to the System Operator as
they occur. Additionally it shall be possible to enquire as to the current location of a
single or group of card holders as a unique Operator function within any given
configuration of Operator Permissions.

ALARMS MANAGEMENT
A.

2.16

King Saud University

Alarms will be presented to the Operator on a priority basis. The possibility for 99
different Alarm priorities shall be provided, with all new Alarms being presented
ahead of previously acknowledged Alarms:

The Alarms presented shall be capable of indicating when their input has reset.

It shall not be possible to clear an Alarm until its input has reset.

When the Operator selects and Alarm, the system shall display up to five lines of
pre-configured instructions to indicate the action to be taken for that Alarm.

It shall be possible for the Operator to enter comments, which will be logged
with the time, date and Operator Name for subsequent review via the History
Log.

To speed the entering of comments, the option shall be provided to display a predefined pick list of typical comments thereby removing the need for these to be
typed in manually.

It shall be possible, for suitably authorised Operators, to enter new instructions


and assign them to the relevant Alarms ad additionally add to the pick list of predefined comments as required.

GRAPHICAL SITE MAPS


A.

The system shall provide a simple means of importing site drawings created from
conventional office drawing applications in either Bit Map, Windows metafiles or
AutoCAD DXF formats. All access and monitoring points shall be represented by an
Icon, which can be dragged and dropped at the required location for each map.

B.

Maps will fulfill two operational needs by both indicating the geographical location of
the Alarm currently selected and shall also be used to provide status information to the
Operator at any time. It shall be possible to change the status of Readers, Access Doors
or alarm Monitored Points and confirm the successful execution of such commands
form the Map display.

MANUAL AND AUTOMATIC COMMANDS


A.

The System shall provide a wide choice of Manual Commands embracing Readers,
Monitor Points, Output Switching Relays and Door Locking devices.

B.

To compliment this capability the means to interrogate a single, or selection of, devices
status will be included to ensure the Operator is always able to check the operational
mode of the System and make any adjustments as needs change.

C.

Automatic Commands will be included and operate on a Timed or Conditional basis.

OCE 30 January 2014

CCTV & Access Control System


16783 - 11/ 21

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.18

2.19

2.20

King Saud University

D.

Time Commands shall automatically link complementary Commands to occur at the


Start and Stop times of any chosen Time Code.

E.

Conditional Commands will be provided as a means of creating IF/THEN/WHEN


associations encompassing a wide selection of IF conditions to the automatic execution
of a THEN command subject to a WHEN Time Code being active. An example being
IF a particular Monitor Point detects an Alarm THEN activate an Output for a Sounder
WHEN it happens during normal office hours.

F.

It shall be possible to associate common devices into a group to provide easy


management of Access Points, alarm Monitor Points and Output Switching Relays on
an Area basis. Such device groupings shall be able to be defined by the Operator at
any time and associated with a descriptive name to aid recognition.

HISTORY REPORTING
A.

Extensive History reporting shall be provided embracing the ability to review all
System Alarms, access control activity and Operator Actions. These reports shall be
available for review via the Operators Display, to a Printer or Disk media. Extensive
sort parameters shall include by any of ten Personal Details fields or Titles, for
example by Department, and only Names commencing with SM.

B.

To provide System Management reporting, detailed listings are also required for all the
Operator actions and the current cardholder database for output to the Display, Printer
or Disk media.

C.

The ability to see frequently used report configurations and associate them with a
Title is a requirement. Such predefined Reports shall be available from a list to
simplify the report selection. It shall be possible to request these reports to run
immediately or schedule them to occur on a specified date and time. Scheduled
Reports should be able to be automatically repeated by specifying the number of days
and reporting period to be included, for example a weekly report of Alarms to run at
10.30 hours on each Monday and including the previous 7 days of Alarms.

CARDS ON-SITE REPORT


A.

A specific Report option will provide a listing of Cardholders currently On-Site. The
report shall include the ability to embrace all Cardholders or selectively filter, by the
Personal Details fields and Titles, who is to be included.

B.

Additionally, it will be possible to sort the information with respect to the whole site,
only a building or area of the site.

C.

The option shall be available to provide full Muster operation, when required,
utilizing dedicated readers located at strategic muster point locations for the automatic
registration of on-site personnel. Listings should be available at a minimum of two
reporting destinations and shall include a Head Count total for all cardholders who
are currently on-site and have failed to muster. It shall be possible to initiate the
listings automatically upon alarm of input, connected to an external relay.

HISTORY ARCHIVING
A.

It will be a requirement to periodically Archive History from the System to a Tape


media to ensure it is preserved. The Operator will therefore be provided with the
ability in instigate this process without the need to take the System off-line. Similarly,
it shall be possible to request a History report from an archived tape.

OCE 30 January 2014

CCTV & Access Control System


16783 - 12/ 21

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.21

King Saud University

B.

An option will be provided to pre-set the number of days History to provide automatic
purging of the available hard disk space after this period.

C.

To assist with the control of History archiving the system shall automatically indicate
the date of the last archive executed to the Operator to save duplication of this data.

SYSTEM BACK-UP
The System shall provide a means to automate a back-up of the systems Database. This will
reduce the task for the Operator to merely replacing the Tape for a new one as a daily
procedure. This process to be executed as a background on-line task.

2.22

CARDHOLDER DATA IMPORT


A.

2.23

The System shall provide, as an option, the means to import cardholder details from an
external source when these exist. This may be used to speed initial commissioning of
the access control systems database or in some cases to allow synchronisation with
other employee management systems. The interface requirements shall be fully
defined and support either, a comma delimited ASCII text file, or Microsoft Access
database, import mechanism.

SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
DISTRIBUTION INTELLIGENCE

2.24

A.

The system selected will utilize distributed intelligent controllers capable of


maintaining their normal operation even when off-line from the Systems Host
Computer.

B.

These controllers being of modular design to easily facilitate future expansion


subsequent to the initial installation of the system. Each shall be capable of servicing
up to 8 Readers and Doors. Optional hardware being included for units required to
supervise Alarm inputs or perform Output switching functions.

C.

When operated off-line the ability to perform normal access decisions including if a
cardholder is valid at that Door and at that Time, along with PIN checking is a
requirement.

D.

All transactions will be Time and Date Stamped by the controller at the time they occur
with this information being the reference used by the Systems Central History Log.

E.

Controller Clocks will be periodically synchronized System wide. Timed and


conditional Commands shall be capable of being executed locally thereby preserving
operation when off-line.

CONTROLLER COMMUNICATIONS
A.

Three schemes of communication shall be provided to meet current and future needs.
RS-485, RS-232, Dial-Up.

2.25

SINGLE CABLE TO FORM A CHAIN


A.

This will provide a means of communicating with all controllers on that chain.

OCE 30 January 2014

CCTV & Access Control System


16783 - 13/ 21

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.26

BI-DIRECTIONAL CHAIN
A.

2.27

2.28

King Saud University

This scheme will be required for controllers in areas of increased security sensitivity. In
this configuration a loop will be installed to facilitate a double communications path to
provide a means of retaining contact with all controllers in the event of a cable break.

DIAL-UP CONNECTION FOR REMOTE SITES


A.

Standard controllers should be capable of being programmed to operate on a dial-up


basis when installed with a Modem and PSTN line connection. In this configuration
the Central System will make contact to download any changes to the Operational
Database as necessary.

B.

Additionally, it shall be possible to schedule routine contact calls to up-load


transactions for inclusion in the systems central History Log.

C.

In the event of the remote site detecting an Access or Monitored alarm it shall
immediately initiate a contact call to the Central System and present this to the
Operator for action.

D.

Future expansions require the option to operate Multiple Modems and telephone lines
at the Central System. Additionally, it should be possible to dedicate a port for alarm
dial-in contact calls to ensure no conflicts with routine housekeeping calls.

CONTROLLER MEMORY
A.

The system offered should not only provide a flexible approach to expansion of the
hardware but also cater for future cardholder capacity needs.

B.

When operating off-line all activity shall be capable of being stored within the
controllers local memory. Each controller will support a means of apportioning the
amount of memory available for cards against the required off-line local storage needs
for transactions and alarms.
Controllers at which the maximum card memory has been utilised shall be capable of
learning new cards by removing cards, which least frequently uses that controllers
doors.

C.

2.29

Cardholders who are infrequent or first time users at that controller will be provided
with positive indication at the reader so that they are aware their request for access is
being dealt with pending the door release.

KEY HOLDER SPECIAL MODE


A.

Key Holder Mode Control will be assigned to special card holders, such as Key
Holders and should be first enabled on a per reader basis by the system operator.

B.

This Mode will allow a Key Holder when vacating an area or building to change the
readers mode of operation from normal Access Control to Key Holder Out operation.
When in this condition only persons with Key Holder Card privileges will be able to
gain access through the door irrespective of their cards current access rights.

C.

The feature is required to be activated/deactivated by the Key Holder, using the card
and followed by a special code entered via the readers keypad.

OCE 30 January 2014

CCTV & Access Control System


16783 - 14/ 21

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.30

MULTIPLE OPERATOR WORKSTATIONS


A.

2.31

2.36

The system will provide the option of anti-passback, utilising sequential or timed
methods, both locally within a controller and across more than one controller for main
access points to the site.

BACK-UP MEDIA
A.

2.35

It will be a requirement to be able to route each companys alarms to specific


workstation locations within the system. This shall be variable by time and day of the
week to facilitate out of hours manning levels.

ANTI-PASSBACK
A.

2.34

The systems readers, alarm monitoring inputs, switching outputs, access codes, card
holders, alarm instructions and comments shall be able to be segregated by
Tenant/Company. It shall be possible to also limit an Operators permissions to allow
access to control and monitor only one company within the overall system.

ALARMS ROUTING BY TIME


A.

2.33

The system shall support additional Operator Workstations with future expansion up
to a quantity of 16 in total being possible.

MULTIPLE TENANCY SITE MANAGEMENT


A.

2.32

King Saud University

The preferred method of system back-up is to a SCSI tape drive to provide adequate
capacity and speed of data transfer.

DOOR MONITORING
A.

Controllers will fully monitor and control access point doors with individually
configurable, standard and extended, time periods for lock release, door open and a
local door pre-held warning sounder.

B.

The pre-held warning period will cause a local audible indication to be provided at the
reader to indicate that the door held alarm will be generated should the door not be
closed. This is intended to reduce the incidence of unnecessary door held alarms being
generated.

C.

Alarms presented to an Operator for action will include Door Forced and Door Held
conditions.

D.

Each door will also include a voltage free relay output to provide an output signal from
the point of the door being released until the door re-closes.

ACCESS MONITORING
A.

The local controller shall be able to detect and report the following conditions:

OCE 30 January 2014

Valid Request
Lost Card
Wrong Time
Wrong Door
Invalid Card
Unknown Card
CCTV & Access Control System
16783 - 15/ 21

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

2.37

2.38

2.40

CARD AND READER TECHNOLOGY


A.

To cater for future needs the controllers shall be capable of interfacing with a range of
reader technologies including Magnetic Stripe, Proximity, Biometrics, Smartcard,
Keypad, and Wiegand Wire and for low security areas Code Only operation. the
Proximity and Wiegand Wire options will include a with PIN capability.

B.

The Access Monitoring and Control Schedule provided details the particular
technology required for the doors included in this tender.

C.

The option to include an on-site encoder, where magstripe cards are specified, shall be
available.

HID compatible.

Read range:

Up to 8 in./20 cm

Transmit Frequency:

140KHz, full duplex operation

Receiver Frequency:

70KHz

Receiver Demodulation:

Phase-shift key (PSK) signal

Card read cycle:

100 m/sec

Power dissipation:

Less than 2 watts.

Interface to controller:

Shielded 22 AWG, dual twisted pair, RS-485, S-Net


Communications, Wiegand.

Indicators:

Single tri-color with buzzer audio indicator


(green-yellow-red).

Tamper protection:

Protected against address switch tampering.

Humidity:

5-90% condensing.

Temperature:

31 to 150 degree F/ 35 to 66 degree C.

Color:

Charcoal.

Certifications:

USA & Canada: UL 294 & FCC Part 15 B


Europe: CA mark Approval.

DOOR LOCKING DEVICES


A.

The doors to be controlled by the access control system shall be of the electro-magnetic
type locks.

B.

All locks shall operate in a fail safe mode such that any interruption in the supply the
lock shall release the doors. (SDC is preferable)

BATTERY BACK-UP SUPPORT


A.

2.41

King Saud University

All controllers are required to incorporate an integral power supply with battery backup support of 6.5AH capacity.

SYSTEM SECURITY PROVISIONS


A.

The System Database shall encrypt the Operator Passwords to prevent unauthorised
viewing.

OCE 30 January 2014

CCTV & Access Control System


16783 - 16/ 21

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

B.

2.42

King Saud University

An internal password protection mechanism for workstations accessing the Host


Database via the Network and Remote site contact calls shall also be provided.

SYNCHRONIZATION OF DATABASES
A.

To ensure system wide synchronization of the distributed controllers databases with


the Host main database, an internal checking process shall be provided. In the event of
any discrepancy then the Host will automatically correct any inconsistency without
requiring Operator intervention.
CCTV SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM

The closed circuit television system shall monitor the whole complex and the preferable brand is PELCO.
The system shall comprise of the following items:
1)

17" & 19" super high resolution colour monitors located in the security office

2)

Wall mounted fixed colour cameras

3)

Time lapse video recording equipment to cover for unoccupied times. (Digital recording System is
also acceptable (32 channel) LENEL DVR Brand is preferable).

4)

Control console located in the security office


1.

INDOOR FIXED CAMERAS:

Digital CCD Color camera, Lowlight DSS, 1/3 Inch with high resolution, and shall have the following
specifications:Image Device

1/3-inch Sony Hyper-HAD CCD

Picture Elements

795 (H) x 696 (V)

Scanning System

625 lines, 2:1 interlace

Sensing Area

6.3 mm (H) X 4.7mm (v)

Horizontal Resolution

480 TV lines

Minimum Illumination
Iris Control

0.02 lux at f1.2, 50 IRE & 0.01 lux at f1.2, 35


IRE

Signal-to-Noise Ratio

Electronic / passive

Gain Control

50 dB (AGC)

Gamma Correction

Automatic

Phase Control

1.0 or 0.45 switchable

Backlight Compensation

V-phase control (90)

Video Output

Selectable by DIP switching setting

Operating Temperature

1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms, sync negative, BNC type

Humidity

14 to 122F (-10 to 50C)


20 to 80% (non-condensing)

2. INDOOR PTZ DOME CAMERA:


High-Performance with auto focus, high-resolution integrated Low-Light color digital camera, 16X
Optical and 8X Digital Zoom, with the following specifications:

OCE 30 January 2014

CCTV & Access Control System


16783 - 17/ 21

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

Image device
Horizontal Resolution
Sensitivity
Iris Control
Signal to noise ratio
Gain Control
Pan Movement
Vertical Tilt
Preset Speeds
o
o

Pan
Tilt

King Saud University

1/4 interline transfer CCD


470TVL
0.05 Lux
Automatic with manual override
>46 bB
Automatic
360 Continuous pan rotation
Unobstructed +2 to -92
360/sec
200/sec

Input Voltage
18-30 VAC
On-Screen compass and Tilt Display.
Zone Blanking
Password Protection.
Auto-sensing
Auto Flip Dome Rotation.
40 Presets with Camera settings and labels with +_ 0.25 degree Preset Accuracy
3. CCTV MONITOR:

17" & 19" High-resolution color Monitors with the following specifications:

17" Inch color monitors 700 TV lines


19" Inch color monitors 800 TV lines
Front Panel Controls
Auto-Switching 90-260 VAC input.
Auto-Sensing NTSC/PAL.
Built-in Speaker 1.0 Watt.
2 Video and 2 Audio Input and Output.
S-VHS Input for Separate Y-C signals
Rack Mountable
Sweep Linearity 10%
Operating Temperature (0 to 41)C.
Humidity 0% to 90% (non-condensing).
4. MULTIPLEXER:

The 16 channel color multiplexer shall have ability to simultaneously Viewing of Up to 16 Cameras While
Recording or Playing Tapes. The multiplexer shall have the following specifications

Full Duplex Operation


Viewing or Playback of Covert Cameras can be Password Protected
Simultaneous Viewing of Up to 16 Cameras While Recording or Playing Tapes
Advanced Image Re-sizing and Digital Filtering. Provides High Quality Multi-Camera and
Zoom Displays
Looping Inputs
Multi-Camera Display Modes PIP (2), Quad (4), Nine (9) and Sixteen (16) Camera Displays
Advanced Activity Detection Programmable Detection Mask and Sensitivity Levels for Each
Camera
Four VCR Compatibility Modes Standard, Auto Tracking, VCR Matching and Custom
On-Screen Alphanumeric Display 12 Character Camera Titles, Time, Date, and Alarm
Three Independent Monitor Outputs
Alarm Handling Priority or Exclusive Alarm Recording and Display

OCE 30 January 2014

CCTV & Access Control System


16783 - 18/ 21

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

Compatible with S-VHS VCRs and Monitors (Main Output)


Remote Control via RS-485 Communications Port
Pan/Tilt and Lens Control
Operating Temperature 32 to 122F (0 to 50C )
VIDEO Input Level
1 Vp-p, composite
Digital Image
768(H) x 512(V) pixels full screen
Sampling Rate
13.5 MHz
Bandwidth
20 MHz
Differential Phase
Differential Gain

Less than 2 degrees


Less than 2 percent

5. TIME LAPSE VIDEO RECORDER:


The VCR Shall be of the time lapse type using T-180 VHS cassettes Front panel controls select time
lapse modes ranging from real time to 168 hour standard 3-hour cassettes. Unit can be played back,
forward, reverse scan at high speed and single or freeze frame.
The VCR shall have built-in time/date generator that shows the hour, minute, second, day, month and
year. The position and brightness of the display shall be adjustable. The VCR shall be compatible with the
monitors. Power 100-220V, 60Hz.
6. MATRIX SWITCHER/ CONTROLLER:
Video switcher shall be microprocessor operated and controlled. Matrix Switcher/Controller shall
offer switching and control for up to 32 Video inputs & 6 Video outputs, provides easy to use,
password-protected, on-screen programming menus.
The matrix switcher shall has the feature to be used with multiplexers to display multiple camera
views on a monitor, and be capable of interfacing with dome camera for Pan/Tilt Zoom Controls.
All video inputs switcher shall automatically display camera video inputs through pre-programmed
computer controlled sequencing.
The Matrix switcher should be remotely operated from desktop keyboards or external computer
systems. Programming the system should be easy using straightforward on-screen menus and a
system keyboard.
An Optional Windows- based System Management Software to enable system users to program the
switcher remotely and allow the external storage of all the setup items on a computer disk should be
available.
The display shall shows time and date, operation mode, camera number, and a 20-character title for
quick, easy identification of the on-screen video.
The Matrix Switcher shall support powerful system macros, and programmable sequences, which
allow activation of commonly occurring events, either manually or automatically, based on time of
day, day of week, or day of year. Macros provide quick call-up of multiple cameras to multiple
monitors.
The switcher shall allow the user to select from a wide variety of alarm handling and display options.
Alarmed cameras shall be displayed on one or several monitors, as part of one or several alarm
groups. There are also choices for the order in which alarms are displayed, priorities, automatic or
manual acknowledgement, presets or patterns to be triggered, and activation of auxiliaries.
Multiple ports for PTZ control, keyboards, and RS-232 should be provided.

OCE 30 January 2014

CCTV & Access Control System


16783 - 19/ 21

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

Video Inputs

32 Video Inputs

Video Outputs

6 Video Outputs

Receiver/Dome Control

Coaxitron and RS-422

Alarm Inputs

Eight individually programmable for N.O.

Video Outputs

Six or eight outputs, BNC

Switching Type

Cross-point video matrix. NTSC and PAL compatible

Switching Method

Vertical interval switching

Switching Time

Less than 16 milliseconds (typical)

Bandwidth

15 MHz

Frequency Response

Flat to 8 MHz, 1 dB to 13 MHz

Signal-to-Noise Ratio

-50 dB (peak-to-peak vs. RMS noise)

Adjacent Channel Crosstalk

-55 dB typical at 3.58 MHz

Differential Gain

0.03% typical

Differential Phase

0.24 typical

Gain

Unity (1 dB)

DC Output

Zero volts

2.43

EQUIPMENT APPROVALS
A.

Equipment offered shall comply with and bear confirmatory CE markings for the
following:

European Low Power Directive (all Mains powered items) EN 60950

Electro Magnetic Compatibility Generic Emissions Part 1 EN 50081-1

Electro Magnetic Compatibility Generic Emissions Part 2 EN 50081-2

Electro Magnetic Compatibility Generic Immunity Standard EN 50082

Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Interference Characteristics EN


55022 of Information Technology Equipment

PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A.

QUALITY STANDARDS

B.

1.

Evidence shall be provided that the equipment and software manufacturer is approved
to BS 5750 or ISO 9000.

2.

The installer shall also be registered to BS 5750 or ISO 9000 quality standards and will
be required to provide a NACOSS certificate for the installed system.

CUSTOMER TRAINING FACILITIES

OCE 30 January 2014

CCTV & Access Control System


16783 - 20/ 21

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

C.

King Saud University

1.

The installer shall undertake to provide Operator training facilities at their offices, for
the system proposed, and commit to ongoing training support for new Operators and
System Managers for a period of at least 5 years from the date of completion.

2.

Tenders shall detail current costs per person for such courses within their quotations.
Initial training of Operators, prior to system hand-over shall be included in the system
pricing.

SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE


1.

The installer shall offer a Service and Maintenance package to include at least one
preventative maintenance inspection of the system per year.

2.

This annual charge shall be inclusive of all labour and call out charges for system
failures and cover all equipment costs for an initial 12 months Warranty period from
the date of system handover.

3.

A choice of response times to attend site and hours of cover with associated annual
charges shall be detailed within the quotation.

END OF SECTION 16783

OCE 30 January 2014

CCTV & Access Control System


16783 - 21/ 21

King Abdulaziz University Hospital

King Saud University

Riyadh

SECTION 16800
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01

INTRODUCTION
The section of Power Factor correction is intended to address the "Power Factor Improvement
(PFI)" in the electrical installations, as the presence of low power factor causes high losses in
the network, higher transformers ratings, higher circuit breakers ratings and bigger cables
sizes. Therefore, and in order to have an efficient networks capacitors bank should be installed
to improve the power factor.

1.02

A.

Power capacitors (Low voltage capacitors) shall comply with IEC70,IEC831,NF C 54104, VDE0560, CSA standers, UL tests. and shall be used for power factor correction for
centralized power factor correction. The capacitors shall be sheet metal enclosed,
protection code IP54.

B.

The temperature range shall be -30 deg C to +45 deg C. The overload factor shall be
1.35of rated capacity continuously, the over voltage factor 1.1 of rated voltage. Power
losses not exceed .5 W/KVAR.

SUBMITTALS
Submit within five working days of notice to precede, the following items in accordance with
the contract document.
A.

B.

Product Data:
1.

Submit original manufacturers latest product data sheets. Only specified or


accepted manufacturers or suppliers shall appear in the product data submittal.

2.

Equipment and components data shall contain descriptive literature,


manufacturers cut sheets, standard schedules, instructions and diagrams.

3.

The most recent publication of performance data, corresponding to


manufacturer and model number, will be submitted for all specified equipment.

4.

Custom or modified equipment shall require the same submittals.

Shop Drawings:
1.

Contractor is to provide shop drawings within 15 days after award of the


contract.

2.

Shop drawing is to consist of one (1) set of reproducible drawings and three (3)
sets of printed drawings.

3.

Shop drawing are to show the number of panels, Electrical steps, no of


contactors, no of fuses, power factor regulator steps, electromagnetic contactors
for capacitor switching, 380volt.

4.

Shop drawings are to show, in detail, type of capacitors, no of capcitors,


capcitors rating, the installtion of capcitors with all horizontal and backbone
cabling including location of slots and sleeves..

6.

Acceptance of any submitted data or shop drawings for material, equipment


apparatus, devices, arrangements and layouts shall not relieve the Contractor

OCE 19April 2005

Power Factor Correction


16800 - 1/5

King Abdulaziz University Hospital

King Saud University

Riyadh

from responsibility for errors, omissions or inadequacies of any sort on


submitted data or shop drawings.
7.

1.03

WORK INCLUDED:
A.

1.04

1.05

Submit pull schedules in a printed and file format compatible with Microsoft
Excel software. Agreement is to be reached with owner as to what fields the
owner requires. The pull schedules are to be submitted prior to systems
acceptance and commissioning

The work covered by this contract includes the construction described, including all
labor, material, tools and equipment necessary to perform and complete such
construction. The scope of this work includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1.

Mounting, connecting to the system and labelling of all capacitors steps.

2.

Preparation and submission of shop drawings, testing reports, as built


drawings, and capacitors bank arrangement schedules and documentation.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

All materials used shall bear the Underwriters Laboratory, Inc. label, or other approved
third party testing Lab.

B.

All products and materials shall be new and unused, clean, free of defects, and free of
damage and corrosion.

C.

Contractor is to provide the latest model/ revision of a specified piece of equipment, at


the time of bid.

E.

Should any change in plans or Specifications be required to comply with governmental


regulations, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer of the item when submitting the
bid response.

DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE


A.

With the exception of bulk materials, items shall be delivered in manufacturers


unopened containers, fully identified with manufacturers name, trade name, type,
rating. All material deliveries must be made during business hours.

B.

All materials will be shipped in a manner that will protect them from damage, weather,
and entry of debris. If items are damaged, do not install, but take immediate steps to
obtain replacement or repair.

C.

The Contractor shall maintain and protect all equipment, materials, and tools from loss
or damage from all causes until final acceptance by Project Manger.

D.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the receipt, safe storage and delivery of
materials and equipment to the job site and for coordination of same with a person
designated by the schools principal. Material and equipment subject to damage by
natural elements shall be stored in a manner suitably sheltered from the elements but
readily accessible for inspection, or in a weather-tight enclosure supplied by the
Contractor.

E.

The Contractor shall not store or place material on floors in excess of the floors
designed load limits.

OCE 19April 2005

Power Factor Correction


16800 - 2/5

King Abdulaziz University Hospital

King Saud University

Riyadh

1.06

PERMITS
All local fees and permits and services of inspection authorities shall be obtained by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall cooperate fully with local utility companies with respect to
their services. The Contractor shall include in his price and itemize all such costs to be
incurred relative to the installation of the system described herein.

1.07

ACCEPTANCE
Upon receipt of the Contractor's documentation of power factor testing, the Engineer may
review or observe the installation and request random tests of the power factor installed at no
additional charge. Once the testing has been completed and the Engineer is satisfied that all
work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Engineer will notify the Contractor in
writing.

1.08

RECORD DRAWINGS
During construction, the Contractor shall maintain a copy of all Specifications and a complete
set of the construction drawings on the job site, making notations and updates thereon as
required, to provide an accurate record of all installations pursuant to the issue of As-built
drawings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01

2.02

CENTRAL COMPENSATION
A.

When required by the project documents, the central regulating power factor
compensation system shall be installed at the main low voltage switchboard

B.

The system shall consist of a capacitor bak where each capacitor contains 4 to 6 steps
including the corresponding contactors for each step, fuses, step indicating lights and
discharge resistors.

C.

The individual capacitors shall be formed together to a bank and connected to the main
power supply.

D.

Power factor control shall be performed through a controller feed by a current


transformer installed in the main feeder line and the system voltage.

E.

The central compensation system shall be designed to allow for an inductive cos phi
from 0.9 to 0.95 as per project requirements for the entire system.

TRANSFORMER COMPENSATION
Transformer may be individually coensated by connecting a capacitor bank in parallel.
The capacitor shall be selected in accordance with the following table.

2.03

POWER FACTOR METER


Power factor meters shall of the totally iron-enclose electro-dynamical cross-coil meter
movement type.
20% of the rated current must guarantee a proper indication at rated voltage

OCE 19April 2005

Power Factor Correction


16800 - 3/5

King Abdulaziz University Hospital

King Saud University

Riyadh

2.04

MANUFACTURERS
A.

2.05

2.06

Manufacturers: Base bid manufacturers: The contractor may provide all required
equipment as displayed from the manufacturers listed below or approved equal:
1.
Merlin Gerin - France .
2.
ABB- KSA .
3.
Siemens - WG .

MATERIALS
A.

Contractor is to use all products and materials that are identified in the specifications or
indicated on the drawings for a specific application.

B.

Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of power factor


improving systems, of types and ratings specified whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. A list of installed systems of
the same type and ratings as specified shall be submitted to the Project Manager.

VERIFICATION OF CAPACITORS
Tests of capacitors employed for the sake of power factor improvement shall be conducted in
accordance with IEC 60931, IEC 61831 and IEC 61921

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01

EXAMINATION
A.

3.02

3.

Examine conditions at the job site where work of this Section is to be performed to
insure proper arrangement and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of job
site conditions.

PREPARATION
A.

Examine the Contract Drawings and specifications in order to insure the completeness
of the work required under this Section.

B.

Verify measurements and dimensions at the job site and cooperate in the coordination
and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work of related trades so as not to
delay job progress.

C.

Provide templates as required to related trade for location of items.

INSTALLATION
A.

Install Power Factor Corrector and components as indicated, in accordance with


equipment manufacturer's written instructions, and under the direct supervision of the
manufacturer's field service engineer and with recognized industry practices to ensure
that Power Factor Corrector complies with requirements. Comply with requirements
of the applicable electrical code.

B.

Grounding: Provide equipment grounding connections for power factor improvement


system as required and specified in Section 16452. Tighten connections to fulfill
manufacturer's torque requirements. If not manufacturer-provided, tighten connections

OCE 19April 2005

Power Factor Correction


16800 - 4/5

King Abdulaziz University Hospital

King Saud University

Riyadh

to comply with tightening torque specified in UL Std 486A to assure permanent and
effective grounds.
3.04

3.05

DEMONSTRATION
A.

Upon completion of installation of the complete compensating system equipment, and


after building circuitry has been energized with normal power source, test the
correction system, with manufacturer's field service engineer present, to demonstrate
capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning
units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with
new units, and proceed with testing.

B.

Demonstrate operating procedures to Owner's personnel and provide written operating


instructions with full explanation of technical information.

POWER HARMONIC FELTERING

A power conditioning system shall reduce broad band harmonics at least 50 % by


a combination of reactances controlled by a microprocessor that continuously
monitors power flow and varies the filter components connected to the system as
necessary. The conditioning system in addition shall reduce variations in phase
voltage by balancing the phase currents through a combination of inductors and
capacitors. The system shall consist of a main unit installed at the main switchboard
plus subsidiary units as necessary installed at the branch circuit panel boards and if
necessary at major individual loads. The system shall also have the ability to reduce
throughput of surge voltages and protect against short lasting voltage drops
through use of stored energy in the power factor correction apparatus.

END OF SECTION 16800

OCE 19April 2005

Power Factor Correction


16800 - 5/5

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

SECTION 16950
ELECTRICAL TESTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01

SUMMARY
A.

Provide labor, materials, temporary wiring, testing equipment, load banks, technical
supervision and services, and perform operations required for testing of electrical
equipment and installations and related work as specified herein and as shown on the
drawings.

B.

Work Included: The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.

C.

Related Work Specified Elsewhere


1.
2.
3.

1.02

1.03

Preliminary inspections and tests.


Electrical acceptance tests.
Operational tests.

Basic Electrical Requirements


Basic Electrical Materials and Methods
Other Division 16 sections.

DESCRIPTION
A.

Preliminary testing and visual inspections shall be conducted prior to acceptance and
operational tests to avoid delays.

B.

Electrical acceptance tests shall be conducted to assure that electrical materials, and
their installations are in accordance with contract documents, regulatory agencies,
applicable codes and standards listed herein, and that they may be energized.

C.

Operational tests shall be conducted to assure capability of equipment and systems to


perform as specified and designed.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.

B.

Testing and testing equipment shall conform to the latest edition of reference
specifications specified herein and to applicable codes and requirements of local
authorities having jurisdiction.
1.

Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the applicable electrical


code and standards.

2.

Comply with latest edition of relevant IEC/S standards for equipment testings.

3.

Comply with applicable provisions of IEE wiring regulations or NFMA equal


regulations.

Personnel engaged in the testing of electrical equipment and systems shall have a
minimum of five (5) years of continuous experience in the testing of the equipment and
systems to be tested. Submit evidence of such qualifications to the Project manager

___________________________________________________________________________________________
OCE - 30 January 2014

Electrical Tests
16950 - 1/16

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

1.04

1.05

King Saud University

C.

Contractor shall furnish testing equipment as required. Testing equipment, meters and
instruments shall have been properly calibrated and certified within six (6) months
prior to testing and shall be in satisfactory condition to perform its functions.

D.

Contractor shall provide an appropriate and stable source of electrical power to the test
locations.

E.

Perform tests in the presence of the Project manager.

F.

Electrical equipment and installation shall meet acceptance and operational tests.
Promptly repair or replace defective work and repeat the tests until the particular
system and component parts thereof receive the approval of the Project manager. Any
damages resulting from tests shall be repaired and/or damaged materials replaced, to
the satisfaction of the Project manager.

G.

It is essential that certain trades and manufacturer's technical representatives be present


during the testing. These representatives shall include:
1.

Electrical subcontractor who is thoroughly familiar with the project as to its


intent, what equipment has been provided and how it is supposed to operate.

2.

Supplier of equipment particularly where packaged equipment has been


provided.

3.

Manufacturer's representative who is thoroughly familiar with the operation of


the equipment.

H.

The operation of the electrical installation by the Project Manager does not constitute an
acceptance of the electrical installations. Final acceptance will depend on Contractor's
demonstration of compliance with contract documents, completion of adjustments as
specified and required, and submission of required documentation and certification of
approval by governing authorities.

I.

Continuity tests shall be performed using direct current and audible bells or buzzers.
Use of telephones is not acceptable.

J.

Safety devices such as rubber gloves and blankets, glow detectors, hot sticks, helmets,
eye shields, protective screens and barriers, danger signs, etc. shall be used to
adequately protect and warn personnel in the vicinity of the tests.

SCHEDULING
A.

Scheduling of tests shall be as approved by the Project manager.

B.

Schedule tests so that equipment can be energized immediately after completing the
tests and approval of the reports.

C.

Notify the Project manager two (2) weeks prior to testing.

SUBMITTALS
A.

Submit the following in accordance with the requirements specified under "Submittals"
in Section 16010.

___________________________________________________________________________________________
OCE - 30 January 2014

Electrical Tests
16950 - 2/16

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

1.

Submit two (2) copies of test reports including actual readings and corrected
readings after each test period.

2.

Submit four (4) bound copies of final approved test reports at the completion of
tests.

3.

Test reports shall be signed by the persons performing the tests and the witnesses
to the tests and include, but not be limited to, the following data.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

4.

Date of test.
Description of equipment tested.
Description of test.
Test results.
Conclusions and recommendations.
Identification of test equipment.

Include copies of the final approved test reports in the maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01

EXAMINATION
A.

3.02

Examine conditions at the job site where work of this Section is to be performed to
insure proper arrangement and fit of the work. Start of work implies acceptance of job
site conditions.

PREPARATION
A.

Examine the Contract Drawings and specifications in order to insure the completeness
of the work required under this Section.

B.

Cooperate in the coordination and scheduling of the work of this Section with the work
of related trades, so as not to delay job progress.

C.

Testing of outdoor equipment shall not be performed during inclement weather.


Ground resistance tests on direct buried ground conductors or rods shall not be
performed within 48 hours after rainfall.

D.

Megger and high potential testing shall not be performed during periods of high
relative humidity. A guard shall be stationed at each location where exposed cables,
buswork, connections or other components exist during megger and high potential
testing.

E.

Equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to testing. Vacuum the interiors of


cubicles and remove foreign material. Insulators, bushings and bus supports shall be
wiped clean with a lint free cloth.

F.

Preliminary tests and visual inspections of the electrical installation including


verification checks of factory wiring shall be conducted prior to electrical acceptance
and operational tests to avoid delays, and to assure that equipment and installations
___________________________________________________________________________________________
OCE - 30 January 2014

Electrical Tests
16950 - 3/16

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

are free of faulty conditions prior to the application of test voltages.

3.03

3.04

G.

Where the equipment or system under test is interrelated with and depends upon other
equipment, systems and/or controls for proper operation, functioning and
performance, the latter shall be operated simultaneously with the equipment or system
under test.

H.

Test fuses for continuity.

I.

Test current transformers for continuity and proper polarity.

J.

Test potential transformers for continuity and absence of short circuits.

K.

Set protective devices in accordance with the approved coordination study.

L.

If generators, motors or transformers require drying out to obtain the required


insulation valves, the drying method shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.

M.

Verify that shipping devices and restraints have been removed.

N.

Check for proper interconnection and tightness at connections of shipping sections.

APPLICATION
A.

Equipment that can be paralleled under any conditions including interlock defeat shall
be tested for proper phasing using hot-phase hot-stick or other approved methods.
This includes, but is not limited to, primary selector switches, automatic transfer
switches, tie breakers and busses, etc. at medium and low voltage levels.

B.

Full load currents of feeders serving single phase loads shall be measured to assure an
equal load balance on each phase. Branch circuits shall be reconnected if necessary to
achieve this balance.

C.

Megger values specified are minimum acceptable values at an ambient temperature of


16 degrees C and low relative humidity. Contractor shall convert readings to
equivalent values at 16 degrees C if measurements are taken under other conditions.

D.

The phase rotation at busses, panels, switchboards, switchgear, etc. shall be checked
and verified using a phase sequence meter for consistency and conformity to
recognized standards, i.e. A-B-C left to right, top to bottom, front to back, when facing
front of the equipment, and to provide an A-B-C (1-2-3) clockwise rotation. Where
electrical installations and extensions of existing systems, or in new buildings at
existing sites, phase rotation shall conform to the existing.

TESTS
A.

Medium Voltage Cables


Tests on Medium voltage cables shall be carried out as per section 16129.

B.

Low Voltage Wire and Cable (600 Volts and Less)


1.

Wire and cable shall be tested for continuity, freedom from short circuits and
grounds and meggered to assure adequate insulation resistances for each
conductor.

___________________________________________________________________________________________
OCE - 30 January 2014

Electrical Tests
16950 - 4/16

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

C.

D.

King Saud University

2.

Test Voltages: Megger instrument shall be 1000 volts DC applied for one minute.

3.

Acceptable Test Results: Insulation resistance between phase conductors and any
phase conductor to ground shall be not less than 2 megohms for connected
conductors and 100 megohms for disconnected conductors.

Metal Enclosed Busways, Motor Control Centers and Panelboards


1.

Equipment shall be tested for continuity, freedom from short circuits, and
grounds and meggered to assure adequate resistances.

2.

Test Voltages: Megger instrument shall be 1,000 volts DC for equipment rated
380 volts and 500 volts DC for equipment rated 250 volts, applied for one minute.

3.

Acceptable Test Results: Insulation resistance phase to phase and any phase to
ground shall be not less than 100 megohms for equipment rated 380 volts and 25
megohms for equipment rated 220 volts.

Switchboards and Switchgears


1.

Test electrical and mechanical interlock systems for proper operation and
sequencing.

2.

Test ground connections as specified under "Grounding System."

3.

Perform ratio and polarity tests on instrument current and potential


transformers.

4.

Perform insulation resistance tests on each bus section, phase to phase and phase
to ground as specified under "Metal Enclosed Busways, Motor Control Centers
and Panelboards." Prior to performing insulation resistance tests on buswork,
isolate the buswork by racking out or opening circuit breakers and disconnects,
short circuit and ground current transformer secondaries, remove potential
transformer primary fuses and assure grounding of the enclosure.

5.

Perform control wiring performance tests using the approved manufacturer's


elementary diagrams.

6.

For selective switchboard and switchgear arrangements, verify proper phasing


between the line and load stabs of the tie breaker cubicle busses using hot-phase
hot-stick techniques, A-A, B-B, C-C.

7.

Test disconnect switches as specified under "Circuit and Motor Disconnects."

8.

Perform an insulation resistance test at 1000 volts DC on each circuit breaker for
one (1) minute from pole-to-pole and from each pole-to-ground with breaker
closed and across open contacts of each phase. Insulation resistance shall not be
less than 100 megohms.

9.

Vacuum circuit breakers shall be tested as follows:


a.

Check bolted connections and contacts for tightness, including bushing


current transformer and bushing potential disconnections; repair points
where surface of the paint has been damaged.

___________________________________________________________________________________________
OCE - 30 January 2014

Electrical Tests
16950 - 5/16

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

b.

Check breaker to see if it is absolutely level on the floor within the


enclosure.

c.

Check and lubricate moving parts.

d.

Megger main breaker poles for freedom from grounds.

e.

Check auxiliary switch connections, contacts, and operating linkages.

f.

Check current transformers for correct tap setting and leave them shorted
and grounded until the equipment is placed in operation.

g.

Operate the breaker from the control switch for proper functioning.

h.

Clean bushings, insulators, etc.

10. Set, calibrate and adjust protective device settings of each circuit breaker in
accordance with the approved coordination study using secondary current
injection.
11. Tests of relays associated with the distribution system shall include the following:
a.

Check equipment ground and assure continuity of connections.

b.

Remove blocking used for shipment.

c.

Check overcurrent and undervoltage relays for proper current and voltage
range. Adjust relays in accordance with the approved coordination study.

d.

Check magnet coil for proper operating voltage.

e.

Clean contacts and magnetic surfaces where necessary.

f.

Check air gap between


manufacturer's clearances.

g.

Check auxiliary contacts for correct arrangement with coil de-energized,


i.e., normally open or normally closed.

h.

Check fuses for proper rating.

i.

Check connectors for tightness.

j.

With loads disconnected, energize control circuits and test for correct
functioning.

k.

For timing relays, adjust the timing cycle for proper equipment operation.

moving

and

stationary

magnets

with

12. Control and instrument switch test shall include the following:
a.

Inspect contacts and shunts, cleaning contacts if required.

b.

Operate switch and note that design functions are performed in proper
sequence.

13. Ammeters shall be tested as follows:


a.

Check connections from current transformers for AC shunts for DC to


ammeters.

___________________________________________________________________________________________
OCE - 30 January 2014

Electrical Tests
16950 - 6/16

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

b.

Check ammeter scale with current transformer ratio for AC and shunt
millivolt rating for DC.

c.

Set pointer on zero scale with no load.

14. Power factor and VAR meter tests shall include checking polarities of instrument
transformers and connecting so lagging current will be to right of center.
15. Voltmeter tests shall include the following:
a.
b.
c.

Check voltmeter scale with potential transformer ratio.


Set pointer on zero scale with no voltage.
Check voltmeter reading with test voltmeter when energized.

16. Wattmeter and watthour meter tests shall include the following:
a.
b.
c.

Check with current transformer and potential transformers ratio.


Set wattmeter pointer on zero scale with no load.
Check rotation on watthour meter.

17. Tests of instrument transformers shall include the following:


a.

Physically check polarity mark orientation on CTs and PTs with three line
diagram on the plans and with manufacturer's drawings.

b.

Check CT and PT polarity markings.

18. Electrical controls shall be tested by trial operation of control equipment after
wiring is completed to see that each interlock and control function operates
according to the manufacturer's operating instructions.
E.

Secondary Unit Substations


1.

Primary Incoming Section


a.

Perform mechanical operator tests in accordance with manufacturer's


instructions.

b.

Test mechanical interlocking systems for proper operation and sequencing.

c.

Perform insulation resistance tests on each pole, phase to phase and phase
to ground for one minute. Test voltage and minimum insulation
resistances shall be as follows:

d.

Equipment
Voltage Rating

Test Voltage

Insulation Resistance Megohms

5,000 volts
8,000 volts
15,000 volts
25,000 volts
35,000 volts

2,500 volts DC
2,500 volts DC
2,500 volts DC
5,000 volts DC
15,000 volts DC

1,000
2,000
5,000
20,000
100,000

For primary selective unit substation arrangements, verify proper phasing


of each switch to switch A-A, B-B, C-C using hot-phase, hot-stick
techniques or other equivalent method as approved by the project
manager.

___________________________________________________________________________________________
OCE - 30 January 2014

Electrical Tests
16950 - 7/16

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

F.

G.

King Saud University

2.

Transformer Section: Test as specified under transformers.

3.

Secondary Low Voltage Section:


Switchgears.

Test as specified under Switchboards and

Motors
1.

Motors shall be tested for freedom from short circuits and grounds meggered to
assure adequate resistances.

2.

Test Voltages: Megger instrument shall be 2,500 volts DC for testing 4,000 volt
motors, 1,000 volts DC for testing 380 volt motors and 500 volts DC for testing
220 volt motors, applied for one minute.

3.

Acceptable Test Results: Insulation resistance phase to ground shall be not less
than 100 megohms for 4,000 volt motors, 20 megohms for 380 and 200 volt
3-phase motors and 5 megohms for 220 volt single phase motors.

4.

Apply voltage momentarily and check each motors for correct direction of
rotation. Correct if necessary.

5.

Measure full load current readings of each motor and verify that the correct size
heater elements have been provided for each starter overload relay. Where
current flow exceeds the motor's nameplate value, install a "DO NOT OPERATE"
tag, advise the Project manager and notify the Contractor to immediately correct
the condition. If power factor correction capacitors are connected on the load
side of the overload heaters, include the capacitive reactances in determining the
proper overload heater size.

6.

Submit a tabulation of each motor indicating the equipment identification, motor


horsepower, voltage, measured full load current and heater rating and
manufacturer's catalog number.

Grounding System
1.

2.

General
a.

Tests on individual ground rods shall be performed with each rod isolated
from each other and the grounding system.

b.

Tests on the grounding system shall be made after installation and


interconnection of the ground system elements including individual
ground rods, ground grid cables, connections to structural steel, reinforcing
bars, incoming water piping, ground busses on walls and within
equipment, etc.

Tests of Individual Ground Rods


a.

Measure the resistance to earth of each individual ground rod using a


Biddle Co. ground tester or two auxiliary ground rods as described in IEEE
Standard 550 paragraph 3.4.2 using an alternating test current. Locate the
auxiliary rods at sufficient distance from the rod under tests to insure that
the regions in which their resistances are localized do not overlap.
Calculated resistances to earth shall not exceed 2.5 ohms.

___________________________________________________________________________________________
OCE - 30 January 2014

Electrical Tests
16950 - 8/16

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

b.

3.

H.

King Saud University

If the resistance is greater than 2.5 ohms, it shall be reduced by lengthening


the rod or driving additional rods with a minimum separation of 3 m and
cadwelding the rods together until the resistance is less than 2.5 ohms.

Tests of the Grounding System: Test ground system for continuity by applying a
low voltage DC source of current, capable of furnishing up to 100 amperes. The
ground path using structural steel must conduct 100 amperes. Resistance as
calculated from the current and voltage shall not exceed 5 ohms.

Diesel Generator Sets


1.

Startup Testing
a.

Engage the local equipment manufacturer's representative to perform


startup and building load tests upon completion of the installation.

b.

Provide calibrated instruments, tools and supplies required for the tests.
Where building loads are not sufficient for test requirements, furnish
dummy loads as required for testing as described herein.
Tests shall include the following:

c.

1)

Check fuel, lubricating oil, and antifreeze in liquid cooled models for
conformity to the manufacturer's recommendations under
environmental conditions present.

2)

Test prior to cranking engine for proper operation, accessories that


normally function while the set is in a standby mode. Accessories
include, but are not limited to: engine heaters, battery charger,
generator strip heater, annunciators. Check engine and driven unit
mountings. Check alignments. Test generator and exciter insulation
resistance with a megger.

3)

Check, during startup test mode for exhaust leaks, path of exhaust
gases outside the building, cooling air flow, movement during
starting and stopping, vibration during running, normal and
emergency l-to-line voltages and phase rotation.

4)

Test, by means of simulated power outage, automatic startup by


remote-automatic starting, transfer of load, and automatic shutdown.
Prior to this test adjust, for proper system coordination, transfer
switch timers. Monitor throughout the test, engine temperature, oil
pressure, battery charge level, generator voltage, amperes, and
frequency.

5)

Perform load tests as follows after starting engine and warming of


unit:
a)
b)
c)

2.

1 hour at 25 percent rated load.


1 hour at 50 percent rated load.
4 hour at 100 percent rated load.

Upon completion of installation, demonstrate capability and compliance of


system with requirements. Furnish written confirmation that the equipment is in
good condition, free from damage, properly installed and tested. Where
possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate

___________________________________________________________________________________________
OCE - 30 January 2014

Electrical Tests
16950 - 9/16

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with
retesting.
I.

Automatic Transfer Switches: Test transfer switches, by means of simulated power


outage; automatic startup by remote-automatic starting, transfer of load, and automatic
shutdown. Prior to these tests, adjust transfer switch timers for proper system
coordination.

J.

Transformers
1.

General
a.

Transformers shall be tested for continuity, freedom from short circuits and
grounds and meggered to assure adequate insulation resistance.

b.

Isolate transformers by opening the line and load side disconnect and/or
disconnect conductors. Tie conductors together on each winding.

2.

Test Voltage: Megger instrument shall be 2,500 volts DC for 15 KV and 5 KV


class windings, 1,000 volts DC for 380 volts windings and 500 volts DC for 220
volt windings. Application of test voltages on 5 KV and 15 KV windings shall be
for 10 minutes with resistance readings tabulated at 30 seconds, 1 minute and 10
minutes. Application of test voltages on 380 volt and 220 volt windings shall be
held until the readings become constant and until three consecutive equal
readings one minute apart are achieved.

3.

Acceptable Test Results: Insulation resistance from winding to winding and


winding to ground shall be not less than the following, corrected to 20 degrees C.

Transformer Coil Rating

Minimum Insulation
Resistance in Megohms
Dry Type
Liquid Filled

0 - 600 volts
601 - 5000 volts
5001 - 15000 volts

500
5000
25000

100
1000
5000

K.

Circuit and Motor Disconnects: Upon completion of the installation of electrical


disconnects, energize circuits and demonstrate capability and compliance with
requirements. Except as otherwise indicated, do not test switches by operating them
under load. However, demonstrate switch operation through six opening/closing
cycles with circuit unloaded. Open each switch enclosure for inspection of interior,
mechanical and electrical connections, fuse installation and for verification of type and
rating of fuses installed. Correct deficiencies, then retest to demonstrate compliance.
Remove and replace defective units with new units and retest.

L.

Uninterruptible Power Supply System (Static)


1.

General
a.

Upon completion of the installation of the UPS system equipment, and


after building circuitry has been energized with the normal power source,
test UPS system, with manufacturer's field service engineer present, to
demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements, and that no

___________________________________________________________________________________________
OCE - 30 January 2014

Electrical Tests
16950 - 10/16

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

damage or maladjustment has occurred during shipment.


b.

Use calibrated instruments and full load rated load banks furnished by the
manufacturer for testing.

c.

Test the UPS system and components in accordance with the approved
manufacturer's detailed site acceptance test procedure and the following:
1)

Initial Test: Operate the system at full resistive load continuously for
a period of 48 hours. Continuously record UPS output voltage and
frequency, input voltage, input current, output current of each phase,
battery voltage and current. If system failure occurs within the test
period, repeat tests after corrective action has been taken until 48
continuous hours of trouble-free testing are completed.

2)

System Operational and Functional Tests: System operating controls,


alarms, meters, mimic status lights, bypass transfer (automatic and
manual), as well as controls and indicators shall be tested for proper
operation.

3)

Module Load Tests - Regulation and Load Sharing: The following


shall be recorded during no-load and full system resistive load
operation.
a)

Input AC voltage, current, frequency (all three phases of


rectifier).

b)

Input AC voltage, current, frequency (all three phases of


inverter, total system).

c)

Output current in each phase of the module.

d)

Battery voltage and current.


These tests shall be conducted twice: Utilizing normal power
and utilizing emergency (backup) power.

4)

Battery Test: During the battery test, oscillograph recordings of the


output voltage shall be made during the switching on/off of the
input AC power. Continuous recordings shall be made of output
voltage and frequency during the entire test. With the UPS operating
at full resistive load, remove the system AC input power. Operate on
the battery for the specified battery time then restore AC power for
one minute. Disconnect the AC power line again and operate on
batteries until UPS automatically shuts down due to low battery
voltage. Note the time, and then restore the input AC power.
Continuously record the battery voltages during rundown. Recharge
the battery for a maximum period of 10 times the noted discharge
time. Note the time of discharge. Reapply AC input power and
restart the system with full-load. Recharge the batteries.

5)

Transient Tests: With the UPS systems operating at full resistive


load, record the AC system's critical load output voltage on a
high-speed oscillograph while performing the following tests:
a)

No-load to 1/3 load and return.

___________________________________________________________________________________________
OCE - 30 January 2014

Electrical Tests
16950 - 11/16

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

b)

1/3 load to 2/3 load and return.

c)

2/3 load to 3/3 and return.

d)

O to 100 percent load and return.

e)

Return the system to on-line.

f)

Remove and return the AC input power 5 times in succession


at 3-second intervals (full UPS load).

g)

Manually transfer the full load to the bypass line and return to
UPS.

h)

After restarting the system and applying full-load, actuate the


emergency shutdown switch.
These tests shall be conducted twice: Utilizing normal power
and utilizing emergency (backup) power.

M.

Shunt Trip Operation: Test the emergency-off circuits to assure proper operation of
shunt trip circuit breakers.

N.

Receptacles
1.

Upon completion of wire tests, check receptacles for proper voltages and
phasing, utilizing a receptacle tester for 220 volt 15 and 20 ampere devices and a
voltmeter for other devices.

2.

Test three phase receptacles for proper phase rotation using a phase sequence
meter.

3.

Grounded receptacles shall be tested for location and the effectiveness of the
ground insert.

4.

Test ground fault circuit interrupter receptacles with both local and remote fault
simulations in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

O.

Lighting Switches: Test lighting switches for correct operation with special emphasis
on 3- and 4-way switches.

P.

Lighting Fixtures: Verify proper operation of lighting fixtures.

Q.

Emergency Lighting Units - Battery Operated: After emergency lighting units have
been installed and building circuits have been energized with the normal power source,
apply and interrupt electrical energy to demonstrate proper operation. Remove and
replace malfunctioning units with new units and proceed with retesting. Include the
following tests:
1.
2.
3.
4.

R.

Duration of supply.
Low battery voltage shutdown.
Normal transfer to battery source and retransfer to normal.
Low supply voltage transfer.

Control Circuits: Test control circuits for proper functioning and fail safe operation.

___________________________________________________________________________________________
OCE - 30 January 2014

Electrical Tests
16950 - 12/16

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

S.

King Saud University

Public Address System


1.

Provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative to supervise


the pretesting, testing, and adjustment of the system.

2.

Pretesting: Upon completing installation of the system, align, adjust and balance
the system and perform pretesting. D, through pretesting, the conformance of
the system to the requirements of the drawings and specifications. Correct
deficiencies observed in pretesting. Replace malfunctioning or damaged items
with new, and retest until materials satisfactory performance and conditions are
achieved.

3.

Operational Test: Perform an operational system test to verify conformance of


system to the specifications. Perform tests that include originating program and
page material at microphone outlets, preamplifier program inputs, and other
inputs. Observe sound reproduction for proper volume levels and freedom from
noise.
a.

Signal-To-Noise Ratio Test: Measure the ratio of signal to noise of the


system at normal gain settings using the following procedures.
1)

Disconnect a microphone at the connector or jack closest to it and


replace it in the circuit with a signal generator using a 1,000 Hz
signal. Replace other microphones at the corresponding connectors
with dummy loads, each equal in impedance to the microphone it
replaces. Measure the ratio of signal to noise.

2)

Repeat the test for each separately controlled zone of loudspeakers.

3)

The minimum acceptance ratio is 50 dB.

b.

Distortion Test: Measure distortion at normal gain settings and rated


power. Feed signals at frequencies of 50, 200, 400, 1,000, 3,000, 8,000 and
12,000 Hz into each pre-amp channel and measure the distortion in the
power amplifier output. The maximum distortion at any frequency shall
not exceed 3 percent total harmonics.

c.

Acoustic Coverage Test: Feed pink noise into the system using octaves
centered at 4,000 and 500 Hz. Use a sound level meter with octave band
filters to measure the level at five locations in each zone. For spaces with
seated audiences, the maximum permissible variation in level is plus or
minus 2 dB and the levels between locations in the same zone and between
locations in adjacent zones must not vary more than plus or minus 3 dB.

d.

Power Output Test: Measure the electrical power output of each power
amplifier at normal gain setting at 50, 1,000 and 12,000 Hz. The maximum
variation in power output at these frequencies must not exceed plus or
minus 1 dB.

e.

Inspection: Make observations to verify that units and controls are


properly labeled, and interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.
Provide a list of final tap settings of speaker line matching transformers.

f.

Retesting:

Rectify deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest

___________________________________________________________________________________________
OCE - 30 January 2014

Electrical Tests
16950 - 13/16

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

work affected by such deficiencies. Verify by the system test that the total
system meets the specifications and complies with applicable standards.
T.

Intercommunication System
1.

Provide the services of a factory authorized service representative to supervise


the pretesting, testing and adjustment of the system.

2.

Pretesting: Upon completing installation of the system, align, adjust and balance
the system and perform pretesting.
Determine, through pretesting, the
conformance of the system to the requirements of the drawings and
specifications.
Correct deficiencies observed in pretesting.
Replace
malfunctioning or damaged items with new and retest until satisfactory
performance and conditions are achieved.

3.

Operational Test: Perform an operational system test to verify conformance of


system to these specifications. Perform tests that include originating and page
material at intercommunication stations and observing sound reproduction for
proper routing and volume levels and for freedom from noise and distortion.
a.

Frequency Response: Determine frequency response of two transmission


paths including all-call and paging by transmitting and recording audio
tones. Minimum acceptable performance shall be within 3 dB from 150 Hz
to 2,500 Hz.

b.

Signal-To-Noise Ratio Test: Measure the ratio of signal to noise of the


system at normal gain settings using the following procedure:
1)

Disconnect a speaker-microphone and replace it in the circuit with a


signal generator using a 1,000 Hz signal. Measure the ratio of signal
to noise.

2)

Repeat the test for speaker-microphones and for each separately


controlled zone of paging loudspeakers.

3)

The minimum acceptance ratio is 45 dB.

c.

Distortion Test: Measure distortion at normal gain settings and rated


power. Feed signals at frequencies of 150, 200, 400, 1,000 and 2,500 Hz into
each intercommunications, paging and all-call amplifier, and measure the
distortion in the amplifier output. The maximum distortion at any
frequency is 5 percent total harmonics.

d.

Acoustic Coverage Test: Feed pink noise into the system using octaves
centered at 4,000 and 500 Hz. Use a sound level meter with octave band
filters to measure the level at five locations in each zone. The maximum
permissible variation in level is plus or minus 3 dB and the levels between
adjacent zones must not vary more than plus or minus 5 dB.

e.

Power Output Test: Measure the electrical power output of each paging
amplifier at normal gain setting at 150, 1,000 and 2,500 Hz. The maximum
variation in power output at these frequencies must not exceed plus or
minus 3 dB.

f.

Inspection:

Make observations to verify that units and controls are

___________________________________________________________________________________________
OCE - 30 January 2014

Electrical Tests
16950 - 14/16

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

properly labeled, and interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.


Provide a list of final tap settings of paging speaker line matching
transformers.
g.

Retesting: Rectify deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest


work affected by such deficiencies. Verify by the system test that the total
system meets the specifications and complies with applicable standards.

U.

Television System:
Upon completion of the installation of television system
components, and after circuitry has been energized with the power source, test
television systems to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements
including, but not limited to, video output signal strength at each television camera,
monitor and receiver location. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site,
then retest to demonstrate compliance, otherwise remove and replace with new units
and proceed with retesting.

V.

Clock and Program Systems


1.

Provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative to supervise


the field system pretesting, testing, adjustment and programming.

2.

Pretesting: Upon completing installation of the system, align and adjust the
system and perform pretesting. Determine, through pretesting, the conformance
of the system to the requirements of the drawings and specifications. Correct
deficiencies by replacing malfunctioning or damaged items with new items and
retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved.

3.

Testing

4.

W.

a.

Adjust time signal receivers and assure that devices receive and operate the
equipment that is controlled.

b.

Adjust the central control to provide proper signal levels at outlet furthest
from the central control.

c.

Adjust items to insure mechanically free operation.

d.

Assure that clocks are corrected properly.

Retesting: Correct deficiencies and retest the system until the total system meets
the requirements of the specifications and complies with applicable standards.

Fire Alarm System


1.

Provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative to supervise


the field system pretesting, testing, adjustment and programming.

2.

Pretesting: Upon completing installation of the system, align and adjust the
system and perform pretesting. Determine, through pretesting, the conformance
of the system to the requirements of the drawings and specifications. Correct
deficiencies by replacing malfunctioning or damaged items with new items and
retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved.

3.

Testing
a.

Perform electrical and mechanical tests required by the equipment

___________________________________________________________________________________________
OCE - 30 January 2014

Electrical Tests
16950 - 15/16

King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building


Riyadh

King Saud University

manufacturer's certification form. In addition, measure and adjust each of


the ionization detectors to the maximum stable sensitivity setting. This
shall be performed with the detector at its operational location and under
normal operational environmental conditions in the area. Bench settings
are not acceptable.
b.

The completed smoke detection system shall be tested to insure that it is


operating properly. This test shall consist of exposing the installed units to
a standard fire test. Failure of the devices to detect smoke shall be
considered a failure of the system and detectors in that system shall be
re-adjusted or replaced. Acceptance of the system shall also require a
demonstration of the stability of the system. This shall be adequately
demonstrated if the system operates for a ninety (90) day test period
without any unwarranted alarms. Should an unwarranted alarm(s) occur,
the Contractor shall readjust or replace the detector(s) and begin another
ninety (90) day test period. The Contractor shall recheck the detectors
using the fire test after each readjustment or replacement of detectors. This
test shall not start until the Owner has obtained beneficial use of the
building under tests.

c.

Wiring shall be checked and tested to insure there are no grounds, opens or
short circuits.

d.

A checkout report shall be prepared and submitted, one copy of which


shall be registered with the equipment manufacturer. The report shall
include, but not be limited to:

e.

1)

A list of equipment installed and wired.

2)

Indication that equipment is properly installed and functions and


conforms with these specifications.

3)

Test of individual zones as applicable.

4)

Serial numbers, locations by zone and model number for each


installed detector.

5)

Voltage (sensitivity) settings for each ionization and photoelectric


detector as measured in place with the HVAC system operating.

6)

Response time on thermostats and flame detectors.

7)

Technician's name, certificate number and date.

After completion of the tests and adjustments listed above, submit the
following information to the Project Manager:
1)

"As-built" conduit layout diagrams including wire color code and/or


tag number.

2)

"As-built" wiring diagrams.

3)

Detailed catalog data on installed system components.

4)

Copy of the test report.


END OF SECTION

___________________________________________________________________________________________
OCE - 30 January 2014

Electrical Tests
16950 - 16/16

King Saud University


King Abdulaziz University Hospital Extension Building

LUMINAIRE TYPE G
LUMINAIRE SPECIFICATION SHEET
RECESSED MOUNTED HOSPITAL GRADE LUMINAIRE
FOR FLUORESCENT LAMP 4X18W
Protection class IP:
23

Lamp

Name:
Wattage
Luminous flux[lm]
Lamp base:
Energy efficiency class
Lamp life time[hour]:
Rendering index
Color temperature
Cool white:
Manufacturer Lamp Ref.
Osram:
Philips:
General Electric:

T26
18
1350
G13
A
18000
85
4000 K
LUMILUX PLUS
TLD SUPER80
POLYLUX XL

Light Controller
LOR (Efficiency )=

51%

19
UGR Glare Limitation to :
Attachment [Diffuser/Louver]
CLEAR TEMPERED GLASS LEN WITH OVER LAY CLEAR
PRISMATIC PATTERN ACRYLIC SHEET DIFFUSER IN FRAME WITH
SYMMETRICAL SPECULAR FINISH ALUMINUM REFLECTOR

Control Gear [Ballast]


ECG 'Electronic Control Gear'
Voltage [V]
Frequency[Hz]
Emergency Back Up Battery
for 3 hours

11 of 35
April 2005

220
60
As indicated in the drawing with the letter E

KING SAUD UNIVERSITY


KING ABDULAZIZ UNIVERSITY HOSPITAL EXTENSION BUILDING
Riyadh, Saudi Arabia

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Division 16)

TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 16
SECTION 16010
SECTION 16050
SECTION 16110
SECTION 16115
SECTION 16120
SECTION 16135
SECTION 16142
SECTION 16143
SECTION 16190
SECTION 16195
SECTION 16310
SECTION 16320
SECTION 16345
SECTION 16425
SECTION 16426
SECTION 16427
SECTION 16452
SECTION 16470
SECTION 16475
SECTION 16481
SECTION 16482
SECTION 16485
SECTION 16495
SECTION 16500
SECTION 16525
SECTION 16535
SECTION 16610
SECTION 16620
SECTION 16670
SECTION 16675
SECTION 16721

OCE

April 2005

ELECTRICAL WORKS
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS & METHODS
ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS
UNDERGROUND DUCTS & MANHOLES
WIRES & CABLES
ELECTRICAL BOXES & FITTINGS
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT
WIRING DEVICES
SUPPORTING DEVICES
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
SECONDARY UNIT SUBSTATIONS
MEDIUM VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
LOW VOLTAGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE ( SPD )
EARTHING / GROUNDING
PANEL BOARDS
FUSES
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
MOTOR STARTERS
ENCLOSED CONTACTORS
TRANSFER SWITCHES
LIGHTING SYSTEM
FLOOD LIGHTING
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM
STAND-BY ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
ISOLATED POWER PANEL
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM

1 of 2

SECTION 16735
SECTION 16740
SECTION 16745
SECTION 16746
SECTION 16748
SECTION 16760
SECTION 16770
SECTION 16780
SECTION 16783
SECTION 16800
SECTION 16950
Appendix I

OCE

April 2005

AUDIO VISUAL SYSTEM (AUDITURIUM)


DATA NETWORK
TELECOMMUNICATION CABLING SYSTEM
TELEPHONE PABX SYSTEM
NURSE CALL SYSTEM
CLOCK SYSTEM
PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM
MASTER ANTENNA TELEVISION SYSTEM
CCTV & ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION
ELECTRICAL TESTS
LUMINAIRE SPECIFICATION SHEETS

2 of 2

You might also like